JP6957119B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a plurality of symbols are variably displayed on a display capable of displaying an image based on a start winning prize, and a predetermined gaming value is given when the stop result of the symbols becomes a predetermined mode. .. In such a gaming machine, in recent years, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-217740

However, in recent gaming machines, even if the volume can be adjusted during the game, the player tends to miss the volume adjustment timing, and the player's favorite game cannot be realized, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, in the invention according to claim 1, a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and when the result of the lottery is a hit, the player is more likely to play than the normal gaming state. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous specific gaming state,
A production display means capable of displaying predetermined production information and
A display control means that controls the display of the effect display means based on the result of the lottery to execute a variable effect, and a display control means.
A sound output control means that controls the output of a predetermined effect sound from the sound output means in relation to the variation effect displayed on the effect display means.
It is provided with a volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output means based on the operation of the operating means.
The display control means can display specific effect information as the predetermined effect information over a specific period during the variable effect.
In the specific period, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, and in the specific period, the volume adjusting means accepts the operation of the operation means while the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound. Although it is adjustable, the effect sound of the adjusted volume can be heard after the lapse of the specific period.
Unlike the specific period, in the non-specific period during which the volume of the effect sound during the variable effect is not suppressed, the volume adjusting means accepts the operation of the operation means while the volume of the effect sound is not suppressed. The volume of the effect sound can be adjusted, and the effect sound of the adjusted volume can be heard at the adjustment timing.
The specific period is characterized in that the number of characters displayed on the effect display means is suppressed as compared with the case before the specific period.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko game machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as viewed from the front by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the function display unit in the game board enlarged in the state which attached to the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 15 to the peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of winning a start opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the control data table at the time of winning a start opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the area which stores the random number for a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows the table related to the advance notice permission determination data, (A) is an example of the advance notice permission determination data address table, and (B) is an example of advance notice permission determination data. It is a figure which shows the table related to the special symbol hold ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol hold ball number command address table, (B) is an example of a special symbol hold ball number designation command creation table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern selection determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the variation pattern selection determination process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation type determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol change waiting process of FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol / flag setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of passing through a gate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol look-ahead processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a pre-reading judgment prohibition period. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ordinary symbol hit determination processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure of a main control program. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative pattern variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the production selection pattern in story reach. It is a figure which shows the change of a random number extraction range in chronological order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a story reach notice setting process. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the notice decision table of story reach, and (B) is a figure which shows an example of the notice decision table of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a figure explaining the production example of story reach. It is a flowchart which shows an example of pseudo continuous fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous notice setting process. It is a figure explaining the effect example of the pseudo continuous variation. It is a figure explaining the timing of control of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the modification of the control timing of pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of prohibition processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure look-ahead effect control processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode of a normal look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting the mode (specific effect) of a continuous look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen transition of the continuous look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal drawing look-ahead effect processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a pre-reading effect. This is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special figure look-ahead among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is an example of a table showing an example. This is an example of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special figure look-ahead among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is an example of a table showing an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the memory look-ahead processing of a modification. (A) is an example of a simplified flowchart in which the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the variation distribution table described above, and (B) is a reach according to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. This is an example of the executable / non-executable table. (A) is an example of a table showing a condition for prohibiting pre-reading by the main control board 4100 of the modified example, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting pre-reading at the time of state transition. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the received command analysis processing of the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead prohibition count processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the received command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the unknown count processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure look-ahead execution determination processing in the reception command analysis processing of the modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot opening display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect transition in the probability change time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU450a. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure look-ahead effect control processing including the switching control of a special figure look-ahead effect. This is a table for selecting a scenario for the special figure look-ahead effect (hold look-ahead effect). This is a table for selecting a scenario for the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure look-ahead effect control processing which includes the switching control of the special figure look-ahead effect, and can execute the hold look-ahead effect and the background look-ahead effect in parallel. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect). It is a figure which shows the effect example which switches the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect) which is being executed to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the hold look-ahead effect and the background look-ahead effect are executed in parallel, and the background look-ahead effect which is being executed is switched to the background look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory. It is a figure which shows an example of the kind of variation pattern of the modification 3 of this embodiment. (A) It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the variation pattern of the modification 3 of this embodiment, and a level, and (B) for explaining the relationship between the variation pattern of modification 3 of this embodiment, and a gaming state. It is a figure of. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which sets the execution possibility of the advance notice effect for each level of the modification 3 of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect setting process of the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal notice setting process of the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the advance notice effect of the modification 3 of this embodiment, (A) is when the first half fluctuation, (B) is after reach or when pseudo-continuous occurrence, (C) is The first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous, (D) indicates the setting value of the effect flag for the lottery probability of the advance notice effect of the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the story reach notice setting process of the modification 3. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table of the story reach of the modification example 3, and (B) is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice determination table of the pseudo continuous variation of the modification example 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous notice setting process of the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure look-ahead effect control processing in the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the look-ahead effect lottery table of the modification 3. It is an example of the type (pseudo-ream type) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0 times. It is an example of the type (pseudo-ream type) of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation in the modified example 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is four. It is a figure explaining an example of the kind of a symbol group in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the definition of a symbol group in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the reliability level of the look-ahead notice effect in the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo consecutive times 0 times in a symbol group 1. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo consecutive times 4 times in a symbol group 1. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo consecutive times 0 times in symbol group 2. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo consecutive times 4 times in a symbol group 2. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo consecutive times 0 times in a symbol group 3. It is an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning in the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo consecutive times 4 times in a symbol group 3. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where there is no pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is 0 times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where there is no pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is four times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the pseudo-ream type is STORY pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is 0 times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the pseudo-ream type is STORY pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is four times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the pseudo-ream type is a special move pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is 0 times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the pseudo-ream type is a special move pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is four times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the pseudo-ream type is a hyper-pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is 0 times. It is an example of the look-ahead effect combination lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the pseudo-ream type is a hyper-pseudo-ream, and the look-ahead possible variation number is four times. It is an example of the pre-reading winning hold lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the table for drawing the mode which can hold and display at the start of the change at the start winning. It is an example of the look-ahead winning hold hold lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the hold number at the start winning is 1. It is an example of the look-ahead winning hold hold lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the hold number at the start winning is 2. It is an example of the look-ahead winning hold hold lottery of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the hold number at the start winning is four. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation pattern classification in the case of the reliability level 0 of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the variation pattern classification in the case of the reliability level 7 of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice level table of the advance notice effect in the said variation of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice level table of the advance notice effect at the time of tempai of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice level table of the advance notice effect in the first half of SP reach of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice level table of the advance notice effect in the latter half of SP reach of the modification 4 of this embodiment. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case of normal variation or normal reach when the number of pseudo-reams is 0 (no pseudo-ream). It is an example of the advance notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0, and it develops into SP reach. It is an example of the advance notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case of normal variation or normal reach when the number of pseudo-reams is four times. It is an example of the notice level combination scenario of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 4 and it develops into SP reach. It is the figure which excerpted an example of the plurality of notice lottery table of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the lottery table of "window notice at the start of change". It is the figure which excerpted an example of the plurality of notice lottery table of the modification 4 of this embodiment, and is the figure which shows the lottery table of "SP second half cut-in notice". It is a front view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a right side view of a gaming machine equipped with a sword production operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect pattern selection table in the effect mode which can execute the sword withdrawal effect, (A) is shown an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect according to the type of a variation pattern, (B ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body when the aura member is provided in the sword part (sword blade part) itself, and is (A) the sword delivery state, (B) the first sword pulling state, (C) the second. Indicates the state of sword withdrawal. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword pulling operation of a sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, and shows (A) a sword delivery state, (B) a first sword pulling state, and (C) a second sword pulling state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a production transition diagram of a sword-drawing production. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of a sword decoration body and the operation validity period related to the operation means. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 1. It is a timing chart which shows the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body of the modification 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 2. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 2. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 2. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 2. This is an example of the effect transition diagram of the sword-drawing effect of the modified example 2. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button used in many ways. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the effect display device, the state transition of the operation button, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body in the reach effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration body used for the pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure which shows the production transition example of the pseudo continuous production common to all production patterns. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of a sword ornament is given while the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect transition example which is characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the production transition example which becomes a feature of the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of production pattern which can be selected based on a variation pattern. It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decorative body and a specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). It is an operation execution timing chart of a sword decoration body and a specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) in a pseudo continuous production, and shows a pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. , It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the 1st suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is valid during the reach effect, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the transition example. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button was once enabled without the sword decoration being effective, and then the sword decoration was activated. It is a figure which shows the suggestion effect before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 1st effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 2nd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows the 3rd effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation-related effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect when "specific operation-related effect" is set as the effect target of the timer effect. It is a time chart explaining an example of the effect content for each type about the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the production example about the effect content when the precursor effect which is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the effect content when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the button image BTG is displayed in the mode (a specific effect mode) to which a princess character is added. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the operation error occurs between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the production example when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the production example when the first precursor effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows the production example when the first precursor production is performed. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when operating a movable decorative body when a specific condition is satisfied. It is a time chart which shows the modification example with respect to the example shown in FIG. 219. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 which starts a new symbol variation comes in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 which a special effect pattern is started arrives in the situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows an example about the process until the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the original position. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button in a series of operation confirmation periods. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button other than the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button in the arbitrary operation confirmation period. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the sword ornament during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and abnormality detection outside the operation acceptance period. (C) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword ornament and the abnormality detection during the operation acceptance period. (A) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the operation button, and (B) is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the game board. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the effect when the button is projected in the normal state, and (B) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the effect when the button is projected when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the normal button normal effect, and (B) is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button in the normal button operation when an abnormality occurs. .. (A) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operation state of the operation button and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs during the operation acceptance period, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the automatic operation confirmation period. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the operation state and the notification mode. It is a time chart showing the flow of the production when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button during the operation reception period, and (B) shows the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs during the operation reception period. It is a time chart. (A) is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the non-time saving state, and (B) is a time chart of the operation button cover and the operation button when an abnormality occurs in the time saving state. It is a time chart showing an operating state. This is a concrete example of mission production. This is a concrete example of roulette production. This is a concrete example of roulette production. This is a concrete example of the effect when the operation button is pressed and held during the roulette effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting mode interrupt process. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume control in the variable display. It is a figure which shows an example of volume control during a demonstration. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sound data creation process. It is a figure explaining the production example of the volume control suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the production example of the volume control suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining (A) the control timing of the volume control suitable realization effect, and (B) the control timing of the brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the production example of the brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the production example of the brightness adjustment suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the control timing in the modification of the volume control suitable realization effect. It is a figure explaining the control timing in volume / luminance adjustment at the time of the notification of high importance such as a high expectation effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in a pseudo-continuous discrimination effect. It is a figure explaining the effect example in the modification example of the pseudo continuous discrimination effect. It is a figure explaining the control timing in the modification of the pseudo-continuous discrimination effect. It is a figure explaining the timing of control in a jackpot expectation degree discriminating effect.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko game machines]
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine as the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. Yes, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and has an open front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a player side of the main body frame 3 and the front surface of the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the door frame 3. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. The dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and the handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Is equipped.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1, when viewed from the front, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, and the horizontal widths in the left and right directions are substantially the same. In addition to the dimensions, the vertical width in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than those of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 to open the door frame 2.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when viewed from the front, the gaming area 1100 in which the gaming ball is driven is facing through the substantially circular gaming window 101, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. As described above, the two upper plates 301 and the lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the inside of the game area 1100 can be visually recognized by the player, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, and accessories in the area 1100.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island equipment of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and their respective frame plates. It is provided with four connecting members 14 that connect the ends of 10, 11, 12, and 13, and by connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 to each other with the connecting member 14, a vertically long rectangular shape ( It is assembled in a square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. An upper support metal fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal mold materials (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. A plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when installing the pachinko game machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 and. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. The shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 is inserted. After inserting into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 can be easily locked by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 to the support hook hole 20c. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached and fixed to the inside of the right side frame plate 13 with two closing plates 24, 25 (see FIG. 1) arranged vertically separated by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054, 1065 (FIG. 1) of the locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are connected by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The engagement can be disengaged and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front surface side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the main body frame base 600 in front view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 are pivotally supported, A ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 to drive a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out balls and a game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 that blocks the flow of the door.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed so as to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and the main body frame. The U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 in front view, and the front end frame portion 602 are recessed from the front to the rear, and the door frame 5 is recessed from the lower end to the rear of the door frame base body 110. The protruding door frame projecting piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent projecting piece 167 (see FIG. 1) projecting rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which an open-side outer bent projectile 164 (see FIG. 1) projecting rearward is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward from the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 are provided. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left ends) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 to each other so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and a game board stop of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plate-shaped upper end regulating rib 609 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and has a lower end that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And have. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. There is. Further, the game board locking portion can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. .. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step toward the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the ball striking device is formed on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the 650 is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating recess. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending to the left and downward is formed on the left side of the front view of the upper end of the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650. It has become like. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game ball descending from the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings that penetrate the lower rear wall portion 604 in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the openings and on both the left and right sides in the front view direction. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating through. The opening of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 from the front side, and the substrate unit is attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 is attached to the door frame, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It has become like. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, so that the door frame 5 can be attached to the main body frame 3. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 while being able to be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped forward extending that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The shaft pin 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633 (FIG. 7). The door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates in the vertical direction into which the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extension portion 632 that hangs downward from the left end portion in the front view to regulate the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. It is equipped with a stopper. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 631, a front extending portion 632, and a stopper by bending and molding a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 to pivotally support the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main body frame shaft support bracket 644 and. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 642b in the vertical direction, and a front The extension portion 642b is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion in the front view and regulates the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b to be extended and a main body frame shaft support hole penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 The front extension portion 642b and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion of the main body frame base 600.

When the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are coaxially above each other. The main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 fits into the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hook hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support metal fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It has become like.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The door frame is positioned coaxially with 642c, and the door frame is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of 5 (see FIG. 7) on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting it into the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described. The ball striking device 650 is attached to the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so that the rotation drive shaft 654a projects forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654, the hammer 656 fixed integrally with the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the predetermined position on the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. The hammer tip 658 at the tip of the ball hammer 656 passes between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time as being possible, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a game held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the rotation drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. .. Further, the hitting mallet 656 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape to the axial center of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a solenoid portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a in between. It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

When the ball striking device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. It is located below 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction with the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed at. Then, the ball striking device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game is played. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, after storing the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko game machine 1, the upper plate 301 of the pachinko game machine 1 is stored based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is to be paid out to. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game balls attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the pachinko island equipment side. The 720, the tank rail unit 730 arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and storing the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It mainly includes a full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, so that the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) capable of arranging game balls in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuously connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the rail 731, and a ball stop piece 735 that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port side. , Is equipped. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball, and a predetermined width that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage. The distribution space with space, the prize ball passage that communicates with the lower end of the left side (open side) of the distribution space and opens in the left side of the back view, and the right side of the back view of the distribution space. (Shaft support side) It is equipped with a ball-extracting passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 is integrally rotatably fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and is arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate. The third gear, the payout rotating body that rotates integrally with the third gear and is arranged in the distribution space, and the payout rotating body are fixed to the opposite side of the third gear so as to be integrally rotatable and are fixed in the circumferential direction, etc. It is provided with a rotation detection board in which a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits are formed at intervals, a ball-out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage. Holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. It includes a rotation angle switch board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and a prize ball case inner board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board described later.

The payout rotating body is provided with three recesses having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and by rotating the payout rotating body, the game ball supplied from the supply passage is one. Each ball is housed in a recess and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed in the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotating body. Each position is provided, and the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752. In this embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 744.

In the prize ball device 740, when the payout rotating body is rotated in the direction counterclockwise when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are discharged to the ball removal passage, and the game balls discharged to the ball removal passage are discharged to the ball removal passage. It can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the full tank branch unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end to win the prize of the prize ball device 740. The prize ball receiving port that receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball passage, the branch space that is placed under the prize ball receiving port and spreads in the left-right direction, and the game from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side. The normal passage that guides the ball, the normal ball outlet 774 that discharges the game ball that has flowed through the normal passage forward and opens at the right end of the front view, and the normal ball outlet 774 that opens at the right end of the front end, and the distance from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the right side of the rear view. It is equipped with a full tank passage that guides the game ball from the vertical position toward the front side, and a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has passed through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in the front view. ing.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port that opens upward to the left end of the front end of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball ejection port. A ball pulling passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has passed through the ball pulling passage are released forward and at the left end of the front view, at a position behind the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. It is equipped with an open ball outlet.

In the full tank branch unit 770, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first ball inlets 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) are opposed to each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and serves as a plate. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball ejection port is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet is formed in the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the base ball removal passage.

When the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the upper plate 301 of the foul cover unit 540 is above the first ball outlet. The game ball that cannot go out to the plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball socket cannot normally enter the passage, starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally is full. It enters the tongue passage and is supplied from the full tank outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. It has become.

[3-5. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a substrate. The power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810 and the power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. The 850, the payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and the terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in the front view. A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810 are provided.

The power supply board box holder 840 has an discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is opened upward and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 on the left front side of the left and right center when viewed from the front. The discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 are opened forward and upward in front of the side (right side in front view). The entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is formed so as to be recessed toward the front side, and includes a box accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply board box 850.

Further, in the power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It is formed and flows down through the opening of the board unit base 810 to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the main body frame base ball pulling passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharging part of the game board 4 and received by the discharging ball receiving part 841 can be discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharging passage 842. It has become.

The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. The power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and has an open front, and a box base 861. A payout control board 4110, which is attached to the rear surface and whose rear surface is covered by the cover 862, is provided. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it is not possible to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 without cutting the separation cutting portion 863, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

Further, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error canceling unit) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 are cleared when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, it is operated to clear the error, and the function to clear the RAM at the time of turning on the power and the period to play the function as clearing the RAM have passed after the power was turned on. It has a function to cancel the error in (later). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and fixed to the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board so that the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, which is attached to the rear surface of the 871 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed to the rear, and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. It includes a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and is for connecting to a CR unit relay. Terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided on the door frame 5 together with the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so that they face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The front side of the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is covered by the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 Only the connection terminals face the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance.

Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a loan balance display unit 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the full switch 550 of the switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Regarding the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362, the loan balance display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540. The description will be described later.

Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , For relaying the connection between various switches that detect the operations of the dial drive motor 414, the dial operation unit 401, and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Is. The decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and dial operation provided on the operation unit 400. A description of various switches for detecting the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), and a door. The right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and the left side attached to the left outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit arranged below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It includes a pair of side speaker covers 290 that are attached to the front of the 100. A plurality of LEDs (LED substrates) are arranged on the backs of the upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, and the left side decoration unit 240, and are related to the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, which will be described later. Then, the light emission is controlled in a predetermined light emission mode, and the upper decoration unit 280, the right side decoration unit 200, and the left side decoration unit 240 are light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100, the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101, the operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the plate unit 300, and the right side of the plate unit 300. The handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 through the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the plate unit 300 and is used to drive the game ball, sandwiches the door frame base unit 100. A foul cover unit 540 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a door frame. A glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101 is provided.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body 110 having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape, and a door frame. An upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. It includes a speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) that is attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 that is rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 (FIG. 1). 1) and the launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) which is arranged on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. , A handle relay terminal plate attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 under the launch cover 191 and relaying the connection between the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and the main control board 4100 provided in the game board 4 described later. 192 (see FIG. 1), the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched. Frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 (see Fig. 1), which is arranged on the opposite side (rear view, to the right of the center in the left-right direction (shaft support side)) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, and frame decoration drive. It includes a frame-decorated drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the amplifier board 194.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. It is provided with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, each decorative board provided in the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. The wiring that electrically connects the switch, the handle relay terminal board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. is the rear view of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being bundled at the position on the right side (shaft support side), it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and is formed in such a form that the game window 101, which penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape, is offset upward as a whole. Has been done. In the game window 101, the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge are formed in a continuous smooth curved shape, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) through which the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. The right (open side) end of the front surface, which is arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101 and is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view to attach and fix the side speaker 130. A handle mounting part for mounting the handle bracket, a wiring passage port that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting part and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and an upper side of the handle mounting part. A lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a cylindrical shape extending shortly toward the front and through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, can be inserted. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back surface of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side of the door frame base body 110 (see FIG. 1), and the game window 101 of the door frame base body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) that is attached along the lower back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

At the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, an upper shaft support 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof in the vertical direction and a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof are provided. It is provided integrally. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating the main body frame 3 in the direction opposite to the opening direction with respect to the outer frame 2), the hook portion for the door frame The engagement between the 1041 and the hook cover 165 is disengaged, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and launches the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via the ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left to the center when viewed from the front, and is linearly forward from the center to the right. It is formed so as to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is mounted is formed in the upper center of the plate unit 300, and a liquid crystal mounting portion 314d for mounting the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion. .. The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when a player presses this portion downward by hand, for example, the upper plate upper panel 314 bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. By bending the upper plate upper panel 314, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is removed from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

Further, the plate unit 300 has an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b in response to the operation of, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 (not shown). It includes a ball rental unit 360 that operates the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) that the player can press. The operation unit) is provided, and the player's operation can be received and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by the pressure detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation in which the dial drive motor 414 is rotated in the reverse direction in small steps.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the residual frequency display 365c can be visually recognized via the loan residual display unit 363. The CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the residual power display 365c, and the light emitting mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized via the rental residual display unit 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display plate 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. .. When the ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the dish unit. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of 300, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid card that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. ing. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet that opens below the entrance and is open at the rear, and a box-shaped front cover that closes the rear end of the front cover and is open at the front, penetrating in the front-rear direction. Rotating around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball invading from the entry port of the front cover to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the rear cover and the front cover. A ball pulling member that is pivotally supported and has a partition portion that separates the entrance and the ball pulling port on the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partition portion of the ball pulling member are hit by the rear cover one by one. A ball feeding member rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover and the rear cover to the supply port 582a, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member are provided. There is.

When the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member accepts one game ball, while when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member accepts one ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base that is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 and has a cylindrical shape and a front end that bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that can rotate relative to the handle base. It is arranged in front of the annular rotary handle main body arranged on the front side, the rotary handle main body front 506 fixed to the front after the rotary handle main body and integrally rotatable with the rotary handle main body, and the front of the rotary handle main body 506. It is also provided with a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body in cooperation with the handle base.

Further, the handle device 500 is fitted to a shaft member which is attached and fixed to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to project from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member. Detection of the potentiometer 512, which has a detection shaft portion that can be rotated and is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and the potentiometer 512, which is fixed to the front surface of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base. A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a launch stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member from the touch switch 516. , A single-shot button that is rotatably supported by the switch support member to operate the launch stop switch 518, and is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member, and the original rotation position (front) is in front of the rotary handle body 506 and after the rotary handle body. It is equipped with a handle return spring that urges the user to return to the (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. Further, the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body rotate from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view) which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view. do.

Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. .. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing angle corresponding to the rotation angle in front of the main body 506 and after the main body of the rotary handle, that is, the rotation position in front of the main body of the rotary handle 506 and after the main body of the rotary handle. There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is a game despite being fired by the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the hit ball launching device 650. A game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base whose front side is open and which has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Inside the one-ball passage, the second ball entrance 542c, which is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a, and inside the cover base that communicates with the second ball passage. The second ball entrance 542c, which extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view, is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is formed at a position opposite to each other. In the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball, and a predetermined amount of the game ball can be used. A storage space that can be accommodated is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball inlet 542e, which can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream side of the second ball passage. It has a ball passage and. Further, the cover base is provided with an opening / closing operating piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing actuating piece comes into contact with the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank and open / close the shutter 792. It can be opened.

The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base. It includes an exit and a second ball outlet that communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base main body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a to pass through the first ball passage from the first ball outlet to the plate unit 300. It can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. It can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply trough and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300.

Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device. When the game ball launched by the 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at the foul ball entrance 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in the front view) of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is oscillated by a game ball stored in the accommodation space so as to be pivotally supported by the cover base. It includes a member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that urges the swing member in a direction in which the swing member is not detected by the full tank switch 550. The lower end of this swing member is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base, and the upper end rotates to the left side when viewed from the front. It is designed to form. Further, the swing member is urged by a spring to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swing member is formed with a detection piece protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full tank switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is driven by a player operating a handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component 1110 that divides the outer periphery, and a position that can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko game machine 1 at the lower right corner of the front view of the front component 1110. A function display unit 1180 arranged in the above, and a plurality of openings 1158 attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1150, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

Further, the game board 4 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the panel lens member 2500 and the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that is visible from the player side according to the game state, and the lower part of the back unit 3000. A board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided so as to cover the game panel 1150 from the rear side.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The outer shape of the front component 1110 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer circumference of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutting portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It can be rotated only between the closed position that extends upward and the open position that rotates clockwise in the front view and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. It includes a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component 1110 is the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). It is located on the extension line of). A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to invade the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 and the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the front unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. The out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, rolling downward in the opposite direction. (See FIG. 1) will fall and will be accepted by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the bottom of the foul space 626 in the dish unit 300. It is designed to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. And the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view, and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side in the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the lower end in the front view. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the above, a notch portion 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5) is fitted. ), The left end of the front view of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board clerk. By locking it to the stop portion, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction.

Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is a game board fixing tool 690 (FIG. 5) pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When the game board fixture 690 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view (see), the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is inserted by the game board fixture 690. The lower end of the clock is restricted from moving forward. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged at the lower right of the front view of the front component 1110.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 2000 is an attacker unit 2100 arranged above the out port 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and an outer circumference of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the above and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged along a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. There is.

The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located within the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and with the obstacle nails planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, with respect to the movement of the game ball. It is possible to give a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) that allow the game balls driven into the game area 1100 to be accepted, and specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction. A rectangle that is located below the start port 2101, the lower start port 2102 located below the upper start port 2101, and below the lower start port 2102, and extends significantly in the left-right direction from the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. It is provided with a large winning opening 2103 having a shape and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103. The game balls accepted by the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side so that a game ball can always be received (winning). On the other hand, in the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 11) are arranged between the lower starting port 2102 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stands up substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the game ball unacceptable to the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces are movable. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning opening (variable winning device) by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make it difficult to accept the game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is rotated to, the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be easily accepted. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is drawn when a game ball is accepted (starting prize) in the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. Depending on the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"), it opens and closes by driving the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 11), and the variable winning opening (variable winning device) Consists of.

Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that the game ball can always be accepted (winning).

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball received by the lower start port 2102 and a count switch that detects a game ball received by the grand prize opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160. The upper starting port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball accepted by the upper starting port 2101 and the general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the game ball accepted by the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. ..

[5-2-2. Side winning opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 was inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 1150 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. Above, two are fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and are oriented so as to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100. It is equipped with a general winning opening 2201. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can always be accepted (winning), and the game balls accepted into the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end portion is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end portion thereof, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on opposite sides and lower sides of the two general winning openings 2201 and are located on the left-right center side of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward the 2103 side), and the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

The two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, a third shelf portion 2204 inclined so as to be lowered toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf portion 2203. At the same time, the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 in the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening decorative substrate and the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 provide the side winning opening member 2200. Is luminescent and can be decorated.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is arcuate so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball with the outer circumference of the game area 1100. In addition to being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form a region having a predetermined width from the outer circumference of the game area 1100.

The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to be lowered toward the left. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and on the right side of the upper shelf part 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (invaded) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball invades to the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the driving force of the game ball is strong. It is possible to adjust the ball as appropriate, and it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension and suppress the game from becoming a vague game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has invaded the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and a center accessory that rolls the game ball released from the warp outlet in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. It mainly includes a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of the 2300.

Although detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the first stage to which the game balls released from the warp outlet are supplied and the game balls arranged in front of the first stage are arranged from the first stage. It is provided with a second stage, which is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has invaded the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the lowermost front of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314. The chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (wins) in the upper start port 2101 with a high probability. ing.

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the stage 2310. It has become.

Further, the center accessory 2300 is transparent so as to extend to the left so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, above the warp entrance 2302. It further includes an arch portion 2315. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315. ..

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of the game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance, which is arranged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion and above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. The gate switch 2352 and the gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 are provided. In the present embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is an arch. It looks as if you have dived in part 2315.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a circular or × shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 of the game panel 1150. The decorative holes are luminescent and decorated. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels arranged on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. It is arranged behind the upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the lower panel lens 2520. It includes a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion guide guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decorative hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed to have as little effect on the ball as possible.

By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate, the panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the gaming ball flows down even if an opaque gaming panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used. The decoration of the game panel 1150, which has never been seen before, can be shown to the player, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be made to stand out to be differentiated from other pachinko game machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and is inside the back box 3001 and the back box 3001 that support the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side at a position separated from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. The upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side in the back box 3001, and the game board side in the back box 3001. It mainly includes a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and accepted by the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game accepted by the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and the right that is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and guides the game ball received downward to the upper starting port 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side of the attacker unit 2100. It mainly includes a guide member 3018.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back unit 3000 is arranged under the rear lower portion of the back box 3001 and accommodates the lamp drive board 4170, and is below the horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 and the lamp drive board box 3423. The horizontally long rectangular motor drive board box 3430 arranged on the side and accommodating the motor drive board 4180, and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and arranged on the left side in the rear view. The panel relay terminal plate 4161, the horizontally long rectangular upper resistance board arranged on the rear upper part of the back box 3001, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 are detachably held. It further includes a lock member.

In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and the units 3100 and 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape are formed. , 3500, etc. make it possible to characterize the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, in the back unit 3000, each unit 3100, 3400, and 3500 can be moved independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement causes the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side supported on the rear side through this opening can be visually recognized from the player side. There is. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the boards 3014, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 has a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (right side in the rear view) on the right side of the opening in the rear view. Along with providing a liquid crystal support for locking, a lock member is attached to the left side when viewed from the rear of the opening, and the lock member holds the other (left side when viewed from the rear) fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By supporting it, the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side can be detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guidance member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game ball received into the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths. Each flow path is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received by the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper start port 2101 is provided with the upper start port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the general winning port 2104 on the right side is provided with the general winning port switch 3020. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is arranged in the front at substantially the center in the left-right direction and is arranged in a circular shape in front view, and is arranged behind the rotating decoration unit 3200 to raise and lower the rotating decoration unit 3200. Mainly provided with 3250, a swinging decorative unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative unit 3300. ing.

The rotary decorative unit 3200 is moved up and down by the elevating mechanism 3250 between the ascending position located above the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the descending position located substantially in the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. It can be moved. In the rotating decoration unit 3200, the rotating decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotation causes the rotational radius of the rotating decoration to increase due to the centrifugal force. It has become like.

Further, in the rotating decoration unit 3200, not only the rotating decoration rotates at the end but also the rotating decoration unit protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the turning radius of the entire rotating decoration body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and strongly attract the interest of the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with a great difference from other pachinko gaming machines.

The swinging decoration unit 3300 includes swinging decorations arranged on the left and right sides on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 located at the raised position, and the swinging decorations on the left and right depending on the gaming state. The body can be swung in the left-right direction all at once.

The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling decorations extending in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decoration is rotatably formed around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, so that the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in the descending direction according to the game state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 is provided with a character body that is modeled and three-dimensionally shaped as a ninja, and the character body moves from the rightmost position to the position closer to the center side in the left-right direction according to the game state. Can be done. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction, and reciprocates around an axis whose right arm extends in the vertical direction. Can be done. As a result, by reciprocating the head, the character can behave as if it were nodding. In addition, by reciprocating the right arm in the horizontal direction, the character can behave as if he were throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 includes gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction, and the gear decorations are simultaneously arranged according to the gaming state. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. .. The liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side includes fixed pieces 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and can be attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed pieces 1902.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side includes a peripheral board box 1905 accommodating the peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a gaming board in a state of being attached to a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 is a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end portion of the front view. It consists of a device 1183 and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183. The upper special symbol, which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol storage display 1184 and consists of one 7-segment LED for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 as the first special symbol. One 7 for displaying the result of the second special lottery, which is arranged diagonally to the right of the display 1185 and the upper special symbol display 1185 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102, as the second special symbol. The lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of segment LEDs and the lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side to display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the lower starting port 2102. It is equipped with a special symbol memory display 1187.

The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186 to display the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game ball. The normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of the four LEDs of the above, and the normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate 2350 are displayed as the normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", the big winning opening 2103 is opened and closed. It includes a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

The game status display 1183 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming states (depending on the combination of the emission color and lighting / blinking). For example, a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

When the upper special symbol memory display 1184 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the game ball is accepted by the upper starting port 2101, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The number of reserved first special symbols (stored) is displayed. The upper special symbol storage display 1184 has an upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and an upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and depends on the lighting / blinking pattern of the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the upper special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the upper special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both turned on. Then, when the number of holds is 3, the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184a blinks and the upper special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up, and when the number of holds is 4, the upper special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both blink. There is. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The lower special symbol memory display 1187 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball is accepted by the lower start port 2102 when the lower special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner (1187). The number of reserved second special symbols (stored) is displayed. The lower special symbol storage display 1187 has a lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and depends on the lighting / blinking pattern of the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b. , The number of holds can be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the lower special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the lower special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are both turned on. Then, when the number of holds is 3, the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the lower special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of holds is 4, the lower special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b both blink. There is. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played by the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. It is designed to be recognized by the person (variable display game).

The ordinary symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the gate portion 2350 is played by combining the emission color and lighting / blinking. It is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the ball passes through. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is changed for a predetermined time.

The normal symbol storage display 1188 holds (stores) the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of holds (the number of memories) of. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By turning on ~ 1188d in sequence, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

The round indicator 1190 includes a 2-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and each lamp can be turned on to display the number of rounds in the "big hit" game. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. There is. Game status display 1183, upper special symbol storage display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol storage display 1188, normal symbol display 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protruding portion of the function display unit 1180.

In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, it is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table). Even if the detailed configuration of the gaming board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player and the game The position of the function display unit 1180 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 14 is a block diagram around the VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit.

As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, and also performs the game operation. The detection signals from the main control MPU4100a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as the main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary voltage of a predetermined voltage. It is mainly equipped with a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e for monitoring signs of stoppage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU4100a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Further, the main control MPU4100a has a built-in non-volatile storage means. In this non-volatile storage means, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. .. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile storage means, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile storage means and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function that does not have a reset function and does not have a reset function. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102, and the general winning opening 2104 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the gate switch 2352 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and the large winning opening 2103 are entered. The detection signals from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball and the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet are relayed to the panel attached to the game board 4. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal plate 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, the upper special symbol display is displayed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol storage indicator 1184, lower special symbol storage indicator 1187, ordinary symbol display 1189, ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190 It outputs a drive signal.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In the present embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas they are generally used. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. The detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 210 and 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 kb without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 4110. When the payout control board 4110 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b receives the commands of the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 4100b. Receive various commands as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 bc without the reset function. As a result, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cc without the reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured around the main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control serial I / O ports, provides a bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected via. The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like. When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The transmission of various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 is not limited to the method of transmitting as serial data, and may be a method of communicating as parallel data. When transmitting as parallel data, a dedicated process for transmitting as parallel data is provided as a program process, and the command is executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the command is stored in the ring buffer or the condition that the command is stored). Therefore, individual commands may be transmitted at the required timing.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described as.) It is equipped with BC0. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and a liquid crystal display device 470 on the precision plate side. Liquid crystal display and sound control unit 4160 that perform drawing control and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second, and a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is provided with a volume adjusting volume 4140a for adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 and the speaker housed in the door frame 5 by rotating the knob portion.

[7-2-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. From the peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Peripheral control unit that is executed each time a V-blank signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, light emission of various LEDs, etc. Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores information for managing schedule data that defines aspects, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of jackpot game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing information for managing various effect flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 4150e for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally (hereinafter, "peripheral control external"). WDT4150e ”) and.

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 851. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 851 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d has stored contents. Can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT4150e to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU4150a will be reset. When the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT4150e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 4. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 5 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided on the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame. It is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT4150e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-2-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 4150ae, a WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 4150ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT4150af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 4150ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 4150ah, various serial I / O ports 4150ae with peripheral control, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 4150ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between the O port 4150ae, the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is reset when the watchdog timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT4150e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a can be output, or the upper decoration on the door frame 5 can be output. It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The speaker and door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 by controlling the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so as to have the volume set in the board volumes 0 to 6. Music and sound effects are played from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. ..

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1, contents related to the game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or the player is likely to be in a favorable gaming state. The notification sound for) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows independently of the sound, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. .. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-2-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sounds and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the above, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type. , The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in a range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is included. For example, the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. When the 1900 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-2-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 13, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca. Various control program copy areas 4150cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control data copy areas 4150ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 4150cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cc, and backup second area 4150cc, the power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. (For example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. ), It is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, which will be described later. Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150 cc to the backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. In "(1fr)", as will be described later, when the VDP4160a with built-in sound source outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU4150a Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU4150a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning.) “(1ms)” is defined as “(1ms)” because the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150ca on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 4150cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command is set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set.

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and the like. Has been done. In the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). (Rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set in this storage area.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is executed. When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is placed in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. NS. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cg. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the information to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed, and the effect information (1 ms) is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Each time a steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 4150ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-2-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 15) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). It instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even when it is done), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da is used to manage various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150db to the backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 4150a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 4150dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-2-2. LCD and sound control unit]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and the music, sound source, etc. played from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 12, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that perform sound control include a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"). Displayed on the sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Speaker) 4160a that controls the drawing of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b that stores various sound data such as music and sound sources in addition to various character data of the screen to be displayed, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that uses serialized music and sound sources as audio data. It is provided with an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmission. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b include image data of a suggestion display object used for displaying a suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the operation unit 400 should be operated, and a main body frame as seen from the player. The position of each part on the back of 3 can be visually recognized. The back image data of the main frame used for displaying the back image of the main frame, the image data of the service mode screen used for displaying the service mode screen, and the break timer setting used for displaying the break timer setting screen. The screen image data and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to 4150 cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is set in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control of the peripheral control unit 4150. After extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of RAM 4150c and outputting to VDP4160a with built-in sound source, when a V blank signal is input, the first sound according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

[7-2-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP4160a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. 14 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP4160a outputs the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. By outputting the image data from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is output from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the upper plate side. The image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and outputs image data for the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side from the channel CH2. When output to the dish-side liquid crystal display device 470, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. Further, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

The VDP4160a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP4160a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. ..

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the above and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1. A sub-volume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. Further, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. In the pachinko game machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and special A certain period of time (peripheral control in this example) when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186) From the reception of the variation pattern command on the MPU4150a to the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or on the peripheral control MPU4150a, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command is received. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, except for (until 0.5 seconds have passed after the final display of the decorative symbol). There is.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a include a plurality of sound source built-in VDP4160a built-in sound sources. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, the sound is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified production sound is serialized as audio data. It is designed to output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value. The volume flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the combined production sound volume is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the accommodated speaker and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Is based on the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment, is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually combined with the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is amplified from 130 to the master volume value that is the volume that flows, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a problem occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or the pachinko game machine 1 is affected. To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of fraudulent activity, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined and this is performed. The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that actually flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Then, the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, only the maximum volume notification sound flows. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is for sound generation described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as the volume value (at this time, if the sub volume value is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. The sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a malfunction occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or the pachinko game machine 1 occurs. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against the above, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the sound is played from the speaker 130, the muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data. Therefore, the notification sound is a speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after a predetermined period of time has passed. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-2-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b are used to draw the character data on the game board side for drawing in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the character data on the upper plate side for drawing in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-2-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right side audio data as positive signal and negative signal to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which a positive signal and a negative signal are used. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-2-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU4150a. The effect based on this can be developed by the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side, or on New Year's Eve, a new year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in a range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the panel side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a cold cathode tube type, the backlight can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the year when the input date and time information was input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, in addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has brightness setting information, input date and time information, etc. when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the gaming board side is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit gaming state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type, the liquid crystal display on the game board side is installed. Corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the display device 1900. Peripheral control MPU4150a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is first turned on, and calendar information and time for specifying the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. If 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-2-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a rotates the knob portion to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjusting volume 4140a is changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source) are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. .. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Announce the contents related to the game production (for example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is likely to be produced as more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to an advantageous state for the player. The notification sound for pachinko and the like also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are operated by rotating the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the above, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source) by a program. ing.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from being less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side can be produced as more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, the dial operating portion 401 of the operation unit 400 and pressing are performed. By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When a predetermined period elapses from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and then the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. In addition to this, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen for this is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume (0 (silence) to 6 (maximum)). A plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted to a desired brightness (100% to 70%). Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, whereby the effect sound can be produced. The volume of is adjusted. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment. Further, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the adjusted door frame 5 and each decorative substrate of the game board 4 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LEDs. In addition, a screen for operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to perform the setting mode during the period in which the customer is waiting and the demonstration is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and in addition to adjusting the sub-volume value of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the calendar information and the time information are regenerated. It can be set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjusting volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after a predetermined period (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) has elapsed from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the dial of the operation unit 400 is displayed according to the screen of this setting mode. By operating the operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the operation unit 400 can be used. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is felt loud and the music or sound effect is noisy, the operation unit 400 can be used. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the gaming board side is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, this time, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. A player who sits and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound is noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. The volume can be reduced to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. 16 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. ..

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). Further, these various commands include an effect-related command for controlling the effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140, a notification-related command for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect, jackpot related, power-on, normal figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state. It is divided into display and others.

[8-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands such as a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, a special figure 1 symbol type, a special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and a state designation at the time of fluctuation related to the above special symbol display 1185. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

The special figure 1 variation pattern command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 1 symbol type command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command indicates the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state specification command is the game state (high probability state, time saving) at the time of the change start of special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is a command indicating the game state, etc.). The variable state state specification command has a value corresponding to the game state and the mode value, and is transmitted at the start of the fluctuation or when the game state is switched. In addition, other commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect include a special figure 1 fluctuation type command (status "A3H", mode "01H to 10H") for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special figure 1 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, and the special figure 1 synchronization is performed. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed). Further, the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 1 symbol type command. The special figure 1 variation type command is transmitted after the special figure 1 variation pattern command. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[8-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern, a special figure 2 symbol type, and a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the lower special symbol display 1186. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is specifically shown in FIG. 15).

The special figure 2 variation pattern command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special figure 2 symbol type command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 2 synchronization effect end command is instructed to end the special figure 2 synchronization effect. Further, similarly to the special figure 1, the special figure 2 fluctuation type command (status “B3H”, mode “01H to 10H”) for specifying the fluctuation type corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is included.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special figure 2 symbol type command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern. The end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Further, as described above, in the case of the special figure 2 as in the case of the special figure 1, the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special figure 2 symbol type command. The special figure 2 variation type command is transmitted after the special figure 2 variation pattern command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-3. Big hit related]
As shown in FIG. 15, the categories related to big hits include big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open Nth display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2103 or the opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). (During closing or starting closing) between 2103 rounds is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 count display command has counted 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2103) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display. be.

In the jackpot ending command shown in FIG. 15, only one type of status and mode is set, but the mode value may be set according to the gaming state after the jackpot. For example, if the game state after the big hit is a low-probability non-time-saving game state, the mode value is set to "01H", and if the game state after the big hit is a high-probability short-time game state, the mode value is set to "04H". The ending may be specified on the main control board 4100 side by setting or the like. Further, even if the game state after the big hit is the same, a plurality of endings may be specified. For example, when the game state is a high-probability non-time-saving game state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the winning probability of the special lottery. May be specified. At this time, the ending may be selected on the peripheral control board 4140 side without specifying the ending with the jackpot ending command.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open. The small hit count display command indicates (start), and the small hit count display command is used when the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (during the small hit, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110). The production) is instructed, and the small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large attacker unit 2100). It is sent when the Nth round of the winning opening 2103 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 starts closing), and the big winning opening 1 is closed. The mouth 1 count display command is a count switch when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2103 is a count switch. (When detected by 2110), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). NS.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 15, the power-on category is composed of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. be).

As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the periphery of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process. The power-on command is transmitted in the control board command transmission process.

[8-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal diagram tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the ordinary symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1189, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol specification command specifies the miss, short open hit, and long open hit. The normal-figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal-figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the ordinary symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11, and the division is as shown in FIG. It consists of commands named opening per figure, open display of solenoid, and ending per figure. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 15, for example).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 expands in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2105). The ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is sent when the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the notification display is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. ing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIGS. 15 and 16 for example).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects it), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection is broken / short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In this case, the magnetic detection switch indicates the start of abnormality notification.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. In this state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is such that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch. When it is in a state, it instructs the end of the door opening notification. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 3 refers to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the main body frame is in the opened state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command closes the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch. This is to instruct the end of the main body frame opening notification when the state is set.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is among the upper start port switch 3022, lower start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. , Which is transmitted when the wire is broken or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch), and the door frame is transmitted. The closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 3 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch), and the main body frame is opened. The closing command is transmitted when the closing of the main body frame is detected (when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 16, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 16 for example).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it outputs "7 * H" as shown in FIG. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU4100a adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The formatted frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 16, the test-related division is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 16 for example).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 12). It inspects various boards such as the decorative drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[8-10. others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 16, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned statuses of "9 * H" and "5 * H" and modes of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is specific. It indicates that it is a hexadecimal number of, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is shown in FIG. 16 for example).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or the lower starting opening. When a game ball enters the lower start opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the switch 2109, the starting opening is instructed to win a prize. The fluctuation shortening operation end designation command instructs the state transition from the fluctuation shortening operation state to the fluctuation shortening non-operation state. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. The special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and a variable display of the special symbol is displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191. It tells the number of balls that have not been used yet (number of held balls). The special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 displays the variation of the special symbol. It tells the number of balls that have not been used yet (number of held balls). The normal symbol memory command is still used for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. It conveys the number of balls that have not been held (the number of pending balls).

The special symbol 1 hold number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls increases (when a game ball enters the upper start opening 2101 and the hold number increases). The special symbol 2 hold number designation command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls increases (when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the hold number increases). Further, the special symbol 1 hold number specification command and the special symbol 2 hold number specification command have a look-ahead when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are "1", and look-ahead when the upper bit of the mode value is "0". Represents none. When the special symbol 1 hold number specification command has a look-ahead, the special symbol 1 hold is read ahead and the special symbol is read before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191. 1 Instructs the start of the look-ahead effect that announces the display result by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the hold. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 hold number specification command has a look-ahead, the special symbol 2 hold is read ahead before being used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191. Instructs the start of the look-ahead effect that announces the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold. The symbol type look-ahead command, the variation pattern look-ahead command, and the variation type look-ahead command are transmitted when the special symbol hold number designation command is transmitted. Note that these commands may be transmitted only when the special symbol hold number specification command has a look-ahead.

The symbol type look-ahead command specifies a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot at the time of look-ahead. The variable pattern look-ahead command specifies an effect pattern (variable pattern) in the mode at the time of look-ahead. The variable type look-ahead command specifies the variable type in the mode at the time of look-ahead.

The normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is issued by the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol hold by pre-reading before the normal symbol hold is used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191. It instructs the start of the look-ahead effect that announces the display result. Further, as for the normal symbol, a normal symbol storage command, a normal symbol type look-ahead command, and a normal symbol variation pattern look-ahead command corresponding to the look-ahead may be prepared. Unless otherwise specified, the term "look-ahead" refers to the look-ahead of a special symbol.

Further, when executing the look-ahead determination, as will be described later, the same processing as at the start of the fluctuation is executed to generate a command including the effect pattern and the symbol, but when the same command as at the start of the fluctuation is transmitted, these commands are generated. Since it becomes impossible to distinguish whether the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the command is at the start of fluctuation or at the time of winning the start opening, only the status value is changed with the same mode value.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, or when the lower start port switch is used. When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. The speaker 130 provided in No. 5 is transmitted mainly to notify the effect by voice, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after digesting the fluctuation shortening of the specified number of times (the stop period has elapsed). Will be sent later). The high-probability end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" is exhausted.

The special symbol 1 storage command is still used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 1 changes (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101). When there is an unreserved number of holdings, when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings increases, it is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185. It will be sent when the number of holdings decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is still used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191 when the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the lower start port 2102). When there is an unheld number of holdings, when a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings increases, it is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186. It will be sent when the number of holdings decreases). The normal symbol memory command is a hold number that has not yet been used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 when the normal symbol 1 operation hold ball number changes (the game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the function display board 1191. In a certain state, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1189 for variable display of the normal symbol. ) Will be sent. As for the normal symbol, the command for specifying the number of reserved normal symbols, which changes depending on the presence or absence of pre-reading, may be transmitted as in the case of the special symbol. As with the special symbol, the presence or absence of pre-reading is indicated by hitting the upper 4 bits of the mode value.

The normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation increases (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 and the number of reserved balls increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

Further, instead of the normal symbol type pre-reading effect command, the normal symbol variation pattern and the pre-reading command related to the normal symbol symbol type may be separately transmitted, such as the normal symbol variation pattern pre-reading command and the normal symbol type pre-reading command. .. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the normal symbol hold number designation command, but it is not necessary to limit it, and if it is determined in advance, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is normally used. It may be sent before the symbol hold number specification command. Further, instead of the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command, the same applies when a look-ahead command relating to a normal symbol variation pattern (normal symbol variation pattern look-ahead command) and a normal symbol symbol type (normal symbol type look-ahead command) is transmitted.

By the way, as described above, the starting port winning command is issued at the time of winning the starting port (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, or from the lower starting port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of Although it is transmitted to notify the fact, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 12 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is a specification that is also used for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

In addition to the above-mentioned commands, for example, a gaming machine-related information command for transmitting gaming machine-related information including gaming machine model information may be transmitted. The game machine-related information command is transmitted from the main board to the peripheral boards as a predetermined trigger. The peripheral control board 4140 that has received the game machine-related information command can execute the effect control according to the model information included in the game machine-related information. For example, when there is a model that executes the look-ahead effect based on the normal symbol hold and a model that does not execute the look-ahead effect, the main control board is configured to always transmit the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command to the peripheral control board 4140. Then, when it is determined that the peripheral control board 4140 is a model capable of executing the look-ahead effect based on the normal symbol hold based on the game machine related information command, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect transmitted from the main control board 4100 is performed. The command is processed as a valid command so that the normal map look-ahead effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the model cannot execute the normal figure look-ahead effect, the command is discarded as an invalid command. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the processing on the main control board 4100 even when there are a model in which the normal drawing look-ahead effect can be executed and a model in which the normal drawing pre-reading effect cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may transmit the gaming machine-related information command at a predetermined timing such as a process (any one before S10 to S46 in FIG. 17) that is executed only once when the power is turned on. Good, multiple times during the game (at the start opening prize, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of a big hit (in the case of a normal figure, at the time of hit), when a predetermined condition such as a change in the game state is satisfied, the timer interrupt process is executed. (Regular timing) may be transmitted. The case of transmitting at the time of power-on is not limited to the case of transmitting during the process at power-on, as long as it is executed with the execution of the process at power-on as an opportunity. For example, when the power is turned on, a game machine-related information command is generated and stored in the command buffer in advance, and the steady processing (main processing, timer interrupt processing) after the processing at the time of power on is completed is stored in the command buffer during execution. It also includes the transmission of the game machine related information command.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, based on the command transmitted from the main control board 4100, any effect that can be executed on the peripheral control board 4140 is processed as a valid command, and the unexecutable effect is processed. It is configured to discard the command as an invalid command. Therefore, even if the effect to be executed differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is possible to standardize the control program of the main control board 4100, and to develop the control program of the main control board 4100 for each model. There is no need to do this, and it is possible to shorten the development period and shorten the testing period at a testing institution.

[9. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 41. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then each process such as the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number for determining whether to generate a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and a big hit for determining the initial value of the big hit judgment random number. Random number for determining initial value for judgment, random number for reach judgment to be used for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special symbol A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the display 1186, and derived by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. A random number for the jackpot symbol used for determining the displayed jackpot symbol, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol used for determining the initial value of the random number for the jackpot symbol, and the like are prepared. The above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol is a random number for the small hit symbol used for determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the small hit game state is generated. It is also used as. On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol is also used as a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106 are used to determine the initial value of the random number. A random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit, a random number for a normal symbol variation display pattern to be used for determining a variation display pattern of a normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the like are prepared.

For example, a counter that updates a random number for jackpot determination is composed of hardware (random number generation circuit) built into the chip, and has a predetermined fixed numerical range (from the minimum value to the maximum value by a predetermined calculation formula). In the present embodiment, the minimum value is updated according to a certain rule so that all the values appear within the value 0 to the maximum value 32767). As a result, it is possible to extract an unbiased random number value. Further, the random number value is updated based on the 10 MHz internal system clock obtained by dividing the 20 MHz clock output from the crystal oscillator by the main control MPU4100a by two. Further, when the update of the random number sequence for one cycle is completed, the sequence of the random number sequence of the new cycle is updated so as to be different from the random number sequence of the other cycle. In this way, since the arrangement of the random number sequences generated for each cycle is different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

The above-mentioned random numbers are so-called hardware random numbers, but may be random numbers (software random numbers) that are updated (generated) by software. Specifically, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767). Then, the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value (value 0) toward the initial value determined based on the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Count up. Every time the update of the big hit judgment random number for one cycle is completed, the start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the big hit judgment random number is determined based on the big hit judgment initial value determination random number, and the determined start value is determined. The update is repeated sequentially from. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is obtained by executing the initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. On the other hand, the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by the same method as the above-described method for updating the large hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for big hit judgment. The start value (initial value) of the next cycle of the jackpot judgment random number is determined based on the random number, and the update is repeated sequentially from the determined start value, but the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated when the power is turned on. The checksum value (sum) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU4100a as a numerical value in the case where the main control side is turned on or in the process when the main control side is turned on. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the value) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off), The jackpot determination random number is set as the start value of the jackpot determination random number based on an ID code that is a different value for each main control MPU4100a built-in and set for each main control MPU4100a. The random number for jackpot determination is updated from this start value. Therefore, the initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value (ID code) is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for jackpot determination is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID code is mainly used as the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. In addition to storing it as individual information for each control MPU4100a, the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. By doing so, it is analyzed by taking a second security measure in which the start value of the random number for jackpot determination always derives the same fixed value for each main control MPU4100a based on the ID code, and a two-step security measure by. Is prevented. Instead of the ID code, the initial value of the big hit determination random number may be set by extracting the above-mentioned hardware random number. As a result, when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to set a different start value of a random number for jackpot determination each time even in the same game board, and it is possible to further enhance security.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU4100a and using the extracted ID code as an initial value of a random number for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains and disassembles the game board 4 by some method, and an ID code stored in advance in a non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that updates the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment value match, the ID code has a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means built in the main control MPU provided in the other game board. That is, in other game boards, the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in another game board, that is, another pachinko gaming machine. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each interval and a game ball is inserted into the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 at each predetermined interval, a big hit gaming state cannot be generated.

[9-2. Initial value update type counter movement]
When the initial value update type counter clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU4100a takes out an ID code from the built-in non-volatile storage means, and is based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number as the big hit judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by the lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter In the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set so that it can be read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value as a minimum value to a value of 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range), a case where a value 10 to a value 209 is set with a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set with a high probability is illustrated. That is, in the low probability, the number of random numbers for big hits (random numbers for big hit determination) is 200, and in the high probability, the number of random numbers for big hits (random numbers for big hit determination) is 330. Here, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of random numbers to be counted and updated from being synchronized with each other, the number of other random numbers to be acquired at the same time is 200, except when the acquisition times of the random numbers are different. Other than that, for example, it is a prime number. That is, in the present embodiment, if the acquisition time of the random number value is different from that of the big hit determination random number, the number of random numbers that will be the big hit can be prevented from being a prime number. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned small hit is, for example, a random number for determining a big hit, which is the number of big hit symbols (200) divided by 4 (50) with a low probability.

Considering the case where such a jackpot judgment value range is set, the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It will be set in the range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) with. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 to the time when the first value 10 in the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) and this value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 in low probability, value 339 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Comparing with the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter. The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started upward by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio waves toward the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming is high.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. When it is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, it is before the first value in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0. The period from the initial value (value 32668 with low probability, value 31768 with high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) with the period until the value (value 32667 with low probability, value 31767 with high probability). Compared with the above, the former period has an extremely higher probability of being drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 with low probability, value 31767 with high probability). Comparing the range up to and the range from the first value (value 32668 with high probability, value 31768 with high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. Therefore, the probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, one of the values becomes the value drawn by the initial value lottery process and is set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment. Therefore, from the value obtained in this lottery toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter , The value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to, the value (low) before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 The period until the value becomes 32667 in probability and 31767) in high probability becomes irregular, and is rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the game ball is raised by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 with radio waves. Even if a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the minimum value (first value) in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from the time T0 is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. In the 4th cycle from the time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. .. In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving fluctuation to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) (periodicity). (By eliminating the), it is not detected by the player.

[9-3. Main control side power-on processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing of the present embodiment, and FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. conduct. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets the initial address on the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S10, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC. The comparator MIC, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC, is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Following step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately between the time the power is turned on and the voltage reaches the specified voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. In the determination in step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D-type flip-flop MIC, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on in step S14, the main control program causes a power failure at the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU4100a can set the D type flip-flop MIC in the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

Following step S15, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 to the main control MPU 4100a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is HI, and the operation switch 952 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 952 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 952 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 952 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. (Game control side power-on operation control means). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU4100a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU4100a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side by the liquid crystal display of the peripheral control board 4140 and the sound control unit 4160, which is shown in FIG. 7, is activated ( Wait until boot). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum considers the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S26, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S28). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing, which will be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step S32, the main control program performs a power-on command creation process (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S28. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 952 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU4100a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 952 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile storage means of the main control MPU4100a is taken out, and the random number for jackpot determination is updated based on the taken out ID code from the fixed numerical range of the counter. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number to be used for determining the initial value of the jackpot determination random number described above.

Following step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified into power-on as shown in FIG. 15 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and the initial setting has been performed is created, and peripherals are created. Test commands classified in relation to the test shown in FIG. 16 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S42, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Following step S44, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 952 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. The execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to send the detection signal input in connection with the operation of the operation switch 952 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). Game control side normal operation control means), it is treated as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 952 (error release unit), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 952 (error release unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step S46, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S48, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S50). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines in step S48 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If there is no signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S52). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC under the control of the main control MPU4100a.

Following step S53, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2105, an attacker solenoid 2108A, 2108B, an upper special symbol indicator 1185, a lower special symbol indicator 1186, an upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, and a lower special symbol storage indicator. The drive signal output to the 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S58). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S58, the main control program sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

In step S28, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S30, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[9-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing on the main control side.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a on the main control board 4100 (step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the generation of other interrupts is allowed. Further, the interrupt flag may be cleared after all the processes in the timer interrupt process are completed. By doing so, the management of the interrupt process is further simplified by preventing multiple interrupts due to the occurrence of another interrupt during the timer interrupt process.

Following step S72, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program enters, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2104, 2201, and the large winning opening 2103. A detection signal from the count switch 2110 that detects a game ball, a detection signal from an upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, and a lower that detects a game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102. A detection signal from the start port switch 2109, a detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a detection signal from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110, which informs that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the control process, is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101 and the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 are read. And the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 15, which is classified into other categories, is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, The corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2103. Detection signal from, detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102. , And the detection signals from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. The second time, each is read again. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program first outputs the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. False detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of 2 readings, 2 readings for comparison over the 3rd time and 2 readings for comparison over the 2nd to 4th times. The reliability of the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

Following step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol described later, and the normal symbol In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) issues various commands and the control board 4110 is normal. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the signal has been received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S76, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment). Counts up.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-mentioned method for updating the big hit determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. The non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the side main process) and the hit random number update process in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but this routine is performed every time an interrupt timer occurs. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs due to unevenness in the process time of , The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S50.

Following step S78, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the main control program reads input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and creates a prize ball command for paying out a game ball based on the input information, or with the main control board 4100. A self-check command for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. This main control program transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data.

Further, in the prize ball control process, the main control program executes the prize ball control program code which is a part of the program code, and is output from the count switch 2110 when the game ball is accepted into the large winning opening 2103, for example. When the detection information based on the detection signal is written in the corresponding definition bit areas defined one bit at a time for several minutes of the big winning opening 2103, for example, 15 balls as prize balls. A prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that the item should be paid out, and is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

In the present embodiment, since the two large winning openings 2103 are provided as the large winning openings, the main control program has a plurality of definition bit areas prepared in advance in the main control RAM as the definition bit areas described above. From among them, each definition bit for two for the grand prize opening 2103 is used. Hereinafter, they are referred to as "first bit area" and "second bit area" in this order. In the case of a game board in which the number of large winning openings is, for example, one definition bit area is used. These definition bit areas used are, for example, 1 bit, and are regarded as areas adjacent to each other. When the game ball is accepted by the grand prize opening 2103, for example, "1" is written in the first definition bit area, which is the fourth bit, for example, as detection information based on the detection signal output from the count switch 2110. After that, the main control program initializes the definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening that identifies that the game ball has been accepted by writing, for example, "0", and prepares for the acceptance of the next game ball.

Here, the main control program also determines which definition bit region to check the state of. For example, in the main control program, if the definition bit area corresponding to the count switch 2110 of the large winning opening 2103 is set to the fourth bit, the pachinko gaming machine provided with only one large winning opening as in the present embodiment. In this case, the main control program acquires the information of the definition bit area of the fourth bit.

Further, the main control program executes mask processing on the detection information acquired in this way according to the prize ball effective range of the large prize opening 2103 described later, creates a prize ball command, and writes it in the transmission information storage area. It is determined whether or not the output should not be output to the payout control board 4110. When it is determined that this prize ball command should not be transmitted, the main control program forces, for example, mask processing for each definition bit area in which the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 described above is written. The bit may be set to OFF (“0”) so that the prize ball command is not written in the transmission information storage area.

In this prize ball control process, the detection information corresponding to the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been accepted by the large winning opening 2103 in the first special game state is the detection information. Taking the opportunity of being written in the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening 2103, for example, a prize ball command is created as a prize ball instruction to the effect that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls, and the above-mentioned transmission information storage area Write to. At the same time, the main control program writes a winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then transmits the command to the peripheral control board 4140 to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the speaker, for example, ". Output a "pocon" sound.

On the other hand, in the main control program, in the first special game state, the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 indicating that one game ball has been accepted by the large winning opening 2103 is transmitted to the large winning opening 2103. If it is not written in the corresponding definition bit area, for example, a prize ball command is not created as a prize ball instruction indicating that 15 balls should be paid out as prize balls. In this case as well, the main control program writes the winning sound command as a command to output a predetermined sound in the transmission information storage area described above, but the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means). Prevent the payout operation of the game ball from being executed. After that, the main control program initializes the above-mentioned definition bit area corresponding to the large winning opening 2103, and clears the detection information based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 so that the game ball can be paid out. do.

At this time, when the main control program pays out more than the specified number of game balls that can be paid out in response to the acceptance of the game balls into the large winning opening 2103, the winning excess abnormality command (not shown in FIG. 16 is omitted). ) Is written in the transmission information storage area, and then transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command transmission process (step S92). Then, the peripheral control MPU4150a causes the speaker to perform a predetermined notification.

In this way, since the illegal game ball is not substantially paid out, the damage suffered by the game hall (game hall) can be minimized.

On the other hand, instead, when the acceptance of the game ball into the large winning opening 2103 is detected, the main control program immediately writes the winning excess abnormality command to the transmission information storage area to control the peripheral control MPU4150a. , The speaker may be notified.

After that, the main control program reads the prize ball command from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits it to the payout control board 4110 (payout control means).

As described above, when the game ball is accepted for the large winning opening 2103, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the corresponding count switch 2110 is functioning.

On the other hand, in this main control program, when the payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 4110 has normally received the prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 A self-check command for confirming the connection status between the boards is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S82). On the payout control board 4110, the payout control program transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 952. In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 16 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S82, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the count switch 2110 detects that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 2103 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program may perform the main control program. , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, the main control program determines whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the probability fluctuation state is subsequently established, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the transition to a gaming state other than the probability variation state is established (winning probability control). means). Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal so as to light the upper special symbol display 1185 according to the variation display pattern determined at the time of starting winning, or sets the lower special symbol display according to the type of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set so as to light the 1186, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Further, when the main control program shifts to the jackpot gaming state, for example, various commands classified into the jackpot related commands shown in FIG. 15 (big hit opening command, jackpot 1 open Nth display command, jackpot 1) Create a closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) and store them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or use the attacker solenoid 2108A or the attacker solenoid 2108A to open and close the opening / closing member 2107. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108B is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. Further, the main control program performs two rounds so as to turn on the two-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 when the number of times (round) that the large winning opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times. Set the output of the lighting signal to the indicator lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when there are 6 rounds, turn on the 6-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the 6-round indicator lamp is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the round is 12 times, the 12-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190 is lit. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 12-round indicator lamp and store it in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 16, turn on the 16-round indicator lamp (not shown) of the round indicator 1190. The output of the lighting signal to the 16-round indicator lamp is set so as to be lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. Further, the main control program sets the output of the lighting signal to the game state indicator 1183 so as to light the presence / absence of the transition to the probability fluctuation state in a predetermined color, and stores it in the output information storage area as output information.

By the way, in a general pachinko gaming machine, when the game ball starts and wins a prize, the special symbol is then changed and displayed, and a big hit lottery is executed. When the condition is satisfied, the lighting mode of the so-called probability change lamp as the game state indicator is changed and the state shifts to the probability fluctuation state. In the probability fluctuation state, the probability of the jackpot lottery described above is set to be relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it is almost guaranteed that the winning condition is satisfied again and the jackpot is won. As a gaming machine that may shift to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the probability fluctuation state in this way, mainly, is the jackpot game looping by continuing the probability fluctuation state until the next big hit? Those that behave like (hereinafter referred to as "loop machines") and those that continue the probability fluctuation state until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number after the jackpot game is completed (hereinafter referred to as "ST (special time) machine"). ") And exist. In this way, the pachinko gaming machines of different models that continue the probability fluctuation state have different control of the game status indicator described above, and at the development stage, the control of the game status indicator must be designed one by one for each model. It was difficult to improve development efficiency.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is accepted by the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied, and the winning condition is satisfied. In the case, the transition from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state is performed, while the probability that the winning condition is satisfied when the winning condition is satisfied and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied is relatively higher than that in the normal gaming state. The display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is set to the lit state while shifting to the high probability fluctuation state. After that, when the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the main control program sets the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 in a state in which the probability fluctuation state is continued and has a specific interrupt cycle. After the lighting state is temporarily turned off, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is changed from the lighting state to the lighting state again within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle.

Specifically, first, as described above, the main control program determines whether or not the winning condition is satisfied after the game ball is accepted by the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102. (Lottery means) If the winning conditions are met, the game shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, while if the winning conditions are met and the probability variation transition conditions are met, the winning conditions are met. The probability is shifted to a probability fluctuation state set relatively higher than the normal game state (game state control means). The main control program turns on the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 while the probability fluctuation state continues, while the display mode of the game state display 1183 when the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Is turned off (lighting mode control means). When the main control program turns on the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 with the transition to the probability fluctuation state described above as a trigger, and then the winning condition is satisfied again and the probability variation transition condition is further satisfied. In the state where the probability fluctuation state is continued, the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is temporarily changed from the lit state to the extinguished state within a specific interrupt cycle, and then the game is played within the same interrupt cycle as the specific interrupt cycle. The display mode of the status indicator 1183 is changed from the off state to the lighting state again (lighting state continuation control means). Even if the player wants to visually recognize that the probability fluctuation state continues, even if the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 is changed in this way for a very short time, the player may change the display mode. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to make it appear that the display mode of the game state indicator 1183 has not changed.

In this way, due to the display mode of the game state display 1183, it is difficult for the player's eyes to visually recognize that the light has been turned off once, and it is visually recognized as if the light state continues. Then, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a so-called loop machine in which the probability fluctuation state continuously continues, the probability fluctuation state of the special symbol continues up to a predetermined number of fluctuations after the jackpot game state ends. A program code that controls the display mode of the game status indicator 1183 between different models, even if it is a so-called ST (special time) machine that shifts to the probability fluctuation state again when the winning condition is satisfied within the specified number of fluctuations. Can be shared. This makes it possible to improve the development efficiency of pachinko gaming machines of different models.

Further, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program (game control means) shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state when the winning conditions are satisfied as described above, while further. When the probabilistic transition condition as an example of the transition condition is satisfied, the probabilistic game state as an example of the specific gaming state is also shifted (game state control means). Here, the main control program may shift to the probabilistic game state as an example of the specific game state without substantially paying out the game ball in the big hit game state. The specific game state may be a state in which the time saving operation condition is satisfied as another example of the transition condition and the time saving function is operating, or both games are simultaneously performed in combination with the above-mentioned probability variation game state. It may be in a state. The main control program manages the remaining number of times of variation display of the special symbol in the period from one game state to another game state, and transmits game state information indicating the managed game state. Then, within the same timer interrupt cycle, the command transmission process S92, which will be described later, transmits the program (game status notification means).

Specifically, when the main control program satisfies the above-mentioned probability variation transition condition, the remaining special symbol is fluctuated and displayed until the gaming state shifts to a gaming state other than the probability variation gaming state, for example, a normal gaming state. Information about the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "remaining number of times information") is included in one of the commands transmitted when the start condition is satisfied after the start condition is satisfied, for example, the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern. By writing the information in the transmission information storage area, the command transmission process S92, which will be described later, transmits the command within the same timer interrupt cycle (remaining fluctuation number notification means). The main control program may include the above-mentioned remaining number of times information in other commands, or may cause the peripheral control board 4140 to transmit the information as an independent command.

By the way, a subroutine, which is a program module composed of a set of program codes, is generally called by a CALL instruction included in the main routine, and the program code group included in this program module is executed at the end. It is configured to return to the main routine with a return instruction. At first glance, it seems difficult to reduce the program capacity because an instruction for recalling is required in this way.

However, in the present embodiment, when the main routine includes a continuous subroutine, for example, instead of the main routine calling and executing the first subroutine with a CALL instruction, and then continuously calling the next subroutine with another CALL instruction. In addition, the return instruction may not be placed at the end of the program code group of the first subroutine and may be directly connected to the beginning of the program code group of the next subroutine. With a program module having such a configuration, the capacity of the entire program can be reduced.

Following step S86, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S88). Details of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the process at the time of passing through the gate is performed based on the input information. In the gate passage processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

Further, following the gate passage processing, the main control program reads the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, extracts the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination from the read gate information, and incorporates the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the ROM (referred to as "ordinary lottery"). The main control program determines whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces 2106 according to the determination result (lottery result by the ordinary lottery). When the main control program opens and closes according to this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened, so that the game ball can be accepted by the lower starting port 2102, which is advantageous for the player. Migrate to.

Further, the main control program determines the variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above determination based on the value of the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and classifies the variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to the above determination into the normal symbol synchronization effect-related items shown in FIG. Various commands are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is turned on according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Further, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program is related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Various commands are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the pair of movable pieces 2106. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the main control program is described above as the normal symbol variation display pattern random number. The normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 15 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the determined normal The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S88, the main control program performs port output processing (step S90). In this port output process, the main control program reads output information from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and outputs various signals based on the output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information. A start port solenoid that outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoids 2108A and 2108B that open and close the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2103, and opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 2106 when it is in a big hit game state. In addition to outputting the drive signal to 2105, 2 round jackpot information output signal, 6 round jackpot information output signal, 12 round jackpot information output signal, 16 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as an information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads transmission information such as commands and data from the transmission information storage area described above, and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 (command). Transmission means). This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 15, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Various commands classified into commands and jackpots (for example, when a game ball entered in the jackpot 2103 is detected, the jackpot 1 count corresponding to the jackpot count command based on the detection signal from the count switch 2110 Display commands), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric service production, and various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. Commands (door frame open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, frame state 2 command), test Various commands classified as related and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

As the command transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, a method in which the command stored earlier for the ring buffer is output first as a buffer for command transmission is used. The main control program transmits commands to the peripheral control board 4140 in the order in which the commands are stored in the command transmission buffer. For example, in the same timer interrupt process, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88) are executed after the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86) are executed. Since the command is stored in the command transmission buffer before the normal map-related look-ahead command, the special figure-related look-ahead command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in preference to the normal figure-related look-ahead command. NS.

In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control unit) A frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) is transmitted to (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 And sends an error clearing navigation command (second error clearing command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (1st main body frame opening command) A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (1st door frame opening command) A door frame opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means, second specific frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command received from the payout control board 4110 to the peripheral control board 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) registers (step S96) and ends this routine. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose register in hardware and saves it. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents loaded on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU4100a sets interrupt enable after returning in step S96.

[9-5. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the main control program updates the above-mentioned big hit determination random number by +1 by the counter, and accepts the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, that is, With the start winning as an opportunity (establishment of the start condition), for each start memory information (start information) for which the start condition is satisfied, the above-mentioned counter value is taken out and used as a big hit random number value, and this big hit random number value is the main control. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the built-in ROM (lottery means). Hereinafter, this determination process is also referred to as a "special lottery". The main control program determines whether or not to generate a jackpot game state based on the lottery result, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied). To shift from the normal game state to the big hit game state. The jackpot game state corresponds to a special game state, a first special game state, and a second special game state, and shall indicate a game state that collectively refers to these.

When the main control program determines the jackpot game mode, the data for defining the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process includes, for example, the number of rounds, the opening time of the jackpot for each round, and the opening time of the jackpot. One of the main control built-in RAMs in which the definition data (table) representing the closing time of the large winning openings for each round and the number of winning limit counts of the game ball is offset by the address offset according to the number of large winning openings. It is read from the definition data area (not shown), which is the storage area of the unit. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 first determines whether or not the game ball has won the lower grand prize opening (large winning opening 1) ( Step S100). When the game ball wins in the lower prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), a command for designating the prize in the lower prize opening is set (step S102).

Similarly, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper prize opening (large prize opening 2) (step S104). When a game ball wins in the upper prize opening (the result of step S104 is "yes"), a command for designating a prize in the upper prize opening is set (step S106). Whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening is detected by the count switch 2110. Furthermore, when each prize designation command is set, it is not limited to detection by the count switch, and each prize designation command is not limited to detection by the count switch, and when the corresponding large prize opening is opened and detected by the count switch. May be set. The condition for determining that the large winning opening is in the open state may be the gaming state according to S142 to S146, or the special symbol / special electric accessory operation number is a value corresponding to S142 to S146. It may be.

Further, the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the upper gate (coupling gate) (step S112). When the game ball has passed through the upper gate (the result of step S112 is "yes"), a command for passing the winning combination operation gate indicating that the game ball has passed through the upper gate is set (step S110).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening (upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102). First, the start port 1 identification value is set in the start port identification area indicating the start port to be determined for winning (step S112).

Then, the main control MPU 4100a determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper start opening 2101 (step S114). Whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the upper start port 2101 is determined by whether or not there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022. Specifically, in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19, the presence or absence of a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 is read and stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is done based on the input information.

When the game ball wins the upper start opening 2101 (the result of step S114 is "yes"), the main control MPU 4100a executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up opening winning process, a start-up opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect. The details of the processing at the time of winning the starting port will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main control MPU4100a sets the start port 2 identification value in the start port identification area (step S118), and determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the lower start port 2102 (step S120). When the game ball wins the lower start opening 2102 (the result of step S120 is "yes"), the start opening winning process is executed as in the case of the upper start opening 2101 (step S122). The start port 1 identification value and the start port 2 identification value are the start port winning process so that the start port winning process common to the upper start port winning process and the lower starting port winning process can be executed. Information for identifying whether the processing being executed is due to the winning process by the upper starting port or the lower winning opening process based on each identification value within, and is referred to or referred to in the starting opening winning process. It is a value set so that the set data table and the area for storing the winning information can be identified.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a executes the corresponding processing based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of branch processing executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the main control side power off processing.

In step S130 processing, based on the value of the game progress state variable, as branch processing, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol changing process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), special Symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step S144) ), The winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), the winning combination operation gate valid waiting process (step S148), or the winning combination operation gate valid processing (step S150) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), the special symbol changes in the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the fact that the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. Performs processing such as starting display.

In the special symbol change processing (step S132), a process of controlling the change display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 is performed.

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), whether or not the special symbol that has started to fluctuate and has been fixedly stopped causes the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102. Is determined.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the fact is performed. conduct.

In the special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), when a jackpot game state is generated, a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 and notifying the fact is performed. conduct.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed.

In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the open state.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 2103 is performed by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the open state to the closed state.

In the winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

In the combination operation gate valid wait process (step S148) or the combination operation gate activation process (step S150), the upper gate (combination operation gate) is activated or the passage of the game ball of the upper gate is detected. ..

[9-6. Start-up opening prize processing]
Next, the processing at the time of winning the starting port will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the starting port winning process in the present embodiment. The start port winning process is executed in the processes of steps S116 (upper start port 2101) and S122 (lower start port 2102) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

In the start opening winning process, the starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 16 is created with the acceptance of the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102. At this time, the starting opening winning command may be set for each starting winning opening, or may be common regardless of the starting winning opening. The main control program stores the command created in this way in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

First, the main control program sets the start opening winning command creation data for creating the starting opening winning command as the command data (step S200), and executes the command buffer setting process (step S202). As a result, a command at the time of winning the start opening is created and stored in the command buffer. The command at the time of winning the starting opening of this embodiment is common regardless of the starting winning opening.

Further, the main control program sets a start port winning control data table corresponding to the winning start port based on the start port 1 identification value or the start port 2 identification value selected before the start port winning process starts. (Step S204). The start port winning control data table stores data required for processing executed at the time of starting winning. Hereinafter, the control data table at the time of winning the starting port will be described.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a start port winning control data table according to the present embodiment. The starting port winning control data table defines a starting opening winning control data table 1 set when the upper starting opening 2101 wins and a starting opening winning control data table 2 set when the lower starting opening 2102 wins. .. Each table has the same structure as the command address table for the number of reserved balls for special symbols, the area for the number of reserved balls for special symbol operation, the reserved history special symbol identification value, and the offset value for referencing the reserved information storage area.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in the process of step S204, the head of the start port winning control data table corresponding to the winning start winning opening is based on the identification value set in the process of step S112 or step S118. Set the address as the control data address. As a result, the necessary data is stored at a predetermined position from the start address of the set start port winning control data table, so the data corresponding to the start port is processed in common by the upper start port and the lower start port. Can be obtained. Specifically, the main control program acquires the number of reserved balls stored in the area indicated by the operation reserved ball number address set in the start port winning control data table set in the process of step S204 (step S206). ). The operation hold ball number address corresponds to the operation hold ball number address (special symbol operation hold ball number area) in FIG. 22, and the content stored in the operation hold ball number address is acquired as the hold ball number.

Then, the main control program determines whether or not the acquired number of reserved balls is equal to or higher than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (step S208). If the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of step S208 is "yes"), this process ends.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S208 is "no"), the main control program adds 1 to the number of reserved balls (step S210). Further, the total number of special symbol operation hold (contents of the special symbol total operation hold number area), which is the sum of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, is added by 1 (step S212).

Further, the main control program specifies a storage location (special symbol hold storage area) of various random numbers such as a random number for determining a big hit extracted by a start winning prize. Here, the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol reservation storage area (source code) related to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. In addition, the line described as "special symbol 1" on the right side of each line in FIG. 23 is a special symbol holding storage area for the upper starting port 2101, and the line described as "special symbol 2" is provided. Is a special symbol hold storage area for the lower start port 2102. Further, in the case of "special symbol 1 random number storage N area for fluctuation pattern", "N" corresponds to the number of reservations. One corresponding random number value is stored in each area.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 23, first, the address (B_HIT_M1) of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 1 area is set as the reference address. Then, as an addition value, a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls (specifically, a value obtained by multiplying the number of reserved balls by the size of the storage area (_TMEM1_KO)) and the reserved storage area index value (offset value for reference to the reserved information storage area). ) Is added. The hold storage area index value is an offset value ("00H" if the value of the start port identification area is "00H" if the value of the start port 1 identification value is used, and an offset value ( _TMEM_ADD) is set. Finally, the calculated added value can be added to the reference address to calculate the storage location (transfer destination address) of the random number for jackpot determination. In this way, by using the index value, it is possible to specify an appropriate storage location by common processing even if the starting port is different. Further, by making the index value different depending on the timing of executing the common process, it is possible to store the data in different storage areas. For example, when the jackpot determination is performed at the time of pre-reading processing and at the start of fluctuation, it is possible to store the information required for the jackpot determination in different storage areas by setting different index values.

Here, returning to the description of the flowchart of FIG. 21, the main control program stores the big hit determination random number in the special symbol hold storage area (step S214). Specifically, the value stored in the big hit determination random number area (counter value of the big hit determination random number) is stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the number of reserved balls. In addition to the random numbers for big hit judgment, random numbers for big hit symbols, reach judgment random numbers, random numbers for fluctuation patterns (random numbers for fluctuation patterns 1, random numbers for fluctuation patterns 2, random numbers for fluctuation types), random numbers for special symbols, etc. Random numbers for determining the winning judgment or the fluctuation pattern are extracted at the start opening winning and stored in the corresponding storage area. For example, when the number of reserved balls in the special symbol 1 is 0, the designated storage location B_HIT_M1 is set as the start address, the jackpot judgment random number is B_HIT_M1, the reach judgment random number is T_RIT_M1, and the variation pattern random number 1 is set. The variation pattern random number 2 is stored in T_HP1_M1, the variation type random number is stored in T_HTP_M1, and the special symbol random number is stored in T_ZUG_M1.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the special symbol identification value for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the symbol variation in the new hold storage based on the total number of pending special symbol operations in the corresponding hold identification history area (special symbol hold identification). It is stored in the area) (step S216). The special symbol hold identification area is assigned a continuous area of 1 byte each from the special symbol hold identification area 1 to the special symbol hold identification area 8, and is 1 from the total number of special symbol hold operations based on the special symbol hold identification area 1. The address shifted by the subtracted value becomes the area corresponding to the new hold storage. The special identification value is included in the start winning control data table set in the process of step S204. The special symbol hold identification area is an area for storing the order in which the upper start port (special symbol 1) or the lower start port (special symbol 2) is won, and at the start of fluctuation, the value of the head area of the special symbol hold identification area is set. By discriminating, it is judged whether or not it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Finally, the main control program executes a memory look-ahead process for executing the special figure look-ahead effect (step S218). The special figure look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the lottery result of the special lottery in advance before starting the variable display of the special symbol. In the memory look-ahead process, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the information (winning information, symbol type, variation) for determining the special symbol look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number value. (Pattern number, etc.) is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At this time, the main control program may include in the command information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game, instead of the lottery result itself of the special lottery. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command. The details of the memory look-ahead process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

[9-7. Memory look-ahead processing]
Subsequently, the details of the memory look-ahead process (step S218) in the start opening winning process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the storage look-ahead processing in the present embodiment. In the memory look-ahead process, a process for executing a look-ahead that acquires the result of the special lottery in advance is performed. By transmitting a predetermined command (special symbol hold number designation command) to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the result of the special lottery acquired by the storage look-ahead process, the result is displayed before the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is possible to execute the suggested special figure look-ahead effect.

When the storage look-ahead process is started, the main control program first saves the address of the control data (control data table at the time of starting winning) (step S240). Further, a hold command with no look-ahead is set as a hold command (step S242).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern changes depending on the timing of the start winning and the timing when the fluctuation is actually started (step S244). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the start winning and the start of the fluctuation, and if the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different, the look-ahead is prohibited. For example, when the number of times the time saving state is maintained (the number of games) or the number of times the variable table is maintained (the number of games) is the upper limit of the number of holds (for example, when there is one special symbol and the upper limit of the number of holds is four). 4 times, when there are 2 special symbols, and when the total value of the maximum number of each hold is 8, 8 times, even if there are 2 special symbols, priority is given to one symbol and the variable display is started. In that case, pre-reading is prohibited if it is within the maximum number of pending numbers on the priority side. When the table for selecting the variation pattern changes (the result of step S244 is “yes”), the main control program executes the processes after step S282 without executing the process related to look-ahead.

On the other hand, when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern does not change (the result of step S244 is "no"), the main control program determines whether or not the look-ahead determination prohibition period is in effect (step S246).

Here, the determination of the look-ahead determination prohibition period will be described. Whether or not the read-ahead determination prohibition period is set is determined based on the advance notice permission determination data address table shown in FIG. Specifically, the notice permission judgment data address table corresponding to the winning start port (set value of the start port identification area) is set, and the notice permission judgment data according to the special symbol / electric accessory operation number and the time saving / medium flag is set. To get. If the acquired advance notice permission determination data is "00H" (_RENZOCK_OK), pre-reading is permitted, and if it is "01H" (_RENZOCK_NG), pre-reading is prohibited. The notice permission determination data is shown in FIG.

FIG. 25 shows an example of a table related to the advance notice permission determination data, (A) shows an example of the advance notice permission determination data address table, and (B) shows an example of the advance notice permission determination data. The notice permission determination data address table is defined as a determination table (RNEZO_CK1_W) corresponding to the special symbol 1 and a determination table (RNEZO_CK2_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2. Further, the advance notice permission determination data is defined as data (RENZO_CK1_B) based on the special symbol operation number (T_JOB_NO) and data (RENZO_CK2_B, RENZO_CK3_B) based on the time saving medium flag (JITAN_FG).

As the basic structure of the advance notice permission judgment data address table, the first byte is the number of times the table is referenced, the second byte is the reference source information (lower address of the reference RAM area), and the third and fourth bytes are look-ahead. It is a reference table address for determining the prohibition period. With the data of the 2nd to 4th bytes (3 bytes) as the basic unit, the data of this basic unit is set for the number of times of reference. In the present embodiment, the data for two times is set as the number of times to be referred to, but as a matter of course, the number of times of reference is not limited to two, and may be one time or three times or more. By adopting such a data structure, it is possible to correspond to any specification by modifying only the data value without modifying the program code.

For example, if the special symbol / electric accessory operation number is changing (HEND), the advance notice permission determination data becomes “00H” (_RENZOCK_OK), and pre-reading is permitted. The special symbol / electric accessory operation number is numerical data. For example, the HEND indicating that the special symbol is changing is 1, and the waiting for the change of the special symbol (IDOL) is 0 or the like. Further, if the game ball wins the upper start opening 2101 and the time saving state (time saving flag (JITAN_FG) is 1), the advance notice permission determination data 2 (RENZO_CK2_B) is selected as the reference table for the look-ahead prohibition period determination, and the time saving flag is set. The value corresponding to is determined. At this time, since the time saving flag is 1, _RENZOCK_NG (“01H” = corresponding to the look-ahead judgment prohibition period), which is the data in the second line of the advance notice permission judgment data 2, is selected, and the look-ahead is performed in the judgment process of step S246. Be regulated. The advance notice permission determination data 3 (RENZO_CK3_B) is a reference table for the look-ahead prohibition period corresponding to the special figure 2, and the data selection is the same as the advance notice permission determination data 2 (RENXO_CK2_B), so detailed explanation is omitted. do.

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are defined in separate determination tables, but if the contents are the same, a common table may be used, or each special symbol may be used. The content may be completely different.

In addition, regardless of the judgment result by the advance notice permission judgment data address table, when the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed, even if it is determined as the look-ahead judgment prohibition period in order to prevent the look-ahead effect from being executed twice. good.

Here, it returns to the explanation of the flowchart of the memory look-ahead process of FIG. In the case of the look-ahead determination prohibition period (the result of step S246 is “yes”), the main control program does not perform the look-ahead determination and executes the processes after step S282.

On the other hand, if the pre-reading determination prohibition period is not set (the result of step S246 is "no"), the main control program stores a special symbol hold storage area (random numbers for each hold number) corresponding to the winning start port and the number of hold balls. Holds the random number value stored in the area to be stored. The special symbol hold storage area corresponding to one special symbol hold storage area (7 bytes in this embodiment) is set. It is stored in (a general term for a random number buffer for symbols) (step S248). Then, the look-ahead determination and the determination at the start of fluctuation are performed based on the random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer. That is, at the time of pre-reading, the contents of the special symbol hold storage area stored corresponding to the number of holds are stored in the buffer, and at the start of fluctuation, the information of the first area of the special symbol hold storage area is stored in the buffer. Judgment can be made with a common reference destination at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation, and in either case, subsequent processing (processing such as jackpot judgment) can be shared and used.

The special symbol hold storage area is a random number storage N area for jackpot determination, a random number storage N area for reach determination, a random number 1 storage N area for variation patterns, and a random number 2 storage N area for variation patterns for the special symbol 1 and the hourly symbol 2. , Random storage N area for variable type and random number storage N area for special symbol (N is 1 to 4). Further, the special symbol hold storage buffer includes a random number buffer for jackpot determination, a random number buffer for reach determination, a random number 1 buffer for variation patterns, a random number 2 buffer for variation patterns, a random number buffer for variation types, and a random number buffer for special symbols.

In the process of step S248, for example, when the third hold storage of the special symbol 1 is stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer, the value of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 3 area is set to the jackpot determination random number buffer. Special symbol 1 Reach judgment random number storage 3 Area value is reach judgment random number buffer, Special symbol 1 Variable pattern random number 1 storage 3 Area value is variable pattern random number 1 buffer, Special symbol 1 Variable pattern random number 2 storage 3 Area value is stored in random number 2 buffer for variable pattern, special symbol 1 random number storage for variable type 3 area value is stored in random number buffer for variable type, special symbol 1 random number storage for special symbol 3 area value is stored in random number buffer for special symbol do.

Then, the main control program refers to each random number stored in the special symbol hold storage buffer set in the process of step S248, and executes a special symbol jackpot determination process for determining the result of the special lottery (step S250). .. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (big hit) of the special lottery (step S252). Details of the special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the jackpot flag buffer as the jackpot flag storage area (step S254). The jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF)) is an area for storing the jackpot flag and the like at the time of pre-reading determination. At the start of fluctuation, the jackpot determination result is stored in the jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area).

In addition to the special symbol winning flag buffer (T_HIT_FGBF), the buffer related to the look-ahead of the special lottery includes a jackpot symbol type buffer (BRZ_TPBF), a variable pattern buffer (T_HD_PTBF), a variable type type buffer (T_HD_TPBF), and a symbol type command buffer (T_HD_TPBF). TZTP_CMBF), a special symbol identification flag buffer (T_MOV_FGBF), and a special symbol operation pending ball count buffer (T_SID_CTBF).

As in the case of the special lottery, the ordinary lottery is also provided with a buffer for pre-reading the ordinary lottery. The buffer related to the pre-reading of the normal lottery includes a hit flag buffer (F_HIT_FGBF), a normal symbol type area buffer (F_FZ_TPBF), and a normal symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (F_SID_CTBF). By providing the buffer in this way, it is possible to standardize the processing at the time of pre-reading and at the time of the start of fluctuation, as in the case of the special lottery.

Further, the main control program sets the special symbol variation distribution information source address table 1 as the special symbol variation distribution information source address table that holds the information for selecting the variation pattern (step S256). After that, the variation pattern selection determination process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S258). The details of the fluctuation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the variation pattern value extracted in the variation pattern buffer (step S260), and further executes the variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S260). S262). The variation type type value is a parameter for specifying the variation type defined for each variation pattern. One or more variation types can be defined for one variation pattern. The variation type corresponds to, for example, the type of pseudo continuous variation when the variation pattern corresponding to the pseudo continuous variation is selected. When the variation type type value is selected, the main control program sets the selected variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S264).

After that, the main control program clears the values from the big hit determination random number buffer to the special symbol random number buffer (step S266). This is to prevent malfunction due to the remaining value when performing the jackpot determination.

Further, the main control program sets commands (symbol type look-ahead command, variation pattern look-ahead command, and variation type look-ahead command) indicating the look-ahead result in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). .. Further, the hold command reference value with read-ahead is set to the hold command reference value (step S280).

Then, the main control program restores the address of the control data (control data table at the time of starting winning) saved in the process of step S240 (step S282). Finally, based on the set hold command reference value, the hold ball number command is acquired (step S284), and the acquired hold ball number command (special symbol hold ball number designation command) is set in the command buffer (step S284). Step S286).

Here, the procedure for acquiring the hold ball number command (special symbol hold ball number designation command) will be further described. In the address of the control data restored in the process of step S282, the address of the starting port winning control data table corresponding to the winning opening (value of the starting opening identification area) in which the game ball has won is set. As described above, since the structure of the start port winning control data table is common regardless of the value of the start port identification area, it is possible to standardize the subsequent processing.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a table related to the special symbol reserved ball number command, (A) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number command address table, and (B) is an example of a special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation table. .. As shown in FIG. 22, the start opening winning control data table includes the address of the special symbol reserved ball number command address table (data set as the start address of each data table (T1_SCT_CM_W, T2_SCT_CM_W)). ), You can refer to the special symbol reserved ball number command address table from the address.

The main control program is a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command address table (T1_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the winning start port or a special symbol 2 reserved ball number command address table (T2_SCT_CM_W) corresponding to the special symbol 2. Based on the hold command reference value set in the process of step S242 or step S280, the address of the corresponding special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data is specified from the special symbol hold ball number command address table. As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data includes the hold command generation table when read-ahead is prohibited (upper row, T1_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B) and the hold command generation when read-ahead is permitted. A table and (lower row, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) are defined.

Then, the main control program creates a special symbol reserved ball number designation command based on the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data. The data structure of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data (T1_SCT_CM1_B, T1_SCT_CM2_B, T2_SCT_CM1_B, T2_SCT_CM2_B) is composed of 3 bytes of data. The first byte data is the lower address of the storage area (RAM) that refers to the number of holds, the second byte data is the default value of the value set as the command mode data, and the third byte data is the command status data value. Become. For example, when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 (T1_SID_CT) is 3 (when the number of reserved balls is 3) and the number of reserved balls for special symbol is pre-read, the special symbol 1 reserved number of balls specified command creation data 2 (T1_SCT_CM2_B) Created based on. Specifically, the status value is "62H", the mode value is "02H" (holding number 3-1) + "11H" (default value) = "13H", and the special symbol holding ball number specification command is "6213H". It becomes. Finally, set the created special symbol hold ball number specification command in the command buffer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), the second byte data (default value of the mode value) of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command creation data is "01H" when read-ahead is prohibited, and read-ahead is permitted. In the case, it is "11H". Therefore, the high-order bit of the mode value of the special symbol hold ball number designation command is "0" when the look-ahead is prohibited and "1" when the look-ahead is permitted even after the hold number is added. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the special symbol reserved ball number designation command can determine the presence or absence of pre-reading by referring to the mode value of the special symbol reserved ball number designation command. As a result, the peripheral control board 4140 waits until it receives the information (command) necessary for executing the special symbol look-ahead effect by receiving the special symbol reserved ball number designation command and referring to the mode value. You can decide whether or not. That is, if the high-order bit of the mode value of the special symbol hold ball number designation command is "0", it is possible to continue the process without receiving the read-ahead-related command. The order of the data configurations set in the special symbol hold ball number designation command creation data is not limited to the description order, and for example, the lower address of the storage area that refers to the hold number is set in the second byte. It suffices if they are set in a predetermined order. Further, the data is not limited to 3 bytes (3 information), and may be set for other information such as that accompanies the output of the hold number command as long as the data structure is predetermined.

[9-8. Special symbol jackpot judgment processing]
Subsequently, the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol jackpot determination process in the present embodiment. The special symbol jackpot determination process determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a jackpot based on the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted at the time of starting winning. This process is commonly used at the time of pre-reading the special lottery and at the time of starting the change of the special symbol (when the change display is confirmed).

The main control program first acquires a jackpot determination random number from the jackpot determination random number buffer (step 300). Subsequently, the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit value for performing the special lottery is acquired from the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit value data (lower limit value table for jackpot determination) based on the probability variation flag (step S302). In the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit data (lower limit table for jackpot determination), the special symbol jackpot determination lower limit is defined corresponding to the probability variation flag. The probability variation flag is information indicating whether the probability state is a normal probability (low probability) or a high probability, and is set to "00H" if the probability is low and "01H" if the probability is high. The value of the special symbol jackpot judgment lower limit value data is set according to the probability state, the lower limit value data is selected based on the probability change flag, and it is possible to make the lottery probability different by making the lower limit value data different. It has become.

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the jackpot determination random number acquired in the process of step S300 is smaller than the jackpot determination lower limit value acquired in the process of step S302 (step S304). When the big hit judgment random number is not smaller than the big hit judgment lower limit value (the result of step S304 is "no"), that is, when the big hit judgment random number is equal to or more than the big hit judgment lower limit value, the big hit judgment random number is the big hit judgment upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the value (step S306). In the present embodiment, the range in which the random number for jackpot determination is generated is from 0 to the upper limit value, and the range of the random number determined to be the jackpot is the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value for jackpot determination. ing. Therefore, normally, if the big hit judgment random number is equal to or higher than the big hit judgment lower limit value, it may be judged as a big hit, but due to the influence of noise or the like, a value exceeding the upper limit value is set for the big hit judgment random number. Even if it happens, it may be judged as a big hit. In this embodiment, in order to prevent such a malfunction, it is also compared with the upper limit value.

The main control program hits the jackpot flag when the jackpot determination random number is not larger than the jackpot determination upper limit value (the result of step S306 is "no"), that is, when the jackpot determination random number is equal to or less than the jackpot determination upper limit value. Winning is set (step S308). Specifically, a jackpot winning is set as a flag setting value, and the flag setting value is stored in the jackpot flag storage area. As described above, the jackpot flag storage area is a jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area) at the start of fluctuation, and a jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) at the time of pre-reading determination.

On the other hand, in the main control program, when the big hit judgment random number is smaller than the big hit judgment lower limit value (the result of step S304 is "yes"), or when the big hit judgment random number is larger than the big hit judgment upper limit value (step). The result of S306 is “yes”), and no winning (missing) is set in the jackpot flag (step S310). As a result, even when it is determined that it is larger than the upper limit value, a value that exceeds the upper limit value is set by setting a value that causes the jackpot flag to be off, as in the case where it is determined that it is smaller than the lower limit value. Even if it is set, it prevents it from being mistakenly determined as a big hit. As described above, when the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol jackpot determination process ends.

[9-9. Special symbol judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol determination process (step S252) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol determination process in the present embodiment. The special symbol determination process identifies a special symbol based on a random number for determining a jackpot symbol extracted at the time of winning a start.

The main control program first acquires the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag storage area (big hit flag area or jackpot flag buffer) (step S320). Then, it is determined whether or not the content of the jackpot flag is a jackpot winning (step S322). If the content of the jackpot flag is not a jackpot win (the result of step S322 is "no"), the special symbol number value is deviated and the symbol command value (0) is set (step S330). Further, the special symbol number value is set to the mode value of the symbol type command (step S332), and the special symbol determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the content of the jackpot flag is the jackpot winning (the result of step S322 is "yes"), the main control program uses the jackpot symbol random number to obtain the jackpot symbol number and the jackpot symbol type from the special symbol determination data address table. Obtain the number (step S324). Since a plurality of jackpot symbols are defined, the jackpot symbol number is acquired from the special symbol determination data address table based on the jackpot symbol random number. The jackpot symbol type number is a number that has a one-to-one correspondence with the jackpot type. For example, 16R probable big hit with a ball (01H), 16R non-probable big hit with a ball (02H), 16R no probable big hit (no time reduction: latent probability change, 03H), 16R no probable big hit (with a short time: sudden) , 04H), small hit (05H), etc. Further, the jackpot symbol number is a value provided for a plurality of symbol type numbers. For example, 01H to 10H for a probabilistic jackpot with a 16R ball, 11H to 26H for a non-probable jackpot with a 16R ball, 27H to 3FH for a probabilistic jackpot without a 16R ball (no time reduction: latent probability variation), 16R. 40H to 55H are provided for probabilistic big hits without ball ejection (with time reduction: sudden probability), and 56H to 5FH are provided for small hits. In this way, a plurality of jackpot symbol numbers provided for the same jackpot type are displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 based on the jackpot symbol number. This is to make it difficult for the player to see the special symbol (this special symbol). On the other hand, since there is only one type of missing symbol, a predetermined value (missing symbol command value (0)) is set for the missing symbol number instead of being selected from the table.

Further, the main control program sets a symbol type command for notifying the peripheral control board 4140 of the jackpot symbol based on the jackpot symbol type number (step S326). Finally, the special symbol number value is set based on the jackpot symbol number (step S328), and the special symbol determination process is completed.

[9-10. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S258) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. 29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process in the present embodiment. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol. Note that this process is executed at the start of fluctuation as well as at the time of look-ahead, and the same fluctuation pattern table is referred to at the time of look-ahead and at the start of fluctuation.

The main control program first acquires the variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), a miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table) of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 according to the game state. It is a data table in which table information for referring to the reach probability (special symbol reach probability table) and the variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the special symbol identification value and stores it in the variation pattern selection value variation special identification area (step S342). Furthermore, the area corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the variable information source table is specified based on the special symbol identification value and the number of data for one block of the variable distribution information source table for each special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2). Step S344). Subsequently, the winning judgment value for deriving the result of the special lottery (the value of the winning result stored in the special symbol winning flag buffer at the time of pre-reading or in the special symbol winning flag area at the start of fluctuation (for example, 00H). : Off, 01H: Big hit, 02H: Small hit) is acquired (step S346).

The main control program determines whether or not the jackpot or small hit has been won by determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value or the small hit value (step S350). If a big hit or a small hit is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot variation selection information type table is searched from the hit variation selection information status table based on the status flag (step S352). At this time, the address of the searched jackpot variation selection information type table is saved. The jackpot variation selection information type table is a variation group at a stage before determining a jackpot variation pattern, and is a variation pattern that is finally determined, for example, SP1 system reach, SP2 system reach, and the like. It is a table for selecting a group (a group group). Depending on whether the result of the special lottery is a small hit or a big hit, the selection of the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value set for the big hit symbol type, and the big hit symbol type number is big hit and small. Since different values are set for the hit, it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern by the common processing for the big hit and the small hit.

Next, the main control program acquires the jackpot symbol type (value stored in the jackpot symbol type buffer at the time of pre-reading or in the jackpot symbol type area at the start of fluctuation) (step S354). The set jackpot symbol type is used in the fluctuation information number search process in step S358.

Subsequently, the main control program selects the symbol type setting data selection table for the variation pattern distribution according to the value of the variation special figure identification area at the time of variation pattern selection. (Step S356). The fluctuation pattern distribution symbol type setting data selection table is for determining the type for determining the hit fluctuation pattern selection value data table from the jackpot fluctuation selection information type table based on the (hit) symbol type value. It is a table of.

Next, the main control program executes the variation information number search process using the jackpot symbol type acquired in the process of step S354 as a comparison value, thereby executing the variation information number (the hit-time variation pattern selection value from the jackpot variation selection information type table). (Type value for determining the data table) is acquired (step S358). Further, the saved jackpot variation selection information type table is set as search data (step S360). Further, by the process of step S358, the variation information number which is the result of the variation information number search process is set as the selection value (step S362).

On the other hand, if the main control program has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control program sets a special symbol reach probability table as search data (step S364). Then, the special symbol reach probability data corresponding to the state flag is searched from the special symbol reach probability table (step S366). The state flag is set with numerical data corresponding to the game state, and in the present embodiment, 00H (low probability non-time saving (normal game) state), 01H (high probability time saving state), 02H. Either (low probability time saving state) or 03H (high probability non-time saving state) is set. This makes it possible to select the reach probability of the special symbol according to the game state. Further, a reach determination for determining whether or not to generate reach based on the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to the pre-reading or fluctuation of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2). Acquire the threshold value (step S368). Subsequently, the main control program sets the reach variation selection information status table as the search data (step S370).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not to generate reach in the variation display corresponding to the start winning (step S372). Specifically, the reach determination random number is acquired from the reach determination random number buffer and compared with the reach determination threshold value acquired in the process of step S368. Reach is generated when the reach judgment threshold value is larger than the reach judgment random number.

When the main control program does not generate reach in the variation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control program sets the deviation variation selection information status table as the search data (step S374). Further, the out-of-order variation selection information holding table corresponding to the state flag is searched from the out-of-order variation selection information state table (step S376), and the searched out-of-range variation selection information holding table is set as search data (step S378). Further, the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls corresponding to whether the look-ahead or fluctuation is the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is set in the selected value (step 380).

The process from step S374 to step S380 is a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern in the case of an outlier in which reach does not occur. Normally, in the case of deviation, it is necessary to change the fluctuation pattern according to the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is large, the fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time may be selected as compared with the case where the number of holds is small. A variation pattern table set to be high is selected.

On the other hand, when the main control program causes a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "yes"), the main control program sets a state flag as a selection value (step 382). When the reach is generated, the length of the fluctuation time is not determined by the number of holdings, but the fluctuation time may be changed by the number of holdings as in the case of normal deviation. Specifically, even with the same reach fluctuation, when the number of holds is large, a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, a high-speed fluctuation time immediately after the start of fluctuation) may be adjusted as compared with the case where the number of holds is small. In this case, since the fluctuation time is different, different fluctuation pattern commands are set.

When the processing of step S362, step S380, or step S382 is completed, the main control program selects the variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the selection value from the search data set at this time (step S384). Specifically, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit (step S362), the big hit variation selection information type table is set as the search data, and the variation which is the search result of the variation information number search process in step S358 as the selection value. The symbol type value for pattern distribution is set. If the result of the special lottery is different and reach occurs (step S382), the reach variation selection information status table is set as the search data, and the status flag is set as the selection value. Further, when the result of the special lottery is out of order and no reach occurs (step S380), the out-of-order variation selection information holding table is set as the search data, and the number of held balls is set as the selection value.

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern (step S386) and executes the fluctuation information number search process (step S388). The variation pattern selection data selection value is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table by the variation information number search process. Further, the main control program acquires the variation pattern selection value data table corresponding to the variation pattern selection data selection value from the variation pattern selection data address table (step S390).

Subsequently, the main control program acquires the random number 2 for the variation pattern (step S392), and based on the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of the random number 2 for the variation pattern and step S390, the variation information number search process. Is executed (step S394). After that, a variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

The variation pattern selection data table is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data, with the variation pattern random number 2 lower limit value and the variation pattern setting value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the random number 2 for the variation pattern and the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection data table are compared, and the variation pattern is larger than the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the variation pattern. When it is determined that the value of the random number 2 is larger, the fluctuation pattern setting value corresponding to the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is selected. If the value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is smaller than the lower limit of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern, the value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern is higher than the lower limit of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern set next. It is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit value of the random number 2 for the fluctuation pattern until it is determined to be large.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (step S386) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern. Since each random number for each fluctuation pattern at present is composed of 1 byte, the result of determination with 2 random numbers is the same as the result of determination with a total of 2 bytes of random numbers. When selecting a variation pattern with one variation pattern random number, the variation pattern random number may be composed of 2 bytes.

[9-11. Fluctuation type judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation type determination process (step S262) in the memory look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation type determination process in the present embodiment. As described above, the variation type determination process is a process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol.

The main control program first searches the variation type determination data table for the variation type determination data corresponding to the state flag (step S400). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern set value is restored and set as a comparison value (step S402), and the fluctuation information number search process is executed (step S404).

Different variation type determination data are set in the variation type determination data table according to the gaming state, and the variation type determination data corresponding to the gaming state is selected by the process of step S400. Further, the fluctuation type determination data is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value and the fluctuation type selection data selection value as one set of data. Then, by executing the fluctuation information number search process, the fluctuation pattern selection value is compared with the fluctuation pattern lower limit value set in the fluctuation type determination data, and the fluctuation pattern selection value is larger than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value. When it is determined, the fluctuation type selection data selection value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is selected. If the fluctuation pattern selection value is smaller than the fluctuation pattern lower limit value, the fluctuation pattern selection value is compared with the next set fluctuation pattern lower limit value, and the fluctuation pattern lower limit value is changed until it is determined that the fluctuation pattern selection value is larger. It is executed repeatedly while. Before executing the variation type determination process, the variation information source address table is set in advance as an input parameter, and the variation type is set based on the variation type determination data table set in this variation information source address table. It is judged.

Next, the main control program searches the variation type selection data (address) corresponding to the variation type selection data selection value acquired by the variation information number search process in step S404 from the variation type determination data address table (step S406). ).

Subsequently, the main control program sets a random number for the variation type as a comparison value (step S408), and executes the variation information number search process (step S410). At this time, the variation type selection data acquired in the process of step S406 is set as the search data, and the variation type setting value is acquired by the variation information number search process.

The variation type selection data is composed of one or a plurality of sets of data with the variation type random number lower limit value and the variation type setting value as one set of data. By executing the variation information number search process, the random number for the variation type is compared with the lower limit of the random number for the variation type set in the variation type selection data, and the random number for the variation type is larger than the lower limit of the random number for the variation type. When is determined to be large, the variation type setting value corresponding to the random number lower limit value for the variation type is selected. If the value of the random number for the variable type is smaller than the lower limit of the random number for the variable type, it is determined that the value of the random number for the variable type is larger than the lower limit of the random number for the variable type set next. It is repeatedly executed while changing the lower limit of the random number for the variable type.

[9-12. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process in the present embodiment. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control program first determines whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hold identification value (value in the special symbol hold identification 1 area) corresponding to the variable display to be executed next time is not 0 from the value stored at the beginning of the special symbol hold identification area. .. When the loaded value is 0, that is, when the variable display of the special symbol is not held (the result of step S420 is "no"), the main control program does not start the variable display of the special symbol. End the process.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control program executes a process for starting the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, first, since the variation display when the game ball enters the lower start opening 2102 (special symbol 2) is executed with priority, the special symbol 2 is set in the start opening identification value (step S422). ), The special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data (step S424). In other words, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set in the variation setting data. Further, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is acquired from the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number area (step S426).

Then, the main control program determines whether or not the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 2 is not 0 (1 or more) (step S428). Special symbol 2 When the number of reserved balls is 0 (the result of step S428 is "no"), the special symbol 1 is set in the starting port identification value (step S430), and the special symbol 1 variation setting data is set as the variation setting data. Set (step S432).

The variation setting data is composed of a RAM or a data table address that is referred to for executing the variation start processing in the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2, and the reference destination is a different value between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2. Can be set, and the data structure (the number of set data) is common. As a result, it is possible to execute a common fluctuation start process for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

The variation setting data of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 in the present embodiment is composed of 13 bytes, and is specifically as follows. The 1st byte is the lower byte of the operation hold ball number address, the 2nd and 3rd bytes are the hold ball number specification command creation data address, the 4th and 5th bytes are the hold storage area transfer source address at the time of transfer, and the 6th and 7th bytes are hold. Storage area transfer destination address, 8th and 9th bytes are reserved 4 Storage area transfer source address, 10th and 11th bytes are reserved 4 Storage area transfer destination address, 12th and 13th bytes are changing setting data The address.

When the variation setting data is set, the main control program stores the start port identification value in the special symbol identification flag area (step S434). Subsequently, in order to start the variation of the special symbol, the number of operation hold balls corresponding to the starting port identification value and the total number of special symbol operation hold stored in the special symbol total operation hold number area are subtracted by 1 (step S436).

Next, the main control program sets a command for specifying the number of reserved balls as command data (step S438) and sets it in the command buffer (step S440). After that, the reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the timer interrupt process on the main control side. The command creation table (FIG. 26 (A)) for creating the reserved ball number designation command is the same as that at the time of pre-reading, and the program capacity is saved by using the same table at the time of pre-reading and at the start of fluctuation. There is.

Subsequently, the main control program executes the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a jackpot acquired at the time of winning the starting opening. Details of the special symbol / flag setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the main control program sequentially shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area (FIG. 23) (step S446). In the special symbol hold storage area, hold storage (starting memory) including various random numbers such as a random number for jackpot determination extracted by the starting winning is stored for each starting opening for each winning start. Clears the hold memory where the change starts when the change of the special symbol based on the hold memory starts, and shifts the remaining hold memory. For example, when the maximum number of holdings is 4, the holding storage stored in the special symbol holding storage 2 area is shifted to the special symbol holding storage 1 area, and similarly to the special symbol holding storage 3 area and the special symbol holding storage 4 area. The stored hold memory is shifted to the special symbol hold memory 2 area and the special symbol hold memory 3 area. After that, the special symbol hold storage 4 area is cleared (step S448). In the shift processing of the special symbol hold storage area, the value set in the variable setting data and set in the transfer source address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area is stored in the transfer destination address at the time of transfer of the hold storage area, and at the time of transfer of the hold storage area. Transfer source address and hold storage area During transfer The transfer destination address is updated to the next address, and the data stored in each hold storage area is sequentially shifted.

Next, the main control program sets the changing data setting address set in the fluctuation setting data as the setting data address, and provides the information necessary to execute the special symbol changing processing executed in the next interrupt processing. Set to a predetermined storage area (step S450).

Further, the main control program creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, first, as a command value, the upper byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set. For example, if the special symbol identification flag is special symbol 2, the upper byte of the special figure 2 variation pattern reference command is set, and if it is special symbol 1, the upper byte of the special figure 1 variation pattern reference command is set (steps S452 to 2). S456).

Further, the main control program acquires the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area as lower-level command data (step S458). Further, the variation type type value is acquired from the variation type type area (step S460), and the variation type type value is added to the command value set in the process of step S452 or step S456 to obtain the variation pattern command according to the variation type. The high-order byte of is calculated (step S462). A variation pattern command is created by the processing of steps S450 to S462, and a command storage process for storing the created command data in a predetermined area is executed (step S464).

Subsequently, the main control program sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Specifically, if the special symbol identification flag is special symbol 1, the special stop symbol 1 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set in the command buffer, and if it is special symbol 2, the special stop symbol 2 designation command shown in FIG. 15 is set. Set (steps S466 to S472).

Next, the main control program sets a variable state specification command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the command buffer (steps S474 and S476). Since each generated command is sent in the order in which it was generated (the order in which it was stored in the command buffer), the order in which the commands are generated (the order in which they are stored in the command buffer) is changed when the transmission order is changed. do it. For example, when it is desired to transmit the symbol type command before the variation pattern command, the processes from step S466 to step S472 may be executed prior to the processes from step S458 to step S464.

Next, the main control program clears the special symbol hold history corresponding to the hold memory in which the variable display is executed, and shifts the special symbol hold history (step S478). In the present embodiment, an area for storing the special symbol hold history for eight pieces (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, four pieces each) is allocated, and the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started. Then, the special symbol hold history corresponding to the subsequent variable display is sequentially shifted. Specifically, the special symbol hold history stored in the second area (special symbol hold history identification 2 area) is moved to the beginning. Since each special symbol hold history identification area is assigned to a continuous area, the area in which seven special symbol hold history is stored may be shifted. Finally, the last area (special symbol hold history identification 8 area) of the special symbol hold history identification area is cleared (step S480), and the special symbol change waiting process is terminated.

[9-13. Special symbol / flag setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol / flag setting process (step S442) in the special symbol change waiting process will be described. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the variation display result of the special symbol is set at the start of the variation. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol / flag setting process in the present embodiment.

First, the main control program stores a random number (random number for determining a special symbol jackpot) for determining a jackpot in a special lottery in a random number buffer for determining a jackpot (random number storage area for fluctuation) (steps S500 to S506). Specifically, a special symbol that starts variable display is specified based on the special symbol identification flag, and the corresponding special symbol jackpot determination random number storage 1 area (special symbol 1 jackpot determination random number storage 1 area or special symbol 2). A special symbol big hit judgment random number stored in the big hit judgment random number storage 1 area) is set. Then, the set special symbol jackpot determination random number is stored (transferred) in the jackpot determination random number buffer (variable random number storage area).

That is, the special symbol hold storage area that is the target of the fluctuation start is specified, and the stored random number value is stored in the corresponding area of the special symbol hold storage buffer. Special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) In addition to the special symbol jackpot judgment random number stored in the jackpot judgment random number storage 1 area, the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) reach determination random number storage 1 area is a random number value. In the reach judgment random number buffer, the random number value stored in the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern random number 1 storage 1 area is used in the variation pattern random number 1 buffer, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) variation pattern. Random number 2 storage The random number stored in the 1 area is used as the random number 2 buffer for the variable pattern, and the special symbol 1 (special symbol 2) is stored in the random number storage 1 area for the variable type. Symbol 1 (Special symbol 2) Random number storage for special symbol The random number value stored in the area 1 is stored in the random number buffer for special symbol.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the jackpot flag area as the jackpot flag storage area (special symbol winning flag area) (step S508). Further, a special symbol jackpot determination process for determining the result of the special lottery is executed based on the jackpot flag stored in the jackpot flag area (step S510). The special symbol / flag setting process is a process executed at the start of fluctuation, and the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed by setting the address value of the jackpot flag area (special symbol winning flag area). On the other hand, when the special symbol jackpot determination process is executed at the time of look-ahead (when executed in the process of step S250 of the memory look-ahead process), as described above, the jackpot flag buffer (special symbol winning flag buffer) is used as the jackpot flag. Is set. In this way, by pre-setting the area of the RAM to be referenced / stored before executing the special symbol jackpot determination process at the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation, the "special symbol jackpot determination processing" can be set at the time of pre-reading and at the time of fluctuation. It is possible to share it with. The procedure for the special symbol jackpot determination process is as described in FIG. 27.

Further, the main control program executes a special symbol determination process for determining the type (special symbol) of the result (big hit) of the special lottery (step S512). The special symbol determination process is common to the process of step S252 in the memory look-ahead process, and can be shared between the look-ahead time and the variable time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, and the processing contents will be described with reference to FIG. That's right. Then, the main control program sets the special symbol number value set in the special symbol determination process as the special symbol number setting value (step S514).

Next, the main control program searches the special stop symbol setting work area address table for the special symbol stop area (special symbol 1 stop area or special symbol 2 stop area) corresponding to the special symbol identification flag (step S516). Further, the special symbol number setting value is stored in the special symbol stop area searched by the process of step S516 (step S518).

Then, the main control program executes a special symbol conversion process for selecting a display pattern to be displayed on the special symbol display (7-segment or the like) (step S520). If the determined symbol number is set as it is as the display data of the special symbol display, the display pattern becomes constant, and there is a risk that the player can easily identify the type of hit in the manner displayed on the special symbol display. Therefore, the display pattern is acquired so that the display pattern does not become a constant display pattern by calculation. It is also possible to select a display pattern from the symbol number on a dedicated table so that the display pattern is not constant, but as the number of symbol types increases, it is necessary to retain the display pattern by that amount, and the display pattern The storage capacity for storing the data will increase. Therefore, by acquiring the display pattern by calculation, it is possible to suppress the increase in the storage capacity while preventing the player from identifying the display pattern.

Finally, the main control program adds 1 to the area corresponding to the special symbol stop area searched in the process of step S516 (the address of the searched special symbol stop area) by adding the symbol information value acquired by the special symbol conversion process. It is stored in (the area corresponding to the assigned address) (step S522), and the special symbol / flag setting process is completed.

[9-14. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process in the present embodiment.

First, the main control program stores the number of special symbol operation hold balls corresponding to the special symbol identification flag in the special symbol operation hold ball number buffer (steps S530 to S536). Specifically, based on the special symbol identification flag, the special symbol operation hold ball number area (special symbol 1 operation hold ball number area or special symbol 2 operation hold ball number area) corresponding to the special symbol that starts the variable display is set. The value of the special symbol operation reserved ball number area (the number of special symbol operation reserved balls) is set in the stored value (steps S530 to S534). Then, the set stored value is stored in the special symbol operation reserved ball number buffer (step S536).

Subsequently, the main control program sets the jackpot flag area in the jackpot flag storage area (step S538). Further, the special symbol variation distribution information source address table 1 is set as the special symbol variation distribution information source address table that holds the information for selecting the variation pattern (step S540). After that, the variation pattern selection determination process for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed (step S542). The variation pattern selection determination process is common to the process of step S258 in the memory look-ahead process, and can be shared between the look-ahead time and the variation time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, which will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. That's right. When the variation pattern selection determination process is completed, the main control program sets the extracted variation pattern value in the variation pattern area (step S544).

Next, the main control program searches the special symbol fluctuation time data for data (variation time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value (step S546). The fluctuation time value acquired at this time becomes the reference fluctuation time value, and the reference fluctuation time value is saved.

Further, the main control program executes a variation type determination process for acquiring the variation type type value (step S548), and sets the acquired variation type type value in the variation type type buffer (step S550). The variation type determination process is common to the process of step S262 in the memory look-ahead process, and can be shared between the look-ahead time and the variation time as in the special symbol jackpot determination process, as described with reference to FIG. ..

Subsequently, the main control program searches the fluctuation time addition value data for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo stations. Then, the main control program adds the addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546 to acquire the final fluctuation time (step S554). Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[9-15. Ordinary design and ordinary electric accessory control processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process in the present embodiment. The ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processes are executed in the process of step S88 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

When the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process is started, the main control program first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate portion (normal figure gate) 2350 (step S800). When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the presence / absence of the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is read by the switch input process in step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 19, and the input information of the main control built-in RAM is stored. Input information is written to the area. The main control program refers to the written input information and determines the passage of the game ball.

When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 (the result of step S800 is “yes”), the main control program executes the gate passage processing (step S802). In the gate passage processing, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted and stored as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The details of the processing at the time of passing through the gate will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

The main control program is a normal symbol / normal electric accessory when the game ball has not passed through the gate portion 2350 (the result of step S800 is "no") or when the processing at the time of passing through the gate is completed. The process corresponding to the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number is searched from the operation call table (step S804), and the searched process is executed (step S810).

In step S810 processing, based on the normal symbol / electric accessory operation number, the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), the normal symbol changing process (step S814), the normal symbol jackpot determination process (step S816), and the normal symbol loss. The stop process (step S818), the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), the normal electric accessory open / close process (step S822), or the normal electric operation end interval process (step S824) is executed.

In the normal symbol change waiting process (step S812), a process of starting the change display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350.

In the normal symbol change processing (step S814), a process of controlling the change display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed.

In the normal symbol hit determination process (step S816), the winning determination of the normal lottery is performed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2350.

In the normal symbol loss stop process (step S818), when the normal lottery is not won, a process of stopping the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 and notifying the fact is performed.

In the normal symbol hit stop process (step S820), when the normal lottery is won, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped to notify the fact, or a pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory). Processes such as setting the opening / closing mode of 2106 are performed.

In the normal electric accessory opening / closing process (step S822), a pair of movable pieces (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 are opened or closed so that the game ball can be accepted by the lower starting port 2102, and the lower starting is started. Performs processing related to operations such as preventing the game ball from being accepted by the mouth 2102.

In the normal electric operation end interval process (step S824), it is determined whether or not the operation of the movable piece (ordinary electric accessory) 2106 is completed, and when it is completed, a process for notifying the fact is performed.

[9-16. Processing when passing through the gate]
Subsequently, the details of the gate passage processing (step S802) in the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control processing will be described. In the gate passage processing, a command to be transmitted when the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2350 is detected is set, a random number for ordinary lottery is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a look-ahead effect is executed. Perform processing to do so.

In the gate passage processing, as described above, the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2350 is detected, the value of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and the gate of the main control built-in RAM is used as the gate information. Store in the information storage area.

The gate information storage area is provided with the 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Hereinafter, the procedure of the gate passage processing will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 37.

When the process at the time of passing through the gate is started, the main control program first acquires the value of the normal symbol operation hold ball number area as the operation hold ball number (step S830). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls is 4 or more, which is the upper limit value (step S832). If the number of balls on hold is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of step S832 is “yes”), the process at the time of passing through the gate is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of operation-holding balls is less than the upper limit value (the result of step S832 is "no"), the main control program stores the number of operation-holding balls in the normal symbol operation-holding ball number buffer (step S834). Further, 1 is added to the contents of the normal symbol operation reserved ball number area, and the normal symbol operation reserved ball number is updated (step S836).

Subsequently, the main control program stores the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number in a predetermined area of the normal symbol random number storage area corresponding to the reserved number (step S838). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol random number storage area is divided into sections 0 to 3 in predetermined units, and each section is a storage area corresponding to the number of reserved symbols. Each time the gate is passed, a hit determination random number for determining the winning of the ordinary symbol and a winning symbol random number for determining the winning symbol of the ordinary symbol are stored in the normal symbol random number storage area. Since the hit determination random number and the hit symbol random number are each composed of 1 byte, the predetermined unit is 2. The random numbers stored for ordinary symbols are not limited to the random numbers. For example, when a reach determination random number for an ordinary symbol or a random number for a variable pattern is provided as in a special symbol, these are gated. It can be configured to be stored for each passage.

Finally, the main control program executes the normal symbol look-ahead process based on the reserved storage of the newly stored normal symbol (step S840). The details of the normal symbol look-ahead processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

[9-17. Normal symbol look-ahead processing]
Subsequently, the details of the normal symbol look-ahead process (step S848) in the process at the time of passing through the gate will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol look-ahead processing in the present embodiment. In the normal symbol look-ahead processing, various random numbers are acquired before starting the variable display of the normal symbol based on the newly stored normal symbol hold storage, and the normal symbol look-ahead effect is performed on the peripheral control board based on the acquired random number values. Information for determining (ordinary symbol type look-ahead effect command shown in FIG. 16) is generated, and processing such as transmitting a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the normal symbol type pre-reading command, it determines whether or not the normal symbol pre-reading effect can be executed, and performs processing according to the determination result.

When the normal symbol look-ahead process is started, the main control program temporarily sets the look-ahead determination value to prohibit look-ahead (step S850). Further, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination prohibition period is set when the process is executed (step S852).

Here, the period during which the look-ahead determination is prohibited will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a period during which the look-ahead determination is prohibited. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading determination of the ordinary lottery is prohibited depending on the operating (opening) state of the movable piece 2106 (ordinary electric accessory).

As shown in FIG. 39, the operating state of the ordinary electric accessory is determined by the gaming state and the mode of the special look-ahead effect. Further, the gaming state includes a probability state corresponding to the winning probability of the special lottery, and a time saving state corresponding to the fluctuation time in the normal lottery, the winning probability, and the operation mode of the normal electric accessory. The probability state includes a low probability state (normal state) and a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability of winning the special figure lottery is higher than that of the low probability state. Further, the time saving state includes a non-time saving state and a time saving state which is more advantageous for the player than the non-time saving state. In the time-saving state of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the general drawing lottery is high, and the operating time of the normal electric accessory (game at the lower start port 2102). It is configured so that the time during which the ball can enter) becomes longer.

Further, in the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory of the present embodiment, in addition to the opening mode in the time saving state, a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower starting port 2102 and a short opening that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower starting port 2102 are sufficient. There are two types of long-open operation modes that allow the ball to enter the ball. Further, the opening modes of the short opening and the long opening may be different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. The short opening in the non-time saving state is an opening mode in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the starting port, but in the time saving state, it may be an opening mode in which the ball is easily entered into the starting port as in the long opening. Further, the long opening may be an opening mode in which the non-time saving state and the time saving state are different, and the ratio of winning to the starting port is further increased in the time saving state as compared with the non-time saving state. In the case of the short opening, it is difficult for the player to aim and let the game ball enter the lower starting port 2102, so that the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed only in the case of the long opening.

On the other hand, the look-ahead effect may be executed even in the case of short opening. For example, by executing the same look-ahead effect for the long open and the short open, it becomes difficult for the player to understand whether the long open or the short open, and the expectation due to the look-ahead effect can be further amplified. In addition, by making the mode of the look-ahead effect different or only partly different between the short opening and the long opening, the player can identify which opening pattern will be used, and the firing operation corresponding to the opening pattern can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Further, as for the look-ahead effect, a gaze effect may be provided regardless of whether it is long or short. Gase production is to notify the player that the pre-reading production is executed, but the production does not succeed (fails) in the end, and as a result, the normal electric accessory is not released. You may. As a result, the play-ahead effect is disappointing for the player, but if the play-ahead effect is not provided, the opening operation is always performed when the look-ahead effect is performed. The purpose is to further amplify the sense of expectation. Further, a look-ahead effect as a definite effect may be provided so that either short open or long open is always executed in the look-ahead effect. By adopting a mode different from the normal look-ahead effect for the final effect, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the player.

In addition, in the case of a short time state, the probability of winning the regular drawing lottery is high, and since the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is long, the profit of notifying the long opening is scarce for the player, so the regular drawing look-ahead effect is executed. You may not do it.

Further, when the special figure look-ahead effect is executed, the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect may be restricted. In the present embodiment, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the mode of the hold display is executed, it is permitted to execute the normal figure look-ahead effect in parallel. On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect that changes the background display is executed, the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect is permitted if the probability state is low, and the normal figure look-ahead effect is executed if the probability state is high. It regulates the execution of. This is because there is a high expectation that the special lottery will be won in the special figure look-ahead effect in the high probability state, so that the effect of the normal figure look-ahead effect may be reduced. However, by executing the normal figure look-ahead effect, the player can be encouraged to continue firing the game ball without stopping the launch of the game ball while the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed. You may want to do it. Further, the execution of the normal map look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the game state. For example, in the case of the big hit game state, the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect may be restricted.

Here, the explanation returns to the explanation of the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the read-ahead determination prohibition period is set (the result of step S852 is "yes"), the main control program executes the processes after step S868. On the other hand, when the read-ahead determination prohibition period has not been reached (the result of step S852 is "no"), in order to execute the look-ahead determination, the contents of the hit determination random number storage area to be read ahead are stored in the hit determination random number buffer. It is stored in (step S854). Specifically, first, the random number value stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area in any of the compartments 0 to 3 corresponding to the number of reserved balls is stored in the ordinary symbol random number buffer. The random number buffer for ordinary symbols is configured corresponding to the random number value stored in the ordinary symbol random number storage area when passing through the gate. In the present embodiment, an area for 2 bytes of a hit determination random number and a hit symbol random number is secured, and is composed of a hit determination random number buffer and a hit symbol random number buffer. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the hit judgment random number and the hit symbol random number stored in the section 1 of the normal symbol random number storage area are used in the hit judgment random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, respectively. It is stored. In this way, the random number value related to the lottery is stored in the random number buffer for hit judgment, and the "normal symbol hit judgment process" is executed for the random number value stored in the random number buffer for hit judgment. It is possible to perform the determination and the hit determination at the start of fluctuation by a common process.

Subsequently, the main control program sets the hit flag buffer as the hit flag storage area (step S856). By setting the address of the hit flag buffer as the reference address of the reference / setting destination and executing the "normal symbol hit judgment process", the hit result, the hit symbol, and the number of holds are the hit flag buffer and the normal symbol type area buffer, respectively. , Ordinary symbol operation reserved ball number buffer will be set / referenced. Further, the main control program executes a normal symbol hit determination process for determining a normal symbol hit (step S858). The details of the normal symbol hit determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. After that, the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer are cleared (step S860).

When the main control program clears the hit determination random number buffer and the hit symbol random number buffer, it sets the normal symbol type look-ahead command creation data as command data (step S862), and refers to the contents of the normal symbol type look-ahead command creation data. A look-ahead command for a normal symbol (corresponding to the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command in FIG. 16) is generated and set in the command buffer (step S864). Further, the read-ahead determination value is reset to read-ahead permission (step S866).

After the processing of step S866 is completed, or in the case of the read-ahead determination prohibition period (the result of step S852 is "yes"), the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol operation pending ball count command creation data 1 as command data. (Step S868). Further, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead determination value is read-ahead prohibition (step S870), and when the look-ahead judgment value is not read-ahead prohibition (the result of step S870 is "no"), that is, when the look-ahead judgment value is read-ahead permission. Is reset to the normal symbol operation hold ball number command creation data 2 as command data (step S872). As described above, different commands are created for the normal symbol operation hold ball number command when the look-ahead is permitted and when the look-ahead is prohibited. For example, different modes are set depending on whether the read-ahead is permitted or prohibited. Finally, the main control program generates a normal symbol operation pending ball count command when read-ahead is permitted or read-ahead is prohibited based on the command data set in the process of step S868 or step S872, and sets it in the command buffer (step S874). ).

[9-18. Normal symbol hit judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the normal symbol hit determination process (step S858) in the normal symbol look-ahead process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol hit determination process in the present embodiment. In the ordinary symbol hit determination process, a process of determining the result of the ordinary lottery is performed.

When the normal symbol hit determination process is started, the main control program first sets the value of the hit determination random number buffer as a comparison value (step S900). Further, the lower limit of the hit value and the like are selected from the normal symbol hit judgment lower limit value data table based on whether or not the game is in the time saving game state, and the normal symbol hit judgment lower limit value data is set (step S902). In addition, since the normal symbol has a high probability during the time reduction and the number of hit values during the time reduction is larger than the number of hit values during the non-time reduction, the value of the lower limit etc. is smaller during the time reduction. (The total number of winning values increases). Further, the main control program temporarily sets the normal symbol winning determination value as the default value of no normal symbol winning (step S904).

Subsequently, the main control program determines whether or not the comparison value set in the process of step S900 is smaller than the hit determination lower limit value set in the process of step S902 (step S906). If the comparison value is smaller than the lower limit of the hit judgment (the result of step S906 is "yes"), the normal symbol winning judgment value temporarily set in the hit flag storage area (normal) because the general drawing lottery was not won. (No symbol winning) is stored (step S922). Further, the normal symbol winning determination value is also stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S924). That is, at the time of outliers, the outliers "0" (no ordinary symbol winning) are set in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area, respectively.

On the other hand, when the comparison value is equal to or greater than the hit determination lower limit value (the result of step S906 is “no”), the main control program further determines whether or not the comparison value is larger than the hit determination upper limit value (step). S908). If the comparison value is larger than the hit judgment upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "yes"), it is judged that the comparison value is out of order as in the case of not winning the general drawing lottery, and the hit flag area and the normal symbol type area are displayed. Set each outlier value of "0". As in the case of the special figure, if the hit judgment random number is originally equal to or higher than the hit judgment lower limit value, it may be judged as a hit, but due to the influence of noise or the like, the upper limit value is set for the hit judgment random number. It is also compared with the upper limit value in order to deal with the malfunction that the exceeded value is set.

When the comparison value is equal to or less than the hit judgment upper limit value (the result of step S908 is "no"), the main control program determines that the normal symbol lottery has been won, and sets the normal symbol winning judgment value as the normal symbol winning ("" 1 ”) is set (step S910). Then, the normal symbol winning determination value (normal symbol winning) is stored in the hit flag storage area (step S912).

Subsequently, the main control program sets the normal symbol determination data 1 as the search data (step S914). Further, a random number for a winning symbol is set as a comparison value (step S916), and the variation information number search process is executed (step S918). The normal symbol determination data 1 is searched based on the value of the hit symbol random number buffer by the variation information number search process, the hit symbol type is determined, and the determined hit symbol type is stored in the normal symbol type storage area (step S920).

As described above, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the determination result is stored in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area. Then, by setting in advance different areas for the pre-reading time and the fluctuating time in the hit flag storage area and the normal symbol type storage area, it is possible to share the processing between the pre-reading time and the fluctuating time. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the hit flag area is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area is set in the normal symbol type storage area. On the other hand, at the time of pre-reading, the hit flag buffer is set in the hit flag storage area, and the normal symbol type area buffer is set in the normal symbol type storage area. With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to standardize the processing of the normal lottery at the time of pre-reading and at the time of the start of fluctuation, as in the case of the special lottery.

The main processes related to the special lottery and the ordinary lottery executed on the main control board 4100 have been described above. The program for executing the game control in the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of modules. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a module configuration of the main control program according to the present embodiment. FIG. 41 shows an excerpt of a part of modules of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process and the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process.

The control program in the gaming machine of the present embodiment is divided into modules for each function. General-purpose modules are commonly used in each process. For example, as shown in FIG. 41, the command buffer setting process executed when a command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 includes a start port winning process of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. Not only is it used in special symbol change waiting processing, but it is also configured to be used in ordinary symbol look-ahead processing of ordinary symbols and ordinary electric accessory control processing. With this configuration, it is possible to use common modules, buffers, etc. when creating commands regardless of the type of command, and it is possible to effectively use the resources of the gaming machine.

Further, a process of searching data (variation information number) from a predetermined table (variation information number search process) can also be commonly used. This is realized by standardizing the structure of the table to be searched and specifying the search range and search parameters. By standardizing and configuring modules in this way, it is possible to improve program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

Further, the command buffer setting process and the variation information number search process share modules with relatively few procedures, but in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when pre-reading the process such as the jackpot determination of the special symbol ( It is common at the start winning prize) and at the start of fluctuation.

More specifically, as described above, the special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27), the special symbol determination process (FIG. 28), and the special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (FIG. 28) at the time of look-ahead (memory look-ahead processing) and at the start of fluctuation (special symbol change waiting process). The variation pattern selection determination process (FIGS. 29 and 30) and the variation type determination process (FIG. 31) are commonly used. In these processes, it is configured to refer to the value stored in the specified address, and by specifying the reference address before executing the process, it is stored in different areas at the time of look-ahead and at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to execute the process based on the value. Moreover, not only the value but also the reference destination of the table may be specified. For example, if it is applied to a process of referencing a different table depending on the game state, it can be a common process regardless of the game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, even in the processing related to the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol hit determination process for determining the hit of the ordinary lottery is standardized. In the normal symbol hit judgment process, the hit flag indicating the result of the normal symbol lottery is acquired from the hit flag storage area and processed, but when executed from the normal symbol look-ahead judgment process, the address of the hit flag buffer is referred to. It is set as an address, but when it is normally executed from the symbol change waiting process, the address of the hit flag area is set as the reference address.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to standardize the modules having a relatively large amount of processing as described above, and improve the program development efficiency and maintenance efficiency.

[10. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 44 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150, a liquid crystal display, and a sound control unit 4160, and here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 42. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. 42. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, in the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a itself, the peripheral control MPU4150a initializes the built-in VRAM by having the sound source built-in VDP4160a write, for example, "0" to the storage area of the built-in VRAM.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and cold start is performed.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is also compared with the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. At the same time, the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (see FIG. 12). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c (see FIG. 13) to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e (see FIG. 12) so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. There is.

Further, in this peripheral control unit power-on processing, the power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function built into the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) operates as follows. That is, in this power-on contact sensitivity adjustment function, the touch panel module 246a itself adjusts the contact sensitivity on the contact surface of the touch panel 246 when the power supply is started by the power control unit (initial contact sensitivity adjusting means). ). Specifically, first, the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481 stores a contact determination threshold value as a capacitance when the contact surface of the touch panel 246 is in a non-contact state. The touch panel controller 481 sets the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a to a predetermined initial value of the contact determination threshold value (hereinafter, “initial contact”) when the power supply is started by the power supply control unit. It is also updated with the "judgment threshold").

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in a range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and presently. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU4150a to the peripheral control MPU4150a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. A state in which the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided is created and set by a lamp data creation process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and is stored in the start address of the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 is created on the 4150cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in 1 byte at a time, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, the rotation direction and pressing operation of the dial operation unit 401. The presence or absence of operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation unit 405 are reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP4160a displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the display data creation process described later from the channels CH1 and 2 on the liquid crystal display on the game board side. Output to the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal on the upper plate side. The output to the display device 244 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs. The speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to synchronization with the production by music, sound effects, etc. that match various productions from the speaker provided on the door frame 5.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers provided in the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. It is played back in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, the number of screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage is set to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are instructed. Among the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a from the first sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data to output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the effect control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) described later (command analysis means). ). That is, in the effect control program, the command received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols (0 to 4). Normal symbol memory command to identify, symbol synchronization effect start command to instruct the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, every time a game ball is accepted in the grand prize opening 2103 With the large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output to, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command, full tank error occurrence command) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it exists (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door frame open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13, and are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150 cc. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 15, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 16, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 16, various abnormalities occur. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing notification, are displayed around the peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c at 4150cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in the warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) are classified into the status display shown in FIG. For example, in the case of an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. By displaying a predetermined warning image (for example, "door is open!") Using 1900 (effect device), upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (effect device), and lamp (effect device), it is visually external to the outside. A warning is given, or a pair of side speakers (directing devices) is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 952 of the payout control board 4110 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100, which may affect the progress of the game, are suppressed.

Next, following the process of step S1024, the effect control program performs the RTC acquisition information update process (step S1025). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the calendar information storage unit set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RTC acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1025, the effect control program performs the effect control process (step S1026). In the effect control process, the effect control program instructs the execution of the process based on the progress state of the effect being executed. For example, when the demo screen is displayed while the variable display game is not executed, or when a command for the special figure synchronization effect is received, the progress of the special figure synchronization effect is controlled. In addition, a big hit game effect or the like is executed based on the result of the variable display game. Details of the effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027). In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, the effect control program sets at the start of execution of the special figure look-ahead effect. The details of the special figure look-ahead effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 70.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs the normal map look-ahead effect control process (step S1028). In the normal figure look-ahead effect control process, the effect control program controls the setting and progress of the normal figure look-ahead effect at the start of execution. The details of the normal figure look-ahead effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76.

Following step S1027, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the light emission data arranged in the time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the light emission indicated by the pointer. Peripheral control unit 4150 provides game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 based on the data. It is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Various controls of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control unit 4150 for the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided. It is extracted from the data copy area 4150ce, created, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In the display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, so that the effect control program is arranged in the peripheral control MPU4150a in chronological order as data constituting the screen generation schedule data. Of the screen data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts at least one character data from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and at least one extracted character data. Sprite data is created from the above, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is generated on the built-in VRAM (corresponding to a frame buffer).

By the way, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the player's interest is hard to be exhausted by displaying an image composed by superimposing a large number of material images on the background image in each frame according to the progress of the game. Although it is required to execute display control to include a larger number of material images in each frame in order to display a wider variety of images, including a large number of material images in each frame is displayed at first glance. It seems that control is a heavy burden.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of simplifying the display control of the frame containing a large number of material images and reducing the processing load, the effect control program is applied to each frame displayed based on the drawing data and to each frame. While managing the correspondence information in which the correspondence with a plurality of material images that can be represented is defined in advance, when trying to display a predetermined frame among the frames, the correspondence information is referred to and the predetermined frame is referred to. At least one predetermined material image to be included in the frame is specified, and the drawing data is included in the sound source built-in VDP4160a without including the above-mentioned predetermined material image and other material images excluding the predetermined material image. It is generated and stored in the built-in VRAM (frame buffer), and the predetermined frame based on the drawing data stored in the built-in VRAM is displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 (display means). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

First, in the present embodiment, of the large number of background image data used for displaying a large number of background images constituting each frame, at least a part of the background image data (hereinafter, also referred to as “specific background image data”) is At least one material image such as a sprite (hereinafter, also referred to as "specific sprite") on the background image based on the specific background image data is placed at a position where it should be originally arranged (hereinafter, referred to as "original arrangement position"). It is managed as follows so as to be represented by an invisible display mode (hereinafter referred to as "confidential state").

First, in the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control ROM 4150b stores the following correspondence relation table (correspondence relation information management means), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a, and the like are associated with this correspondence relation. Browse the table. In this correspondence association table, each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP4160a and at least one sprite that can be represented in each frame (or a predetermined number of frame group groups). Predefined correspondence information is managed together with a concealment release command (concealment release command) for releasing the visual concealment state of at least one sprite. In this correspondence association table, each sprite (or each background image) can be identified by using the sprite number, and the coordinates of each sprite in the display range of each frame are used as a part of the correspondence relation information. The value is managed.

In this correspondence association table, such correspondence information includes, for example, at least one material image such as a sprite that can be displayed in each frame displayed based on each drawing data generated by the sound source built-in VDP4160a. The correspondence with the concealment release command for releasing the visual concealment state of the at least one material image is defined in advance. In the following description, the at least one material image is referred to as a "desired sprite".

As described above, the peripheral control MPU4150a has a function of causing the sound source built-in VDP4160a to generate drawing data from sprite data based on the scheduler data (drawing management means). When the effect control program attempts to display a predetermined frame according to the result of a predetermined effect lottery executed when the start condition is satisfied, the effect control program controls the peripheral control MPU4150a to control the correspondence relationship of the association table. With reference to the information, a desired sprite to be included in the predetermined frame is specified (material image specifying means).

Further, the effect control program identifies the concealment release command corresponding to the desired sprite by referring to the correspondence information in the correspondence association table when the desired sprite should be represented in a predetermined frame according to the schedule data. The specified concealment release command is output to the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source (concealment release instruction means). This concealment release command includes a sprite number (hereinafter referred to as "desired sprite number") capable of identifying a desired sprite whose concealment state should be released in the predetermined frame. By outputting such a concealment release command, the display status flag of the name tag information, which was initially off, is updated to on. This name tag information and its display state flag are prepared for each sprite that can be displayed in each frame, and are referred to when the sound source built-in VDP4160a executes the drawing process.

Here, the effect control program operates the sound source built-in VDP4160a (drawing control means) as follows when trying to display a predetermined frame by controlling the peripheral control MPU4150a. That is, when the sound source built-in VDP4160a does not receive the concealment release command, the display mode keeps the desired sprites that can be included in the predetermined frame in the concealed state based on the correspondence information in the correspondence association table. The drawing data to be used is generated in the frame buffer. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame in the mode in which the desired sprite cannot be visually recognized on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side by controlling the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

On the other hand, when the sound source built-in VDP4160a receives the above-mentioned concealment release command, the sound source built-in VDP4160a receives the concealment release command, and the display status flag of the name tag information corresponding to the desired sprite number included in the concealment release command is updated to ON. As an opportunity, the desired sprite corresponding to the concealment release command is specified by referring to the correspondence relation information in the correspondence relation association table. Further, the sound source built-in VDP4160a generates drawing data in the frame buffer for releasing the concealment state of the specified desired sprite and setting the display mode so that the desired sprite can be visually recognized. Thereby, the effect control program can display the frame of the display mode in which the desired sprite can be visually recognized at the original arrangement position on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

In this way, the effect control program does not have to finely manage which sprite group can be represented in each frame when displaying the frame group of a certain scene due to the existence of the correspondence association table. On the other hand, it is desirable to have the sound source built-in VDP4160a draw a frame representing each desired sprite by controlling whether or not to output the concealment release command to the peripheral control MPU4150a, which is much simpler than the conventional display control. You can draw a frame that does not represent the sprite of. As a result, it is possible to simplify the display control of the frame including a large number of sprites and reduce the processing load.

Moreover, since the above-mentioned correspondence relationship association table is used to link the sprite group including the desired sprite and the effect control program (the concealment release command group issued by) to manage the correspondence relationship. , The sprite data creation work and the production control program design work can be completely separated from each other, and the design work related to display control can be simplified.

By the way, as described above, many detection devices that can be mounted on pachinko gaming machines generally have their sensitivity adjusted as an initial process when the power is turned on, and then operate at that sensitivity. Even if the contact sensitivity is adjusted in the initial process in this way, it is conceivable that the sensitivity will gradually become unsuitable at first glance depending on the subsequent gaming environment.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in this display data creation process, the effect control program further controls the peripheral control MPU4150a to connect the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 (second display means) to the touch panel 246 (contact type input means). A function that causes the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) to adjust the contact sensitivity of the contact surface of the touch panel 246 while outputting the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command) that executes a display operation in a mode that encourages contact with the operation surface. Outputs a threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) that enables (contact sensitivity adjustment means) and (command output means). That is, the effect control program is a screen (to the operation surface of the contact type input means) in which the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 is urged to touch the operation surface of the touch panel 246 as an effect command (effect execution command). A command for executing the display operation of (a mode for prompting contact) is written in the transmission information storage area, and then output to the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit 4160 (contact prompting command means). Next, when the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit 4160 receive the command, the effect control program (display control program by control) touches the operation surface of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) with a finger based on the command. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 244 displays a screen in which the user is urged to touch.

Next, following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program mainly detects the contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246 based on the contact detection signal as the detection signal received from the touch panel module 246a of the touch panel 246 under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a. (Contact state detection means). That is, this effect control program also has a function as a touch panel driver (contact state detecting means) for detecting a contact state on the operation surface of the touch panel 246. This effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the operation surface of the touch panel 246 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by this coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), and then. The operation information including this initial position is acquired. It should be noted that this effect control program may not only acquire such coordinate values but also acquire the range of the operation surface (hereinafter referred to as the contact range).

In this touch panel processing, in order to deal with the above-mentioned concerns, the effect control program is further controlled by the peripheral control MPU4150a, separately from the above-mentioned effect command (effect execution command), and then to the control register 481a of the touch panel controller 481. A threshold setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) for updating the stored contact determination threshold is written in the transmission information storage area at a predetermined timing, and then output to the touch panel module 246a (contact input control means) (sensitivity adjustment). Command means).

Specifically, the effect control program executes the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command (see FIG. 15) when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) elapses from the main control MPU4100a at the predetermined timing described above. ) Has passed since the last time (for example, 1 minute) has passed, or when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) has elapsed, the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command (figure). When a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last reception (see 15), the above-mentioned threshold setting command is written in the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a.

The effect control program controls the touch panel module 246a, and when the touch panel controller 481 receives a threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output from the peripheral control MPU4150a as an example outside the touch panel module 246a, the touch panel 246 is contacted. Adjust the contact sensitivity on the surface. That is, this effect control program receives a threshold value setting command from the peripheral control MPU4150a to the touch panel controller 481 of the touch panel module 246a, and based on this threshold value setting command, the contact determination stored in the control register 481a. By updating the threshold value, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is adjusted. Specifically, the touch panel controller 481 acquires a capacitance based on a detection signal output by the touch panel sensor 482 when receiving this threshold value setting command, and uses this capacitance as the contact surface of the touch panel 246. Is considered to be a new contact determination threshold value in the non-contact state, and the contact determination threshold value stored in the control register 481a is updated with the new contact determination threshold value.

Then, after that, the touch panel controller 481 compares the new contact determination threshold value updated in the control register 481a with the detected capacitance acquired each time the contact state is detected as described above. If it is determined that the detected capacitance is less than the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in a non-contact state, while if it is determined that this detected capacitance is greater than or equal to the contact determination threshold, it is determined that the contact surface is in a non-contact state. It is determined that the contact surface is in contact.

Similarly to the above, when the touch panel controller 481 determines that the contact surface is in the contact state, the touch panel controller 481 outputs the contact detection information including the detection coordinate values on the contact surface to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the contact detection information, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can grasp the contact position on the contact surface described above based on the detection coordinate values included in the received contact detection information.

As described above, the touch sensitivity of the touch panel 246 is increased at a desired timing when the touch panel controller 481 receives the threshold value setting command (sensitivity adjustment command) output by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140. Since the determined contact determination threshold value is updated, if the output timing of the threshold value setting command by the peripheral control MPU4150a is appropriately controlled, the contact sensitivity of the touch panel 246 (contact type input means) is adjusted at a desired timing. Becomes (calibration). Therefore, the effect control program removes the output timing that may affect the game by the player and causes the touch panel controller 481 to receive the threshold value setting command, so that the touch panel 246 is always used without affecting the game. The detection of the contact state can be set as an appropriate operation mode.

As described above, the timing at which the effect control program should output the threshold value setting command to the touch panel controller 481 under the control of the peripheral control MPU4150a is, for example, the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command output when the variation display of the special symbol ends. Alternatively, it is unlikely that a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has passed since receiving the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, and the player has stopped the game, so that the touch panel 246 is in contact with the operation surface. Timing can be illustrated. That is, such adjustment of the contact sensitivity is performed as much as possible during the variable display of the special symbol that may execute the effect using the touch panel 246, and is performed when the variable display is completed. There is.

In addition, as the timing at which the threshold value setting command should be output, the effect control program sends a command at the end of the normal symbol synchronization effect (see FIG. 15) transmitted from the main control MPU4100a when the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. It may be the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the receipt.

On the other hand, as described above, the touch panel 246 is a capacitance type and is provided on the upper plate 301 which can store a large number of game balls and easily generates static electricity, but it is necessary even after the power is turned on. Since the sensitivity is adjusted at a predetermined timing accordingly, it is erroneously detected that the capacitance has changed even if it is caused by such a change in the surrounding environment and is not operated by the player. It becomes difficult to do.

Following step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, the sound indicated by the pointer. The command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 is activated to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The LCD and the VDP4160a with built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed to be the sound source of the liquid crystal display and the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 can be used. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects played from the provided speaker are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (maximum in this embodiment). The notification sound set to (volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side can be produced as more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 into the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, reception command storage area 4150cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, included in the target Bank0 (1fr), And the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150 kb up to the contents stored in the terminal address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 4150cc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d becomes a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup management target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 13, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is set in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db as the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content stored in the bank0 (RAM). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150 dc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 4150db, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 4150db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM).

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 4150dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

The peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and interrupts 1 ms in step S1010. The timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. Once set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 can be accepted was input from the liquid crystal display and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing to be executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 18 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 42 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 42. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the V-blank signal is input and the next V-blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined by step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 42. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned processing failure this time peripheral control unit steady processing exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 42 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, in the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12, the effect control program controls the peripheral control MPU4150a, and as shown in FIG. 42, the 1ms timer interrupt execution number STN. Is less than 33 times (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42, in which the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the effect control program directly performs this routine. To finish. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 42. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, the effect control program performs motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the effect control program sets the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. While driving, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Here, the effect control program uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c is input. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 12 is based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The frame is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the motor on the board side of the decorative drive amplifier. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 4150 caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O ports for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c. Of the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, drive to motors and solenoids to move various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a signal is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripherals shown in FIG. The control RAM 4150c is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the dial operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150 kai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation presence / absence of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, the effect control program performs a drawing state acquisition process (S1110), subsequently performs a backup process (step S1112), and ends this routine. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c, every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is performed. Each time it is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. The effect information (1 ms) stored in the 4150 cah and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 cc. The control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 kb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 4150 cc. All the contents are copied in order from, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 42, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the effect.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 244 on the upper plate side, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received, the periphery 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU4150a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main frequency serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main frequency serial data, and the third byte of the main frequency serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 4150 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 13, and the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This reception command storage area 4150cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU4150a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216 and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[10-5. Fluctuation pattern]
Subsequently, the production in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table in the present embodiment. The variation pattern table is a table that manages the pattern (variation pattern) of the special symbol synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. The special figure synchronization effect includes an effect such that the peripheral control board 4140 causes the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side to display a decorative pattern in a variable manner or a character is displayed in accordance with the variable display game. Further, it may include an effect such as operating a movable accessory during the variable display of the decorative pattern, causing a light emitting body such as a lamp to emit light, or outputting sound from a speaker. The effects corresponding to the fluctuation patterns of the present embodiment include story reach, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (pseudo-ream), and the like. In addition, a fluctuation pattern that spans a plurality of fluctuation display games may be defined.

The story reach is an effect in which the decorative pattern is in the reach mode, and a specific effect is executed one or more times according to the expectation level (possibility of becoming a big hit) of the variable display game being executed. In the present embodiment, the higher the number of times the specific effect is executed, the higher the expectation of the big hit. The specific effect may be executed before the reach occurs, or may be executed only after the reach occurs. In addition, the production mode of the specific production includes, for example, screen display (cut-in) such as the appearance of a character, dialogue (screen display, voice output), operation of a movable accessory, and type of production such as light emission of a lamp. .. In addition, a plurality of different production modes may be defined according to the degree of expectation for the same type of production.

Pseudo-continuous variation is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol (identification symbol) is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then re-variated. The temporary stop and re-variation are repeated one or more times. In this embodiment, the higher the number of stops, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, when executing the pseudo continuous variation, an effect such as making a character appear when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed, or the effect may be executed while the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when reach occurs in the final fluctuation of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the type of reach in the final fluctuation may be defined together.

The fluctuation pattern is a combination of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command (hereinafter, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The value (effect pattern) set in the mode (referred to as "special figure fluctuation pattern command") and the special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 2 symbol type command (hereinafter, special figure 1 symbol type command and special figure 2 symbol). It is selected based on the value (result of the variable display game) set in the mode (referred to as the "special symbol type command" together with the type command). Further, one variation pattern may correspond to the combination of the special figure 1 (2) variation pattern command and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, or a plurality of variation patterns may correspond to each other. When a plurality of fluctuation patterns correspond to each other, a random number value may be acquired and selected by lottery, or may be selected based on a predetermined condition such as a gaming state.

The variation pattern table includes items such as variation pattern name, winning information, variation time, number of effect insertions (number of scenarios), effect selection pattern, and re-lottery. The "variation pattern name" is a name that identifies the variation pattern. The "winning information" is the result of the variable display game to be executed, and corresponds to the value set in the mode of the special figure 1 symbol type command or the special figure 2 symbol type command. In addition, instead of the "winning information", a gaming state (for example, a "normal state", a "probability change state", and a "time saving state") may be used.

The "fluctuation time" corresponds to the variation time (execution time of the variation display game) in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Further, the fluctuation time may be changed according to the number of start-up memories. For example, when the number of start-up memories is large (for example, the number of start-up memories is 3 or more), the fluctuation time may be shortened. It is the same as the fluctuation time of the special symbol (identification symbol) in the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180. The same applies even when the fluctuation time is shortened.

The "number of effect insertions" is the number of times a specific effect is executed during the variable display in story reach, or the number of times the special symbol is temporarily stopped (regardless of whether or not the effect is executed at the time of temporary stop) in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. Is. The “effect selection pattern” is definition information for selecting a specific effect candidate to be executed in story reach, or selecting an effect to be executed at the time of temporary stop in pseudo continuous variation. In the present embodiment, the effect selection pattern is set so that the higher the reliability of the variation pattern is selected, the easier it is to select the highly reliable specific effect. A specific example of the “effect selection pattern” will be described later with reference to FIG. 54.

The "re-lottery" is information that defines whether or not to execute the process of re-lottering the stopped special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is completed. In the present embodiment, the "re-lottery" is executed when the result of the variable display game is a special result (for example, a big hit).

[10-6. Received command analysis process]
Subsequently, the received command analysis process (process of step S1022 of FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the present embodiment.

In the reception command analysis process, when the effect control program is executed on the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4150a), first, whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer. (Step S1401).

When the peripheral control board 4140 according to the present embodiment receives a command from the main control board 4100, it generates a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 45), and in this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the main control board 4100 Various commands from are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided on the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control unit reception ring buffer is provided with a plurality of areas, and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are stored in the order in which they are received.

When the command is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (the result of step S1401 is “Yes”), the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the command from the main control board 4100 in the earliest reception order in the peripheral control unit reception ring. Read from the buffer (step S1402).

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (special figure 1 variation pattern command or special figure 2 variation pattern command, FIG. 15) (step S1403). ). When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation pattern command is used (the result of step S1403 is "Yes"), the special figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in the fluctuation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the movement is changed. The pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read command is not the special figure variation pattern command (the result of step S1403 is "No"), the read command is the special symbol symbol type command (special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 1 symbol type command or special figure 1). FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the symbol type command is a winning information command indicating “missing”, “specific jackpot”, and “non-specific jackpot” (FIG. 15) (step S1405). When it is determined that the command is a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is "Yes"), the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1406), and the receiving command is received. End the analysis process.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read effect command is not a special symbol type command (the result of step S1405 is "No"), the read command is a command for instructing the special symbol look-ahead effect (special symbol 1 hold). It is determined whether or not the command is a number designation command or a special symbol 2 hold number designation command (with look-ahead), FIG. 16) (step S1407). The special symbol look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls) increases. As will be described later, when the read effect command is a command for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag indicating the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect is set. Therefore, the determination of "Yes" in the process of step S1407 described above is limited to the case where the read effect command is the special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command of "pre-reading". If the command is a special symbol 1 (2) hold number specification command of "no look-ahead", the judgment is "No". As the special figure look-ahead effect command to be determined in the process of step S1407, a command for instructing a special figure look-ahead effect other than the special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command (symbol type look-ahead, variable pattern look-ahead, variable type look-ahead). If all of these commands for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect are received, the determination of "Yes" may be performed.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a sets the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1408) when the read effect command is a special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1407 is “Yes”), and receives command analysis processing. To finish. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the special figure look-ahead effect is executed. Make the necessary settings to execute the production. The main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the read effect command is not the special figure look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1408 is "No"), the read command is the normal figure look-ahead effect command (normal symbol type look-ahead command, FIG. 16). ) (Step S1409). The normal symbol look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the timing when the number of normally symbol operation holding balls increases. In addition, the Fuzu pre-reading effect command includes information corresponding to the result of the Fuzu lottery. When the normal figure look-ahead effect command is received, the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag that instructs the start of the normal symbol type look-ahead effect (normal figure look-ahead effect) is set. When the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect can be executed is determined in the normal figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1028 in FIG. 42) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the normal figure look-ahead effect is executed. Make the necessary settings to execute the production. It should be noted that the main control board 4100 may determine whether or not to execute the normal drawing look-ahead effect. In addition, in the case of a model that does not execute the normal map look-ahead effect, the received command is discarded.

On the other hand, if the read effect command is not a normal map look-ahead effect command (the result of step S1409 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU4150a executes processing such as setting a flag corresponding to the received command (step). S1411), the received command analysis process is terminated.

As described in FIGS. 15 and 16, the command received from the main control board 4100 includes, for example, a special figure synchronization effect end command (special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or a special figure 1 synchronization effect end command) for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production end command) or when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the variable time state specification command that specifies the game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal game state) after the big hit game ends included. When the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the synchronization effect end flag is set. Further, depending on the result of the variable display game, a jackpot opening command for instructing the execution of the effect at the start of the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command for instructing the execution of the effect at the end of the jackpot game, and the like are included.

Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, a starting port winning command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to notify the starting port that the game ball has won a prize. The start of (for example, audio output) is instructed. In addition, when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1 operation changes due to the winning of a game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185, the special symbol 1 storage command is mainly controlled. Received from board 4100. Similarly, when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2 operation changes due to the winning of a game ball to the lower start port 2102 or the start of the variable display of the special symbol on the lower special symbol display 1186, the special symbol 2 storage command is mainly used. Received from the control board 4100.

Further, the special symbol 1 storage command (special symbol 2 storage command) includes the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls (the number of special symbol 2 operation hold balls), and is displayed on the liquid crystal display on the game board side based on the process of step S1107. The display corresponding to the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1 operation (number of balls on hold for operation of special symbol 2) in the device 1900 is set to be updated.

Further, when a notification command for notifying the occurrence of an error other than the production-related command is received, a flag or the like is set in a predetermined storage area (step S1407), and a warning process or the like (step S1024 in FIG. 42) is performed. Execute the process.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned command, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is cut off, a power cut command is transmitted. The main control board 4100 is supplied with power for a predetermined time from the capacitor (backup power supply) provided on the power supply board 851 even when the power supply from the outside such as the pachinko island equipment is stopped. The information stored in the RAM of the control board 4100 can be held, and a command such as a power failure command can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 or the like. In addition, when the power supply from the outside is restarted, a power-on command is transmitted. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the power-off command or the power-on command, the peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the state. Details of these processes will be described later.

[10-7. Production control processing]
Subsequently, the effect control process (process of step S1026 of FIG. 42) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process of the present embodiment.

The effect control process is one of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1600), and the jackpot display process (step S1700) based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Is processed selectively.

In the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is "0", when the variation pattern reception flag is set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) of the receive command analysis process. In addition, a process for starting a special figure synchronization effect including a variable display of a decorative pattern is performed. For example, based on the variation pattern and the winning information of the variation display game, the effect content (stop symbol of decorative symbol, type of reach effect, determination of feasibility of execution of advance notice effect, notice effect mode (notice type, notice mode), extension effect (Presence / absence, etc.) is determined, and settings are made according to the determined production content. In addition, control is performed so that the demo effect is executed when the special figure synchronization effect is not executed. Details of the decorative pattern variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Further, in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S16000) executed when the processing selection flag is "1", the variation display game is performed on the condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (variation display of the decorative symbol) is started. Controls the special figure synchronization effect that is executed in synchronization. Further, when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received, the process for ending the special figure synchronization effect and stopping the confirmation is executed. That is, in the decorative symbol variation processing, the effect control is performed from the start to the end of the special symbol synchronization effect. Details of the decorative pattern variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Further, when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received, the effect control program determines and stops the decorative symbol based on the result of the variation display game in order to end the special symbol synchronization effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol. Finally, the effect control program sets the process selection flag based on the result of the variable display game. Specifically, when the result of the variable display game is "big hit", the process selection flag is set to [2], and when the result of the variable display game is "missing", the process selection flag is set to [0]. Set.

In order to continue the special figure synchronization effect until the special figure synchronization effect end condition is satisfied, the effect control program can, for example, switch the scene (image) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side or change the character. Perform productions such as making them appear. Further, the effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed from the next time onward is executed.

Further, in the jackpot display process (step S1700) executed when the process selection flag is "2", the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the jackpot set in the process of step S1407 (see FIG. 48) and the jackpot A display indicating on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened on the condition that the flag corresponding to the start command is set, and a display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display, etc.) ) Is performed respectively. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

[10-8. Decorative pattern change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1500) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control program first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag set in the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 48) is set (step). S1501). That is, in the process of step S1501, the process of step S1404 (see FIG. 49) waits until the variation pattern reception flag is set based on the fact that the predetermined start condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side. .. Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is set (that is, until the variation display game is started), the control related to the demo effect is executed by the processing from step S1511 to step S1513.

Specifically, if the variation pattern reception flag is not set (the result of step S1501 is "No"), is the effect control program executing the demo effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side? It is determined whether or not (step S1511). Then, when it is determined that the demo effect is not being executed (the result of step S1511 is "No"), it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the display effect such as the previous symbol change was completed (). Step S1512). When the predetermined time has elapsed (the result of step S1512 is “Yes”), the demo effect display flag for starting the demo effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (step S1513).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (the result of step S1512 is "No"), the effect control program temporarily ends the decorative symbol variation start process, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. It waits until either the condition (the result of step S1501 is "Yes") or the predetermined time elapses (the result of step S1512 is "Yes") is satisfied.

Further, when the effect control program determines that the demo effect is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (the result of step S1511 is "Yes"), the effect control program continues the execution of the demo effect as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation pattern reception flag is set (the result of step S1501 is "Yes"), the effect control program clears the variation pattern reception flag (step S1502). Then, based on the received special symbol variation pattern command and special symbol symbol type command, the effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed is executed (step S1503). Details of the effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. Finally, the effect control program updates the process selection flag to [1] (step S1504). By controlling in this way, the decorative symbol variation start processing is executed only once at the start of execution of the special symbol synchronization effect.

[10-9. Production setting process]
Subsequently, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is a process for setting the effect content at the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100, the corresponding flag is set and the parameter is set. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment.

The effect control program first identifies a variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 (step S1520). At this time, the fluctuation is based on the current gaming state (for example, a production mode related only to the production mode such as a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation time reduction state, a normal game state, etc.). You may choose a pattern. Specifically, the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 47 may be provided with an item of the gaming state, and variation patterns having different production modes may be defined for each gaming state.

Then, the effect control program sets the effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the specified fluctuation pattern is story reach (step S1521). In the case of story reach (the result of step S1521 is “Yes”), the story reach setting process for setting the data necessary for executing the story reach is executed (step S1530). The details of the story reach setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53.

On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1521 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not the variation pattern is a pseudo continuous variation (step S1522). When it is a pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1522 is “Yes”), a pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process for setting data necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1550).

On the other hand, when the specified variation pattern is not a pseudo-continuous variation (the result of step S1522 is "No"), the effect control program sets information necessary for executing the effect based on the variation pattern (the result is "No"). Step S1523).

When the setting of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process for executing the continuous look-ahead effect in which the effect content can be set independently of the variation pattern is executed (step S1524). In the continuous look-ahead effect setting process, when it is determined in the special figure look-ahead effect control process of step S1027 of FIG. 42 that the continuous look-ahead effect is executed, the progress of the continuous look-ahead effect is controlled based on the determined effect content. do. The details of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process will be described later.

Finally, the effect control program sets the effect pattern and the stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the music and the sound output from the speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

Finally, the effect control program sets the effect pattern and the stop symbol according to the game state (step S1525), and ends the effect setting process. As the effect pattern according to the game state, for example, the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the music and the sound output from the speaker, and the like are set according to the game state. In addition, the effect pattern also includes a notice mode corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. For example, in order to suggest the result of variable display, a specific character may appear or the background color may be set to a different color than usual. The stop symbol set in the process of step S1524 is confirmed and displayed in the decorative symbol variation process at the timing when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received from the main control board 4100.

When the effect setting process is completed, the information necessary for executing the special figure synchronization effect is set. Then, the ramp data output process (step S1012), display data output process (step S1016), sound data output process (step S1018), lamp data creation process (step S1028), and display data of the peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 42). By executing the creation process (step S1030), the sound data creation process (step S1032), and the like, special figure synchronization effects such as variable display of decorative symbols are started.

[10-10. Decorative pattern fluctuation processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1600) executed when the processing selection flag is “1” will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation processing in the present embodiment.

The decorative symbol variation process is executed when the decorative symbol variation start process is executed and the process selection flag is "1". Then, in the decorative symbol variation processing, the special symbol synchronization effect executed in synchronization with the variation display game is controlled on condition that the special symbol synchronization effect (variation display of the decorative symbol) is started.

When the decorative symbol variation processing is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the condition for ending the variation display of the decorative symbol, that is, the end condition of the special symbol synchronization effect is satisfied (step S1601). As the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect, for example, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command (symbol confirmation command) is received from the main control board 4100, or the special figure synchronization effect may be ended. The special figure synchronization effect may be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start. Further, both the reception of the special figure synchronization effect end command and the elapsed time from the start of the special figure synchronization effect may be set as the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect. For example, a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure synchronization effect. Even if it is not, when the special symbol synchronization effect end command is received, the variable display may be forcibly terminated and the display screen may be switched so as to confirm and stop the decorative symbol.

When the end condition of the special symbol synchronization effect is satisfied (the result of step S1601 is "Yes"), the effect control program stops (fixed stop) the variable display with the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol symbol type command (fixed stop). Step S1602). Then, the process selection flag is set based on the result of the variable display game (step S1602). Specifically, when the result of the variable display game is "missing", the processing selection flag is set to "0", and when the result is "big hit", the processing selection flag is set to "2". If there is a "small hit", another process selection flag (for example, "3") is set.

On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the end condition of the special figure synchronization effect is not satisfied (the result of step S1601 is "Yes"), that is, when the variation display of the decorative symbol is continued, first, the variation pattern It is determined whether or not the type is story reach (step S1604). When the type of the variation pattern is story reach (the result of step S1604 is “Y”), the story reach control process for controlling the progress of story reach is executed (step S1610). In the present embodiment, all the scenario effects executed in the story reach are selected at the start of the variable display (story reach setting process), but when each scenario is selected immediately before the scenario effect is executed, the story reach control process is performed. Is selected with. Further, when the progress of the scenario effect is controlled based on the operation of the operation unit 400, the operation status of the operation unit 400 is detected in the story reach control process, and the control according to the operation status is executed. Just do it.

When the type of variation pattern is not story reach (the result of step S1604 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not the type of variation pattern is pseudo-continuous variation (step S1605). When the type of the fluctuation pattern is pseudo continuous fluctuation (the result of step S1604 is “Yes”), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process for controlling the progress of the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed (step S1630). The details of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process will be described later.

Further, when the type of the variation pattern is not pseudo-continuous variation (the result of step S1605 is “No”), the effect control program executes the control process of the special figure tuning effect corresponding to the variation pattern such as special reach (the result of step S1605 is “No”). Step S1660). For example, an effect such as switching a scene (video) being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side or making a character appear is executed. Further, the effect that does not depend on the fluctuation pattern may be executed independently, and for example, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variation display game to be executed from the next time onward may be executed. When the control of the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is completed, the prohibition process for correcting the effect display executed in the variation display game when it corresponds to the prohibition condition is executed (step S1560), and then this process is terminated. .. Details of kinsoku processing will be described later.

[10-11. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 is input from the main control board 4100 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the power failure warning signal interrupt process of the peripheral control unit.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 12 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal). ) Is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU4150a can operate even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. ..

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU4150a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 13 is started. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup management target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 13 are stored in Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cc. And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 13 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). 1 byte) continuously backed up All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the receiving command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control CPU core. 4150aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) are transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af shown in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control external WDT4150e shown in FIG. 12 so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a clear signals to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. Is not output and the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 42 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e are The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[11. Story Reach]
Next, a case where story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special symbol synchronization effect is executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. When story reach is selected as the variation pattern, the effect (specific effect) that suggests the expectation of the variation display game being executed at a predetermined timing is executed once or multiple times (insertion) in the special figure synchronization effect. Will be done.

Further, in the effect related to the story reach, the decorative symbol is in the reach mode, but the execution timing of the specific effect may be before the occurrence of the reach or after the occurrence of the reach. In the present embodiment, the specific effect in the story reach is executed after the reach occurs. Hereinafter, the production when story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

[11-1. Story reach setting process]
First, the production control in story reach will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach setting process in the present embodiment. The story reach setting process is executed in the process of step S1530 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the story reach setting process shown in FIG. 53, the process related to the setting of the specific effect executed at a predetermined timing is described, and other variation patterns are selected for the setting of the special figure synchronization effect such as the other reach effect. Since it is processed in the same manner as in the case of the above, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the story reach setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the number of effect inserts and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1531). At this time, the number of effect insertions and the effect selection pattern may be changed according to the game state such as the probability state (probability change state, normal state) of the variable display game and the operating state (time saving state) of the normal electric accessory. Further, the initial value (“0”) is set to the number of selected effects indicating the number of specific effects (counters) set in this process (step S1532). Subsequently, the scenario of the specific effect is selected by the number of inserted effects (steps S1533 to S1539). In the present embodiment, the specific effect to be executed last is sequentially selected, and the specific effect to be executed first is selected last.

The effect control program determines whether or not the number of selected effects is equal to or greater than the number of inserted effects, that is, whether or not scenarios have been selected for all specific effects (step S1533). When the number of selected effects is less than the number of inserted effects (the result of step S1533 is "No"), the specific effect for which the scenario has not been selected remains, so the process for selecting the scenario (steps S1534 to S1538). To execute.

The effect control program acquires a random number value (effect selection information) for selecting a specific effect (step S1534). Then, a specific effect is selected from the effect selection pattern table (FIG. 54) based on the effect selection pattern acquired in the process of step S1531 and the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 (step S1535).

Here, the procedure for selecting a specific effect will be described in more detail. In the effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment, an effect selection pattern is set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 47). FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect selection pattern in the story reach of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when story reach is executed, any specific effect of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is executed, and the expectation that the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 ( The possibility) is set to be high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, it is easy to select a scenario having a high degree of expectation in the order of pattern 1 to pattern 3. Specifically, in pattern 1, scenario 5 and scenario 6 having relatively high expectations are not selected, and in pattern 3, scenario 1 and scenario 2 having relatively low expectations are selected. It is set not to be done.

Further, a range of random numbers is set for each scenario, and each scenario is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1534 of FIG. 53. In addition, instead of setting so that a specific scenario is not selected, all scenarios may be selectable, and the selection rate of each scenario may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers.

Further, the effect selection pattern may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state in which there is a high probability that the variable display of the special symbol will be won, a scenario with a high degree of expectation may be easily selected, and the player's expectation may be further increased. Further, a plurality of effect selection patterns (lottery tables) may be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This predetermined condition may be, for example, the above-mentioned gaming state, the number of executions of the variation display based on the predetermined variation pattern (for example, the number of executions of the SP reach), or a big prize in the jackpot game. It may be the number of prizes of the game ball to the mouth, or it may be a combination of these.

Random numbers for selecting a specific effect are extracted from a predetermined range (range from "0" to "1000" in this embodiment). Therefore, after the scenario with high expectation is selected, the scenario with low expectation is selected (falling down), which may make it difficult for the player to grasp the reliability of the story reach itself. For example, when "Story Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern, pattern 1 is selected as the effect selection pattern, and the number of inserted effects is 3. At this time, it is assumed that "scenario 2" is selected as the scenario corresponding to the specific effect to be executed first, "scenario 3" is selected as the scenario to be executed next, and "scenario 1" is selected as the scenario to be executed last. In this case, the specific effect executed after the second specific effect (“scenario 3”) becomes “scenario 1” with a relatively low expectation. For this reason, the player cannot determine whether the expected degree of the variable display game being executed corresponds to "scenario 1" or "scenario 3", and the reliability of the story reach as a specific effect is impaired. There is a risk that it will end up.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in the process of step S1613, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned downfall from occurring. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing changes in the random number extraction range in this embodiment in chronological order.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the specific effect to be executed last is sequentially selected. When "Story Reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern (number of inserted effects 3), first, the last (third) specific effect to be executed is selected. At this time, in the process of step S1534, a random number value is extracted in a range (specified range) from 0 to 1000 (FIG. 55 (A)). Assuming that the random number value extracted at this time is "550", "Scenario 3" is selected by referring to the effect selection pattern selection table of FIG. 54. Then, the effect control program stores the selected scenario in a predetermined storage area (reach mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1536). Then, 1 is added to the number of selected effects (step S1537).

In addition, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute the story reach advance notice effect described later as the advance notice effect in synchronization with the selected specific effect, and the content (notice mode, advance notice type) of the story reach advance notice effect to be executed. The story reach notice setting process for this is executed (step S1570). The details of the story reach notice setting process will be described later. Information such as the selected scenario, the image data of the advance notice, and the audio data is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like.

Subsequently, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value) of random numbers extracted to select the second specific effect to be executed (step S1538). As described above, since "scenario 3" is selected in the last specific effect to be executed, if "scenario 4" is selected in the second specific effect to be executed, a downfall will occur. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), the random value generation range is selected so that only "scenario 1" to "scenario 3" are selected instead of the specified range of 0 to 1000. Is set in the range from 0 to 600. The reset upper limit value "600" is an upper limit value for which "scenario 3" is selected, and by setting the upper limit value to "600", "scenario 4" is prevented from being selected. In FIG. 55 (B), the range of the solid line (“0” to “600”) is the range in which random numbers can be extracted, and the range of the broken line (range from “600” to “1000”) is the range in which random numbers cannot be extracted. It is within the possible range.

Here, when "150" is extracted as a random number value for selecting the second specific effect to be executed, "scenario 2" is selected as the scenario of the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit of the range of the extracted random number values to "200" so that "scenario 1" or "scenario 2" that does not cause a fall in the specific effect to be executed first is selected. Set. After that, for example, when "85" is extracted as a random number value, "scenario 1" is set (FIG. 55 (C)).

Then, in the process of step S1538, the value of the number of selected effects is 3, and the value of the number of selected effects and the value of the number of inserted effects match. Therefore, the result of the process of step S1533 is "Yes", and the effect control program is specified. Finish the selection of the production. Finally, the range (upper limit value) of the changed random numbers is set to the specified value (0 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is completed.

In the procedure in the story reach setting process of FIG. 53, the range of random numbers was set at the start of fluctuation (effect control process → decorative symbol fluctuation start process → effect setting process → story reach setting process), but at other timings. A range of random numbers may be set.

For example, all the scenarios of the specific effect may be selected at the timing when the specific effect is first executed (at the start of execution of the specific effect). In this case, in the story reach control process (step S1610) of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52), the story reach setting process described above may be executed at the timing of executing the first specific effect.

At this time, the selection pattern may be reset based on the start winning command, the look-ahead effect-related command, etc. transmitted from the main control board 4100 from the start of the fluctuation to the execution of the specific effect. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable display game to be executed later, and it is possible to diversify the variation of the effect. If the execution (insertion) of the specific effect is after the reach occurs, the specific effect may be selected at the start of the reach effect.

Further, at the timing of selecting the specific effect, the random values of the number corresponding to the number of inserted effects may be extracted and sorted in ascending order to determine the execution order of the specific effect. For example, when the random value is extracted three times and "550", "85", and "150" are extracted, "85" (scenario 1), "150" (scenario 2), and "550" (scenario). The specific effect may be executed in the order of 3).

Further, a lottery of random values may be performed each time a specific effect is executed. For example, the execution timing of the specific effect is defined in the schedule data, and a random value for selecting a scenario at the execution timing of the specific effect is extracted. In this case, after selecting the scenario of the specific effect, the lower limit of the random number is set. In the effect selection pattern table shown in FIG. 54, the larger the random number value is, the higher the expectation is set to be executed. Therefore, when the specific effect to be executed is selected in the execution order, the upper limit value is set. No, reset the lower limit. Specifically, when scenario 2 is selected first, the lower limit value is set to "100" so that a fall does not occur when the next specific effect is selected, and a random number value is set in the range of "100" to "1000". To generate. By controlling in this way, it is possible to execute the story reach as in the case of selecting a specific effect at the start of fluctuation or the like. When the selection of the specific effect is completed, the lower limit value set in the peripheral control RAM 4150c is held and used when executing the next specific effect. Further, the lower limit value may be cleared (set to 0) at the timing when the last specific effect is selected or at the timing when the variable display game (special figure synchronization effect) ends. A more specific procedure will be described in Control in Pseudo-Continuous Production, which will be described later.

Further, both the lower limit value and the upper limit value may be set when the specific effect is selected. By doing so, it is possible to control the scenarios so that they are likely to be executed in a specific order. For example, after scenario 1 is selected, by setting the lower limit value to "0" and the upper limit value to "200", it is possible to select only "scenario 1" or "scenario 2". Further, by setting the lower limit value to "101" and the upper limit value to "200", it is possible to ensure that "scenario 2" is always selected. It should be noted that the same processing can be performed when all specific effects are selected at the start of fluctuation or the like. Further, the effect selection pattern table may be provided with items such as setting only the upper limit value (or the lower limit value) or setting the upper limit value and the lower limit value so that the effect can be set for each effect selection pattern.

If the lower limit value is not "0", a random number value from "0" to "lower limit value-upper limit value" may be generated, and the lower limit value may be added to the extracted random number value. For example, when the lower limit value is "101" and the upper limit value is "200", a random number from "0" to "99 (= lower limit value-upper limit value)" is generated and the lower limit value "101" is added. The result may be an extracted random number.

[11-2. Story reach notice production]
Next, the story reach notice production will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a specific effect is executed in the special figure synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100. Execute the story reach notice production in synchronization with the specific production.

In this example, the story reach notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect, but the story reach notice effect may be executed separately from the specific effect. In this case, the story reach notice is executed. Of the decorative symbols that are displayed in three columns on the left, middle, and right as the execution timing of the effect, one or both of the left and right decorative symbols (in this example, the left symbol of the decorative symbol) or both stop (for example, the decorative symbol). It may be before the right symbol stops at the same symbol as the left symbol and reach occurs, or after the left and right decorative symbols stop (for example, the right symbol of the decorative symbol stops at the same symbol as the left symbol). It may be (after the reach has occurred). The story reach notice production will be described below.

[11-3. Story reach notice setting process]
First, the production control in the story reach notice production that is executed in synchronization with the story reach will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach notice setting process in the present embodiment. The story reach notice setting process is executed in the process of step S1570 of the story reach setting process (FIG. 53).

When the story reach notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first selects the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol (step S1571). At this time, the story reach is performed according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is the probabilistic state or the normal state, etc.) and the operating state of the normal electric accessory (time saving state). The notice decision table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) includes "no notice", in other words, whether or not to not only determine the notice type (notice mode) but also execute the story reach notice effect. The story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) was configured so as to draw a lottery, but a separate table was set up to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect, and the table and a predetermined random number were provided separately. When it is determined that the story reach notice effect is to be executed based on the above, the notice type may be determined using the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)).

Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the story reach advance notice effect and the advance notice type (step S1572). Then, based on the story reach notice determination table selected in the process of step S1571 and the random number value acquired in step S1572, the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect and the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect from the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)). The content (notice mode, notice type) of the story reach notice effect to be executed is determined (step S1573).

Here, the procedure for determining the presence / absence of the story reach notice effect and the type of notice will be described in more detail. In the story reach notice effect executed in the present embodiment, a story reach notice determination table is set according to the result of the winning determination and the winning type (FIG. 57). FIG. 57A is a diagram showing an example of a story reach notice determination table according to the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, when the story reach notice effect is executed, the story reach notice effect according to any of the notice types (notice modes) of the notice 1 to the notice 5 is executed, and the order of the notice 1 to the notice 5 is executed. It is set so that the degree of expectation (possibility) that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), it is easy to select a notice type having a high degree of expectation in the order of missed, non-probable change big hit, and probable change big hit. Specifically, the notice 5 with a relatively high expectation is not selected in the outlier, and the notice 1 and the notice 2 with a relatively low expectation are not selected in the probability variation jackpot. It is set. If the result of the winning judgment is a big hit without a ball, whether or not to select the notice decision table at the time of loss and execute the story reach notice effect, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice). The type, notice mode) may be determined.

Further, a range of random numbers is set for each notice type, and the notice type is selected based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1572 of FIG. 56. In addition, instead of setting so that a specific notice type is not selected, all notice types may be selectable, and the selection rate of each notice type may be adjusted by adjusting the range of the corresponding random numbers. ..

Further, the advance notice determination table may be held for each game state. For example, in a high-probability state in which there is a high probability that the variable display of the special symbol will be won, the notice type with a high expectation may be easily selected to further increase the player's expectation. Further, a plurality of advance notice determination tables (lottery tables) may be selected when a predetermined condition is satisfied. This predetermined condition may be, for example, the game state described above, the number of times the variation display is executed based on the predetermined variation pattern (for example, the number of times the SP reach is executed), or a big prize in the jackpot game. It may be the number of winning game balls in the mouth, the jackpot type may be 16R jackpot or 4R jackpot, and the jackpot type may be a jackpot with a ball or a jackpot without a ball. , The number of effect insertions, which is the number of times the specific effect is executed during the variable display in the story reach, may be the total number of specific effects executed in one variable display; the variable in which the specific effect is executed once. Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect corresponding to the pattern, the notice decision table that determines the type of notice to be executed, and whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect corresponding to the variable pattern that executes the specific effect twice. A notice determination table that determines the type of notice to be executed, ... Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern in which the specific effect is executed n times (n = 1 to 6 in this example). And the notice determination table that determines the type of notice to be executed), it may be the number of times the specific effect is executed in the story reach (story reach notice synchronized with the specific effect executed the first time). A notice determination table that determines whether or not to execute the effect and the type of advance notice to be executed, determines whether or not to execute the story reach advance notice effect in synchronization with the second specific effect to be executed, and the type of advance notice to be executed. Notice determination table to be performed, ... n (n = 1 to 6 in this example) A notice that determines whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect to be executed and the type of notice to be executed. Decision table), a combination of these may be used.

Also, in the story reach notice production that is performed in synchronization with the story reach, the story reach notice production according to the notice type with high expectation is executed, and then the story reach notice production according to the notice type with low expectation is executed. It is designed to prevent the occurrence of "falling down". Specifically, by adjusting the extraction range of the random number value acquired in step S1572 in the same manner as in the process of preventing the occurrence of the story reach, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned decrease.

That is, when "story reach 2" is selected as the variation pattern (number of inserted effects 3), the specific effect to be executed at the end (third) is selected, and the story reach notice effect is synchronized with this specific effect. When the story reach notice setting process for determining whether or not to execute and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed is executed, the story reach notice according to the winning type is executed in the process of step S1571. A determination table is selected, and in the process of step S1572, a random number value is extracted in the range of 1 to 1000. At this time, when the winning type is a non-probability change jackpot and the extracted random number value is "800", "notice 3" is selected with reference to the story reach notice determination table of FIG. 57 (A) (step S1573). ). Then, the effect control program stores the notice type selected in the predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1574).

Subsequently, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the second specific effect, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed. A range (upper limit value) of random numbers extracted for this purpose is set (step S1575). As described above, since "notice 3" is selected in the last specific effect to be executed, if "notice 4" or more is selected in the second specific effect to be executed, a downfall occurs. It ends up. Therefore, the generation range of the random number value is set to the range of 1 to 840 so that only "notice 1" to "notice 3" is selected instead of the specified range of 1 to 1000. The reset upper limit value "840" is an upper limit value for which "notice 3" is selected, and by setting the upper limit value to "840", "notice 4" or more is not selected. That is, a random number that can be extracted to determine whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the second specific effect, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed. The range of is from "1" to "840", and the range of random numbers from "841" to "1000" cannot be extracted.

Here, as a random value for determining whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the second specific effect, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed. When "600" is extracted, "notice 2" is selected as the notice type according to the story reach notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect. Therefore, the effect control program sets the upper limit of the range of the extracted random number values to "690" so that "notice 1" or "notice 2" that does not cause a fall in the specific effect to be executed first is selected. Set. After that, for example, when "500" is extracted as a random number value, "notice 1" is set. Then, in the process of step S1538 of the story reach setting process, the value of the number of selected effects becomes 3, and the value of the number of selected effects and the value of the number of inserted effects match. Similar to the random number value (effect selection information) for selecting the effect, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode). The range (upper limit value) of the changed random number of the random number value (preliminary random number) for determination is set to the specified value (1 to 1000) (step S1539), and the story reach setting process is completed. That is, even in the story reach notice production, a lottery is drawn as to whether or not to execute the story reach notice production for all the productions inserted in the story reach, and the content of the story reach notice production to be executed (notice type, notice mode). Is performed.

In this way, in the story reach notice production that is performed in synchronization with the story reach, each of the scenarios for the number of production insertions (all scenarios executed in the story reach) that are executed in the story reach before the start of the story reach. On the other hand, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed are determined, and information (notice) related to the notice type (notice mode) according to the decision result. Information) is stored in a predetermined storage area (preliminary mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140.

In the above example, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed are determined for each specific effect executed in the story reach, and the decision result is obtained. Information (notice information) related to the notice type (notice mode), etc. according to the above is individually stored in the notice mode storage area. On the other hand, information (notice information) related to the notice type (notice mode), etc., which collectively indicates whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed, is announced. It may be stored in the mode storage area. That is, the story is not limited to determining whether or not to individually execute the story reach notice effect for each of the specific effects to be executed, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed. Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for each of all the specified effects to be executed according to the number of times the specific effect is executed (the number of effect insertions) executed during the variable display in the reach, and the story reach notice to be executed. Decide on one of a plurality of (packaged) notice types (notice modes) indicating the content (notice type, notice mode) of the effect, and select the notice type (notice mode), etc. according to the decision result. The related information (notice information) may be stored in the notice mode storage area.

[11-4. Production example]
By the above processing, it is possible to select the specific effect and the story reach notice effect to be executed in the story reach so that the downfall does not occur. Next, a specific example of the production when story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern will be described.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. In the story reach of the present embodiment, after the reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing. The specific effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, an area 1912 is formed above the start memory display unit 1911, and lines corresponding to the scenario are displayed in this area 1912.

Further, when the story reach notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect, the background of the dialogue (area 1912) is displayed according to the notice type. The story reach notice effect synchronized with the specific effect is an effect of displaying the aspect of the background of the dialogue displayed in the area 1912 in an aspect different from the usual aspect. Specifically, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in blue corresponding to the notice 1, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in green corresponding to the notice 2, and the background part of the dialogue is displayed in green corresponding to the notice 3. The background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in red, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in a leopard pattern corresponding to the notice 4, and the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 corresponds to the notice 5. Is displayed in rainbow colors. Note that notice 5 is selected only when a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded) is confirmed (appearance is restricted when the ball is out), and it is a so-called premium notice with an extremely low frequency of appearance. ing. Further, when the story reach notice effect is not executed in synchronization with the specific effect (default), the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in white.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display is set in the order of notice 1 to notice 5 so that the degree of expectation (possibility) that the result of the game becomes a big hit is high, and the fluctuation display is made in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6. It is set so that the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the game will be a big hit is high, and the type of notice being executed (notice mode; which of notice 1 to notice 5) and the execution are being executed. It is possible to make the player comprehensively judge the degree of expectation (possibility) that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit from both the type of scenario (whether it is scenario 1 to scenario 6).

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario (line) of a specific effect executed in the story reach of the present embodiment. (A) shows scenario 1, (B) shows scenario 2, (C) shows scenario 3, (D) shows scenario 4, (E) shows scenario 5, and (F) shows scenario 6. As described above, it is shown that the expectation of the variable display game being executed in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 6 is high. Specifically, in scenario 1, a line indicating that the degree of expectation is low (“No good !!”) is displayed, and the line is set so that the feeling of expectation increases in sequence. In scenario 5, a line suggesting a big hit (“Is it a big hit?”) Is set, and in scenario 6, a line suggesting that the big hit is confirmed (“It's a big hit !!”) is set. Note that scenario 6 may be selected only when the jackpot is confirmed.

Next, the screen transition of story reach will be described. 60 and 61 are diagrams showing an example of the screen transition of the story reach of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the special figure tuning effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, since the story reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern, the reach occurs at a predetermined timing as shown on the screen (B).

After that, when it is time to execute the first specific effect, the specific effect in which the dialogue (scenario 2) is displayed in the area 1912 is executed (screen (C)). After that, when it is time to execute the second specific effect, as shown on the screen (D), the scenario 3 with a higher degree of expectation is selected, and the specific effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode.

Here, when the random number generation range is not adjusted, in the last specific effect executed, as shown on the screen (E-1), a specific effect having a lower expectation than the previously executed specific effect is performed. It may be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the control is performed so as to prevent the falling, the specific effect having the same or higher expectation as the previously executed specific effect is always executed (screen (E-2)). In the procedure of the present embodiment, the scenarios are selected in order from the last specific effect to be executed. Therefore, when the scenario 1 is selected last, the scenario 1 is selected in all the specific effects. In such a case, since the same specific effect is continuously executed, a plurality of scenarios corresponding to the same degree of expectation may be prepared so that the same specific effect is not continuously executed.

[12. Pseudo continuous fluctuation]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed one or more times in the special symbol synchronization effect, and the decorative symbols are selected by lottery at a predetermined timing. The production based on the scenario is executed. As for the effect based on the scenario, as in the story mode described above, an effect (specific effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of the variable display game being executed is executed.

The temporary stop of the decorative symbol is a state in which the player recognizes that the change of the decorative symbol has stopped, but the change is actually continued. For example, when the decorative symbol stops in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the last stopped middle symbol is in a state of being slightly moved up and down, and re-variation is started from this state.

Regarding the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are stopped. The variable display of the fourth symbol may be continued, and the stopped symbol may be changed again. In this case, the result mode of the variable display may be shown including the stop mode of the fourth symbol in addition to the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. At this time, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol may be stopped at the same decorative symbol, and the result mode may be different only by the difference of the fourth symbol. By configuring in this way, by executing the hit game by making a part of the result mode of the big hit and the result mode of the small hit similar to each other, the game state after the end of the hit game (winning probability of the variable display game, etc.) Can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the variation of the production can be increased.

In the story reach in the present embodiment, all the scenarios to be executed at the start of the fluctuation are determined, but in the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment, the scenario is selected by lottery at the timing when the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. .. Further, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, when reach occurs in the final revariation, a normal reach effect (for example, SP reach) that can be executed even if the pseudo continuous fluctuation does not occur may be executed. Alternatively, it may be a reach effect that is executed only in the case of pseudo continuous fluctuation. Further, in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, it is not necessary to generate reach at the final fluctuation. Hereinafter, the effect when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-1. Pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process]
First, the effect control in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation, as described above, the effect content is drawn by lottery immediately before the specific effect (scenario effect) is executed. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation, the initial settings necessary for executing the pseudo continuous fluctuation are performed. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process in the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed in the process of step S1550 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51). In the pseudo-continuous variation setting process shown in FIG. 62, the process related to the setting of the specific effect executed at a predetermined timing is described, and other variation patterns are used for the setting of the special figure synchronization effect such as the reach effect. Since it is processed in the same manner as when it is selected, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process is executed, the effect control program first acquires the effect insertion number (temporary stop count) and the effect selection pattern from the variation pattern table (FIG. 47) (step S1551), and the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Store in a predetermined area.

Further, the effect control program sets the number of effect insertions as an initial value in the number of remaining effects, which is the number of remaining executions of the specific effect executed in the pseudo continuous variation (step S1552). Finally, in order to initialize the range of random numbers (upper limit value and lower limit value) for selecting the scenario of the specific effect, a specified value is set (step S1553). In the present embodiment, the effect content is drawn by lottery when the scenario effect is executed, and the scenario effect is sequentially selected from the first scenario effect to be executed. Therefore, the lower limit value is initialized as the range of random numbers for the scenario selection lottery. At this time, in order to limit the selected scenario, an upper limit value may also be set.

As in the case of the story mode, all the scenarios may be drawn by the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process so that all the scenario effects are selected at the start of the fluctuation. The procedure for drawing a scenario effect is the same as in the story mode.

[12-2. Pseudo continuous fluctuation control processing]
Next, the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process in the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous fluctuation control process is executed from the start to the stop of the variation display of the decorative symbol, and controls the execution of the temporary stop and the execution of the scenario effect in the pseudo continuous variation. The pseudo continuous fluctuation control process is executed in the process of step S1630 of the decorative symbol variation process (FIG. 52).

In the pseudo continuous fluctuation effect of the present embodiment, the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is set according to the timing of the temporary stop, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the operation input acceptance period, the pressing operation unit 405 is operated. Scenario production is executed. In the procedure shown in FIG. 63, when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the normal effect is continued without executing the scenario effect.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (step S1631). The pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set when the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted in order to execute the scenario effect. That is, if the pressing operation unit 405 is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, the process for executing the scenario effect is executed.

If the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is not set (the result of step S1631 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not it is the timing when the operation acceptable of the pressing operation unit 405 is possible. (Step S1646). If it is not the timing at which the operation reception of the pressing operation unit 405 becomes possible (the result of step S1646 is “No”), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process is terminated.

When it is time to accept the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (the result of step S1646 is "Yes"), the effect control program is a pressing operation unit that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405. A pseudo-continuous notice setting process for determining whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the suggestion effect and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed is executed (step S1670). .. The details of the pseudo-continuous notice setting process will be described later. In addition, information such as image data and audio data of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like.

When the pseudo-continuous notice setting process is executed, the effect control program sets a setting for executing the effect (requesting the operation of the press operation unit 405) suggesting that the operation input of the press operation unit 405 can be accepted. (Step S1647). Specifically, it is related to image data, audio data, and the like necessary for executing an effect that suggests that the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted (requests the operation of the pressing operation unit 405). The effect information is read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like and set. The set effect information is the lamp data output process (step) after executing the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady processing. The effect is actually executed by S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018). Next, the effect control program sets the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag (step S1648), and ends the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process. The timing at which the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be accepted is set according to the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. For example, it is set before a predetermined time when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.

On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set (the result of step S1631 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (step). S1632). The pressing operation unit operation flag is set when the pressing operation unit 405 is actually operated. Specifically, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is acquired by the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108) of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, and the pressing operation unit operation flag is the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42). ) Is set in the operation unit monitoring process (step S1014) included in the peripheral control unit steady process.

When the pressing operation unit operation flag is set (the result of step S1632 is “Yes”), the effect control program acquires a random number value in the set upper limit value and lower limit value range (step S1633). Further, based on the acquired random number value, a scenario to be executed as a specific effect is acquired from the effect pattern table (step S1634). The format of the production pattern table is the same as in the case of story reach. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern table for selecting a scenario in the case of pseudo continuous variation in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the range of random numbers is set so that a scenario with a low degree of expectation can be easily selected.

When a scenario is selected, the effect control program determines whether or not to execute the pseudo-ream advance notice effect described later as the advance notice effect in synchronization with the execution of the effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario, and the pseudo-ream to be executed. A pseudo-continuous notice setting process for determining the content of the notice effect (notice type, notice mode) is executed (step S1680). The details of the pseudo-continuous notice setting process will be described later. Information such as image data and audio data of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the like.

Then, when the scenario is selected, the effect control program sets the effect information related to the image data, sound data, etc. required to execute the effect (specific effect) based on the selected scenario. Is executed (step S1635). The effect information set in the scenario execution setting process is the lamp after executing the ramp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady processing. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

After that, the effect control program sets the lower limit of the range of random values for selecting the scenario to be executed next, based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1633, so that the effect content does not fall. Set (step S1636). Specifically, the lower limit of the random number is set so that a scenario having a lower expectation than the scenario selected in the process of step S1634 is not selected, that is, a scenario having at least the same degree is selected. For example, a case where the effect pattern 12 is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 64. If the acquired random number value is "450", scenario 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to "301", a scenario with an expectation degree equal to or higher than that of scenario 2 is always selected in the next lottery. Further, by setting the lower limit value to "501" instead of "301", it can be set so that it always rises.

On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the pressing operation unit operation flag is not set (the result of step S1632 is "No"), in the effect control program, the time is up for the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer. Whether or not it is determined (step S1638). If the time is not up (the result of step S1638 is "No"), the pseudo continuous effect control process is terminated, and the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is continuously accepted. On the other hand, when the time is up for the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer (the result of step S1638 is "Yes"), the processes after step S1640 are executed.

If the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, or if the operation input of the pressing operation unit 405 is not accepted during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period and the time is up, The effect control program ends the pressing operation unit operation suggestion effect (step S1640). Further, the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is cleared (step S1641), and the remaining number of effects is subtracted by 1 (step S1642).

Finally, the effect control program determines whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0 (step S1643). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S1643 is "Yes"), the last specific effect is executed, so the lower limit of the random number is set to the specified value (step S1645), and the pseudo continuous effect control is performed. End the process.

On the other hand, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S1643 is "No"), the effect control program measures the operation acceptable time of the pressing operation unit in order to set the operation input timing for the next pressing operation unit. The timer is set (step S1644).

From the above, when the pressing operation unit is operated while the pressing operation unit operation acceptable time measurement timer is not timed up and the pressing operation unit operation acceptable flag is set, a specific effect is produced. Controlled to be executed. The execution timing of the effect (specific effect) based on the scenario may be after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or immediately after the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. For example, if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the control is changed so that the scenario execution setting process is executed after the press operation unit operation acceptable time measurement timer has timed up, and the press operation is performed after the scenario execution setting process. The part operation flag may be cleared.

[12-3. Pseudo-ream notice production]
Next, the pseudo-continuous notice production will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when pseudo continuous fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation pattern, temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are executed one or more times in the special symbol synchronization effect, and the decorative symbols are selected by lottery at a predetermined timing. When an effect (specific effect) based on the created scenario is executed, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with this specific effect. Hereinafter, the effect when pseudo continuous variation is selected as the variation pattern will be described.

[12-4. Pseudo consecutive notice setting process]
First, the effect control in the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo-continuous notice setting process in the present embodiment. The pseudo continuous advance notice setting process is executed in the processes of step S1670 and step S1680 of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (FIG. 63).

When the pseudo-continuous advance notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first selects a pseudo-continuous change advance notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) according to the variation pattern type of the special symbol (step S1671). At this time, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is made according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is the probabilistic state or the normal state, etc.) and the operating state of the normal electric accessory (time saving state). You may change the notice decision table of. If the result of the winning judgment is a big hit without a ball, whether or not to select the notice determination table at the time of loss and execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed (notice). The type, notice mode) may be determined. In addition, the lottery result of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) includes "no advance notice", in other words, not only the advance notice type is determined but also whether or not the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is executed. A notice determination table for pseudo-continuous fluctuation (FIG. 57 (B)) was configured so as to draw lots, but a table for drawing lots was separately provided as to whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and based on the table and a predetermined random number. When it is determined that the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is to be executed, the advance notice type may be determined using the advance notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation.

Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect and the advance notice type (step S1672). Then, based on the pseudo continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table selected in the process of step S1671 and the random number value acquired in step S1672, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is produced from the pseudo continuous variation advance notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)). The presence / absence and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed are determined (step S1673), and are selected as a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. Information (notice information) related to the notice type and the like is stored (step S1674).

After that, the effect control program is disturbed for selecting the advance notice type in the next pseudo-continuous advance notice effect to be executed so that the effect content does not fall down based on the random number value acquired in the process of step S1672. The lower limit of the numerical range is set (step S1675). Specifically, the lower limit of the random number is set so that the notice type having a lower expectation than the notice type selected in the process of step S1673 is not selected, that is, at least the same notice type is selected. do. For example, with reference to FIG. 57 (B), a case where the number of effect insertions (the number of temporary stops) is 3 and a variation pattern that is a non-probability variation jackpot is selected will be described. If the acquired random number value is "150", notice 2 is selected. At this time, by setting the lower limit value to "101", the notice type having the same or higher expectation as the notice 2 is surely selected in the next lottery. Further, by setting the lower limit value to "201" instead of "101", it can be set so as to always increase.

It should be noted that a range of random numbers (upper limit value and upper limit value) for selecting a scenario of a specific effect executed by the pseudo continuous variation based on the determination that the number of remaining effects has become 0 in step S1643 of the pseudo continuous variation control process. When the lower limit value of this random number is set to the specified value in order to initialize the lower limit value (lower limit value) (step S1645), the random number (notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect and the advance notice type is initialized. In order to do so, the process of setting the lower limit of this random number to a specified value is also performed. As a result, the random number can be extracted from the entire range the next time the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process is executed, and it becomes possible to determine one of the notice types from all the notice types.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect for the scenario executed every time the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is operated. The content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed is determined, and the information (notice information) related to the notice type for one scenario is assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 according to the decision result. It is designed to be stored in a predetermined storage area (preliminary mode storage area).

[12-6. Pseudo continuous fluctuation production example]
Next, an example of producing the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. In the pseudo-continuous variation of the present embodiment, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol before the reach occurs in the variation display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started from a predetermined time before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the operation can be accepted for the pressing operation unit 405), and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is performed at the timing of the temporary stop. It ends (the operation reception for the pressing operation unit 405 becomes impossible). When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in a state where the operation can be accepted for the pressing operation unit 405 (the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period), after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, until the re-variation of the identification symbol is started. During that time, a specific effect is executed. In addition, a pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the pressing operation unit suggestion effect and the specific effect.

The specific effect is the same as the story reach, and when the specific effect is executed, the decorative symbol 1910 is reduced and moved to the upper right portion, and the area 1912 is formed above the start memory display unit 1911. In the area 1912, the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific effect to be executed is displayed. Further, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect is the same as the story reach advance notice effect, and when the specific effect is executed, the background of the dialogue (area 1912) is displayed according to the advance notice type.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in the pseudo continuous variation of the present embodiment. First, when the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, the special symbol synchronization effect accompanied by the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the left symbol and the right symbol are in this order. The decorative design stops. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period is reached, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect for prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is started. Further, when the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed in synchronization with the pressing operation unit suggestion effect, a line prompting the operation of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 (in the example shown in FIG. 66, "press the button !!"). Is displayed in the background (area 1912) according to the notice type. The pseudo-continuous notice effect that is executed in synchronization with the press operation unit suggestion effect is the same as the story reach notice effect, and the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in blue corresponding to the notice 1 and corresponds to the notice 2. Then, the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in green, the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in red corresponding to the notice 3, and the background part of the dialogue in the area 1912 corresponds to the notice 4. Is displayed in a leopard pattern, and the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in rainbow colors corresponding to the notice 5. Further, when the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is not executed in synchronization with the pressing operation unit suggestion effect (default), the background portion of the dialogue in the area 1912 is displayed in white.

When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the continuous symbol indicating that the pseudo continuous variation is executed stops as the middle symbol, and then, as shown in FIG. As shown in 66 (D), a specific effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the re-variation of the decorative symbol is started, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started as in FIG. 66 (B) (FIG. 66 (F)). At this time, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated by the time the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer expires, after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 66 (G)), the specific effect is not executed. Re-variation is initiated (FIG. 66 (H)). After that, when the final decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (FIG. 66 (I)), the reach effect is executed (FIG. 66 (J)). In the example shown in FIG. 66 (J), the SP reach 3 that can be executed is executed even when the pseudo continuous variation is not executed, but the reach executed at this time may be an effect specialized for the pseudo continuous effect. good. Further, the pressing operation unit suggestion effect may be executed before the final temporary stop, and the reach effect may be executed after the specific effect is executed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 66, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period (until the time is up for the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer), a specific effect is executed. Although the re-variation is started without the lapse of a predetermined time, the specific effect may be executed. Further, in this case, if it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the pseudo-continuous notice effect according to the notice type determined in synchronization with the specific effect executed after the lapse of a predetermined time is executed. However, if the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period (until the time is up for the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period measurement timer), a specific effect is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Even if it is decided to execute the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect of what is executed (related to the advance notice type and the like stored in the predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140). An image required for deleting (destroying) information or executing a pseudo-continuous notice effect according to the notice type based on information about the notice type etc. stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area). It is also possible not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the h part of the area 1912 is displayed in the default white color) by not performing the process of setting the effect information related to the data, the sound data, and the like. ..

[12-4. Pseudo continuous fluctuation timing chart]
Further, the execution timing of the effect in the pseudo continuous fluctuation will be described. 67 and 68 are diagrams for explaining the timing of controlling the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment.

FIG. 67 is a timing chart corresponding to the production example shown in FIG. 66. FIG. 67A shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

First, at time t10, a game ball wins a prize at the starting ports 2101, 1022, and the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 (the special symbol (identification symbol) on the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186). Variable display, variable display game) is started. At this time, the special symbol variation pattern command, the special symbol symbol type command, and the like are transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 receives a command and selects a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect.

When a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (start of the special symbol synchronization effect), the operation input acceptance period of the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 (pressing operation unit operation reception) is performed at the timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. The possible period) is started, and the pressing operation unit suggestion effect is started (time t11). Further, if it is decided to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect in synchronization with the pressing operation unit suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect according to the determined advance notice type is executed. The period during which the operation of the pressing operation unit can be accepted continues until the time t13 when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is completed. At this time, the scenario effect to be executed is drawn by lottery (step S1634 in FIG. 63).

Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period (time t12), the lottery is performed at the timing when the temporary stop of the decorative symbol ends (the timing when the re-variation of the decorative symbol starts, time t14). Perform a specific effect based on the scenario. Further, if it is decided to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect according to the determined advance notice type is executed.

Similarly, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, the specific effect of scenario 3 is executed at time t15, and the specific effect of scenario 4 is executed at time t16. After that, when the final temporary stop is completed, the reach effect is started (time t17). Then, after the end of the reach effect, the variation of the decorative symbol ends in synchronization with the end of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, and the finalized symbol is displayed (time t18).

Subsequently, a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated during the period when the pressing operation unit operation can be accepted will be described. FIG. 67B shows a case where the execution of the corresponding specific effect is skipped without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the first pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), since the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated at the timing of time t12, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the scenario 1 are not executed. Since the lower limit of the random number is not reset for the specific effect executed at the timing of time t15, all the candidate scenarios can be selected.

Next, a modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a timing chart of a modified example of the pseudo continuous fluctuation in the present embodiment. FIG. 68C shows a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the pressing operation unit operation acceptable period.

In the example shown in FIG. 68 (C), even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect are executed at the start of the re-variation of the decorative symbol. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect are executed before the start of the maximum fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect at the timing operated by the player, and it is possible to execute the effect without a sense of discomfort.

In the example shown in FIG. 68 (D), when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect are skipped without being executed, and the pressing operation unit is operated during the subsequent operation acceptable period of the pressing operation unit. When 405 is operated, a plurality of specific effects including skipped specific effects and pseudo-continuous notice effects and pseudo-continuous notice effects are executed.

With reference to FIG. 68 (D), a case where the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period without operating the pressing operation unit 405 during the second pressing operation unit operation acceptable period. Shown. In this case, the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed at the time of the second temporary stop are skipped, but at the time of the third temporary stop, not only the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed at the time of the third temporary stop are skipped. , The skipped portion (which was supposed to be executed at the time of the second temporary stop) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are also executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 68 (D), the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the scenario 1 are executed at the first temporary stop, and the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed at the second temporary stop are skipped. .. When the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the third pressing operation unit operation acceptable period, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect including the skipped portion are selected. After the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the selected specific effect (scenario 3, scenario 4) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are sequentially executed.

As described above, in the pseudo continuous effect in the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous effect is executed in advance by setting the range (lower limit value) of the random number for drawing the subsequent specific effect based on the random number drawn for the preceding specific effect. It is possible to prevent a random number in which an effect having an expectation level lower than the expected degree of the specific effect to be performed is executed. Also, in the pseudo-continuous notice effect that is executed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous effect, the range (lower limit value) of the random number that draws the subsequent pseudo-continuous notice effect is set based on the random number that draws the preceding pseudo-continuous notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a random number that is lower than the expected degree of the pseudo-continuous notice effect that is executed in advance.

Further, since the player can select whether or not to execute the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect by operating the pressing operation unit 405, the effect can be executed according to the player's intention.

[12-5. Modification example of pseudo continuous fluctuation]
[12-5-1. Example of variation of scenario selection timing]
In the example of the pseudo continuous variation described above, the press operation unit operable period is set according to the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and the scenario for executing the specific effect at the timing when the press operation unit 405 is operated is selected. At the same time, it was decided whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed. On the other hand, as in the story reach described above, all the scenarios for executing the specific effect are selected at the start of the fluctuation, and whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect, and is executed. A case of determining the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect will be described.

When all scenarios are selected at the start of fluctuation, and whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect in synchronization with the specific effect, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed are determined. In the pseudo continuous fluctuation setting process (step S1550, FIG. 62) executed in the effect setting process (FIG. 49), the same process as in steps S1533 to S1538 in the story reach setting process (FIG. 53) is executed. With this configuration, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started with all the scenarios corresponding to the specific effect and the advance type of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect executed in synchronization with the specific effect set. ..

As described above, when all the scenarios and the advance notice type of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect to be executed in synchronization with the specific effect are determined at the start of the fluctuation, the press operation unit 405 is set during the press operation unit operable period. When the operation is not performed, the execution of the specific effect that was not executed and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect may be restricted (skipped). In this case, when the pressing operation unit 405 is operated during the later operationable period of the pressing operation unit, the re-lottery is executed to reselect the scenario, and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed in synchronization with the specific effect. You may decide whether or not to do it, and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed. Further, the regulated specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be skipped without executing the re-lottery, and the preset specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed. A specific effect based on a skipped scenario after the restriction is lifted and a pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed.

In addition, when the final specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed, even if the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect that should be executed in the middle are regulated, the final effect is given to the player. In order to notify the degree of expectation, a specific effect based on the scenario determined at the start of the fluctuation and a pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the notice type determined at the start of the fluctuation may be executed.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect may be executed after the elapse of a predetermined period.

[12-5-2. Modification example of specific production execution conditions]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect is executed at the timing of the temporary stop of the decorative symbol by operating the pressing operation unit 405, but the specific effect may be executed based on other conditions. good.

The other conditions are, for example, a combination of symbols that are fixedly stopped and do not appear at the time of loss, that is, when stopped at the so-called chance eye, a specific effect and a pseudo-continuous notice are given without operating the pressing operation unit 405. The effect may be executed (at this time, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 may not be required). Further, the specific effect and the pseudo-ream advance notice effect may be executed when the decorative symbol is stopped by a combination including the pseudo-ream dedicated symbol that appears only at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo-ream instead of the chance eye. In this case, the final stop symbol does not have to be the pseudo-ream-dedicated symbol, but any of the displayed symbol strings may stop at the pseudo-ream-dedicated symbol. In addition, a specific effect and a pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed when the game is stopped at a normal lost pattern (so-called lost eye).

Further, the timing of executing the specific effect is when a predetermined movable body (movable accessory) operates, a predetermined light emitting body (lamp, LED, etc.) emits light, or a predetermined sound is output. May be good.

Further, the operation unit 400 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a dial operation unit 401 in addition to the pressing operation unit 405. As described above, the dial operation unit 401 is configured to be rotatable left and right. For example, when the dial is rotated at a predetermined timing, the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect may be executed. .. Further, the mode of the effect may be changed according to the rotation direction of the dial.

As another operating means, for example, a lever-type operating unit such as a control stick is arranged in front of the upper plate 301, and the specific effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed by operating the lever at a predetermined timing. You may do it.

Further, a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the player can input operations from this touch panel. By operating the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, a specific effect and a pseudo-continuous notice effect can be obtained. You may want to do it. Further, in order to enable various inputs on the touch panel, not only the selection of the specific effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect but also the effect mode of the specific effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be changed depending on the operation content.

In addition to the contact-type operating means as described above, a non-contact-type operating means such as a non-contact sensor may be used. For example, a non-contact sensor may be arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the player may perform an operation such as holding a hand in front of the gaming board to execute the specific effect and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect.

[13. Kinsoku Shori]
Next, prohibition processing will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special figure synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, the above-mentioned advance notice effect (story reach advance notice effect) , Pseudo-continuous notice production) When the notice production according to a specific notice type (in this example, "leopard pattern" of notice 4) is executed twice or more, the big hit (excluding the big hit without a ball) It is controlled so that it may be). Further, as described above, in the special figure synchronization effect, the advance notice effect according to the special advance notice type (in this example, the "rainbow color" of the advance notice 5) is controlled so as to be a big hit if the advance notice effect is executed even once. ing.

In addition, when the notice 4 is executed two or more times (not limited to two times) as a specific notice type in the special figure synchronization effect, the big hit (excluding the big hit without a ball) is always excluded. If a specific notice type is executed a predetermined number of times within the same (once) special figure synchronization effect, the specific notice type may not be executed any more. ..

Next, control of prohibition processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of prohibition processing in the present embodiment. The prohibition processing is executed in the processing of step S1560 of the decorative symbol variation processing (FIG. 52).

When the prohibition processing is executed, the effect control program first determines whether or not the result of the winning determination is a big hit, that is, whether or not the special lottery result is a miss or a small hit (step S1561). In addition, when the result of the winning judgment is a big hit without a ball, whether or not to select the notice determination table at the time of loss and execute the notice effect, and the content of the notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode). When it is configured to determine, even if it is determined as a big hit in step S1561, if it is a big hit without a ball, it is determined that it is not a big hit (determined as YES in step S1561), and in step S1562 You may proceed to the process.

Next, the effect control program determines the advance notice type stored in the predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140, and responds to the stored advance notice type. It is determined whether or not the effect display executed in the variable display game corresponds to the prohibition condition by executing the advance notice effect (step S1562).

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special symbol synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 is based on "notice 4". Since the notice effect is controlled so as to be a big hit when it is executed twice or more, it is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. When the notice type is "notice 4", the same (once) special figure synchronization effect is performed even though the result of the winning judgment is not a big hit by executing the notice effect based on this "notice 4". If it is determined that the forbidden condition that the advance notice effect based on "notice 4" is executed twice is satisfied (YES in step S1562), a predetermined storage area allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 is satisfied. Information (notice information) related to the notice type and the like stored in (notice mode storage area) is deleted (destroyed) (step S1563).

By deleting (discarding) the information (notice information) related to the notice type and the like stored in the predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 in step S1563, the notice is given. Since the production will not be executed, it is possible to correct the situation that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. As a result, even though the result of the winning judgment is not a big hit, the advance notice effect based on "Notice 4" is executed twice or more within the same (once) special figure synchronization effect, and it is possible to avoid confusing the player. ..

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, after the advance notice effect according to the high-expected advance notice type is executed in the story reach advance notice effect and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, the advance notice effect according to the low-expected advance notice type is executed. Although it is designed to prevent the occurrence of "falling down", if the information related to the notice type etc. (notice information) stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibited condition, it is before that. Even the execution of the advance notice effect according to the advance notice type equivalent to the advance notice type of the advance notice effect that is executed at the time of inserting the effect or is scheduled to be executed at the time of inserting the effect before that is restricted. In other words, if the information related to the notice type, etc. (notice information) stored in the notice mode storage area falls under the prohibition condition, even the execution of the notice effect that maintains the jackpot expectation is restricted. It has become. In addition, the allocation of judgment values in the above-mentioned story reach notice determination table and pseudo continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table at the time of deviation is set so that the jackpot expectation in the previously executed advance notice effect can be easily maintained. Specifically, the story reach is such that the number of judgment values assigned in the order of notice 1 to notice 4 is reduced, that is, more judgment values are assigned to the notice type with low jackpot expectation. Of the advance notice determination table and the pseudo continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table, the table at the time of deviation may be configured.

In addition, as described above, in the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach, the story reach notice is given to each of all the scenarios (specific production) executed in the story reach in advance (before the story reach is started). The presence or absence of the effect and the content of the story reach notice effect (notice type, notice mode) to be executed are determined, and the decision result (information related to the notice type, etc. (notice information)) is assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. It is designed to be stored in a predetermined storage area (preliminary mode storage area). Notice mode Notice information for a plurality of scenarios is stored in the storage area (separately for each scenario or in the form of collecting all scenarios). In this case, if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied (YES in step S1562), the effect control program includes not only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area but also the notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition. Delete all notice information including. As a result, it is possible to prevent the story reach notice effect from being performed in synchronization with the story reach, and it is possible to correct the state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. That is, in the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach, not only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area but also all the notice information including the notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition are collected. Correct the situation that does not meet the prohibition conditions by deleting it.

On the other hand, in the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, each time the pressing operation unit (effect button) 405 is operated, for one scenario (specific effect) executed in response to the operation. Whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed are determined, and the determination result (information related to the notice type, etc. (notice information)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is designed to store in a predetermined storage area (preliminary mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Notice mode The notice information for one scenario is stored in the storage area. In this case, if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied (YES in step S1562), the effect control program deletes only the advance notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the advance notice mode storage area. As a result, while preventing the pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition from being executed, the pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the notice information not corresponding to the prohibition condition can be executed and does not correspond to the prohibition condition. The condition can be corrected. That is, in the pseudo-continuous notice production performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, only the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted to correct the state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition, and the prohibition condition is corrected. Execute a pseudo-continuous notice production based on the notice information that does not correspond to.

In this way, when the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach falls under the prohibition condition, it corresponds to the prohibition condition by deleting all the notice information including the notice information that does not correspond to the prohibition condition at once. If the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation falls under the prohibition condition, some of the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect corresponding to the prohibition condition is corrected. By deleting only the notice information, it is corrected to the state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation falls under the prohibition condition, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed later is deleted from the notice information corresponding to the prohibition condition. Not limited to this, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed first may be deleted. In this case, as in the case of story reach, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the content of the pseudo-continuous notice effect to be executed for each of the scenarios (specific effects) executed by the pseudo-continuous change before the start of the pseudo-continuous change. (Notice type, notice mode) is determined, and the determination result (information related to the notice type, etc. (notice information)) is stored in a predetermined storage area (notice mode storage area) assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. When the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is stored and the forbidden condition is met, the notice information corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect executed first is stored in order until the forbidden condition is not met. The notice information stored in the area may be deleted. In addition, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the pseudo-ream advance notice effect performed in synchronization with the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (YES in step S1562), one of the advance notice information corresponding to the pseudo-ream advance notice effect corresponding to the prohibition condition. After deleting only the notice information of the section, a predetermined notice information may be set (replaced with the predetermined notice information) according to the number of inserted effects in place of the deleted notice information. ..

In addition, if the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted to correct the state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect (story reach advance notice effect, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect) corresponding to the prohibition condition from being executed. Further, in the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 57 (A)) and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table (FIG. 57 (B)), the largest number of determination values are assigned to "no notice". That is, when the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition, the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area has the highest appearance frequency (selection ratio) of the lottery result ( It can be paraphrased by replacing it with (notice information). When the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition in this way, the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is used as the most frequently appearing lottery result (notice information). By replacing, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the replacement has been performed, and it is possible to execute the variable effect without discomfort.

If it is determined that the prohibition condition is applicable in the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach (YES in step S1562), the prohibition condition is applicable to the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area. After deleting all the notice information including not only the notice information to be performed but also the notice information that does not correspond to the prohibited conditions, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for each specific effect, and the content of the story reach notice effect to be executed (notice). The type and the notice mode) are determined and the notice information packaged according to the number of inserted effects is set in the notice mode storage area (the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area is a predetermined package). It may be replaced with the converted notice information). Specifically, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the story reach in which the number of inserted effects is 3, (YES in step S1562), the third time without executing the story reach notice effect at the time of inserting the first and second effects. It may be replaced with the notice information packaged so as to indicate that the notice 3 is executed at the time of inserting the effect of. Further, in this case, different notice information may be set according to the winning type. For example, if the special lottery result is out of order (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the third production is performed. Set the packaged notice information so that the notice 1 is executed at the time of insertion, and if the special lottery result is a non-probability change big hit (may be limited to the big hit with a ball), the notice is given at the time of the third production insertion. Set the packaged notice information to execute 2, and if the special lottery result is a probabilistic jackpot (may be limited to a jackpot with a ball), execute notice 3 when inserting the third production. You may want to set the notice information packaged as such. In addition, when it is determined that the prohibited conditions are met, the notice information with the lowest suggestion (probability) among the plurality of packaged notice information (for example, the special lottery result is missed (when the third production is inserted). Only the notice type that executes notice 1) may be replaced. The degree of expectation (possibility) and the frequency of appearance have an inverse proportional relationship, and a production having a low degree of expectation has a high frequency of appearance and a high degree of expectation. Has a low frequency of appearance. By replacing it with the notice information with the lowest expectation that it suggests when it is judged that the prohibition condition is met, the notice type with the highest frequency of appearance will be executed, so the production can be replaced. It is difficult for the player to grasp what has been done. Also, when it is determined that the prohibited condition is met, it is set as the notice information newly set (replaced with the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area). Since the notice type, etc. is packaged so that it does not correspond to the prohibited condition, it is not necessary to judge whether or not it corresponds to the prohibited condition when replacing it based on the judgment that it corresponds to the prohibited condition. Since the processing is simpler than the case where the advance notice type to be replaced for each specific effect is determined while considering whether or not the conditions are met, the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, when it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied in the story reach notice production performed in synchronization with the story reach (YES in step S1562), after deleting all the notice information stored in the notice mode storage area, the notice information is deleted. As the notice information set according to the number of inserted effects, the notice information according to the most frequently appearing notice type may be replaced. For example, a separate table for drawing whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect is provided, and the story reach notice effect is provided in the story reach notice setting process executed in the process of step S1560 of the story reach setting process (FIG. 53). When it is executed and a lottery is drawn, it corresponds to the prohibited condition when it is configured to determine the advance notice type using a plurality of advance notice determination tables provided according to the number of times the specific effect is executed in the story reach. If it is determined that (YES in step S1562), when the story reach advance notice effect is executed, the appearance frequency is set to be the highest in the notice determination table according to the number of times the lottery is drawn (the most judgment values are set). It may be replaced with the notice type (allocated). As a result, when the type of story reach notice effect scheduled to be executed is replaced with the notice type that appears most frequently when the prohibition condition is met, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know that the replacement has been performed. It is possible to perform variable effects without any discomfort.

As described above, whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect for all the specific effects to be executed according to the number of times the specific effect is executed (the number of inserted effects) during the variable display in the story reach, and In the case of configuring to determine one of a plurality of (packaged) notice types (notice modes) indicating the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed, the above-mentioned prohibition The lowest expectation of big hits among multiple notice types (notice modes) provided according to the number of executions of a specific effect (number of effect insertions) executed during variable display in story reach when conditions are met. It may be replaced with the notice type.

In addition, although it is usually replaced with a predetermined notice type when the above-mentioned prohibited conditions are met, even if the prohibited conditions are met, it is decided in advance if the predetermined specific conditions are satisfied. It may be replaced with a notice type different from the notice type that is given. For example, if it is determined in the story reach notice production that the prohibited conditions are met and the special lottery result is out of order, the notice mode is stored. At least a part of the notice information corresponding to the notice type corresponding to the prohibited condition stored in the area is determined in advance for the notice type (the story reach notice effect may not be executed, and it is the biggest hit. All notice information including notice information corresponding to the notice type that does not correspond to the prohibited conditions stored in the notice mode storage area can be determined in advance. The notice type is packaged notice information (the story reach notice effect may not be executed, or it may be replaced with the notice information with the lowest expectation, which is the biggest hit among the packaged notice information. If the special lottery result is a small hit or a big hit without a ball, at least of the notice information corresponding to the notice type corresponding to the prohibited condition stored in the notice mode storage area. All of the notice information including the notice type corresponding to the notice type that does not correspond to the prohibition condition stored in the notice mode storage area, such as replacing a part with the notice type that is expected to be a big hit than the predetermined notice type. The notice information may be replaced with the notice information in which the predetermined notice type has a higher expectation of being a big hit according to the packaged notice type than the packaged notice information.

Then, the effect control program executes the advance notice execution setting process for setting the effect information related to the image data, the sound data, and the like necessary for executing the story reach advance notice effect (step S1574). The effect information set in the advance notice execution setting process is the lamp after executing the lamp data creation process (step S1028), the display data creation process (step S1030), and the sound data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit steady processing. The effect is actually executed by the data output process (step S1012), the display data output process (step S1016), and the sound data creation process (step S1018).

As described above, the gaming machine of this example is a story reach advance notice effect executed in one special figure synchronization effect, and all the advance notice information when the advance notice information stored in the advance notice mode storage area corresponds to the prohibition condition. Alternatively, by deleting a part of the notice information or replacing all or part of the notice information with the notice information according to another notice type, the condition that does not correspond to the prohibition condition is corrected. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the start memory display unit 1911 performs a hold display of the start memory separately from the special figure synchronization effect, and by displaying this hold display in a mode different from the usual mode, a special symbol can be displayed. A look-ahead effect (also called a hold notice) that suggests the result of the variable display is executed before the variable display is started. However, the mode of look-ahead effect is not subject to the above-mentioned prohibition conditions. That is, in the special figure tuning effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, if the prohibition condition is met, the state is corrected to a state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition, but the start memory display unit 1911 is subject to the prohibition condition. Is excluded from. Therefore, in the special figure synchronization effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the effect (notice effect) that corresponds to the prohibition condition when executed is the mode (notice type) and the start memory of the advance notice effect. It can be performed according to the mode of the look-ahead effect executed by the display unit 1911. As a result, an effect (notice effect) that would not normally be performed is executed, and the player can be expected.

[13. Special figure look-ahead production]
Next, a look-ahead effect that suggests the result of the variable display will be described before the variable display of the special symbol is started. The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment is a normal look-ahead effect that is executed at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening, and a start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect until the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect is digested. It is configured to be feasible with a continuous look-ahead effect that suggests the expectation of variable display based on it.

In the normal look-ahead effect, for example, the hold display of the start memory of the look-ahead target is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode. Further, in the continuous look-ahead effect, each time the start memory that is variablely displayed in advance is digested, the mode of the hold display of the start memory to be read ahead is changed. In addition to changing the mode of the hold display of the start memory, the specific effect in the story reach or the pseudo continuous fluctuation may be executed at the timing of changing the mode of the hold display.

[13-1. Special figure look-ahead effect control processing]
First, the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027) of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 42) will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure look-ahead effect control process in the present embodiment. In the special figure look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing the normal look-ahead effect and a process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect are executed. The special figure look-ahead effect control process may be executed when a look-ahead effect command is received in the receive command analysis process.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the reception command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the look-ahead effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is "No"), the look-ahead effect is not executed, so the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is "Yes"), the effect control program is usually based on the content of the look-ahead effect command corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target. The mode of the look-ahead effect is selected (step S2002). At this time, the mode of the normal look-ahead effect may be changed only when the reach effect is executed in the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead target.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a normal look-ahead effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the normal look-ahead effect, when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening, the mode of the hold display is set regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of hold start memories is 0. Change at a predetermined rate.

When the look-ahead effect is not executed, the hold display is "white", but when the look-ahead effect is normally executed, the display color of the hold display is determined according to the degree of expectation that the hold display will be a big hit from "white". It changes to "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" with the probability of (Fig. 71). In addition, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the color of the hold display is set to change with a higher probability than in the case of a miss.

When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a normal look-ahead effect setting process for setting the color to be changed to the selected color (step S2003). In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, a setting is made to change the display color of the hold display, and a setting is made to output a sound effect, turn on a lamp, or move an accessory at the timing of the change. After that, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S2004). As a result, it is possible to prevent the normal look-ahead effect from being executed a plurality of times for one start memory.

In the present embodiment, the continuous look-ahead effect is executed only when the normal look-ahead effect is executed. That is, the player usually has a sense of expectation by the look-ahead effect at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening, and when the mode of the hold display further changes as the game progresses, the player has a greater sense of expectation. It should be noted that the continuous look-ahead effect may be executed without executing the normal look-ahead effect. For example, when the number of reserved start memories is large, the continuous look-ahead effect is executed without executing the normal look-ahead effect. You may do so. In particular, it is effective when the upper start port and the lower start port can always win a prize, and these start ports are configured to be able to win a prize alternately and up to eight start memories can be held.

The effect control program determines whether or not to execute the normal look-ahead effect (step S2005). When the normal look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2005 is "No"), that is, when the color of the hold display remains "white" and does not change, the special figure look-ahead effect is not executed and the special figure look-ahead effect is not executed. The effect control process is terminated.

When the normal look-ahead effect is executed (the result of step S2005 is "Yes"), the effect control program is a continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (based on various information included in the look-ahead effect command received from the main control board 4100). The corresponding information is acquired from FIG. 71) (step S2006), and whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect is drawn by lottery (step S2007). Various types of information include, for example, fluctuation patterns and winning information. Further, the starting memory number (the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation) is included in the special symbol memory command transmitted at the same timing as the look-ahead effect command. As a result of the lottery, if the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed (the result of step S2007 is "No"), the special figure look-ahead effect control process is terminated.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous look-ahead effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. Since the mode of the hold display changes over a plurality of fluctuations, the continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment is executed when the number of start storages is 3 or more. Further, when the result of the variation display based on the start memory is a big hit (or a high possibility of a big hit), the continuous look-ahead effect is easily executed, and the number of continuous look-aheads is likely to increase. ..

The lottery for whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect (step S2007) is based on the probability of executing the continuous look-ahead effect. Further, when the start memory of the look-ahead target does not reach, the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed. The unit of the continuous look-ahead effect execution probability in FIG. 72 is%.

When executing the continuous look-ahead effect (the result of step S2007 is "Yes"), the effect control program sets the effect selection pattern acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table (step S2008). Further, the number of continuous look-ahead effects executed is set in the number of remaining effects (number of remaining look-aheads) (step S2009).

Further, the effect control program sets a range (upper limit value and lower limit value) of random numbers for selecting the continuous look-ahead effect to a specified value (initial value) (step S2010). Finally, the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2011), and the special figure look-ahead effect control process is terminated.

[13-2. Continuous look-ahead effect setting process]
Next, the continuous look-ahead effect setting process executed in the decorative symbol variation process will be described. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is a process of controlling the look-ahead effect for the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect. In the present embodiment, as described above, the hold display of the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is changed at the timing when the start memory in which the variable display game is executed is executed prior to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. Execute the process.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous look-ahead effect setting process of the present embodiment. The continuous look-ahead effect setting process is executed in the process of step S1524 of the effect setting process (FIG. 51).

The effect control program first determines whether or not the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2101). The continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the process of step S2011 of the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 70) when the continuous look-ahead effect is executed. If the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2101 is "No"), the continuous look-ahead effect is not executed, so the continuous look-ahead effect process ends.

On the other hand, when the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2101 is "Yes"), the effect control program acquires a random number value for selecting the look-ahead effect (specific effect) to be executed (). Step S2102). Further, based on the acquired random number value, the mode of the specific effect is acquired from the continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table (FIG. 74) (step S2103), and the specific effect setting process is executed (step S2104). In the specific effect setting process, settings are made to execute the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect).

In the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) in the present embodiment, the shape of the hold display is changed according to the degree of expectation. Further, since the continuous look-ahead effect is normally executed while the look-ahead effect is executed, the shape is controlled to change when the color of the hold display is changed. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a continuous look-ahead effect mode selection table for selecting a mode of hold display in the continuous look-ahead effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 74, in the present embodiment, six types of specific effects are defined according to the degree of expectation, and a range of random numbers is set for each specific effect. For example, when the effect selection pattern is "Pattern 2", the specific effect 1 is when the random number value is 0 to 200, the specific effect 2 is when the random value is 201 to 400, ..., 901 to 1000. Specific effect 6 is selected.

Further, in the pattern 1, the specific effect 5 and the specific effect 6 having a high degree of expectation are not selected, and in the pattern 1, all the specific effects can be executed, but the specific effect having a high degree of expectation is specified. The range of random numbers is set so that the effect is difficult to select. On the other hand, in the pattern 4, the specific effect 1 having a low expectation is not selected, and the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 having a high expectation are easily selected. As shown in FIG. 72, the pattern 1 is selected with a fluctuation pattern having a low degree of expectation, while the pattern 4 is selected when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit.

If the same shape as the previously executed continuous look-ahead effect is selected, the game may proceed as it is as if the continuous look-ahead effect was not executed, or the hold display blinks temporarily. The player may be notified that the continuous look-ahead effect has been executed.

Here, the explanation returns to the explanation of the flowchart of FIG. 73. When the specific effect setting process is executed, the effect control program subtracts 1 from the number of remaining effects (step S2105). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining effects has become 0, that is, whether or not all the continuous look-ahead effects (specific effects) have been executed (step S2106). When the number of remaining effects becomes 0 (the result of step S2106 is "Yes"), all the continuous look-ahead effects have been executed, so the continuous look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S2107). Finally, the lower limit of the random number is set to a specified value (for example, “0”) (step S2108), and the continuous look-ahead effect setting process is completed.

On the other hand, in the effect control program, when the number of remaining effects is not 0 (the result of step S2106 is "No"), that is, when all the continuous look-ahead effects are not executed, the random number value acquired in the process of step S2102. The lower limit of the random number is set based on (step S2109). For example, when the random number value extracted by the effect selection pattern "Pattern 3" is "350", the specific effect 3 is selected, so that the specific effect 1 or the specific effect 2 is not selected, that is, it falls. Set the lower limit value “201” when the specific effect 3 is selected as the lower limit value of the random number so that As a result, when the next continuous look-ahead effect is executed, a random number value in the range of "201" to "1000" is extracted in the process of step S2102, and the effect is higher than the effect executed in advance in the continuous look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent an effect with a low degree of expectation from being executed.

In the continuous look-ahead effect, the random number extraction range may be adjusted so that the hold display changes stepwise. For example, when the effect selection pattern is "Pattern 3" and the number of continuous look-ahead executions is "3", the lower limit value is set to "0" and the upper limit value is set to "0" so that the first specified effect to be executed is 1 to 4. It is set to 600 ". At this time, if the specific effect to be executed first is 2, the lower limit value of the random number value for selecting the specific effect to be executed the second time is set to "201", and the upper limit value is set to "800". That is, the specific effect is set so that any one of 3 to 5 is selected. By doing so, the specific effect is executed so that the degree of expectation is always high (so that it will rise), and even if the specific effect 5 is selected, the specific effect 6 will be performed in the next (last) specific effect. Will be selected, and it will be possible to prevent the downfall and execute a specific effect so that the degree of expectation will surely increase. It should be noted that if the setting is made so as to surely rise, it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of the player, and therefore, it may be controlled so as to surely rise only in the case of a big hit.

[13-3. Production example]
By the above processing, it is possible to select a specific effect in the continuous look-ahead effect so that a downfall does not occur. Subsequently, a specific example of the continuous look-ahead effect will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition of the continuous look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

FIG. 75A shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in a state in which the look-ahead effect is not executed. FIG. 75 (B) shows a state in which the normal look-ahead effect is executed as a result of the game ball winning a prize in the upper start opening 2101 in the state of FIG. 75 (A). After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the decorative design is confirmed and displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the reserved start memory is digested and the next variation display is started. At this time, the first continuous look-ahead effect is executed, and the specific effect 3 is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 75 (D) to 75 (G), each time the reserved start memory is digested and the variable display is started, the specific effect 4 and the specific effect 5 are executed, and the shape of the hold display is changed. Change.

Then, when the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect is digested and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started (FIG. 75 (H)), reach occurs (FIG. 75 (I)). In the example shown in FIG. 75 (J), SP reach 3 is executed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by making it possible to execute the look-ahead effect based on the progress of the game (changing the effect mode), the player's expectation is further increased in the process of continuing the game. Is possible. In particular, for a variable display game that is executed after the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect) is executed at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening until the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect is digested. There is a risk that the game interest will decline, but by changing the mode of the hold display each time the variable display game is executed, it will be possible to continuously raise the expectations of the player, and the game interest will decline. Can be prevented.

[13-4. Deformation example of special figure look-ahead effect]
[13-4-1. Deformation example of special figure look-ahead effect control]
It is not necessary to distinguish between the normal look-ahead effect and the continuous look-ahead effect. In the above-described embodiment, in the first look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect), the mode (color) of the hold display changes at the timing when the game ball wins the start opening, and in the second and subsequent look-ahead effects (continuous look-ahead effect), the hold is held. The mode (shape) of the hold display changes at the time of digestion. In this case, only whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect is determined at the timing when the game ball wins a prize at the start port, and the content of the specific effect (change in the hold display) is drawn at the time of hold digestion.

On the other hand, as in story reach, the contents (scenarios) of all specific effects may be drawn by lottery at the time of starting prize. For example, in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027 in FIG. 42, FIG. 70), all specific effects are drawn by lottery. In the process of setting the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1408) of the received command analysis process (FIG. 48), the contents of all the specific effects may be drawn by lottery.

Further, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less at the time of starting winning and the variable display is being executed, the number of executions of the continuous look-ahead effect is set to 1, and when the number of reserved memories is 3 or more, the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table ( The mode of the continuous look-ahead effect may be selected based on FIG. 72) (the continuous look-ahead effect lottery table may cover all patterns). In this case, the color of the hold display may be changed in the first look-ahead effect (same as the normal look-ahead effect), the shape may be changed from the beginning, or both the color and the shape may be changed. ..

Further, when the number of times of the look-ahead effect is one, that is, when the mode of the hold display changes at the time of the start winning, and then the mode of the hold display does not change, the effect may be a very low expectation. That is, the higher the number of changes in the holding mode, the higher the expectation of the jackpot, but in the case of only one change, the expectation may be low.

[13-4-2. Special Figure 2 Priority Digestion]
In the present embodiment, when the game ball wins in the upper start opening 2101, the first special symbol variation display game in which the special symbol is variablely displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185, and the game ball wins in the lower start opening 2102. In this case, the second special symbol variation display game in which the special symbol is variablely displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the lower start opening 2102, the variable display is started with priority over the case where the game ball wins the upper start port 2101. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect is executed based on the start memory in which the game ball wins in the upper start opening 2101, if the game ball wins in the lower start port 2102, the digestion of the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is delayed. Become.

In this way, when the variable display of the look-ahead target is interrupted, the specific effect executed immediately before may be continuously executed. Further, the specific effect based on the lottery scenario may be executed, and the specific effect to be executed last may be continuously executed for the interrupted amount.

In addition, the scenario may be reselected by the amount interrupted. At this time, a range of random numbers may be set corresponding to the scenario corresponding to the specific production that has already been executed, and a new scenario may be drawn so that the production content does not fall into the wrong direction, or the executed scenario is ignored. , The range of random numbers may be initialized and a new scenario may be drawn.

Further, when the game ball wins the lower start opening 2102, the specific effect may be executed only for the variable display corresponding to the start memory won in the upper start port 2101 without executing the specific effect.

Further, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are configured to be executable at the same time, for example, a specific effect is performed according to the execution of the first special figure variation display game. Just do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the variation display of the normal symbol is won, the start port solenoid 2105 is driven to open and close the movable piece 2106, so that the game ball can win a prize in the lower start port 2102. However, when the game ball alternately wins the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start opening 2102, and the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are executed alternately, an interruption occurs. Does not occur. In this case, control may be performed in the same manner as when only the first special figure variation display game is executed, but since the variation display for up to eight times can be reserved, these variation display games are not distinguished and are long. It is possible to execute a series of specific effects over a period of time, and it is possible to execute a more varied effect.

[13-4-3. Deformation example of special figure look-ahead effect mode]
In the embodiment described above, the mode of the hold display has been changed, but the background of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side may be changed. Specifically, the background color may be simply changed, or a structure or a natural object having a special aspect may be arranged behind the decorative pattern or the character. For example, a cloud may be displayed, the color of the cloud may be changed according to the expectation of a big hit, or lightning may be generated from the cloud.

[14. Random number lottery variant]
In the production example described above, the range for generating random numbers (upper limit value, lower limit value) was changed to prevent the falling, but other methods may be used to prevent the falling. good. The case where the pattern 1 of the effect selection pattern shown in FIG. 54 is selected will be described.

For example, the specific effect is selected by converting the extracted random number value by processing such as calculation without changing the random number generation range (that is, keeping the range from "0" to "1000"). You may. A specific example will be described below.

In the present invention, when "scenario 3" is selected as the specific effect, the specific effect executed immediately before is one of "scenario 1" to "scenario 3". Explaining such an example, in order to prevent the downfall, random numbers are set to be generated in the range of "0" to "600". Here, a random number in the range of "0" to "1000" is generated, and by multiplying by "600/1000" (rounded down to the nearest whole number), a random number in the range of "0" to "600" is generated. be able to.

Also, when generating random numbers in the range of "0" to "600", the remainder obtained by dividing the random numbers generated in the range of "0" to "1000" by "600" can be used as the random number value. good. In this case, since the values from "0" to "400" are duplicated, the variation of the random numbers is biased. For example, when the division result is 1 or more, the difference between the random number generation range and the overlapping range. By adding (here 600-400 = 200) to the random number value (that is, changing the overlap range from "200" to "600"), it is set to increase the possibility of executing a scenario with high expectation. It may be possible to raise the expectation of the player.

As yet another example, when generating random numbers in the range of "0" to "1000", random numbers generated in the range of "0" to "100" are generated 10 times, and each generated random number is generated. May be added to generate a random number in the range of "0" to "1000". With this configuration, by setting and adding the number of random number generations according to the range of random numbers to be generated, it is possible to set various ranges of random numbers while keeping the range of random numbers actually generated constant. can. Further, the random numbers may be multiplied by a predetermined number instead of being generated a predetermined number of times. For example, a random number in the range of "0" to "1000" may be generated by multiplying the random number generated in the range of "0" to "100" by 10. Although fine distribution is not possible, the same result can be obtained if the random numbers are uniform random numbers. Further, the random number extraction method may be changed according to the effect selection pattern, and the accuracy of the random numbers extracted may be adjusted as necessary.

Further, after extracting the random number for selecting the specific effect to be executed first, the random number for selecting the subsequent specific effect may be added to the random number for selecting the preceding specific effect. .. At this time, the random number generation range may be adjusted so that the random number value after addition does not exceed the upper limit value, or the excess portion of the upper limit value may be truncated.

[15. Allowance of falling (breaking the law)]
[15-1. Production example]
In the embodiment described above, the specific effect to be continuously executed is configured to prevent a decline in the expectation of the effect content. However, even if the downfall does not occur, the result of the variable display does not always become a big hit. In addition, when a specific effect with a high degree of expectation is first executed, the flow of the subsequent effect is predicted by the player, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game cannot be enhanced.

Therefore, a modified example will be described in which, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the falling edge is allowed and the effect pattern that is normally executed is changed. The condition for allowing the downfall may be determined according to, for example, a gaming state such as a probability state of the winning probability of the variable display or an operating state (time saving state) of the ordinary electric accessory. Specifically, the random number generation range is not adjusted when there is a high probability that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (high probability state, probability variation state), or when it is in a state advantageous to the player such as a time saving state. Random numbers may be allowed. On the contrary, in a state other than the probabilistic state or the time saving state, which is not advantageous to the player, the random number generation range may not be adjusted so that the random number may be reduced.

Further, only when the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the downfall may be allowed. That is, the player can recognize that the big hit is confirmed when the effect of lowering the expectation is executed and the player is disappointed. In this way, by increasing the degree of expectation when an effect that is not executed in the normal flow is executed, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to allow the downfall (with a low probability) even in the normal time while controlling the downfall so that it is difficult to occur, and increase the probability that the downfall will occur when the result of the variable display game is a big hit.

Further, it may be decided whether or not to allow the downfall according to the fluctuation pattern rather than the result of the fluctuation display game. For example, when a reach with high reliability (for example, story reach, SP reach 3 after pseudo-continuous production, etc.) occurs, the reach may be more likely to occur than the reach with low reliability. On the other hand, when a reach with a low reliability occurs, a drop may occur more easily than a reach with a high reliability. In this way, instead of the result of the variable display game, the admissibility of the downfall may correspond to the production content.

Further, the reliability of the fluctuation pattern when the result of the fluctuation display game is a big hit may allow a decline. For example, a high-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) is set so that a downfall is more likely to occur than a low-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) is selected. On the contrary, the low-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) may be more likely to cause a downturn than the high-reliability fluctuation pattern (reach) is selected.

In addition, when the unclear mode that does not clearly notify whether the probability state of the variable display game is the normal state or the probability change state is executed after the jackpot game is completed, a random number is provided only when the actual probability state is the normal state. You may adjust the generation range of. In this case, if the probability state is a probabilistic state, the probability of winning the variable display game is high even if a downfall occurs, and as a result, the player is less likely to be discouraged. Because it does not, the story reach production is less likely to discourage the player. On the contrary, only in the case of the probabilistic state, the random number generation range may be adjusted to prevent the random number from falling. With this configuration, the player can recognize that the current probability state is the normal state (low probability) due to the occurrence of the downfall.

Further, in the obscure mode, the probability state may be explicitly notified when a downfall occurs without adjusting the random number generation range. Further, it may be possible to set two types of modes, a mode in which the random number generation range is adjusted to the obscure mode and a mode in which the random number generation range is not adjusted. Further, the player may be able to select these modes. With such a configuration, the player can select whether to make the probability state recognizable at an early stage or to perform an effect with less disappointment.

[15-2. Control example]
Next, the control that allows the downfall will be described. In the present embodiment, the random number generation range has been adjusted in order to prevent the fall, but a specific procedure will be described.

For example, when allowing a fall, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number is reset to the specified value (initial value). In this case, there is a possibility that the downfall does not occur, but when the downfall is generated as a notification effect of a big hit, the range of random numbers may be set so as to always generate the downfall. Further, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the random number may be set to return to a predetermined step instead of the specified value (initial value). With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the probability of occurrence and the stage of the downfall.

Further, as described above, random numbers having a biased distribution may be generated by generating random numbers in a predetermined range in duplicate. In this case, the probability of occurrence of the fall (rise) may be adjusted by setting the overlapping range as the range in which the fall occurs, or conversely, the range in which the rise occurs. Further, the range of random numbers generated by setting the initial value, the minimum value, and the maximum value of the random number counter may be adjusted.

Further, as described above, the counter for updating the random number is added one by one at a predetermined timing (timer interrupt processing), but the numerical value to be added may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, 1 is added in the normal game state, and another random number is extracted and added in the high probability state (probability change state). By changing the method of updating the random number counter in this way, it is possible to change the frequency of occurrence of the downfall according to the game state.

[16. Processing when power is cut off]
Here, in the reception command analysis processing, the processing when a power-off command or a power-on command is received will be described.

As described above, the power cut command is transmitted to the main control board 4100 when the power supply from the outside is stopped. Before the power failure command is transmitted, as described above, the power failure warning signal is output from the main control board 4100, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is executed to perform processing such as command backup. Is executed.

The peripheral control board 4140 executes a process according to the mode in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, when the power supply from the outside is stopped and the power supply to the entire gaming machine (main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4140) is cut off, the power supply is cut off only to the main control board 4100. In this case, the power supply may be cut off only to the peripheral control board 4140. Each case will be described below.

[16-1. When the power is cut off only on the peripheral control board]
When the power supply is cut off only to the peripheral control board 4140 due to factors such as poor wiring contact, the game control on the main control board 4100 is continued. At this time, if the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not lost, that is, if the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c match the stored contents of the backup management target work area 4150ca, hot start is performed as described above. To resume (continue) the production control.

Even when the effect control is restarted by the hot start, the peripheral control board 4140 may notify that the power supply is temporarily cut off. The power supply cutoff notification may be, for example, displaying an initial screen when the power is turned on, or displaying a screen notifying that the power is cut off.

Further, when the power supply is cut off, there is a possibility that a gap may occur between the time measurement (timer) on the main control board 4100 and the time measurement on the peripheral control board 4140. For example, there is a possibility that the elapsed time from the start of fluctuation of the variation display of the special symbol on the main control board 4100 and the variation display of the decorative symbol on the peripheral control board 4140 may be different from each other. In this case, since the variable display of the decorative symbol ends later, the special figure synchronization effect may be ended when the special figure synchronization effect end command is received. If it is necessary to display the initial symbol at the start of fluctuation, the default lost symbol or a predetermined symbol is displayed. The predetermined symbol may be a symbol other than the jackpot, and may be a symbol dedicated to the occurrence of a power failure.

In addition, if the power is cut off during the execution of the big hit game, the time measurement deviation may be corrected at the timing when the big winning opening closing display command or the ending command indicating the transition to the next round is received.

When the stored contents of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are lost, the value 0 is written in the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the effect control is restarted as a cold start.

If an effect (variation pattern) accompanied by a specific effect is executed at the timing when the effect control is restarted as a cold start, the execution of a series of specific effects is interrupted. On the other hand, in the case of a hot start, the production may be continued as it is as long as the progress information of the specific production is retained, or the lottery result of the scenario may be discarded and the scenario may be re-lottered. When drawing a scenario at the time of executing each specific effect, draw a lottery for the scenario for executing the subsequent specific effect until the timing when all the last specific effect ends so that the contents of each specific effect do not conflict. Instead, the specific effect may not be executed. In either case of cold start or hot start, the execution of the specific effect may be stopped when the power supply of the peripheral control board is cut off.

[16-2. When the power is cut off only on the main control board]
When only the power supply of the main control board 4100 is cut off and the power supply of the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied, the power failure command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 as described above. At this time, the peripheral control board 4140 switches the effect display during execution to the screen display (abnormality notification screen) when the power is cut off. After that, when the power supply to the main control board 4100 is resumed, a command to notify the game state is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 together with the power-on command. The command for notifying the game status may be integrated with the power-on command.

When the gaming state notified together with the power-on command matches the effect content currently being executed, the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the effect screen and continues the effect as it is. At this time, if it is not possible to return to the effect screen only with the information notified together with the power-on command, an effect that the player does not misunderstand is executed. For example, the case where it is not possible to return to the effect being executed is, for example, a state in which the stop result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, or a round effect during a big hit game. The effect that the player does not misunderstand is, for example, that all the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner at high speed during the variable display of the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbols dedicated to an abnormality are displayed. Further, if the jackpot game is in progress, it is sufficient to display only that the jackpot game is in progress without displaying the number of rounds.

If the game state and the display state currently being produced are different, the abnormality notification screen is displayed. Then, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. The abnormality notification screen may be displayed to such an extent that the player can recognize that an abnormality has occurred. At this time, if the fluctuation display is executed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continuing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery). ) Is canceled.

[16-3. When the power of the main control board and peripheral control board is cut off]
When the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, power is supplied to the main control board 4100 from the backup power supply, and the contents stored in the RAM are retained for a predetermined period. As described above, the power failure command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140.

After that, when power is supplied to the gaming machine again, the main control board 4100 transmits a power-on command to the peripheral control board 4140. At this time, the main control board 4100 notifies the peripheral control board 4140 of the game state, and when the game is not stopped as in the waiting state for customers, the peripheral control board 4140 notifies that the power supply has been cut off. After executing, switch to a production that does not give a misunderstanding to the player such as waiting for customers. After that, when a normal command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal state is restored by performing an effect corresponding to the received command. In this case, if the variation display is executed in the pseudo continuous variation or the variation pattern of the story reach, the execution of the specific effect is stopped, and even if the continuous look-ahead effect is continuing, the subsequent execution of the specific effect (scenario lottery). ) Is canceled.

[16-4. Summary when power is cut off]
With the above configuration, even if the power supply to the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is cut off, whether to continue the execution of the fluctuation display with the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous fluctuation or the story reach. Whether or not it can be judged appropriately.

[17. Pre-reading production]
Next, the normal symbol type look-ahead effect (normal symbol look-ahead effect) will be described. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is received from the main control board 4100, the normal symbol look-ahead effect is executed. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal map look-ahead effect control process in the present embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a normal map look-ahead effect of the present embodiment.

When the normal figure look-ahead effect control process is started, the effect control program first determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2201). As described above, the normal symbol look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the received command analysis process (FIG. 48) when the normal symbol type look-ahead effect command is received. If the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2201 is "No"), the effect control program does not execute the normal figure look-ahead effect, and thus ends this process.

On the other hand, when the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2201 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect is currently being executed (step). S2202). When the normal map look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is "Yes"), the processes after step S2207 are executed in order to continue the running normal figure look-ahead effect.

When the effect control program is not executing the normal figure look-ahead effect (the result of step S2202 is "No"), the effect control program determines whether or not the execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect is satisfied (step S2203). The execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect determines whether or not it can be satisfied according to, for example, a game state or an execution status of another effect. When the execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect is not satisfied (the result of step S2203 is "No"), the effect control program clears the normal figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2209), and ends this process.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing of executing the normal drawing look-ahead effect is not particularly limited. For example, it may be executed independently of the execution state of the variation display of the decorative symbol (special symbol synchronization effect) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 77 (A), even while the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variablely displayed, the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed as shown in FIG. 77 (B). Further, the execution timing of the normal drawing look-ahead effect may be the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 77, the normal figure look-ahead effect may be executed in parallel even while the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed.

On the other hand, even when a command (ordinary symbol type look-ahead effect command) instructing execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect is received from the main control board from the 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect can be executed. Is possible. For example, when an effect that the player pays attention to (for example, a reach effect) is being executed, or when a special effect is executed during the execution of the normal figure look-ahead effect, the execution condition of the normal figure look-ahead effect is set. As a failure, the execution of the normal map look-ahead effect may be restricted. In addition, when the pre-reading notice effect of the special lottery is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the normal lottery is regulated by the processing on the peripheral control board 4140 side so that the advance notice effect of a plurality of types is not executed at the same time. May be good.

In the normal figure look-ahead effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), a star-shaped normal figure look-ahead effect area is displayed in the upper right part of the screen, and the symbols are variedly displayed within the area ( FIG. 77 (C). Then, as a result of the variable display, the symbols corresponding to the hits (“win”, FIG. 77 (D)) and the symbols corresponding to the misses (“-”, FIG. 77 (E)) are stopped and displayed, and the result of the general drawing lottery. Is notified. The player may launch the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102 provided with the movable piece 2106 when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped in the normal drawing look-ahead effect area. Further, when the symbol indicating the hit is stopped, the player may be notified to shoot the game ball aiming at the lower starting port 2102. At this time, in the effect control program, in order to secure the time for the player to aim and fire at the lower start port 2102, the result of the normal drawing look-ahead effect is obtained before the predetermined time when the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction. Control to be displayed.

Further, when a plurality of movable modes of the movable piece 2106 are set depending on the type of winning of the ordinary lottery, it is usually used according to the advantage for the player (easiness of winning the game ball to the lower starting port 2102). It may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the figure look-ahead effect is satisfied. For example, as a movable mode of the movable piece 2106, the time during which the movable piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction is set to be long (long opening), or the number of times the movable piece 2106 is moved is set to be large. At this time, the normal drawing look-ahead notice effect may be executed only in the case of a movable mode that is advantageous to the player such as long release.

In addition, a plurality of types of symbols other than hits and misses may be defined, and stop symbols may be set according to the degree of expectation that a normal lottery will be a big hit. Further, the stop symbol may correspond to the movable mode of the movable piece 2106. As a result of winning the regular drawing lottery, if the movable piece 2106 moves in the long open mode, a stop symbol is set to notify as a hit, and in the short open mode, it is neither a hit nor a miss. It may be a stop symbol of.

In the case of a time saving state in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short, it is not necessary to execute the normal symbol type look-ahead effect. This is because the winning probability is high, the profit for the player is small even if the result of the ordinary lottery is announced, and the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short, so that it is not possible to secure sufficient time to execute the normal map look-ahead effect. That is, it may be possible to determine whether or not the normal map look-ahead effect can be executed according to the game state.

When the execution condition of the normal drawing look-ahead effect is satisfied (the result of step S2203 is “Yes”), the effect control program displays the normal figure look-ahead effect area (step S2204). Then, in order to set the time for variable display of the symbol in the normal figure look-ahead effect, the normal figure look-ahead effect timer is set (step S2205), and the normal figure look-ahead effect is started (step S2206). The time until the time-up of the normal-figure look-ahead effect timer may be fixed, may depend on the game state, may depend on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, or may be a combination of these.

Further, when the normal figure look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2202 is “yes”), the effect control program determines whether or not the normal figure look-ahead effect timer has timed up (step S2207). If the normal figure look-ahead effect timer has not timed up (the result of step S2207 is "no"), this process ends in order to continue the normal figure look-ahead effect.

On the other hand, when the normal figure look-ahead effect timer is timed up (the result of step S2207 is "Yes"), the effect control program stops and displays the changing symbol in order to display the look-ahead result of the normal figure lottery (the result of step S2207 is "Yes"). Step S2208). Finally, the normal map look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S2209), and this process is terminated.

Although the above-described normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, it may be executed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 470 on the upper plate side. In addition to displaying on the display device, the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed by multiple effect devices such as operating a movable accessory, emitting a light emitting body such as a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker. It may be possible, or it may be a combination of these a plurality of effect devices. When executing a general drawing look-ahead effect in combination with a plurality of production devices, in addition to the case where the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed by a plurality of production devices at the same time, the normal drawing look-ahead effect is executed by one of the multiple production devices. You may. For example, when performing a normal map look-ahead effect on the screen display and audio output, a state in which the normal figure look-ahead effect cannot be executed by the screen display (for example, when an error is being notified or another (look-ahead) effect is being executed, etc. In the case of), the execution of the effect by the display device is restricted, and only the normal map look-ahead effect by the audio output is executed. Further, instead of restricting the execution of the normal drawing look-ahead effect, the normal drawing look-ahead effect may be executed in an overlapping manner with other effects. In this case, the production mode of the normal drawing look-ahead effect is changed. For example, the screen display may be made semi-transparent to execute the normal drawing look-ahead effect, or the volume may be reduced to output the sound.

[18. Effect, etc.]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, by dynamically changing the range of the random number value according to the game state or the like, continuous production without contradiction is executed, such as preventing the fall without complicating the control. can do.

Further, if a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied during the execution of the effect including the specific effect, the flag for executing the specific effect and the initial value of the random number are cleared. The predetermined initialization condition is, for example, a case where the power supply is cut off during the execution of the effect and the effect cannot be continued.

In addition, if there is a start prize that generates a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the production, or if there is a start prize that generates a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a rare fluctuation pattern with high expectations), the game Even when the transition condition of the state (game mode) is satisfied, the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped, and the flag and the initial value of the random number are cleared.

For example, in the specification in which the variation display based on the game ball winning the lower start port 2102 described above is executed with priority over the case where the upper start port 2101 is won, the result of the variation display executed with priority is When the above initialization conditions such as a big hit are satisfied, the flag and the initial value of the random number are cleared, and the execution of the effect including the specific effect is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being interrupted due to the occurrence of an event such as the occurrence of a big hit or a change in the gaming state, and being restarted in a halfway state.

Further, the present invention may be applied not only to prevent falling down, but also to execute an effect that is continuously executed and has an order.

For example, it may be applied when selecting an effect for each round in a jackpot game. In this case, the effect of each round may be selected at the start of the big hit game, or the effect content may be selected every predetermined number of rounds (for example, every 3 rounds in the big hit game of 15 rounds). Further, the common effect may be executed up to the middle round (for example, 7 rounds out of 15 rounds), and the effect content may be selected for the subsequent rounds (for example, 8 rounds or later). At this time, for example, when the start memory of the variable display game executed after the end of the big hit game includes the start memory that becomes the big hit, the effect pattern in which the special effect is easily executed is selected, and the continuous big hit is performed. You may suggest (notify) to the player that there is.

As described above, the feature of the present invention is that it is possible to execute a variety of effects without complicating control by dynamically changing the range of random numbers according to a game state or the like. Become.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to hold a notice lottery table that covers all the selection patterns of the specific effect in the story reach, the pseudo continuous variation, and the continuous look-ahead effect, the storage capacity is increased due to the diversification of the effect. Can be suppressed.

[19. Prohibition of special figure look-ahead (judgment / directing)]
Here, the control in which the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 prohibits the special figure look-ahead determination and the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure look-ahead effect will be described.

[19-1. Control on the main control board side (prohibition of special figure look-ahead judgment)]
[19-1-1. command]
First, FIGS. 78 and 79 are examples of a table for explaining the detailed contents of the command related to the special figure look-ahead among the commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 78 is an example of a table showing an example of command modification of “8-10. Other” described above in FIG. FIG. 79 shows the special figure 1 symbol type command of “8-1. Special figure 1 synchronization effect related” and the special figure 2 symbol type command of “8-2. Special figure 2 synchronization effect related” described in FIG. This is an example of a table showing details. The description of the same configuration as described above will be omitted.

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect. Here, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the mode value is set to "01H", and the lower start is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the mouth 2102, the mode value is set to "02H".

Next, in the above (FIG. 16), the timing at which the special symbol 1 hold number changes (the timing at which the hold number (starting memory number) due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start port 2101 increases, or the upper special symbol display 1185 When the special symbol 1 storage command is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a at the timing of the decrease in the number of reserved symbols due to the variable display) and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is further increased (when the game ball is won in the upper start port 2101), the special symbol is used. 1 A command to specify the number of holds was sent. Therefore, the special symbol 1 storage command has 0 to 4 hold number information, and the mode values "00H" to "04H" are set accordingly. Further, as described above, the special symbol 1 hold number designation command notifies not only the hold number at the time of increase but also the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect. The special symbol 1 hold number specification command represents "pre-reading" information when the upper 4 bits of the mode value are "1", and "no pre-reading" information when the upper bit of the mode value is "0". Represents. Then, when the special symbol 1 hold number designation command is "pre-reading", it also plays a role of instructing the start of the pre-reading effect. The special symbol 2 storage command and the special symbol 2 hold number designation command have the same configuration except that the status value is different from that of the special symbol 1.

On the other hand, in the modified example (FIG. 78), the command to be transmitted differs depending on whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 is decreased (at the start of fluctuation) or increased (at the time of winning the starting opening). Special symbol 1 When the number of reserved balls decreases (the timing when the number of reserved balls decreases due to the fluctuation display on the upper special symbol display 1185), that is, at the start timing of the fluctuation display, the special symbol 1 storage command at the start of fluctuation indicating the number of reserved balls Is sent. Therefore, the variable start special symbol 1 storage command transmitted when the number of holds decreases has 0 to 3 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values "01H" to "04H" are set accordingly. On the other hand, at the timing when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is increased (the timing of the increase in the number of reserved balls due to the winning of the game ball to the upper start port 2101), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command at the time of pre-reading indicating the number of reserved balls and the presence or absence of pre-reading is transmitted. NS. Therefore, the look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command transmitted when the number of holds increases has 1 to 4 pieces of hold number information, and the mode values "* 2H" to "* 5H" are set accordingly. The upper 4 bits "*" of the mode value are set to "0" in the case of "no look-ahead" and "1" in the case of "pre-reading". The setting of the presence / absence information of the look-ahead is performed in the process of step S242 (“no look-ahead”) and the process of step S280 (“with look-ahead”) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 80) described later. The special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead and the above-mentioned special symbol 1 hold number specification command (FIG. 16) have the same information to be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a, but the status value and mode value that make up the command are set. different. The special symbol 2 storage command at the start of fluctuation and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command at the time of pre-reading have the same configuration except that the status value is different from that of the special symbol 1.

In addition, only when there is look-ahead (that is, when the start address of the mode value of the special symbol 1 (2) memory look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead is "1"), the symbol type look-ahead command, the variable pattern look-ahead command, and the variable type A look-ahead command is sent. In the modified example, the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is also transmitted. Therefore, in the modified example, a process of setting the transmission of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is added to the above-mentioned memory look-ahead process (FIG. 24) when the look-ahead determination is performed.

Here, the memory look-ahead processing of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage look-ahead processing of the modified example. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the above-mentioned storage look-ahead process (FIG. 24), and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as described above, the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is transmitted when the look-ahead determination is performed. Therefore, the main control MPU4100a sets the command indicating the look-ahead result (symbol type look-ahead command, variation pattern look-ahead command, and variation type look-ahead command) in the command buffer for transmitting to the peripheral control board 4140 (steps S268 to S278). Occasionally, a variable distribution table information look-ahead command is also set in the command buffer (steps S279a and S279b). The variable distribution table information look-ahead command will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. Further, the command acquired in the process of step S284 is the target of the special symbol storage look-ahead command (FIG. 78) at the time of look-ahead of the corresponding special figure. As described above, the read-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command has the same information as the special symbol 1 (2) hold number designation command (FIG. 16).

Return to FIG. 78. The symbol type look-ahead command is missed, specified jackpot, or non-missing, depending on the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S250, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S252, FIG. 28) of the memory look-ahead process (FIG. 80). This command specifies a specific jackpot. Similarly, depending on the results of the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S510, FIG. 27) and the special symbol determination process (step S512, FIG. 28) of the special symbol / flag setting process (FIG. 34) executed at the start of fluctuation. As a command for designating a miss, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot, there is a special figure 1 (2) symbol type command. The detailed configuration of these commands will be described.

The mode values of the symbol type look-ahead command (FIG. 78) and the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command (FIG. 79) are associated with missed or jackpot symbol types 0 to 48. In the symbol type look-ahead command, the mode value "01H" is set for the loss, and the mode values "02H" to "46H" are set for each symbol type for the jackpot symbol types 0 to 44 indicating the specific jackpot, and are not specified. The same mode value "50H" is set for the jackpot symbol types 45 to 48 indicating the jackpot (small hit). On the other hand, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command, mode values "47H" to "50H" are set for each symbol type even for the jackpot symbol types 45 to 48 indicating a non-specific jackpot (small hit). ..

As described above, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command is a command for designating an effect pattern (variation pattern). The variation pattern value (variation pattern number) indicating the variation pattern is obtained by using the variation pattern random number 1 and the variation pattern random number 2 in the variation pattern selection determination process (steps S258, FIG. 29, FIG. 30) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 80). Set using. The random number 1 for the variation pattern is used to set the effect mode from a plurality of random numbers 1, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is used to set the detailed effect content (effect pattern) according to the set effect mode.

The variation type look-ahead command is a command that specifies information (added value of time) as to whether or not to perform pseudo continuous variation with respect to the set variation pattern. The time addition value is set by using the variation type random number in the variation type determination process (step S262, FIG. 31) of the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 80). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is not performed by the random number for the fluctuation type, the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern is maintained. If it is determined that the random number for the variation type performs pseudo-continuous variation, the random number for the variation type is used for the pseudo-continuous according to the variation type (any of types A to C) corresponding to the set variation pattern. The number of times the variation is executed (1 to 3 times) is determined. At this time, since the time addition value is associated with the execution number of the pseudo continuous fluctuations, the time addition value is set by determining the execution number for each type. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern is extended.

The variation distribution table information look-ahead command is a command for designating a variation distribution table used when determining a variation pattern in the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) at the start of variation. As described above, the variable distribution table includes the large hit variation selection information type table (big hit distribution table) used in the case of a big hit (“yes” in step S350), and the case of performing a reach effect although it is out of the question (step). The reach variation selection information status table (reach distribution table) used for (“yes”) in S372, and the loss variation selection information table (“no”) used when the reach effect is not performed due to the loss (“no” in step S372). Non-reach distribution table) is provided. The variable distribution table at the start of the variation set in the variable distribution table information look-ahead command includes a reach or non-reach distribution table in addition to the above-mentioned three distribution tables. The reach or non-reach distribution table has a hold (starting memory) having a reach judgment random number that may change the result of the reach judgment as to whether or not to perform the reach effect when the number of reserved balls changes between the look-ahead time and the fluctuation start time. ) Is the table set for.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the merit of transmitting the variable distribution table information look-ahead command as one of the look-ahead commands will be described. FIG. 81 is an example of a simplified flowchart in which (A) the variation pattern selection determination process (FIG. 29) is simplified by focusing on the above-mentioned variation distribution table, and (B) corresponds to the correlation between the reach determination random number and the comparison value. This is an example of the reach execution enable / disable table.

As shown in FIG. 81 (A), in the variation pattern selection determination process, a jackpot determination is performed by a random number for jackpot determination, and when a jackpot is reached, a jackpot distribution table is set. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination is incorrect, the reach determination is performed by the reach determination random number. In the reach judgment, the reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach judgment random number is smaller than the comparison value (reach threshold value), and the non-reach distribution table is set when the value of the reach judgment random number is larger than the comparison value. Set. After that, the effect mode is determined from the variation pattern random number 1 using the set table, and the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern random number 2 in the effect mode.

In the reach determination, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the comparison value (reach threshold value) fluctuates according to the number of reserved balls at the time of determination. Here, it is assumed that the comparison value when the number of reserved balls at the time of determination is four is 10, and the comparison value is added by 10 each time the number of reserved balls decreases by one. In this case, when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, the reach distribution table is set regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is 0 to 4. However, when the reach determination random number is 10 to 49, the reach determination result differs depending on the number of reserved balls, so either the reach distribution table or the non-reach distribution table is set. Further, when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, the non-reach distribution table is always set regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Therefore, the mode value of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is "01H" when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, "02H" when the reach determination random number is 0 to 9, and the reach determination random number is a random number. When is 10 to 49, "03H" is set, and when the reach determination random number is 50 or more, "04H" is set.

In this way, by transmitting the variation distribution table information look-ahead command from the main control board to the peripheral control board at the time of look-ahead, the peripheral control MPU4150a can hold the mode value of "03H" at the time of look-ahead and at the start of change. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect control in consideration of the possibility that the result of the reach determination may differ when the number of reserved balls fluctuates. In the memory look-ahead process (FIG. 80), when the mode value of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command is "03H", the process of setting the hold command reference value when there is look-ahead in step S280 is not performed, and the step The state in which the hold command reference value at the time of no look-ahead in S242 is set may be maintained. That is, the main control MPU 4100a performs the look-ahead determination but does not transmit the look-ahead determination result information to the peripheral control board 4140. In this case, the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command of "no look-ahead" is transmitted to the peripheral control board. As a result, the look-ahead effect control by the peripheral control MPU4150a can be simplified, and the control load can be reduced.

As described above, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board when the game ball is won in the upper start port 2101 (lower start port 2102) is reserved. Information on whether or not to perform a look-ahead effect (“with look-ahead” or “without look-ahead”) is included together with the number of balls information. Then, the symbol type look-ahead command, the variation pattern look-ahead command, the variation type look-ahead command, and the variation distribution table information look-ahead command are transmitted only in the case of "pre-reading", and these pre-reading commands are not transmitted in the case of "no look-ahead". .. The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 can perform the look-ahead effect without waiting for the reception of other look-ahead commands as long as it receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) transmitted when the start opening winning is generated. It is possible to determine whether or not it is an execution target. When the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) of "pre-reading" (when it receives specific game information), it receives another look-ahead command or a special figure. After executing the process (first pre-processing) of setting the look-ahead effect execution flag (step S1408 of the reception command analysis process, FIG. 48) to satisfy the execution condition of the look-ahead effect, the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. Step S1027 of 42, the second preprocessing) is executed, and the look-ahead effect is executed. Further, when the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command (special symbol 2 storage look-ahead command) of "no look-ahead", it can grasp that the look-ahead command is not transmitted later. It is possible to immediately determine the non-execution of the look-ahead effect (the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set) without waiting for the reception of the look-ahead command. That is, in this case, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the special figure look-ahead effect control process (FIG. 70) which is the second pre-process without executing the first pre-process, and the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set. Since this has not been done (“No” in step S2001), the special figure look-ahead effect control process is terminated without executing the look-ahead effect.

If the pre-reading determination is not performed on the main control board 4100 side (when the "no pre-reading" command is received), the command required for setting the pre-reading effect on the peripheral control board 4140 (symbol type pre-reading command, variation). Since the pattern look-ahead command, variable type look-ahead command, and variable distribution table information look-ahead command) are not transmitted, the command sent at the start opening winning (look-ahead) is simplified, and the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the look-ahead effect. It is possible to prevent erroneous control. Further, as will be described later, the main control board 4100 having a backup function for a defect of the look-ahead effect that may occur in the progress of the game can transmit the presence / absence information of the look-ahead to the peripheral control board 4140, so that an appropriate look-ahead effect can be obtained. Execution can be facilitated. The condition in which "no look-ahead" is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command (that is, the condition in which the main control board 4100 prohibits look-ahead) will be described later with reference to FIG. 82.

In addition, the symbol type look-ahead command sent at the start opening winning (look-ahead) is set to a different mode value for each specific jackpot type for the specific jackpot (first specific result) that accompanies the operation of the condition device. A common mode value is set for the non-specific jackpot (second specific result), which is a so-called small hit that does not involve the operation of the device, regardless of the type of non-specific jackpot. That is, when the pre-reading determination result is a specific jackpot (first specific result), the main control board 4100 issues a command (first specific information) in which a mode value is set so that the type of the specific jackpot can be specified. However, when the pre-reading determination result is a non-specific jackpot (second specific result), a command (second specific information) with a unified mode value is transmitted so that the non-specific jackpot type cannot be specified. Then, in the special figure 1 (2) symbol type command transmitted at the start of fluctuation, a different mode value is set for each type of non-specific jackpot as well as non-specific jackpot. As a result, regarding the hold that is a non-specific big hit, which is a so-called small hit, the type of the hold cannot be grasped even by the peripheral control board 4140 until the start of the fluctuation. There is no risk of being read. Therefore, it is possible to provide a look-ahead effect that appropriately raises the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

For example, it is provided with a V-zone winning structure of two types of blades in which a large winning opening is opened with a small hit and a big hit is generated by a game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V zone) in the large winning opening. In pachinko gaming machines, the ease of winning a game ball in a specific area differs depending on the type of small hit. That is, whether or not a big hit can be derived depends on the type of small hit. In addition, since the type of big hit to be derived differs depending on the type of small hit, the benefits (time reduction number of times, etc.) that the player can obtain are different. Therefore, the type information of the small hit becomes more important for the player. If a pre-reading effect that can grasp the type of small hit is performed in such a pachinko gaming machine, the player can make a distinction according to the type of small hit and easily aim for a big hit or a specific privilege. .. Therefore, by preventing the look-ahead effect according to the small hit type from being executed, the player is not given any predictable element (information) until the fluctuation is started. As a result, the fairness of the game can be maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[19-1-2. Pre-reading judgment prohibition condition]
FIG. 82 is an example of a table showing the conditions under which the main control board 4100 of the modified example (A) prohibits pre-reading, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the effect of prohibiting pre-reading at the time of transition to the state.

In the above-mentioned memory look-ahead process (FIG. 80), when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different between the timing of the start winning of the game ball and the timing when the fluctuation is actually started (“yes” in step S244), or , When the look-ahead determination prohibition period is reached even if the table does not change (“yes” in step S246), the look-ahead determination is prohibited. When the look-ahead determination is prohibited, "no look-ahead" is set in the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command.

Here, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is different (“yes” in step S244), specifically, the probability state at the start winning is the probability at the start of fluctuation. There are cases where the state is different from the state, or the time saving state at the start winning is changed to the non-time saving state at the start of fluctuation, and the number of times the probability state and the time saving state are maintained (the number of games) or the number of times the state of the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern is maintained. Indicates when (number of games) corresponds to within 4 times. In this case, pre-reading judgment is prohibited regardless of the type of special symbol.

Further, when the look-ahead determination prohibition period is set (“yes” in step S246), the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper start port (special figure 1 start port) 2101 is a time saving state or the condition device is operated. The case where the game is in a big hit game state or the game state when the game ball is won in the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) 2102 is a non-time saving state or a big hit game state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the game ball winning (occurrence of special symbol 2 hold) to the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) 2102 is limited to the reduced working hours state, the lower start port (special figure 2 start port) The look-ahead determination is prohibited when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the 2102 (starting port) is a non-time saving state (a state that is not a time saving state). In addition, even if the look-ahead determination is performed for the special symbol hold that occurred during the jackpot game, the special symbol is in the normal (low) probability state and the non-time saving state during the jackpot game regardless of the game state up to that point. There is a high possibility that the game state will be different from the game state when the hold is exhausted (the game state after the big hit game), and there is a concern that the accuracy of the look-ahead determination may be reduced. Therefore, even when the game state at the time of winning the game ball to the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (when the special symbol hold occurs) is a big hit game, the look-ahead determination is prohibited.

As shown in FIG. 82 (B), when the state A shifts to the state B after 100 fluctuation digestions, the maintenance count (remaining fluctuation count) of the state A becomes 4 times (97 in the state A). The look-ahead judgment is prohibited at the start of the first fluctuation). Then, the period from the state A to the state B is set as the look-ahead determination prohibition period.

Winning 1 that occurs immediately before the 97th change in state A starts is digested as the 97th change if there is no hold in all the hold memory 1 to 4 areas, but the hold is held in the hold memory 1 to 4 areas. If there is, it is stored in the hold storage 2 to 4 areas as the 2nd to 4th holds, respectively. Then, it is digested as the 98th to 100th fluctuation. Further, if the hold is stored in all the hold storage areas 1 to 4, the prize will be overflowed and the hold will not be stored.

As described above, in the prize 1, the variation is executed in the state A even when the variation digestion is slow. If there is no state transition between the time of winning and the start of fluctuation, the look-ahead information (big hit judgment result, fluctuation pattern, etc.) determined at the time of winning is not different from the fluctuation information determined at the start of fluctuation. However, in the winning 2 generated after the winning 1, that is, after the start of the 97th fluctuation in the state A, the state may shift between the winning and the starting of the fluctuation depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of the winning. .. If the number of reserved balls at the time of winning 2 is 3 and the winning 2 is stored in the holding storage 4 area as the 4th hold, the state A is at the time of winning but the state is B at the start of fluctuation. It becomes. In this case, the look-ahead information determined at the time of winning and the variation information determined at the start of the variation may not be the same because the states on which various determinations are premised are different. In particular, when the state A is more advantageous to the player than the state B, the pre-reading effect based on the pre-reading information has a high expectation, but the fluctuation is actually low. Events can occur that can significantly discourage the player.

Therefore, depending on the number of reserved balls at the time of winning, the period during which the state transition can occur between the time of winning and the time of the start of fluctuation, that is, the 100th fluctuation from the start of the 97th fluctuation in the state A is completed and the state is from the state A. Look-ahead is prohibited during the period until the transition to B. In this way, when the period until the table for selecting the variation pattern is changed is a predetermined period (here, the number of remaining maintenance times of the state is 4 variation), the look-ahead effect is not performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being deteriorated due to the execution of an excessive (deviation) look-ahead effect as compared with the actual fluctuation, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the look-ahead effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, the state transition includes a transition from a high probability state to a normal probability state by ST count digestion, a transition from a time saving state to a non-time saving state by time saving number digestion, and a state transition by effect mode transition according to the number of fluctuations. Be done. When the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern may change between the time of winning (at the time of look-ahead) and the time of the start of fluctuation due to these state transitions, the main control MPU4100a does not perform the look-ahead determination and wins the peripheral control MPU4150a. Only the number of reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the starting port and the information without pre-reading are transmitted.

By performing the look-ahead prohibition control at the time of such a state transition, for example, when a power failure occurs during the time saving state and the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU 4150a conventionally grasps the remaining number of time saving times. Since it cannot be done, it will be possible to execute the look-ahead effect that was prohibited after the power is restored. Specifically, as described above, the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern differs between the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state. Further, the main control MPU 4100a counts the number of fluctuations (time reduction number) in the time reduction state, but the time reduction number information is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 side. Therefore, when the power is restored, the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the information in the time saving state, but cannot grasp the progress status (remaining time saving number of times) in the time saving state. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to prohibit the look-ahead effect when the number of remaining time reductions before the transition from the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state is 4 times or less, the determination cannot be made and the time reduction state ends after the power is restored. I had no choice but to prohibit the look-ahead production. On the other hand, in the present invention, the main control MPU4100a performs read-ahead prohibition control at the time of state transition. The main control MPU4100a does not perform a look-ahead determination when the number of remaining time reductions before the state transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state is 4 times (predetermined number of times) or less. Do not transmit to control board 4140. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a does not perform the look-ahead effect. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can execute the look-ahead effect in the time saving state according to the command transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a even when the power is restored due to the power interruption during the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the period during which the look-ahead effect is not performed, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

Further, in the explanation of the variable distribution table information look-ahead command (FIGS. 78 and 81), when the mode value is "03H", the reach determination result is obtained when the number of reserved balls fluctuates between the look-ahead time and the change start time. I mentioned earlier that it can be different, that is, the table that selects the variation pattern can change. Whether or not the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern may change depending on the result of the reach determination can be determined by the reach determination random number and the upper and lower limits of the comparison value used for the reach determination. The comparison value is set from the special symbol reach probability data and the number of reserved balls. If the special symbol reach probability is predetermined, these values can be acquired by the look-ahead determination without setting the variable distribution table information look-ahead command. In such a case, it may be a target for determining whether or not to be a look-ahead target before executing the look-ahead determination (steps S248 to 280) in the storage look-ahead process (FIG. 80). When both the reach and non-reach distribution tables may be selected, the main control MPU4100a determines that the tables for selecting the variation pattern are different (“yes” in step 244).

Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention has a configuration in which the special symbol 2 hold is preferentially digested over the special symbol 1 hold and can be held and stored up to a maximum of 4 each, the number of times the state is maintained (the number of games) before the transition. Pre-reading is prohibited when the number of times remaining is 4 or less, but it is not limited to this. The number of determination thresholds (here, 4 times) may be changed according to the specifications applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the control that does not execute the special figure look-ahead determination performed on the main control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure look-ahead effect on the peripheral control board side, which will be described later.

[19-2. Control on the peripheral control board side (prohibition of special figure look-ahead effect)]
Subsequently, the control in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 prohibits the special figure look-ahead effect will be described.

In the above description, the special figure look-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has been described, but the look-ahead prohibition control by the main control MPU 4100a alone is not sufficient to prevent the occurrence of a defect related to the look-ahead effect. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers power from a power failure, the main control MPU4100a can grasp the power recovery information (game backup information), but the peripheral control MPU4150a cannot. When the hold exists at the time of the power failure, the main control MPU4100a transmits the information on the number of hold balls to the peripheral control board 4140, but the look-ahead information (result information, fluctuation pattern, etc., etc.) for the number of hold balls is read-ahead. The contents of the command) are not sent. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a cannot execute the look-ahead effect on the hold at the time of the power interruption, which was in the hold state at the time of the power interruption. Further, the look-ahead information for the hold generated after the power is restored is transmitted from the main control MPU4100a, but there is a concern about the execution of the look-ahead effect of the hold generated after the power is restored until all the hold at the time of power failure is exhausted.

For example, when the probability state after power recovery is a high probability state and the hold at the time of power failure includes a hold that becomes a low probability state, the main control MPU4100a determines the look-ahead of the hold that occurred after power recovery. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state changes from the high-probability state to the low-probability state by the variable execution of the corresponding hold. That is, it is a low probability state when the hold generated after the power is restored is exhausted. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold generated after the power is restored is a highly expected effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an out-of-order effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectations. There is a risk of causing a decline in interest.

Therefore, in the first modification, the peripheral control MPU4150a prohibits the look-ahead effect even if the special figure look-ahead command is received until the fluctuation of a predetermined number of times (8 times) is started after the power is turned on including the time of power recovery. The predetermined number of times is the maximum number of hold of special symbol 1 hold and special symbol 2 hold. Further, as described above, the look-ahead effect is also prohibited even when the mode value of the received look-ahead variable distribution table information command is "03H". In the following, with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84, the look-ahead effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU4150a of the first modification will be described.

Further, as a modification 2, if there is an unknown hold (hold when the power is turned off) when the power is turned on, the peripheral control MPU4150a prohibits the look-ahead effect even if the special figure look-ahead command is received until the unknown hold is exhausted. do. Further, in the modification 2, when the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead of "no look-ahead" regardless of the game state, the hold of the command is treated as an unknown hold, and similarly. , The look-ahead effect is prohibited until the unknown hold is exhausted. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88, the look-ahead effect prohibition control by the peripheral control MPU4150a of the second modification will be described.

[19-2-1. Deformation example 1 (when the power is turned on, pre-reading the specified number of fluctuations is prohibited)]
First, the first modification will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the modified example 1. The processes common to the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIG. 48) are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the read-ahead prohibition counting process in the received command analysis process of the first modification.

As described above, in the reception command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transmits various commands from the main control board 4100 to the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 4150c provided in the peripheral control board 4140. Remember. Then, the command with the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer (step S1402), and processing according to the read command is executed.

In the first modification, when the read command is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU4150a sets a flag for prohibiting read-ahead of 8 fluctuations after the command is turned on and a flag corresponding to other commands (yes in step S1421). Step S1422), the received command analysis process is terminated. After the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, first, when the power of the main control board 4100 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands (instruction of production start and game state) according to the game backup information to the peripheral control board 4140. .. Therefore, the first command received by the peripheral control board 4140 after the power is turned on is the power-on state command.

Then, when the read command is a special figure fluctuation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the look-ahead prohibition count process (step S1430). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is completed.

Here, the look-ahead prohibition counting process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. The look-ahead prohibition count process is a process for setting whether or not the special symbol variation display game has been started to be executed eight times after the power is turned on so that it can be determined even when the special figure look-ahead command is received.

First, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the 8-variation look-ahead prohibition flag is set after the input (step S1431). Then, when the flag is set (Yes in step S1431), "8" is set in the look-ahead prohibition count of the subtractive method provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c (step S1432). After that, the 8-variation look-ahead prohibition flag is released after the input (step S1433). As a result, the pre-reading prohibition count setting is completed at the start of the first special symbol variation display game after the power is turned on.

Further, if the peripheral control MPU4150a is not set with the 8-variation look-ahead prohibition flag after being turned on (No in step S1431), the peripheral control MPU4150a shifts to the process of step S1434 described later.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the read-ahead prohibition count is “0” (step S1434). If the look-ahead prohibition count is not "0" (No in step S1434), the look-ahead prohibition count is decremented by 1 to update (step S1435), and the look-ahead prohibition count process ends. On the other hand, when the read-ahead prohibition count is "0" (Yes in step S1434), the look-ahead prohibition count process ends as it is.

It will be explained over time. After the power is turned on, the process of Yes → step S1432 → step S1433 is executed in step S1431 at the start of the first fluctuation, and the look-ahead prohibition count for counting the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is set. After that, in step S1434, the process of No → step S1435 is executed, and the look-ahead prohibition count becomes “7”. After that, at the start of the second fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 → No in step S1434 → Step S1435 is executed, and the look-ahead prohibition count becomes “6”. The same process is repeated at the start of the 3rd to 8th fluctuations, and the look-ahead prohibition count becomes "0" at the start of the 8th fluctuation. Therefore, at the start of the subsequent fluctuation, the process of No in step S1431 → Yes in step S1434 is repeated.

In this way, in the look-ahead prohibition count process, the value of the look-ahead prohibition count and the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on are linked and linked, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the look-ahead prohibition state is in the read-ahead prohibition state. ..

Return to FIG. 83. In the peripheral control MPU4150a, the read command is a special figure look-ahead effect command (pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command, look-ahead symbol type look-ahead command, look-ahead fluctuation pattern look-ahead command, look-ahead change type look-ahead command. , (Yes in step S1407), an ambiguous command (reach or non-reach distribution table) with a status value of "69H" and a mode value of "03H" as the special figure look-ahead effect command. It is determined whether or not the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command) indicating is received (step S1441). Then, when the ambiguous command is received (Yes in step S1441), the look-ahead effect is not executed, so that the reception command analysis process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU4150a does not receive the ambiguous command, that is, when it receives the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command of another mode value (No in step S1441), the look-ahead prohibition count is set. It is determined whether or not it is "0" (step S1442). If the look-ahead prohibition count is not "0" (No in step S1442), the fluctuation has not started eight times after the power is turned on (the look-ahead prohibition state), so the look-ahead effect is not executed. Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the look-ahead prohibition count is "0" (Yes in step S1442), the start of fluctuation eight times after the power is turned on has been completed, so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is instructed to execute the look-ahead effect. The figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S1408), and the reception command analysis process is terminated. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the special figure look-ahead effect in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 70) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to do so.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect prohibition control of the first modification, the look-ahead effect is not performed after the power is turned on until a predetermined number of fluctuation starts, which is the upper limit of the hold, is executed. Therefore, the hold at the time of power failure does not affect the look-ahead effect of the hold that occurs after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to solve the above-mentioned problems, suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game, and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. Further, since the predetermined number of times is set to the total upper limit number of holdings of the special symbol 1 hold and the special symbol 2 hold, the look-ahead effect can be permitted after the hold at the time of power failure is surely exhausted (variation starts).

Although it was stated that the look-ahead effect prohibition control is always performed after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned problem occurs when the power is turned on by recovering the power from the power failure. It does not occur at the time of normal power-on such as executing RAM clear on the main control board 4100. A command that distinguishes between the two is transmitted from the main control board 4100, but the peripheral control board 4140 does not distinguish between the two in order to simplify the process. However, prohibiting the look-ahead effect until the RAM is cleared, which does not cause a problem, may also reduce the interest of the game. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 may determine whether or not the RAM is cleared, and if the RAM is cleared, the look-ahead effect may be permitted. By removing the prohibition on the unnecessary look-ahead effect in this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect.

For example, when the probability state after power recovery is a high probability state and the hold at the time of power failure includes a hold that becomes a low probability state, the main control MPU4100a determines the look-ahead of the hold that occurred after power recovery. It is executed in the high-probability state, but the probability state changes from the high-probability state to the low-probability state by the variable execution of the corresponding hold. That is, it is a low probability state when the hold generated after the power is restored is exhausted. Therefore, even if the pre-reading effect of the hold generated after the power is restored is a highly expected effect, the variable effect of the hold may be an out-of-order effect, which significantly disappoints the player's expectations. There is a risk of causing a decline in interest.

[19-2-2. Deformation example 2 (Unknown hold No look-ahead until digested)]
Next, the second modification will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the received command analysis process of the modified example 2. The processing common to the reception command analysis processing (FIG. 83) of the modification 1 is designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of the input unknown flag setting process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an example of the unknown count process in the received command analysis process of the second modification. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing an example of the special figure look-ahead execution determination process in the received command analysis process of the modified example 2.

As described above, in the modified example 2, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is held when the power of the modified example 1 is turned on (held when the power is cut off), and the special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading without pre-reading from the main control board 4100. The hold when a command is received is treated as an "unknown hold" in which the look-ahead information for executing the look-ahead effect is unknown. Then, the look-ahead production is prohibited until the unknown hold is exhausted.

The reception command analysis process of the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 85. First, when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a power-on state command (Yes in step S1421), the peripheral control MPU4150a sets a read-ahead prohibition (unknown flag) due to unknown hold. The process is executed (step S1450). After that, the flag corresponding to the other command is set (step S1423), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 86, the unknown flag setting process at the time of input (step S1450) will be described. First, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a special figure 1 hold number (unknown hold number) and a special 2 hold number (unknown hold), respectively, in the special 1 unknown count and the special 2 unknown count of the subtractive method provided in the peripheral control RAM 4150c for each special symbol. Number) is set (step S1451). In the case of power recovery from the occurrence of power failure, the number of holds at the time of power failure will be set as the power recovery information (backup game information).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the set special 1 unknown count is “0” (step S1452). Then, when the special 1 unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1452), the special 1 unknown flag indicating the prohibition of the look-ahead effect of the special 1 hold is set (step S1453), and the process proceeds to the process of step S1454. do. On the other hand, when the special 1 unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1452), it means that there is no special 1 unknown hold at the time of power failure, or it is the initial start, not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S1454 without setting the flag.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU4150a determines whether or not the set special 2 unknown count is “0” (step S1454). Then, when the special 2 unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1454), the special 2 unknown flag indicating the prohibition of the look-ahead effect of the special 2 hold is set (step S1455), and the unknown flag setting process at the time of input is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when the special 2 unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1454), it means that there is no special 2 unknown hold at the time of power supply, or it is the initial start, not at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the flag is not set and the unknown flag setting process is terminated at the time of input.

In this way, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a look-ahead effect prohibition setting (unknown flag set) is performed for each special symbol based on the presence or absence of unknown hold according to the state at the time of turning on. Specifically, when there is a hold at the time of power failure, the look-ahead effect prohibition setting of the special symbol to be held at the time of power failure is set.

Return to FIG. 85.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes an unknown count process (step S1460) when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403). After that, the special figure variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, the variation pattern reception flag is set (step S1404), and the reception command analysis process is completed.

Here, the unknown count process (step S1460) will be described with reference to FIG. 87. The unknown count process is a process of determining whether or not to release the read-ahead prohibition (clear the unknown flag) by digesting the unknown hold. Specifically, the unknown count of the special symbol whose fluctuation is to be started is subtracted to make an unknown hold digestion judgment (pre-reading effect prohibition release judgment), and when digested, the unknown flag (look-ahead effect prohibition) is released. ..

The peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the unknown flag of the special symbol to be changed is set (step S1461). Then, if the unknown flag of the target special figure is not set (No in step S1461), the unknown count process ends.

On the other hand, when the unknown flag of the target special figure is set (Yes in step S1461), the peripheral control MPU4150a updates the unknown count of the target special figure by 1 subtraction (step S1462), and updates the target special figure after the update. It is determined whether or not the unknown count in the figure is "0" (step S1463). Then, if the unknown count is not "0" (No in step S1463), the unknown count process ends. On the other hand, when the unknown count is "0" (Yes in step S1463), the unknown flag of the target special figure is cleared (step S1464), and the unknown count process is terminated.

In this way, in the unknown count process, the value of the unknown count and the number of fluctuations until the unknown hold is exhausted (the number of balls held when the unknown hold information is received) are linked and linked to indicate the presence or absence of the unknown hold. When the value of is "0", the unknown flag is cleared. As a result, in the special figure look-ahead execution determination process (step S1470, FIG. 88 in FIG. 85), which will be described later, it is possible to determine whether or not the look-ahead prohibition state is in the state of the unknown flag, and it is determined whether or not the hold look-ahead effect execution that has occurred is possible. I am trying to be able to.

Return to FIG. 85.

By the way, in the modification 2, not only the hold at the time of power failure, but also the hold when the special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead without look-ahead is received from the main control board 4100 is treated as "unknown hold". Therefore, the setting of the unknown flag due to the occurrence of the unknown hold (pre-reading effect prohibition setting) is the pre-reading of the hold (game ball winning to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102) that occurs not only when the power is turned on but also after the power is turned on. It is also performed when a command is received.

When the command read in the process of step S1402 is a look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command indicating the number of reserved balls at the time of the start opening winning and the presence / absence of the held look-ahead information that has occurred (peripheral control MPU4150a) Yes) in step S1469, and the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is executed (step S1470). In the special figure look-ahead execution determination process, the unknown flag for each special symbol is set according to the presence or absence of the look-ahead information of the received command (look-ahead effect prohibition setting), or the look-ahead effect is executed according to the state of the look-ahead information and the unknown flag. Set flags.

Here, the details of the special figure look-ahead execution determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. The peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the received look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command is a command targeting the special symbol 1 (step S1471). Then, if it is the command of the special symbol 1 (Yes in step S1471), it is determined whether or not the command has "look-ahead" (step S1472a). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the beginning of the mode value of the received look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command is "1".

When the received look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command is not "pre-reading available" (No in step S1472a), the peripheral control MPU4150a has other look-ahead commands (look-ahead symbol type look-ahead command, look-ahead fluctuation pattern). Since the look-ahead command, the look-ahead variation type look-ahead command, and the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command) are not transmitted from the main control board 4100, the special 1 unknown flag that prohibits the special 1 look-ahead effect is set (step S1473a). At this time, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command at the time of look-ahead is set to the special 1 unknown count (step S1474a), and the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated. If the special 1 unknown flag has already been set, the set state is confirmed in the process of step S1473a, and the value of the special 1 unknown count is rewritten to the value of the new number of reserved balls in the process of step S1474a. conduct. Always update so that the digestion of the unknown hold, which is new in the memory order, is the condition for canceling the pre-reading production prohibition.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the received look-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command is "pre-reading available" (Yes in step S1472a), other look-ahead commands are transmitted from the main control board 4100. , It is determined whether or not "6903H" (ambiguous command) is received as the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command (step S1475a). This is the same as the process of step S1441 of the received command analysis process (FIG. 83) of the above-described modification 1. Then, when the ambiguous command is received, that is, when the look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command of "6903H" is received (Yes in step S1475a), the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU4150a has not received an ambiguous command, that is, has received a look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command of a mode value other than "03H" (No in step S1475a), the special feature. 1 It is determined whether or not the unknown flag is set (step S1476a). Then, when the special 1 unknown flag is set (Yes in step S1476a), the special 1 look-ahead effect execution is prohibited, so the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, when the special 1 unknown flag is not set (No in step S1476a), the special 1 look-ahead effect execution is permitted, so the special figure look-ahead effect execution instructing the execution of the special 1 look-ahead effect is executed. The flag is set (step S1477a), and the special figure look-ahead execution determination process is terminated. When the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the special figure look-ahead effect in the special figure look-ahead effect control process (step S1027, FIG. 70) executed in the peripheral control unit steady processing (FIG. 42). Make the necessary settings to do so.

In the process of step S1471, when the received look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command does not target the special symbol 1, that is, the command targets the special symbol 2 (No in step S1471). The processing of steps S1472b to S1477b to be executed is a process in which the target is changed to the special symbol 2 from the processing of steps S1472a to S1477a for the special symbol 1 described above.

In the special figure look-ahead execution determination process, when a look-ahead special symbol 1 (2) memory look-ahead command without look-ahead is received, the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set, and the target is set until the corresponding unknown hold is exhausted. Pre-reading production of special symbols is prohibited. Therefore, even if the pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage pre-reading command with pre-reading is received, the pre-reading effect is not executed while the unknown flag of the target special symbol is set. Further, even if the received look-ahead fluctuation distribution table information command is an ambiguous command, the look-ahead effect is not executed.

As described above, in the look-ahead effect prohibition control of the second modification, the hold at the time of power failure received as the power recovery information at the time of turning on the power is set to "unknown hold", and even if the power is restored, the look-ahead effect is not executed. In addition, when there is an unknown hold (that is, when there is a hold in which the look-ahead information (specific game information) is not transmitted and the peripheral control MPU4150a cannot specify the look-ahead determination result), the target special symbol until the unknown hold is exhausted. Do not perform pre-reading production in. Then, if the unknown hold is exhausted, the look-ahead effect is permitted. Therefore, the hold at the time of power failure (unknown hold) does not affect the look-ahead effect after the power is restored. Further, since the pre-reading effect prohibition period is set for each special symbol according to the number of unknown pending numbers, more appropriate pre-reading effect prohibition control can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect of pre-reading effect and the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, even when a read-ahead special symbol 1 (2) storage look-ahead command without look-ahead is received from the main control board 4100, the corresponding hold is set as "unknown hold", and the look-ahead in the target special symbol is set until the unknown hold is exhausted. Since the effect is prohibited, by executing this pre-reading effect prohibition control together with the pre-reading determination prohibition control at the time of state transition by the main control board 4100 described above, a more appropriate pre-reading effect can be provided to the player. For example, when shifting from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state at the time of the above-mentioned state transition, if the number of times the time-saving state is maintained is 4 fluctuations or less remaining, the main control MPU4100a prohibits the look-ahead determination. Therefore, the special symbol 2 hold that occurred during the read-ahead determination prohibition period is not determined to be read-ahead, and is recognized by the peripheral control MPU4150a as an unknown hold. Therefore, until the special symbol 2 hold (upper limit of 4) generated during the time saving state of the remaining 4 fluctuations is digested, the look-ahead effect in the special symbol 2 is prohibited in the non-time saving state after the state transition. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with priority digestion of the special symbol 2, the unknown reserved special symbol 2 is digested before the special symbol 1 after the state transition. In this way, the hold that occurred during the four fluctuations immediately before the transition state is not subject to the look-ahead determination on the main control board 4100 side, and the peripheral control board 4140 side also receives the hold that can be read ahead until the hold is exhausted. By not targeting the look-ahead effect, it is possible to prohibit the execution of the look-ahead effect during the period when a problem is likely to occur. The hold that occurs in the non-time saving state after the state transition is mainly the special symbol 1 hold. At this time, since the look-ahead effect prohibition control is executed for each special symbol, it is for the special symbol 2 hold. Therefore, it does not interfere with the execution of the look-ahead effect on the special symbol 1 side in the non-time saving state.

Further, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control for the unknown hold other than the hold at the time of power failure is performed at the timing when the number of holds changes. Specifically, the pre-reading effect prohibition is started at the timing when the special symbol 1 (2) memory pre-reading command (unknown command) at the time of pre-reading without pre-reading is received, and the unknown hold corresponding to the unknown command is digested and the fluctuation starts. It will be released at the timing of. In this way, the look-ahead effect is prohibited when an unknown hold occurs in the hold storage area, and the look-ahead effect is permitted at the same time as the last unknown hold is exhausted. Therefore, it is possible to execute more accurate look-ahead effect prohibition control, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the look-ahead effect and the game entertainment.

Further, as described in the first modification, the look-ahead effect prohibition control at the time of turning on the power does not have to be targeted at the time of clearing the RAM. In this case, in the above-mentioned input unknown flag setting process (FIG. 86), a determination process for confirming the reception of the RAM clear command is added before the process of S1451, and when the RAM clear command is received (when the RAM is cleared), after that. It is sufficient to end the unknown flag setting process at the time of input without executing the process of. Normally, the peripheral control board 4140 receives the RAM clear command, but does not read it from the received command storage area 4150cc in order to share the control when the RAM is cleared and when the power is turned on. In this way, by controlling so as to allow the look-ahead effect when the RAM is cleared, it is possible to eliminate the prohibition of the unnecessary look-ahead effect, suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game, and provide an appropriate look-ahead effect. ..

Further, in the modification 1 and the modification 2, an ambiguous command (a read-ahead variable distribution table information command having a mode value "03H" indicating a reach or non-reach distribution table) is received for the pending hold with the look-ahead that has occurred. If it is, it is not the target of the look-ahead effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the second modification, the look-ahead effect may be prohibited when a hold that becomes a non-specific hit (small hit) occurs in a high probability state. Specifically, in the above-mentioned special figure look-ahead execution determination process (FIG. 88), when a read-ahead special symbol 1 storage look-ahead command with look-ahead is received (Yes in step S1472a), a small hit (mode value "50H") ”) Is added to determine whether or not the symbol type look-ahead command (status value“ 66H ”) has been received, and to determine whether or not the current probability state is a high probability state when it is received. If it is executed and the command is received and the probability is high, the processes of step S1473a and step S1474a may be executed. Here, at the stage of pre-reading, the small hit type information is not transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140. Some types of small hits return the high-probability state to the low-probability state (normal probability state). If the look-ahead effect is performed even after the small hit hold that induces the transition to the low probability state occurs, the look-ahead effect occurs after the small hit hold, and the big hit is determined when the look-ahead is performed in the high probability state. An event may occur in which a shift is determined at the start of fluctuation in a low-probability state in which the hold is shifted to the small hit. At this time, if the hit confirmation effect is performed in the look-ahead effect, the actual fluctuation result (missing) not only significantly disappoints the player's expectations, but may also lead to distrust of the game effect. Therefore, even if a look-ahead command with look-ahead is received, if the small hit symbol type look-ahead command "6650H" is received in a high probability state, the result of the small hit is determined at the start of fluctuation (pending digestion). ) Is prohibited. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game and a distrust of the player's production due to the excessive (wrong) pre-reading effect being executed with respect to the actual fluctuation result, and also to prevent the pre-reading effect. You can increase the reliability of.

[19-2-3. At the start of the jackpot game (clear look-ahead information)]
By the way, the hold that occurs during the big hit is prohibited from the look-ahead effect because the pre-reading determination is not executed by the main control MPU4100a, but the hold that has already occurred and is stored at the start of the big hit depends on the game state at the time of occurrence. It has pre-reading information by pre-reading determination, and the peripheral control MPU4150a can perform pre-reading effect. However, the game state after the big hit, which is digested (variation starts) at the start of the big hit, may be different from the game state at the time of pre-reading determination (the fluctuation pattern table is different). On the other hand, there is a risk that the pre-reading effect will not be appropriate. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a holds the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 for the hold at the start of the big hit, and clears the look-ahead effect information set based on the hold information at the start of the big hit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem in which an appropriate look-ahead effect is not performed. Hereinafter, the control process by the peripheral control MPU4150a will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot display process. The jackpot display process is a process (step S1700) executed in the above-mentioned effect control process (FIG. 49).

The peripheral control MPU4150a first executes the jackpot opening display process in response to the jackpot start command (step S1710). Next, the jackpot display process for displaying the display indicating that the jackpot 2003 will be opened on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and performing the display effect during the jackpot game state (for example, round display) is executed (step). S1720). After that, the jackpot ending display process for producing the end effect of the jackpot game state is executed (step S1730), the process selection flag is updated to "0" (step S1740), and then the jackpot display process is terminated.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening display process. The jackpot opening display process is a process (step S1710) executed in the jackpot display process (FIG. 89) described above.

The peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the start flag is set (step S1711). The start flag is a flag set when the jackpot opening command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received in the process of step S1411 of the above-mentioned reception command analysis process (FIG. 48). Then, if the start flag is not set (No in step S1711), the jackpot opening display process ends.

On the other hand, when the start flag is set (Yes in step S1711), the peripheral control MPU4150a has the effect information (preliminary) corresponding to the look-ahead command from the schedule data storage area 4150cae (predetermined storage area) in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. (Notification mode) is cleared (step S1712). The schedule data storage area 4150cae is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 4100 are set, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is based on the effect information stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The production is controlled. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a has a function (preliminary notification mode identifiable setting means) for setting pre-reading effect information (preliminary notification mode) in a predetermined storage area, and the advance notification mode on condition that a jackpot game is executed. It also has a function to set non-identifiable (advance notification mode unspecified setting means). The effect information cleared here is set based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table when the look-ahead command is received.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a again sets the effect information corresponding to the look-ahead command in the schedule data storage area 4150cae based on the effect mode and the effect pattern selection table that are switched and set in the wake of this big hit (step S1713). ..

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU4150a clears the start flag (step S1714), executes a display setting process for setting an opening display such as a fanfare effect (step S1715), and then ends the jackpot opening display process. After that, when the jackpot symbol display command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, the next jackpot display process (step S1720 in FIG. 89) is executed.

In this way, in the jackpot opening display process, the effect display indicating the start of the jackpot is performed, and the pre-reading effect information of the hold stored at the start of the jackpot is changed from the one corresponding to the game state at the time of the hold to the jackpot game state. It can be rewritten as a new one. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU4150a deletes the look-ahead effect information that was selected under the normal probability state when the hold occurs, and re-uses the look-ahead effect information under the high probability state that can be switched when the jackpot occurs. Reselect. Further, the target of the effect information clearing process in step S1712 is the look-ahead effect information, which is the hold information of the look-ahead command received from the main control board 4100 (number of reserved balls, presence / absence of look-ahead, symbol type, variation pattern, variation type). , Distribution table) is retained, so that the effect information based on the hold information can be reset in the effect information setting process of the next step S1713. The timing of resetting is not limited to the start of the big hit. For example, it may be reset by the big hit round confirmation effect. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate look-ahead effect according to the situation for the hold at the start of the big hit, and it is possible to suppress the effect of the look-ahead effect and the deterioration of the interest of the game.

The target of the above-mentioned effect information clearing process (step S1712) is not limited to the hold stored at the start of the jackpot. Pre-reading with pre-reading special symbol 1 (2) storage Even when a pre-reading command is received from the main control board 4100 and other pre-reading commands are received, an abnormal change in the number of holds (holds at the time of the previous reception). When the number information is 0, but the number of pending information received this time is increased to 4, etc.), the pending effect information stored at this time may be cleared. If an abnormality determination condition is set and the hold stored when the condition is established is targeted for the effect information clearing process (step S1712), it is possible to prevent a defect in the look-ahead effect for the hold in advance, and an appropriate look-ahead can be performed. It leads to the provision of production.

The control that does not execute the special figure look-ahead effect performed on the peripheral control board side may be a control that does not perform the special figure look-ahead determination on the main control board side.

[20. Production mode transition]
By the way, in the above-mentioned received command analysis process (FIGS. 48, 83, 85), when the command read in the process of step S1402 is a special figure variation pattern command (Yes in step S1403), step S1404 The variation pattern reception flag is set by the process of. Then, when the variation pattern reception flag is set, the decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 52) for starting the special symbol synchronization effect including the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed. Then, the peripheral control MPU4150a has an effect pattern (decorative symbol stop symbol, reach effect type, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern and the winning information received from the main control board 4100 based on the effect mode corresponding to the gaming state among the plurality. Judgment as to whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect, the presence / absence of the extension effect, etc.) are determined, and the effect of the effect pattern is executed as the special figure synchronization effect.

Specifically, with reference to FIG. 91, an example of the effect transition in the probabilistic time saving state in which the time saving number of times is 64 times will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of the effect transition in the probability variation time saving state. When the game state enters the probabilistic time reduction state, the special figure synchronization effect (time reduction time effect) of the specific A effect mode is executed from 1 to 30 times of the time reduction, and the special figure of the specific B effect mode is executed after the time reduction of 31 times. Synchronized production (probability change confirmation production) is executed. In the special figure synchronization effect of the specific A effect mode, the continuous effect of whether or not the time reduction state is continued is executed in the fluctuations in which the number of time reductions is 10, 20, and 30, and the normal effect is executed in the other variations. Will be done.

At this time, the main control MPU4100a manages the number of time reductions, and sets the variation pattern (normal effect pattern, continuous effect pattern, probability variation confirmation effect pattern) according to the time reduction number in the variation pattern command. Specifically, the main control MPU4100a first selects one table from a plurality of provided tables according to the number of time reductions (the number of times the lottery game is executed in the time reduction state). At this time, the table to be selected differs depending on the number of time reductions. Then, a variation pattern (game pattern) according to the lottery game is selected from the selected table. As shown in FIG. 91, the variation pattern in which the number of time reductions is 1 to 9 times, 11 times to 19 times, and 21 times to 29 times in the probability variation time reduction state is selected from the table in which the normal effect pattern is set, and the time reduction number of times is 10 times. , 20 times and 30 times, the variation pattern is selected from the table in which the continuous effect pattern is set, and the variation pattern in which the time reduction number of 31 times or more is selected from the table in which the probability variation confirmation effect pattern is set. Further, as the continuous effect pattern, a success effect pattern in which the time saving state continues and a failure effect pattern in which the time saving state ends are provided. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4150a can determine and execute the effect corresponding to the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations) by following the received fluctuation pattern even if the peripheral control MPU4150a itself does not manage the number of time reductions (number of fluctuations). As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can perform an appropriate effect at the time of power recovery even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared such as when the power is cut off. It should be noted that the effect mode of each effect differs depending on the effect mode set by the peripheral control MPU4150a. In FIG. 91, the peripheral control MPU 4150a selects the effect mode in the specific A effect mode when the time reduction number is 1 to 30 times, and selects the effect mode in the specific B effect mode after the time reduction number of 31 times.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 92, the effect mode transition process in which not only the effect determination but also the effect mode transition is executed based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control MPU4100a will be described.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect mode transition process executed by the peripheral control MPU450a. The effect mode transition process is executed, for example, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100 at the start of variation is received in the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation start process (FIG. 46). The transition of the effect mode is taken as an example of the transition from the specific A effect mode of FIG. 91 to the specific B effect mode.

Peripheral control MPU4150a first determines whether or not the effect mode is in the specific A effect mode (step S1751). Here, the specific A effect mode is a transition condition to the specific B effect mode that the continuous effect (success or failure) is executed at predetermined times in a time saving state and the continuous success effect is executed three times. It is a production mode to be performed. If the peripheral control MPU4150a is not currently in the specific A effect mode (No in step S1751), the effect mode transition process ends.

Then, when the peripheral control MPU4150a is currently in the specific A effect mode (Yes in step S1751), the peripheral control MPU4150a receives a success command (variation pattern command) indicating a success effect pattern among the continuation effect patterns from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (step S1752). Then, if the success command has not been received (No in step S1752), the effect mode transition process ends.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU4150a receives the success command (Yes in step S1752), the peripheral control MPU4150a updates the count of the number of successes by 1 (step S1753). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of successes after the update has reached 3 (step S1754). If the number of successes is not 3 (No in step S1754), the effect mode transition process ends. When the number of successes is 3 (Yes in step S1754), the effect mode is changed from the special A effect mode to the special B effect mode (step S1755). After that, the effect mode transition process ends. The number of successes can be added during the special A effect mode, and the count is cleared at the end of the special A effect mode.

In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a switches the effect mode when receiving a predetermined number of specific variation pattern commands from the main control MPU 4100a, and is in a specific gaming state (here, a time saving state) according to the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU 4100a. ), It is possible to appropriately determine the transition effect (normal effect, continuous success effect, continuous failure effect) in the series of effect modes (specific A effect mode) without knowing the number of fluctuations. Since the peripheral control MPU 4150a can determine an appropriate effect based on the command received from the main control board 4100 side where the game information is always backed up, it can be restored even if the data on the peripheral control board 4140 side is cleared, such as when the power is cut off. It is possible to perform the appropriate effect at the time of electricity.

[21. Special figure look-ahead effect switching control]
Here, when a new start memory with a high expectation of a big hit is generated while the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed, the special figure look-ahead effect that is executed in advance is newly generated as a start memory. The control for switching (overwriting) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the above will be described. The description of the contents that overlap with the explanations so far will be omitted.

[21-1. Control on the main control board side (switching control of special figure look-ahead effect)]
As described in the memory look-ahead process (FIG. 24), in the present embodiment, a command (special symbol) required to execute the special figure look-ahead effect is not required during the look-ahead determination prohibition period when the game ball starts and wins a prize. Send the hold number specification command, special figure fluctuation pattern command, etc.). Even when the switching control of the special figure look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed is determined by determining whether or not the look-ahead determination prohibition period is in effect, as in the storage look-ahead process shown in FIG. Judgment is made, a command necessary for executing the special figure look-ahead effect is generated, and the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. As described above, the main control board 4100 serves as a first look-ahead determination means for first determining whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed after the start winning.

[21-2. Peripheral control board side control (switching control of special figure look-ahead effect)]
When the peripheral control board 4140 receives a command for executing the special figure look-ahead effect from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4140 executes the special figure look-ahead effect based on the content of the command and the execution status of the special figure look-ahead effect.

Further, in the game machine of the present embodiment, in addition to the special figure look-ahead effect that suggests a highly expected start memory such as the normal look-ahead effect that changes the hold display described above, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. It is possible to execute a special figure look-ahead effect such as changing the background of an existing image (background look-ahead effect) or making a character appear independently of the effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern (character look-ahead effect). The background look-ahead effect does not have to clearly indicate a specific hold display and execute the effect, and one of the currently held start memories (which may include the running start memory) has a high expectation of a big hit. It may indicate. In the present embodiment, a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display of the look-ahead target (normal look-ahead effect, continuous look-ahead effect, collectively referred to as “hold look-ahead effect”) and a background look-ahead effect that changes the background are executed. An example of the background look-ahead effect will be described later in FIGS. 97 to 99.

Subsequently, the control by the peripheral control board 4140 for executing the special figure look-ahead effect will be described. Specifically, the special figure look-ahead effect setting process for setting the special figure look-ahead effect will be described. Other processes are the same as the processes described so far.

[21-2-1. Special figure look-ahead effect control processing (switching control of special figure look-ahead effect)]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the special figure look-ahead effect control process including the switching control of the special figure look-ahead effect of the present embodiment. Similar to the special figure look-ahead effect control process shown in FIG. 70, this process is a process executed in step S1027 of the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 42).

In the special figure look-ahead effect control process including the switching control of the special figure look-ahead effect, the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect for changing the hold display shown in FIG. 70 and the display mode of the hold display can be changed for each variable display. In addition to the process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous look-ahead effect, the process for executing the background look-ahead effect is included. In the process for executing the background look-ahead effect, it is possible to switch (overwrite) the background look-ahead effect that has been executed in advance to the background look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory. Hereinafter, the specific procedure will be described, but the description of the processes common to the flowchart shown in FIG. 70 will be omitted as appropriate.

The effect control program first determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set (step S2001). As described above, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the reception command analysis process (step S1022 in FIG. 42) when the look-ahead effect command is received from the main control board 4100 (step S1408 in FIG. 48). If the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is not set (the result of step S2001 is "No"), the special figure look-ahead effect is not executed, so the special figure look-ahead effect control process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure pre-reading effect execution flag is set (the result of step S2001 is "Yes"), the effect control program pre-reads based on the content of the pre-reading effect command corresponding to the start memory of the pre-reading target. The type and mode of the effect are selected (step S2020). Specifically, either a normal look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold display of the start memory or a background look-ahead effect that changes the background of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is selected and selected. Determine the production mode of the special figure look-ahead effect.

Next, the effect control program determines whether or not the normal look-ahead effect is selected (step S2021). When the normal look-ahead effect is selected (the result of step S2021 is "Yes"), the processes of step S2005 and subsequent steps are executed. The processing after step S2005 is as described with reference to FIG. 70. The timing of clearing the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is different from the process shown in FIG. 70.

On the other hand, when the normal look-ahead effect is not selected (the result of step S2021 is "No"), that is, when the background look-ahead effect is selected, the effect control program actually executes the background look-ahead effect. (Step S2022). Whether or not the background look-ahead effect is actually executed is determined, for example, whether or not the expected degree of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the start memory is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected degree. In addition, it may be possible to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect according to the degree of expectation, such as making it easier to execute the special figure look-ahead effect when the degree of expectation is high.

Although the special figure look-ahead effect can be basically executed in all fluctuation patterns, the allocation of lottery data for determining whether or not execution is possible differs depending on the fluctuation pattern. For example, in the case of normal reach, the winning (execution) probability of the hold look-ahead effect is 1/100 (out of 99/100), while in the case of normal reach, 25/100 (out of 75/100), super reach. In the case of a loss, it is determined based on a lottery table set to be 50/100 (a loss of 50/100), and in the case of a super reach, it is 99/100 (a loss of 1/100).

Further, the actual effect mode (scenario) is determined based on a table in which another scenario table corresponds to the number of times the effect is executed. For example, when the number of times of production is two, a table in which the lottery probability is set for each scenario is provided. It should be noted that the production content, the number of scenarios, and the lottery probability of the scenarios selected according to the scenario table are different.

FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the scenario in which the color of the hold display changes and the fluctuation pattern when the number of times of the special figure look-ahead effect (hold look-ahead effect) is two. Each scenario is, for example, scenario 1 (blue → blue), scenario 2 (blue → green), scenario 3 (blue → red), scenario 4 (red → gold), and the degree of expectation is in the order of scenario 1 to scenario 4. It will be a high special figure look-ahead effect. Note that scenario 4 is set so that the lottery is performed only at the time of a big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to a big hit. Further, the number of continuous productions is not limited to two, but may be, for example, three or more, and a table showing the correspondence between the scenario and the fluctuation pattern may be prepared according to the number of continuous productions.

In the present embodiment, the scenario to be executed is determined based on the table in which the scenario lottery probability is set. In addition to the fluctuation pattern, in the case of a big hit, a table for scenario lottery may be provided according to the type of big hit. When the fluctuation pattern and the jackpot symbol are uniquely determined, it is sufficient to have only a table based on the fluctuation pattern, and it is not necessary to provide a table for determining the jackpot type.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the special figure look-ahead effect (hold look-ahead effect) that changes the hold display, and the background look-ahead effect is similarly provided with a lottery table and a scenario table. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the scenario and the fluctuation pattern when the number of times of the background look-ahead effect is two. Each scenario is, for example, scenario A (light cloudy → light cloudy), scenario B (light cloudy → rain cloud), scenario C (rain cloud → thundercloud), scenario D (rain cloud → sunny), and the degree of expectation is in the order of scenario A to scenario D. It will be a high special figure look-ahead effect. It should be noted that the scenario D is set so that the lottery is performed only at the time of a big hit, and is a scenario dedicated to the time of a big hit. Further, the number of continuous productions is not limited to two, but may be, for example, three or more, and a table showing the correspondence between the scenario and the fluctuation pattern may be prepared according to the number of continuous productions.

If the effect control program does not execute the background look-ahead effect (the result of step S2022 is "No"), the effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this process.

On the other hand, when executing the background look-ahead effect (the result of step S2022 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not the background look-ahead effect is currently being executed (step S2023). To determine whether or not the background look-ahead effect is being executed, for example, a flag is set at the timing when the execution of the background look-ahead effect is started (or determined / selected), and the timing when the background look-ahead effect is finished (for example, the background look-ahead effect) is set. A flag to be cleared at the start (end) of the variation display based on the start memory for executing the effect) may be provided, and the operation may be performed based on the value set in this flag.

As an example of the above flag, a flag (look-ahead expectation degree flag) may be prepared for each expectation degree of the look-ahead effect mode (hold look-ahead or background look-ahead). For example, when the expectation of a big hit differs depending on the production mode such as high, medium, and low, a look-ahead expectation flag corresponding to each expectation is prepared (for example, a high expectation look-ahead notice flag, Medium expectation look-ahead notice flag, low expectation look-ahead notice flag). Further, instead of dividing the flags according to the degree of expectation, the degree of expectation may be divided according to the information set in one flag (for example, when the value of the flag is "1", the degree of expectation is low, " When it is "2", it is a medium expectation, and when it is "3", it is a high expectation). These examples are merely examples, and the degree of expectation does not have to be limited to three types, and may be three or more types or only two types. That is, it suffices if it is possible to determine (determine) whether or not the look-ahead effect mode (background look-ahead) can be executed according to the degree of expectation.

When setting the look-ahead expectation flag, the look-ahead expectation flag of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is retained when the special figure look-ahead effect is switched, and the flag is compared with the flag of the special figure look-ahead effect to be newly executed. do it. For example, if the look-ahead expectation flag of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is in the expectation level, and if the look-ahead expectation flag of the special figure look-ahead effect to be newly executed has a high expectation level, a new special figure look-ahead effect is created. Switch. As the flag of the special figure look-ahead effect to be newly executed, information (numerical information or the like) set for each of the above scenarios may be used.

When the background look-ahead effect is being executed (the result of step S2023 is "Yes"), the effect control program determines whether or not to switch the background look-ahead effect being executed to the newly executed background look-ahead effect. (Step S2024).

In the present embodiment, the expectation of the newly executed background look-ahead effect is compared with the expectation of the background look-ahead effect being executed, and when the newly executed background look-ahead effect has a higher expectation, the background look-ahead effect is performed. Switch. The "expectation degree" is basically the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a big hit, but it may be the degree of expectation of the type of big hit (symbol) or the degree of expectation of the gaming state after the big hit. Further, it may include the degree of expectation as an effect (for example, normal deviation, normal reach, SP reach, etc.) instead of the result of the variable display of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation pattern may be specified from the fluctuation pattern look-ahead command and determined based on the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, "expectation" may be added to the item of the fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 47) to define the expectation for each fluctuation pattern in advance, or the reach effect (normal reach, SP reach) to be executed may be performed. Etc.), the degree of expectation may be set. Further, since the reach effect having a high expectation such as SP reach has a long fluctuation time, it may be determined that the longer the fluctuation time is, the higher the expectation is. Further, when the degree of expectation is the same, any start memory may be prioritized or may be decided by lottery. If both are big hits, the special figure look-ahead effect cannot be executed during the big hit game, so the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is prioritized.

Further, in the case where the player can obtain a large profit as in the case of both big hits, it is possible to switch to a special look-ahead effect display mode that does not appear in a single look-ahead lottery. The degree of expectation does not have to be limited to the jackpot, and the degree of expectation may be divided according to the type of jackpot. For example, the number of rounds of the big hit game, the winning probability of the special lottery after the big hit, the number of times the game state (probability change state, time saving state) that is advantageous for the player continues, the amount of profit that can be obtained at the time of the big hit and the amount of profit after the big hit. Expectations may be divided according to the game state.

Further, a priority may be set for each determined scenario, and the determination may be made based on the priority set for each scenario. For example, numerical information is set for each scenario so that the larger the numerical value, the higher the degree of expectation. When the scenario information is set and stored in the RAM, it is stored as numerical information, so that the value itself can represent the high or low degree of expectation. This numerical information corresponds to, for example, information (numerical value) for determining the production mode and information (numerical value) indicating the degree of expectation, and numerical information may be set based on these information. In this case, whether or not to switch the special figure look-ahead effect is determined by holding the numerical information of the scenario until the special figure look-ahead effect is completed and comparing it with the numerical information corresponding to the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect to be newly executed. You just have to judge.

If the effect control program does not continue the background look-ahead effect being executed and does not switch to a new background look-ahead effect (the result of step S2024 is "No"), the effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2027). , End this process. In this case, the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is continuously executed without being interrupted.

On the other hand, when switching the background look-ahead effect being executed to a new background look-ahead effect (the result of step S2023 is "Yes"), the effect control program sets the setting information of the background look-ahead effect being executed to the new background look-ahead effect. Is initialized to execute (step S2025). Even when the background look-ahead effect being executed is executed to the end, the setting information of the background look-ahead effect is initialized. The timing of initializing the setting information is, for example, the timing at which the start memory related to the background look-ahead effect during execution is digested.

The effect control program initializes the setting information of the background look-ahead effect being executed (step S2025), or when the background look-ahead effect is not being executed (the result of step S2023 is "No"), the background look-ahead effect The setting process is executed (step S2026). Since a plurality of background look-ahead effects cannot be executed in parallel, the background look-ahead effect setting information may be unconditionally initialized by the background look-ahead effect setting process. Finally, the effect control program clears the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag (step S2027), and ends this process.

In the process of step S2025, instead of initializing the setting information of the background look-ahead effect being executed and executing a new background look-ahead effect, a new background look-ahead effect is executed following the background look-ahead effect being executed. You may try to do it. At this time, the player may be able to recognize that the background look-ahead effect is continued (extended), or may not be recognized (difficult to recognize). For example, if the player cannot recognize that the background look-ahead effect has continued (extended), he / she feels that the state of high expectation has continued for a long time, so that the feeling of expectation can be maintained for a long time. At this time, the high expectation is maintained even after the fluctuation display of the start memory corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect that was originally executed is off, and the fluctuation display that is executed later has a higher expectation. Since the effect based on the fluctuation pattern is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be discouraged.

Further, when the special figure look-ahead effect is switched, an effect for notifying the switching may be executed. For example, when switching the special figure look-ahead effect, the player may be able to recognize by executing an effect (display, sound, light emission, drive body, etc.) that is not executed in the normal effect. Further, an effect suggesting that the special figure look-ahead effect is switched may be executed. In this case, instead of executing the effect at the start of fluctuation after determining that the special figure look-ahead effect is to be switched, even if the change occurs, the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is being executed while being continued. The pre-reading effect is performed to the extent that the player can recognize the pre-reading effect (screen flash, color is different only around the display screen, the decorative pattern itself changes (color, shape), subliminal effect, etc.), and the player is given a special figure pre-reading effect. It suffices as long as the production can recognize that the switching of the production has occurred.

In the present embodiment, the normal look-ahead effect can be executed in parallel for a plurality of start memories, but the background look-ahead effect cannot be executed in parallel. Therefore, the process of step S2021 may determine whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed in parallel, not whether or not the normal look-ahead effect is normally executed. For example, the look-ahead effect that can be executed in parallel is the first group, the look-ahead effect that cannot be executed in parallel is the second group, and the look-ahead effect selected in the process of step S2020 belongs to the first group or the second group. The process may be branched depending on whether it belongs to a group. Even if the pre-reading effect can be executed in parallel, the pre-reading effect being executed may be switched (overwritten) to the pre-reading effect based on the newly generated start memory.

Further, the background look-ahead effect and the normal look-ahead effect (hold look-ahead effect) may be executed at the same time. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a special figure look-ahead effect control process capable of simultaneously executing a background look-ahead effect and a normal look-ahead effect (hold look-ahead effect).

When the background look-ahead effect and the hold look-ahead effect are executed at the same time, the normal look-ahead effect, the background look-ahead effect, or both can be selected in the process of step S2020. This point is different from the process of step S2020 of the special figure look-ahead effect control process shown in FIG. 93. Further, the process of step S2021 in FIG. 93 is deleted, and after the process of setting the hold look-ahead effect is completed, the process of setting the background look-ahead effect is executed. That is, after the process of step S2011, the processes from step S2022 to step 2026 may be executed.

Further, a plurality of normal look-ahead effects may be executed in parallel only in a specific state. For example, a plurality of normal look-ahead effects may be executed in parallel only when the expected degree of the normal look-ahead effect that is executed in advance is lower than that of the newly executed normal look-ahead effect.

In addition, the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the received special symbol hold command can be executed and the current game state stored on the peripheral board side (the game state referred to here is limited to probabilistic change and time reduction). Priority is given to any of them based on the consistency with the game such as fluctuation, reach, big hit (opening, ending, big winning opening operation, etc.), waiting for customers, etc.). You may decide whether or not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect. When giving priority to the special symbol hold command, priority is given to the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the special symbol hold command can be executed regardless of the game state, and the game state (probability state or special symbol look-ahead effect being executed) is prioritized. Etc.), the special symbol look-ahead effect may not be executed even if the special symbol hold command contains information that permits the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect.

Further, when the special symbol look-ahead effect is not executed even if the special symbol hold command includes information permitting the execution of the special symbol look-ahead effect, for example, a dedicated look-ahead lottery table (mismatch dedicated table) is provided. A lottery may be made to determine whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed based on the discrepancy-only table. At this time, in this mismatch-only table, the probability of selecting the scenario to return to the normal mode (the state in which the special figure look-ahead effect is not executed) is set to be high, and the degree of expectation is gradually lowered. As described above, the effect mode is changed, or an effect that is not executed by the normal special figure look-ahead effect is executed. If the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the special symbol hold command can be executed does not match the current gaming state stored on the peripheral board side, do not give a misunderstanding to the player. , You may forcibly return to the normal production mode.

In addition, if the information indicating whether or not the special symbol look-ahead effect included in the received special symbol hold command can be executed does not match the game state, there is a possibility of a malfunction such as a program bug or electrostatic noise. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to detect the occurrence of anomalies by executing an effect that cannot be executed normally, rather than simply controlling not to execute the special figure look-ahead effect, and debugging and endurance tests during development. It can be useful for inspecting game machines such as.

As described above, the peripheral control board 4140 has a special figure based on the game state and other start-up memories after the main control board 4100 (first look-ahead determination means) determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead effect can be executed. It serves as a second pre-reading determination means capable of determining whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed and the content of the effect.

[21-3. Production example]
Subsequently, a specific example of the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect) executed by the control described above will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect) in the present embodiment. The special figure look-ahead effect described with reference to FIG. 97 is a background look-ahead effect in which the background changes, and the background can be further changed at a predetermined timing according to the degree of expectation. Hereinafter, a specific example of the background look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97A shows a state before the background look-ahead effect is executed, and shows a time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 is completed and the special symbol is confirmed. In the state shown in FIG. 97 (A), four start memories of the special symbol 1 are reserved.

After the special symbol is stopped, the reserved start memory is digested, and the variable display of the special symbol is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the state in which the background look-ahead effect is started is shown. At this time, the start memory that is the target of the background look-ahead effect is one of the three reserved start memories. The player may be able to identify the start memory that is the target of the special figure look-ahead effect at the timing when the background look-ahead effect is started, or is notified at the timing when the start memory that is the target of the background look-ahead effect is digested. You may try to do it. If a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation is selected in the start memory that is the target of the background look-ahead effect, the variation will be the background look-ahead effect during the variation display of the decorative pattern (for example, when reach occurs). The player can grasp that it is the target.

In the background look-ahead effect of this embodiment, clouds appear in the background. In addition, the background changes due to the background look-ahead effect are configured to progress step by step, and the appearing clouds change step by step. The pattern in which the background (cloud) changes may be determined according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped (FIG. 97 (C)), the reserved start memory is digested, and the next fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the cloud As the color becomes darker, it turns into a rain cloud. After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), it changes to a thundercloud, and further thunder is generated, resulting in a large storm. At this time, the hold display is reduced or hidden as the reach occurs. In this embodiment, the darker the color of the cloud, the higher the expectation, and when a thundercloud occurs, the expectation is highest, but as a special effect (for example, a big hit is confirmed), the cloud disappears and the sun appears. (Fig. 97 (F)).

Further, the timing at which the background first changes may be the timing at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening (upper starting opening 2101, lower starting opening 2102), or may be the timing at which the decorative symbol starts to change. In the present embodiment, it is set at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and even if a plurality of starting ports are won in a predetermined state (for example, a normal gaming state), the winnings to the plurality of starting ports are displayed so that they can be discriminated. However, even if multiple start ports are won in a state different from the predetermined state, it is difficult or impossible to distinguish the prizes in the plurality of start ports, and the decorative symbol changes when the state is different from the predetermined state. Since a plurality of game balls are started and entered during the game, it is difficult for the player to recognize which start memory is expected to be higher.

In addition, when the number of holdings is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), there is a certain grace period from the occurrence of the highly expected start memory to the start of the fluctuation, and a plurality of execution timings of the background look-ahead effect are set. If possible, the background look-ahead effect may be started after a certain period of time has elapsed. For example, with respect to the special figure look-ahead effect generated when the number of holds is 3 or more, no effect may be executed when the hold 1 and hold 2 are exhausted, and the special figure look-ahead effect may be started at the timing when the hold 3 is exhausted. In this case, as a scenario for the special figure look-ahead effect, a scenario such as "no change-> no change-> look-ahead A" may be set, and a lottery may be performed for each change. In the case of drawing lots for each fluctuation, as described above, it is possible to prevent the game from being less enjoyable by preventing the downfall from occurring.

With the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the start memory that is the target of the special figure look-ahead effect, and all the fluctuations that are executed until the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern with high expectation is started. It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the display, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the timing at which the background changes stepwise may be changed at each start of change of the decorative symbol, or may be changed at predetermined time regardless of the start timing of change of the decorative symbol. This makes it possible to change the background in multiple stages even when the number of start-up memories digested in advance is small. Further, when a reach occurs in the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect may be executed in parallel with the background look-ahead effect, or the background look-ahead effect may be stopped and the reach effect may be executed.

Subsequently, when a new start memory with a high expectation of a big hit is generated while the background look-ahead effect is being executed, the background look-ahead effect executed in advance is based on the newly generated start memory. An example of the effect when switching (overwriting) to the background look-ahead effect will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect) being executed is switched to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory.

FIG. 98 (A) shows a state before the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect) is executed, as in FIG. 97 (A), and the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) 1910 is completed. , Indicates the time when the design is confirmed. Four start memories of special symbol 1 are reserved.

Further, FIG. 98 (B) shows a state in which the reserved start memory is newly digested, the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the background look-ahead effect is started, as in FIG. 97 (B). .. After that, the change display of the decorative pattern is stopped (Fig. 98 (C)), the reserved start memory is digested to start the change of the decorative pattern, and the background is changed stepwise (Fig. 98 (D)). The variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped (FIG. 98 (E)). At this time, the background may be changed independently of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), two new game balls win the starting winning opening during the variable display of the special symbol, and the number of reserved special symbols 1 is again four. Then, when the background look-ahead effect started in FIG. 98 (B), that is, the expectation that the newly generated start memory becomes a big hit is higher than the expectation of the background look-ahead effect that is being executed, it is being executed. The background look-ahead effect is interrupted, and the background look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory is executed.

For example, during the execution of the special figure look-ahead effect, a lottery for the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory may be possible. This lottery may always be possible, or certain conditions (for example, the content of the look-ahead effect currently being produced, the content of the change or stop of the decorative symbol, and the random number lottery to determine whether or not the lottery is possible) are satisfied. May be possible. When the lottery for the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory is won, the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect is determined. When the determined display mode is compared with the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed, and the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory is a display mode with a higher degree of expectation. At a predetermined timing (start of next fluctuation, occurrence of reach, stop of symbol, etc.), the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect to be newly executed is switched and executed. In addition, when the display mode of the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect is lower than the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed, the display mode is switched to the newly executed special figure look-ahead effect. The display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed may be continued, or the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed may be stopped.

In the background look-ahead effect of the present embodiment, the effect mode is related to "weather", but the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect to be newly executed may not be directly related to "weather". For example, when the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is related to "weather", it may be related to a car race in which the content of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect is completely irrelevant. By executing the special figure look-ahead effect related to the special figure look-ahead effect being executed, the player feels as if he / she is executing a series of scenarios, and the period of the look-ahead effect is extended. can.

In addition, in the scenario of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect that is newly executed, the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed is compared, and in particular, the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect that is being executed is combined with these scenarios from the progress status. New scenarios may be combined. For example, if the scenario of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is "cloudy → rain cloud → cumulonimbus cloud" and the scenario of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect is "light cloudy → snow cloud → large storm" (the jackpot expectation is light cloudy <cloudy <rain cloud). <Cumulonimbus <Great Storm), When the display mode of the special figure look-ahead effect being executed is "rain cloud", by switching to the scenario of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect, the overall flow of the look-ahead effect mode is "cloudy". The effect is as follows: rain cloud → light cloudy → thundercloud → large storm, and although the expectation level drops once at the time of switching, the expectation level once dropped will be higher in the subsequent display mode. In this case, by preparing a scenario that changes in the order of "cloudy → rain cloud → light cloudy" as a false (gase) special figure look-ahead effect, the "thundercloud" that appears after the light cloudy will hit the player's jackpot. Expectations can be raised further.

When executing the special figure look-ahead effect of a scenario that is not related as the scenario of the subsequent special figure look-ahead effect, it is possible to suggest to the player that a new highly expected start memory has occurred. Even if the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect in the inside is out of order, the player's expectation can be maintained until the result of the lottery corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the subsequent start memory is known.

FIG. 98 (F) shows a state in which the background look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory has been started. After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the color of the cloud changes to become darker, and as shown in FIG. 98 (H), lightning appears from the darker cloud.

In FIG. 98 (F), the color of the clouds is lighter than that in FIG. 98 (E), and the progress of the background look-ahead effect has returned to the previous stage. In this way, when the progress of the background look-ahead effect returns to the previous stage, the player can recognize that the start memory with a higher expectation has been added, and the expectation can be further increased. .. It should be noted that the effect of these cloud changes is set in advance as a scenario, and a plurality of scenarios may be combined or a combination of scenarios may be prepared in advance.

On the other hand, the subsequent background look-ahead effect may be started so as to continue the interrupted background look-ahead effect without returning the progress of the background look-ahead effect to the previous stage. By controlling in this way, the player can maintain the state in which the expectation of the jackpot continues for a longer period of time.

Reach also occurs in the variable display corresponding to the interrupted background look-ahead effect, but in this case, the reach effect is executed and the background look-ahead effect is continuously executed even after the next variable display is started. do it.

It should be noted that the special figure look-ahead effect (background look-ahead effect) that changes the background is executed in parallel with the special figure look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect) that changes the display mode of the hold display of the start memory with high expectation described above. It may be. The player may grasp the start memory corresponding to the background look-ahead effect, but in this case, the player's expectation is higher than when the display mode of the hold display is simply changed. Expectations may be further increased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start memory with a higher expectation of a big hit occurs while the special figure look-ahead effect is being executed, the special figure look-ahead effect that is executed in advance is performed. By switching (overwriting) to the special figure look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory, it is possible to give the player the original expectation of a big hit, and the effect of the look-ahead effect can be maximized. .. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Finally, an example of the effect when the hold look-ahead effect and the background look-ahead effect are executed in parallel will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an effect example in which the hold look-ahead effect and the background look-ahead effect are executed in parallel, and the background look-ahead effect being executed is switched to the background look-ahead effect based on the newly generated start memory. In the effect example shown in FIG. 99, the background look-ahead effect related to the hold look-ahead effect is executed.

FIG. 99A shows a state before the pre-reading effect is executed, and shows a time when the variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) is finished and the out-of-order symbol is confirmed. In the state shown in FIG. 99 (A), three start memories are reserved. FIG. 99 (B) shows a state in which the held start memory is digested, the number of holds is changed from 3 to 2, and the variable display of the special symbol is started.

After that, one game ball wins in the start winning opening during the change of the special symbol shown in FIG. 99 (B), and the player wins the execution lottery of the look-ahead effect in the start winning prize. FIG. 99C shows a state in which the special symbol continues to fluctuate and the hold look-ahead effect is executed. At this time, the hold display of hold 3 changes to a "cumulonimbus" shape instead of the usual round shape. Further, in the start memory in which the hold look-ahead effect is executed, the background look-ahead effect is executed in parallel with the hold look-ahead effect. In the background look-ahead effect, the background changes from "cloudy" to "rain clouds" and finally to "thunderclouds (cumulonimbus)". In this way, the hold display changes to "cumulonimbus" due to the hold look-ahead effect, and the background finally changes to "thundercloud" related to "cumulonimbus".

FIG. 99 (D) shows a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is completed. Subsequently, FIG. 99 (E) shows a state in which the next hold start memory is digested and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, as a background look-ahead effect, a cloud indicating "cloudiness" is displayed in the background. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the variable display of the special symbol ends. At this time, the clouds displayed in the background may be left as they are, or may be erased once. It suffices if the player can recognize that the background look-ahead effect has been executed.

FIG. 99 (G) further shows a state in which the next hold start memory is digested and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the hold display is in a state where hold 1 is "cumulonimbus", hold 2 is "normal", hold 3 is "storm", and hold 4 is turned off. Furthermore, the background changes from "cloud" to "rain cloud" as a background look-ahead effect. In addition, as a result of two game balls winning the start winning opening and the second start memory (hold 3) winning the execution lottery of the look-ahead effect during the variable display of the special symbol, the hold display shows "storm". It changes to the shape shown. Further, the background look-ahead effect is executed based on the start memory corresponding to the hold 3. At this time, a scenario in which the background changes from "light cloudy" to "thundercloud" and finally to "great storm" is selected. Since the expectation that the start memory of the hold display "storm" will be a big hit is higher than the start memory of the hold display "cumulonimbus", the background look-ahead effect is switched (overwritten). FIG. 99 (H) shows a state in which the variable display of the special symbol is completed, and rain clouds are continuously displayed in the background.

FIG. 99 (I) shows a state in which the start memory in which the hold display was "cumulonimbus" is digested and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also, if the background look-ahead effect is continued, cumulonimbus clouds (thunderclouds) should be displayed, but the background is "lightly cloudy" because the hold display has been switched to the background look-ahead effect based on the start memory of "storm". Is changed to. At this time, the hold display is in a state in which hold 1 is "normal", hold 2 is "storm", and hold 3 and hold 4 are turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), a reach is generated based on the start memory in which the hold display is "cumulonimbus cloud", and the reach effect is executed. At this time, the background and the hold display remain unchanged.

When the reach variation of FIG. 99 (J) is completed, as shown in FIG. 99 (K), the result of the variation display of the special symbol is out of order. At this time, the background remains slightly cloudy.

Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (L), when the next fluctuation is started, the background changes to a thundercloud. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (M), the variation of the special symbol ends. At this time, the background and the hold display are the same as those shown in FIG. 99 (L).

Further, when the hold display digests the start memory of "storm", as shown in FIG. 99 (N), the variable display of the special symbol is started. At this time, all the hold displays are turned off, and the background changes to "Great Storm (Lightning + Storm)". Then, as shown in FIG. 99 (O), the variable display of the special symbol is fixedly stopped, and a big hit occurs.

In the present embodiment, by associating the hold look-ahead effect with the background look-ahead effect and performing it according to the display at the final stage of the scenario, how the background finally changes when the hold display changes. (What kind of scenario is selected (occurs)) can be determined in advance. Further, the display mode corresponding to the hold display does not have to correspond to the final stage of the scenario, and may be the first stage or an intermediate stage. If it is in the middle stage, there is a possibility that the display mode has a higher degree of expectation at the final stage, and the expectation of the player can be increased.

[22. Modification example of performing production control by level management]
In the above, the control for preventing the fall during the production execution has been described, but when the production is executed at a predetermined timing for each fluctuation pattern, if the production has many variations, the production data becomes enormous and management becomes difficult. .. In addition, the effect control such as the above-mentioned process of preventing the fall is complicated, and for example, when executing a rare effect, even if there is an error in the effect data, it may be difficult to find it. Furthermore, a huge amount of man-hours are required to execute the test for all patterns.

Therefore, as a modification 3 of the present embodiment, we propose a gaming machine that makes it possible to facilitate the management of production data by managing the production hierarchically. The purpose of this is to reduce the amount of data required to execute the effect and prevent an error in the setting of the effect data.

In the third modification of the present embodiment, the “level (level ( Production standard information) ”is defined. The content of the production is decided based on the level. Hereinafter, an example of selecting the advance notice effect (including the above-mentioned story reach advance notice effect and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect) and the effect at the time of fluctuation based on the level will be described.

[22-1. Fluctuation pattern]
First, in order to simplify the following explanation, a simplified fluctuation pattern is defined. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of the types of fluctuation patterns of the modification 3 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 100, the variation pattern command is composed of a status (STS) and a mode (MODE), and these are combined to form a variation pattern command.

Further, the fluctuation pattern 1 is "normal reach", the fluctuation pattern 2 is "normal reach (missing)", the fluctuation pattern 3 is "normal reach (hit)", the fluctuation pattern 4 is "SP reach (missing)", and the fluctuation pattern 5 is "SP reach". It is "SP reach (hit)". The branch number added to each variation pattern corresponds to the number of pseudo-reams. Specifically, when the branch number is 1, the number of pseudo-reams is 1, ..., And when the branch number is 4, the number of pseudo-reams is 4. In the third modification of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the pseudo continuous fluctuation up to four times. Therefore, in the third modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the status (STS) corresponds to the number of pseudo-reams, and the mode (MODE) corresponds to the fluctuation pattern.

Regarding the reach mode, the expectation that the SP reach will be a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach, and in the case of the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the expectation that the big hit will be increased as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases.

[22-2. Level (Direction standard information)]
Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the level (production standard information) will be described. In the third modification of the present embodiment, the higher the level, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is set. Therefore, the level is set corresponding to the expectation of the fluctuation pattern. FIG. 101 (A) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the level of the modification 3 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 101 (A), a basic level is set for each fluctuation pattern, level (LV) 1 for fluctuation pattern 1, LV2 for fluctuation pattern 2, LV3 for fluctuation pattern 3, and fluctuation pattern. LV4 is set in 4, and LV5 is set in the fluctuation pattern 5.

In the third modification of the present embodiment, the basic level is set, but in reality, the level is set based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of pseudo-reams. For example, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), in the case of the fluctuation pattern 3, LV3 is set as the basic level, but when the number of pseudo-reams is 3, LV4 higher than the basic level is selected. Is set to. The fluctuation pattern 3 is a case where the normal reach is executed and a big hit occurs, but the player's expectation can be raised by executing an effect that should not be executed in the normal reach. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern 4, when the number of pseudo-reams is small, LV2 lower than the basic level is set. In the variation pattern 4, SP reach is executed, but the result of the variation display is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation from being excessively agitated by lowering the expectation of the effect.

As described above, since the level is set based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of pseudo-reams, the level corresponds to the look-ahead command and the fluctuation pattern command in the modification 3 of the present embodiment. Since the variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead command and the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command are the same, the level corresponding to the look-ahead command and the level corresponding to the variation pattern command are the same when the start memory is the same. .. The level may be determined when the look-ahead command is received, a flag or the like corresponding to the specified level may be set, and the level may be specified from the flag or the like when the variation pattern command is received. That is, when the look-ahead command is received, the level corresponding to the look-ahead command is determined and the "level (effect reference information)" corresponding to the content of the effect that can be executed is defined, and when the change pattern command is received, the change pattern command is supported. The effect may be selected according to the level defined at the time of receiving the look-ahead command without determining the level to be performed.

Further, in the modified example 3 of the present embodiment, it is possible to set the level based on the fluctuation pattern and the gaming state. FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of the third modification of the present embodiment and the gaming state. In this modification, as described above, the probability state (low probability state (normal state), high probability state) of the fluctuation display and the operating state (time saving state) of the normal electric accessory are set as the gaming state. Specifically, it is a low-probability non-time-saving state, a low-probability non-time-saving state, a high-probability non-time-saving state (so-called latent probability change), and a high-probability time-saving state (so-called probability change state).

When the level is set to a level different from the basic level according to the gaming state, for example, when the player does not know the gaming state, the gaming state may be suggested. Specifically, when it is not possible to grasp whether the player is in the high probability state or the low probability state in the high probability non-time saving state, a level different from the basic level is set as shown in FIG. 101 (B). do. For example, when the fluctuation pattern 1 is selected in the high probability non-time saving state, a level higher than the basic level (LV1) (LV2) is set, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern 4, a level lower than the basic level (LV4) is set. By setting (LV1), it is controlled to execute an effect that is not normally executed, and it is suggested to the player that the player is in a high probability state.

Although the high-probability non-time saving state (so-called latent probability change) has been described, a level different from the basic level may be set in terms of playability. For example, when the game state is a high-probability time-saving state and a normal jackpot that does not shift to the high-probability state occurs in the fluctuation pattern 5, a level lower than the basic level is set and an effect with a low expectation is executed. It can be suggested that this will cause the player to fall from the high probability state.

In addition, the level may be changed as the pseudo-ream progresses. As a result, even if a fluctuation pattern with a low degree of expectation is selected, if the result of the fluctuation display is a big hit, it is possible to execute a production with a high degree of expectation by promoting the level according to the progress of the production. Therefore, the interest of the player can be gradually enhanced. Specifically, the level of the effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped may be set to be higher in the latter half.

Further, the selection of the level may be determined based on the jackpot symbol (type of jackpot). For example, if it is a big hit that shifts to the probabilistic state and has a large number of prize balls, the level is set high, and if it is a big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state, or if it is a big hit without (small) prize balls, it is relatively Set to a low level. In addition to this, the game state is added, and while it is in the probabilistic state, the level is set low in the case of a big hit that shifts to the normal state, or it is a high level when shifting to the probabilistic state or maintaining the probabilistic state. It may be set to.

Further, in the modification 3 of the present embodiment, whether or not the effect can be executed and the type of the effect to be executed differ depending on the set level. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a table for setting whether or not the advance notice effect can be executed for each level of the third modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 102 shows whether or not an effect (notice effect) suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit in the variable display of the special symbol can be executed.

More specifically with reference to FIG. 102, as an example of the advance notice effect, a movable accessory (accessory A, accessory B), a background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C), the above. The background of the dialogue corresponding to the specific production scenario (notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, notice 5) can be executed, and the production by the character B is more expected than the character A. Similarly, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is higher when the background image C is displayed than the background image A, which is set so that the degree of expectation is higher in the order of the background image A to the background image C. , It is suggested that the expectation is higher when the notice 5 is displayed than the notice 1 because the expectation is set to be higher in the order of the notice 1 to the notice 5. The background image A displays the background of the display screen in green corresponding to the notice 2, and the background image B displays the background of the display screen in a leopard pattern corresponding to the notice 4. The image C displays the background of the display screen in rainbow colors corresponding to the notice 5. Then, as in the case of the notice 4, the background image B is always a big hit (even if the big hit without a ball is excluded) when the notice effect according to the "leopard pattern" is executed twice or more in the same variable display game. The background image C is controlled so as to be a big hit when the notice effect according to the "rainbow color" is executed even once as in the notice 5. ..

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game machines are divided into a plurality of groups for each notice type having the same big hit expectation, and the higher the level, the higher the notice effect according to the higher hit expectation is possible. However, when it is set to a predetermined level based on the fluctuation pattern, the level higher than this set level, in other words, the jackpot expectation higher than the jackpot expectation set to the predetermined level based on the fluctuation pattern The notice effect according to the notice type belonging to the set group will not be executed. That is, as a group having the same degree of expectation of a big hit, a group 1 consisting of a character A and a notice 1, a group 2 consisting of a background image A and a notice 2, a group 3 consisting of a character B and a notice 3, and a background image. It is divided into five groups: group 4 consisting of B and notice 4, and group 5 consisting of background image C and notice 5, and the expectation of big hits is higher in the order of group 1 to group 5. There is. Further, when the level 3 is set based on the fluctuation pattern, for example, the notice type belonging to the groups 1 to 3 in which the jackpot expectation lower than the jackpot expectation set in the level 3 is set (role A, A group in which a big hit expectation higher than the big hit expectation set in level 3 is set, although it is possible to execute a notice effect according to the notice 1, the background image A, the notice 2, the character B, and the notice 3). The notice effect according to the notice type (background image B, notice 4, background image C, notice 5) belonging to 4 and group 5 is not executed.

As mentioned above, the higher the level, the higher the expectation of the big hit can be executed. Therefore, in the case of the lowest level 1, the advance notice effect by the character A having the lower expectation is only enabled. be. On the other hand, in the case of level 5, all the advance notice effects can be executed, and one of the advance notice effects may be executed, or the advance notice effect by the movable character and the advance notice by changing the background of the display screen. Allows duplicate appearance of the production and the advance notice production by changing the background of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific production (they may appear multiple times in the same variable display game, and are not limited to those appearing at the same time). Alternatively, if the movements of the movable accessories do not interfere with each other, the effects of the movable accessories may be duplicated, and the advance notice effects may be executed in parallel.

Further, the table shown in FIG. 102 may be referred to at the time of executing each advance notice effect, and it may be determined whether or not the advance notice effect may be actually executed. That is, the notice effect to be executed (information on the notice type and the like stored in the notice mode storage area) is changed to the type of effect that can be executed according to the level set in the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 102. If it is not included, it is judged that it corresponds to the prohibited condition (not included in the type of effect that can be executed according to the level among the information on the notice type etc. stored in the notice mode storage area. Information about the notice type is deleted (destroyed), or information about the notice type that is not included in the types of effects that can be executed according to the level among the information about the notice type etc. stored in the notice mode storage area. By not performing the process of setting the effect information related to the image data, sound data, etc. required to execute the advance notice effect according to the advance notice type based on the above, the advance notice effect is not executed. May be good. This makes it possible to prevent the advance notice effect that should not be executed from being executed. It is not necessary to make such a determination when all are feasible, as in the case of level 5.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect by the character and the advance notice effect by the background image may suggest the result of the variable display (the change) being executed, or the advance notice effect for the reserved memory for which the variable display has not been started (the variable display). It may be a look-ahead notice production).

[22-3. Lottery for notice production]
Next, the procedure for selecting the advance notice effect selected at each lottery timing will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect setting process in the present embodiment, FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal advance notice setting process in the present embodiment, and FIG. 105 is a modification 3 of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for selecting the content of the advance notice effect of, (A) is the first half fluctuation, (B) is after reach or pseudo-continuous occurrence, (C) is the first half or pseudo after reach. The first half of the reach after the continuous occurrence, (D) shows the lottery probability of the advance notice effect and the set value of the effect flag in the latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the pseudo-continuous occurrence. Since the story reach setting process (step S1530), the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (step S1630), and the prohibition process (step S1560) execute the same process as described above, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the effect setting process executes substantially the same process as the above-described process, only different processes will be described, and overlapping parts will not be described.

When the effect control program receives the variation pattern command, the effect control program executes the effect setting process for setting the content of the effect to be executed based on the received special figure variation pattern command and the special symbol symbol type command (step S1503). .. When the effect setting process is started, the effect control program specifies the variation pattern based on the special figure variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100, and the above-mentioned advance notice effect (movable accessory (accessory A, accessory B)). , Normal notice setting process (step) for determining whether or not to execute the background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C) and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the notice effect to be executed. S1580) is executed. In addition, whether or not to execute the background of the dialogue corresponding to the scenario of the specific production (notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, notice 4, notice 5) and the content of the notice production to be executed (notice type, notice mode) are determined. Similar to the above example, the process is performed by the story reach notice setting process (step S1570) of the story reach setting process (step S1530) and the pseudo continuous notice setting process (step S1670) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (step S1630). Be told.

[22-4. Normal notice setting process]
First, the normal notice setting process will be described. When the normal advance notice setting process is executed, the effect control program first determines the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol, and selects the advance notice determination table (FIG. 105) according to the basic level (step S1581). ). At this time, a notice determination table is set according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or a normal state, etc.) and the operating state (time saving state) of the normal electric accessory. May be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice decision table (FIG. 105) includes "no notice", in other words, not only the notice type (notice mode) is decided, but also the lottery is made to decide whether or not to execute the notice effect. Although the determination table (FIG. 105) is configured, a separate lottery table is provided as to whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, and when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed based on the table and a predetermined random number, the advance notice determination table is used. (Fig. 105) may be used to determine the advance notice type.

FIG. 105 (A) shows the lottery probability of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the change of the special symbol. At level 1, the advance notice effect is not executed with a 50% probability, but the advance notice effect according to the character A is executed with a 50% probability. When the advance notice effect is not executed, 0 is set in the flag setting value of the advance notice flag. Similarly, when the advance notice effect according to the character A is executed, 1 and the advance notice effect according to the background image A are performed. 2 is set when it is executed, 3 is set when the advance notice effect according to the character B is executed, 4 is set when the advance notice effect according to the background image B is executed, and 4 is set according to the background image C. 5 is set when the advance notice effect is executed. Expectations for big hits increase in the order of accessory A, background image A, accessory B, background image B, and background image C, and when a level with high expectations is selected, it is easier to select a notice type with high expectations. It is set to be.

FIG. 105 (B) is a notice effect executed after the reach or when the pseudo-continuous occurrence occurs, (C) is a notice effect executed in the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-continuous occurrence, and (D) is the development after the reach. It shows the lottery probability and the set value of the effect flag of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half or the latter half of the reach after the pseudo-continuous occurrence. Each notice effect is set in the same tendency as the case of the notice effect executed in the first half of the change of the special symbol in FIG. 105 (A), and the latter half of the development after the reach of FIG. 105 (D) or after the pseudo-continuous occurrence. If the expectation of the big hit is high at the time of execution like the notice effect executed in the latter half of the reach, it is set so that the notice effect with higher expectation can be easily executed, and the player's expectation is raised. I try to increase it. At level 1, the advance notice effect is not executed in the latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the pseudo-continuous occurrence, so 100% is set to "None".

Next, the effect control program acquires a random number value (preliminary random number) for determining the presence / absence of the advance notice effect and the advance notice type (step S1582). Then, based on the advance notice determination table selected in the process of step S1581 and the random number value acquired in step S1582, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the content of the advance notice effect to be executed from the advance notice determination table (FIG. 105) (notice mode, advance notice). The type) is determined (step S1583), and the notice is selected for the predetermined storage area (the area corresponding to the timing of executing the notice effect of the normal notice mode storage area) allocated to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140. While storing the type (step S1584), the notice flag corresponding to the execution time of the notice effect is set and the process ends (step S1585).

In addition, the lottery is performed at each timing of the first half fluctuation, after the reach or when the pseudo-ream occurs, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-ream occurs, and the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the pseudo-ream occurs. conduct. However, there are some that do not draw lots according to the content of the special figure synchronization effect executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. For example, the fluctuation pattern 1 shown in FIG. 100 does not generate reach. Therefore, FIG. 105 Based on the change first half notice determination table of (A), the process of determining whether or not to execute the notice effect at the time of the first half change and the type of notice to be executed is executed, and the lottery is not performed for other timings. In addition, regardless of the content of the special figure synchronization effect executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the process of determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of advance notice to be executed is executed for all timings. The determination result may be discarded according to the content of the figure synchronization effect. For example, the variation pattern 1 shown in FIG. 100 is reached during the first half variation based on the respective tables of FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (D). Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect at the time of the subsequent or pseudo-ream occurrence, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, and the second half of the development after the reach or the second half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-ream, and the advance notice to be executed. The process of determining the type is executed, and the decision result for the timing other than the first half fluctuation is discarded without being stored in the normal notice mode storage area, or the notice type and execution timing stored in the normal notice mode storage area are set. The corresponding notice information may be deleted.

In this way, when the special figure variation pattern command is received from the main control board 4100, the variation pattern of the special symbol is specified from the received special symbol variation pattern command, and the basic setting is set to the variation pattern of the specified special symbol. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect (movable accessory (accessory A, accessory B), background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C)) using the advance notice determination table according to the level. , The content (notice type, notice mode) of the notice effect to be executed is determined.

[22-5. Story reach notice setting process]
Next, the story reach notice setting process of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach notice setting process of the modified example, and FIG. 107 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the story reach notice determination table of the modified example. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the story reach notice setting process (FIG. 56) described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as described above, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of advance notice to be executed are determined according to the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), a story reach notice determination table is provided for each basic level. Then, the effect control program discriminates the basic level set in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and selects the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 107A (A)) according to the discriminated basic level (step). S1571A), based on the selected story reach notice determination table and the random number value acquired in step S1572, the presence or absence of the story reach notice effect and the story reach notice to be executed from the story reach notice decision table (FIG. 107 (A)). The content of the effect (notice mode, notice type) is determined (step S1573).

In addition, a notice of story reach according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or a normal state, etc.) and the operating state of the normal electric accessory (time saving state). You may change the decision table. In addition, the lottery result of the notice decision table (FIG. 107 (A)) includes "no notice", in other words, not only the notice type (notice mode) is decided, but also whether or not to execute the notice effect is drawn. As described above, the story reach notice determination table (FIG. 107 (A)) is configured, but a separate table is provided to draw lots for whether or not to execute the notice effect, and the notice effect is executed based on the table and a predetermined random number. Then, when it is determined, the advance notice type may be determined using the story reach advance notice determination table (FIG. 107 (A)).

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the variation pattern of the special symbol specified from the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is the variation pattern for executing the story reach, the specified special symbol Whether or not to execute the story reach notice effect and the content (notice type, notice mode) of the story reach notice effect to be executed are determined by using the story reach notice decision table according to the basic level set in the fluctuation pattern of. It has become like.

[22-6. Pseudo consecutive notice setting process]
Next, the pseudo-continuous notice setting process of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 108. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the pseudo-continuous notice setting process of the modified example, and FIG. 107 (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the notice determination table of the pseudo continuous fluctuation of the modified example. The same reference numerals are given to the processes common to the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice setting process (FIG. 65), and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example, as described above, whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of advance notice to be executed are determined according to the basic level set in the variation pattern of the special symbol. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), a notice determination table for pseudo continuous fluctuation is provided for each basic level. Then, the effect control program discriminates the basic level set in the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and selects the notice determination table (FIG. 107A (A)) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation according to the discriminated basic level (FIG. 107A (A)). Step S1671A), based on the selected pseudo-continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table and the random number value acquired in step S1672, the presence / absence and execution of the pseudo-continuous variation advance notice effect from the pseudo-continuous variation advance notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)). The content (notice mode, notice type) of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is determined (step S1673).

In addition, the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed according to the game state such as the probability state of the variable display game (whether the current game state is a probabilistic state or a normal state, etc.) and the operating state (time saving state) of the normal electric accessory. The notice decision table may be changed. In addition, the lottery result of the notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) includes "no notice", in other words, not only the notice type (notice mode) is decided, but also whether or not to execute the notice effect is drawn. As described above, the quasi-continuous fluctuation advance notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) is configured, but a separate table is provided to draw lots for whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect is performed based on the table and a predetermined random number. When it is determined to be executed, the advance notice type may be determined using the advance notice determination table (FIG. 107 (B)) of the pseudo continuous fluctuation.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol specified from the special figure fluctuation pattern command received from the main control board 4100 is the fluctuation pattern that executes the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the specified special Whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect using the pseudo-continuous change advance notice determination table according to the basic level set in the symbol variation pattern, and the content of the advance notice effect to be executed (notice type, notice mode). It is supposed to decide.

[22-7. Special figure look-ahead effect control processing]
Subsequently, the execution control of the look-ahead notice effect in the third modification of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure pre-reading effect control process in the modified example 3 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 110 is a table for selecting the content of the pre-reading advance notice effect of the modified example 3 of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example.

When the special figure look-ahead effect control process is started, first, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4150a) sends a command (special symbol 1 hold number designation command or special symbol) to instruct the special figure look-ahead effect transmitted at the time of starting winning. 2 It is determined whether or not the hold number designation command (with look-ahead), FIG. 16) has been received (step S3000). When a command for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect is received (the result of step S3000 is "Yes"), the peripheral control MPU4150a is set to the variation pattern of the special symbol specified based on the received variation pattern look-ahead command. The pre-reading effect lottery table (FIG. 110) corresponding to the determined basic level is selected (step S3001), and a random number value (pre-reading advance notice random number) for determining the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the advance notice type is determined. ) (Step S3002), and based on the selected look-ahead effect lottery table and the random number value acquired in step S3002, the presence / absence of the look-ahead advance notice effect and the look-ahead to be executed from the look-ahead effect lottery table (FIG. 107 (B)). The content of the notice effect (notice mode, notice type) is determined (step S3003).

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a look-ahead effect lottery table according to the present embodiment. In the look-ahead notice effect, when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening, the mode of the hold display is displayed regardless of the progress of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed, except when the number of hold start memories is 0. Change at a predetermined rate.

When the look-ahead notice effect is not executed, the hold display is "white", but when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the display color of the hold display changes from "white" to a big hit according to the degree of expectation. It changes to "blue", "green", "leopard print", and "rainbow" with a predetermined probability (FIG. 110). Further, the basic level set for the variation pattern of the special symbol specified based on the received variation pattern look-ahead command is set so that the probability that the color of the hold display changes in the order of 1 to 5 increases.

When the color of the hold display is selected, the effect control program executes a look-ahead effect setting process for setting the color to be changed to the selected color (step S3004). In the look-ahead effect setting process, a setting is made to change the display color of the hold display, and a setting is made to output a sound effect, turn on a lamp, or move an accessory at the timing of the change. After that, the special figure look-ahead effect execution flag is cleared (step S3005). As a result, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading advance notice effect from being executed a plurality of times for one start memory.

When changing the display color of the hold display to a color other than "white", a lottery is made to determine whether or not the hold display is gradually changed, the timing of the change, etc., and the pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the lottery result. May be good. Further, the pre-reading notice effect may be due to the operation of the movable accessory, or may be the lighting of a lamp or the output of sound.

In addition, when the game state at the time of receiving the command for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect and the game state at the start of the variation display corresponding to the command for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect are different (for example, the high probability state that continues a predetermined number of times ends). Since there is a risk of discrepancies between the results of the advance notice production and the variable display, setting the level to 1 will prevent the player from being discouraged due to the execution of an unreasonably high-expected effect. Can be done. Further, the level does not necessarily have to be set to 1. For example, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the level may be set to the maximum value.

On the other hand, if the command for instructing the special figure look-ahead effect has not been received (the result of step S3000 is "No"), the peripheral control MPU4150a ends this process.

If the power is cut off before the start of the fluctuation after the level of the look-ahead notice effect is set, the information on the level of the look-ahead notice effect is initialized by the power interruption process and the fluctuation is performed a predetermined number of times ( Within the maximum number of minutes on hold (up to 8)), the advance lottery may be performed with the level of the fluctuation as the lowest level (level 1).

Specifically, when the power is turned on, if a hold number command is received following the power on command, the fluctuation level is equal to the number of holds based on the received hold number command (total number for the two special figure types). May be the lowest level. In addition, when the power is turned on, if the hold number command is not received following the power on command, the level of the fluctuation is set to the lowest level for a predetermined number (8 for the special figure 2 type). You may.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to manage the production data hierarchically by setting the level (effect reference information) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. This makes it possible to reduce errors in setting the effect data. In particular, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of hard-to-find errors such as rare production patterns, so that it is possible to improve the efficiency of the operation test of the gaming machine. Then, by providing a gaming machine that operates stably, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, by drawing the production content based on the level, the content of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the normal advance notice effect (movable character (character A, character B)) executed by the special figure synchronous effect (corresponding change). , The contents of the background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C), the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect can be prevented from being inconsistent with each other. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to a decrease in the expectation that has increased when the advance notice effect is generated after the start of the fluctuation.

It should be noted that the variation pattern of the special symbol determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command in the normal advance notice setting process (step S1580), the story reach advance notice setting process (step S1570), and the pseudo continuous advance notice setting process (step S1670) is set. It is determined whether the basic level is inconsistent with the level set at the time of starting prize (when receiving a command to instruct the special figure look-ahead effect), and if there is a contradiction, at the time of starting winning. You may choose the determined level. As a result, when a plurality of levels can be selected according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy with the effect content at the time of pre-reading. If it is confirmed that the result of the variable display will be a big hit, the level may be set to be high. In this case, even if the expectation of the effect in the fluctuation is higher than that of the look-ahead effect, the player's expectation is not impaired.

Further, according to the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of notice types (role A, character B, background image A, background image B, background image C, notice 1) depending on the level (effect reference information) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. , Notice 2, Notice 3, Notice 4, Notice 5) can be paraphrased by switching between a feasible notice type and an unexecutable notice effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 101, when the level corresponding to the effect pattern is 1, the advance notice effect according to the character A, the story reach advance notice effect according to the advance notice 1, and the pseudo continuous advance notice effect are executed. While enabled, its execution is restricted for other notice types. When the level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 5, the advance notice effect corresponding to all the advance notice types can be executed, and the execution of the advance notice effect is not restricted. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the execution allowable range of a plurality of types of notice types is determined according to the level (directing standard information) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, and the notice types (notices) that can be executed according to the fluctuation pattern. The permissible range of execution of the type) is changed.

It should be noted that the basic level is not limited to one set according to the fluctuation pattern, and a plurality of levels may be set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, the content of the pre-reading notice effect (notice type, etc.) is determined to be one of a plurality of levels set according to the fluctuation pattern by lottery or the like, and corresponds to the determined level. ), And the normal advance notice effect (movable accessory (accessory A, accessory B), background of the display screen (background image A, background image B, background image C)) executed by the special figure synchronization effect (the fluctuation). , Story reach notice effect, pseudo-continuous notice effect,) content (notice type, etc.) can be determined and executed, and it is possible to execute an effect display that does not cause a contradiction.

[22-8. Kinsoku Shori]
Next, the prohibition processing of the modified example will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special symbol synchronization effect executed by the peripheral control board 4140 in synchronization with the variation display (variation display game) of the special symbol on the main control board 4100, the above-mentioned notice effect is provided. Of these, when the notice effect according to a specific notice type (“leopard pattern” in this example) is executed twice or more, it is controlled so that it will always be a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded). ing. Since the prohibition processing is the same as the processing of FIG. 69 described above, only different parts will be described and no duplicate explanation will be given.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the movable accessory (accessory A, accessory B) and the display in which whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the normal advance notice setting process (step S1580) and the type of advance notice to be executed are determined. Even in the notice effect (hereinafter referred to as normal notice effect) regarding the screen background (background image A, background image B, background image C), the notice effect according to a specific notice type (“leopard pattern” in this example) is executed. (Displays a "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen as the background image B). In the kinsoku processing of the modified example, when the result of the variable display game to be executed does not become a big hit (the big hit without a ball may be excluded), a specific notice is given by the above-mentioned story reach notice effect or pseudo-continuous notice effect. Not only is it regulated so that the type ("leopard print") is not executed more than once, but it is also specified when the normal notice effect, story reach notice effect, and pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed in one variable display game. The notice production (“leopard print”) is regulated so that it is not executed more than once.

In step S1562 of the prohibition processing shown in FIG. 69, the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area assigned to the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 and the peripheral control RAM 4150c of the peripheral control board 4140 are set. It changes by discriminating between the notice type of the story reach notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the assigned notice mode storage area and executing the notice effect according to the stored notice type. It is determined whether or not a specific advance notice effect (“leopard print”) is executed twice or more in one variable display game even though the result of the display game is not a big hit.

Specifically, whether the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is "background image B" that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen is stored in the notice mode storage area. It is determined whether the notice type of the story reach notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect is "notice 4" which displays the background part of the dialogue in the "leopard pattern" in the area 1912, and is set to the normal notice mode storage area. The result of the winning judgment is that the normal advance notice effect based on the stored advance notice type is executed, or the story reach advance notice effect or the pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the advance notice type stored in the advance notice mode storage area is executed. Although it is not a big hit, the notice production of "leopard pattern" (background notice B of normal notice production, notice of story reach notice and pseudo-continuous notice 4) is 2 in the same (once) special figure synchronization production. If it is determined that the prohibited condition of being executed more than once is satisfied, the notice information regarding the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area and the story reach stored in the notice corresponding storage area. One or both of the notice information regarding the notice type and the like of the notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is deleted (discarded) or replaced with the notice information according to the other notice type (step S1563).

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the forecast type of the normal notice effect and the notice type of the story reach notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect correspond to the prohibited conditions, they are stored in the normal notice mode storage area. Delete one or both of the advance notice information regarding the advance notice type of the normal advance notice effect and the advance notice information regarding the advance notice type etc. of the story reach advance notice effect and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect stored in the advance notice corresponding storage area ( By discarding) or replacing it with another predictive type, one or both of the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may not be executed, or one or both of the notice types may be "leopard". Since the "leopard pattern" is not displayed by being replaced with a notice type different from the notice type that expresses the "pattern", it is possible to correct the situation that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. As a result, even though the result of the winning judgment is not a big hit, the notice effect of expressing the "leopard pattern" is executed twice or more within the same (once) special figure synchronization effect, which discourages the player. It can be avoided.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the basic level is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the type of advance notice that can be executed differs according to the basic level. Then, when the level corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is 4, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the result of the fluctuation display game does not become a big hit. While the process of correcting so that it is not executed more than once is executed, if the level according to the variation pattern is 5, the result of the variation display game will be a big hit, so the process of correcting so that it does not correspond to the prohibition condition is performed. Not executed. In this way, the notice type whose execution is restricted is changed according to the level of the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the display color of the hold display may be changed to "leopard print" as a look-ahead notice effect. However, even when the look-ahead notice effect for changing the display color of the hold display to the "leopard pattern" is executed during the variable display game, the above-mentioned prohibition condition is not applied. Therefore, when the look-ahead notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to "leopard pattern" is executed, the notice effect that expresses the "leopard pattern" in the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect. Is not always a big hit. That is, not only the special figure synchronization effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, but also a specific advance notice effect (“leopard pattern”) is specified for the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911. The game can be noticed by expecting the execution of the advance notice effect that expresses the number of times (or more), and expects the execution of a specific advance notice effect (the advance notice effect that expresses the "leopard pattern" a predetermined number of times (or more)). It is possible to pay attention to the effect executed in a plurality of areas of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the area where the special figure synchronization effect is performed and the area where the hold display of the start memory is performed. In this case, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed and the display color of two or more hold displays is changed to "leopard pattern", the display color is changed to "leopard pattern". The result of any of the variable display games in the starting memory to be played may be a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded).

In addition, as a look-ahead notice effect, a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" is started, and the "leopard pattern" is used in the normal notice effect, story reach notice effect, and pseudo-continuous notice effect. Even if it is planned to perform a notice effect to be displayed, it does not correspond to the above-mentioned prohibition conditions. That is, when a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" is started as a look-ahead notice effect, the "leopard pattern" is used in the normal notice effect, the story reach notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect. Even if you execute a notice effect that expresses "", it does not necessarily mean that it will be a big hit. However, when the player starts the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" as the look-ahead notice effect, the "leopard pattern" is already displayed as the look-ahead notice effect. Therefore, if the "leopard print" is displayed even once in the variable display game, it is assumed that it will be a big hit and the result of the variable display game is expected, so that the special figure synchronization effect can be noticed.

Further, when it is decided to execute the notice 4 for displaying the "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the pseudo-continuous notice effect described above, in step S1562 of the prohibition process. If the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen, the normal notice mode storage area stores the normal notice effect. One or both of the notice information indicating the notice type, etc. and the notice information indicating the notice type, etc. of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area can be deleted (destroyed), or the other notice types can be used. You may replace it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect of the "leopard print" from being executed twice or more even though the result of the variable display game is not a big hit.

In addition, as described above, there are a plurality of timings for executing the normal advance notice effect (first half of the change of the special symbol, after the reach or when the pseudo-ream occurs, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-repeated occurrence, and the development after the reach. The latter half or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-ream) and the timing after the execution of the pseudo-ream notice effect are also included. Then, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the normal notice effect is already executed at the timing of executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the notice type of the executed normal notice effect is a "leopard pattern" in the background of the display screen. If the background image B is to be displayed, the notice 4 for displaying the "leopard pattern" on the background of the dialogue is controlled so as not to be executed as a pseudo continuous notice effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notice effect of displaying the "leopard pattern" from appearing continuously, and the notice of displaying the "leopard pattern" more than once even though the result of the variable display game is not a big hit. It is possible to prevent the production from being executed. In addition, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the normal notice effect has not yet been executed at the timing of executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect, and the notice type of the normal notice effect scheduled to be executed is displayed in the background of the display screen. When the background image B for displaying "pattern" is displayed, that is, the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed before the normal advance notice effect, and the display screen is used as the advance type of the normal advance notice effect executed after the pseudo-continuous notice effect. When the background image B displays the "leopard pattern" in the background (the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" in the background of the display screen. At the same time, the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is the notice 4 that displays the "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed before the normal notice effect. (If this is the case), it may be controlled not to execute the notice 4 that displays the "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue as the pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area). The notice information indicating the notice type, etc. may be deleted (destroyed) or replaced with another notice type). As a result, if it is decided in advance that the notice effect that causes the "leopard pattern" to be displayed when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed is not executed yet, it is executed first. As the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice production, the notice 4 that expresses the "leopard pattern" is set to another notice type (the result of the variable display game is lower than the notice 4). By replacing it with (Because notice 5 is selected only when a big hit occurs), it is possible to create a so-called upstart state in which the expectation of a big hit increases according to the progress of the game, and the player can get a big hit. You can expect the variable display game to pay attention to.

In addition, among the above-mentioned plurality of timings (first half of fluctuation of special symbol, after reach or when pseudo-ream occurs, first half of development after reach or first half of reach after occurrence of pseudo-ream, second half of development after reach or second half of reach after occurrence of pseudo-ream). Timing before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol) and timing after the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, after reach or when the pseudo-ream occurs, the first half of the development after the reach or the first half of the reach after the pseudo-ream occurrence , The latter half of the development after the reach or the latter half of the reach after the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous), and when the normal advance notice effect is executed at each of two or more timings, and the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect The notice type of the normal notice effect to be executed at a later timing (for example, after reach or when pseudo-ream occurs, the first half of development after reach or the first half of reach after pseudo-repeated occurrence, the second half of development after reach or the second half of reach after pseudo-repeated occurrence) If the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen is determined, the notice 4 that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the dialogue may be controlled not to be executed as a pseudo-continuous notice effect. , When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the notice type of the normal notice effect to be executed at the timing before the pseudo continuous notice effect is determined to be the background image B that displays "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen. For example, it may be controlled not to execute the notice 4 that displays the "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue as a pseudo-continuous notice effect. Further, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" at two or more timings including the timing before the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the timing after the pseudo-continuous notice effect is displayed. If it is decided to be the normal notice effect to be executed, and if it is decided to be the notice 4 that displays the "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue as the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the normal notice is executed at the timing prior to the pseudo-continuous notice effect. A production that expresses a "leopard pattern" with the notice type of the production and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice production (normal notice production of the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen, as the background of the dialogue It may be controlled not to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect of the notice 4 for displaying the "leopard pattern" (pseudo-notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area). Delete (discard) the notice information indicating the background image B that is executed at the timing prior to the continuous notice effect, or replace it with another notice type (background image A) (only when the background image C is a big hit). (Because it is selected), the notice information indicating the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area is deleted (discarded), and other notice types (variable display than the notice 4) are displayed. It may be replaced with one of notices 1 to 3 (because notice 5 is selected only when a big hit is made), which has a low expectation that the result of the game will be a big hit). In addition, it is possible to create a so-called upstart state in which the expectation of a big hit increases according to the progress of the game, and the player can expect a big hit and pay attention to the variable display game.

It should be noted that the lottery process (pseudo-continuous notice setting process) related to the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed at the start of fluctuation (in this example, the pseudo-continuous variation setting process (step S1550) of the effect setting process (FIG. 103)) as in the normal advance notice effect. It may be executed. In this case, the notice type determined in the normal notice effect setting process (step S1580) and the pseudo-continuous notice setting process (step S1550) expresses the "leopard pattern", in other words. Those that correspond to the prohibited conditions (in this example, the notice type of the normal notice effect is the background image B that displays "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen, and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is "leopard pattern" on the background of the dialogue. 4), the notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area. By deleting (destroying) one of the notice information indicating, etc., or replacing one with the other notice type, multiple effects that display the "leopard pattern" in one variable display game will not be executed. And it may be corrected to the state that does not correspond to the prohibition condition. Further, in this case, when the execution timing of the normal advance notice effect is earlier than the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, the advance notice information indicating the advance notice type of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect stored in the advance notice mode storage area may be deleted. It may be replaced with another notice type, which can prevent the notice effect of expressing the "leopard pattern" from being continuously displayed, and even though the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, 2 It is possible to prevent the advance notice effect of displaying the "leopard print" from being executed more than once. Further, when the execution timing of the normal advance notice effect is later than the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, in other words, when the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed before the normal advance notice effect, it is also stored in the advance notice mode storage area. The notice information indicating the notice type of the pseudo-ream notice effect may be deleted or replaced with another notice type, whereby the "leopard pattern" is still displayed at the timing when the pseudo-ream notice effect is executed. If it is decided that the advance notice effect will be executed after that even if the advance notice effect is not executed, "leopard print" is displayed as the advance notice type of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect that is decided to be executed at the earlier timing. The notice 4 to be issued is selected from other notice types (notice 1 to notice 3 with a lower expectation that the result of the variable display game will be a big hit than the notice 4 (notice 5 is selected only when a big hit is obtained). Therefore, by replacing it with)), it is possible to create a so-called upstart state in which the jackpot expectation is improved according to the progress of the game, and the player can expect the jackpot to pay attention to the variable display game.

In addition, as described above, it is prohibited to select all the scenarios for executing the specific effect of the pseudo continuous fluctuation at the start of the change, and to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect and the type of advance notice to be executed. The notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area in step S1562 of the process is the background image B for displaying the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen, and is stored in the notice mode storage area. When the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is the notice 4 that displays the "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue, the notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area and the notice information Notice mode The notice information indicating the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the storage area and one or both of them are deleted (discarded), or one or both notice types are replaced with other notice types. You may do so. Further, in step S1562 of the prohibition processing, the notice 4 in which the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect displays "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue is stored in the notice mode storage area, and the notice type of the story reach notice effect is When the notice 4 for displaying the "leopard pattern" is stored in the background of the dialogue, the notice information indicating the notice type of the normal notice effect and the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area are stored. One or both of the notice information indicating the above and the like may be deleted (destroyed), or one or both notice types may be replaced with another notice type. The pseudo continuous advance notice effect is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 as shown in the pseudo continuous fluctuation control process (FIG. 63), and is performed when the pressing operation unit 405 is not operated. Is not executed. That is, while the normal advance notice effect and the story reach advance notice effect are executed according to the passage of time in the special figure synchronization effect, the pseudo continuous advance notice effect is a pressing operation unit in addition to the passage of time in the special figure synchronization effect. It is executed according to the condition that the additional condition of the operation of 405 is satisfied. Therefore, when the result of the variable display game becomes a big hit, or the notice type of the normal notice effect stored in the normal notice mode storage area is not the background image B, or the notice of the pseudo continuous notice effect stored in the notice mode storage area. Even if the type does not correspond to the prohibition condition such as not the notice 4, the pseudo continuous notice effect is not executed unless the additional condition that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated is satisfied. In other words, even if the notice 4 in which the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect displays "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue is stored in the notice mode storage area, it is not always executed. However, the advance notice effect that expresses the "leopard print" is important in that it notifies the player that it will be a big hit if it is executed twice or more, and the result of the variable display game will not be a big hit. Nevertheless, if it is executed more than once, it may not only confuse the player but also greatly discourage the player. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the notice 4 for displaying the "leopard pattern" as the notice type of the pseudo-continuous notice effect is stored in the notice mode storage area, the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied. For example, although there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous notice production according to "Notice 4" will not be executed, it will definitely be a problem (the result of the variable display game will not be a big hit) by correcting it so that it does not correspond to the prohibition condition just in case. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of (a notice effect for displaying the "leopard print" is executed twice or more).

In addition, in the above example, when the prohibition condition is met, it is shown to correct it so that it does not correspond to the prohibition condition. You may do so. For example, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit (may be limited to a big hit with a ball), a specific notice type (in this example, "leopard pattern") is displayed at a predetermined ratio by lottery or the like. The notice information stored in the normal notice mode storage area or the notice mode storage area may be replaced so that the notice effect according to the notice type) is executed a predetermined number of times (or more). As a result, it is possible to expect the appearance of the "leopard print" and draw attention to the variable display game.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is divided into a plurality of groups for each notice type having the same jackpot expectation, and a specific group among these plurality of groups (display of a hold display of the look-ahead notice effect). For the notice production according to the notice type belonging to the leopard pattern, the background image B of the normal notice production, the notice 4 of the story reach notice production, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice production, one special figure synchronization production (variation). It regulates duplicate appearances (appearing multiple times (as long as it is two or more predetermined times) within one special figure synchronization effect) in the display game). In this example, when the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, the display color of the hold display of the look-ahead notice effect is a leopard pattern, the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and It is configured to prevent duplicate appearance of the advance notice effect (multiple appearances in one special figure synchronization effect) according to the advance notice type of the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect, but the same applies to other groups. When the result of the variable display game is not a big hit, duplicate appearance (multiple appearances in one special figure synchronization effect) may be prevented, or some groups among other groups (for example, for example) may be prevented. Even if the display color of the hold display of the look-ahead notice effect is rainbow color and the background image C of the normal notice effect is allowed to appear twice (multiple appearances in one special figure synchronization effect). good. In addition, even if the result of the variable display game is a big hit, the big hit is confirmed if some groups (for example, the notice 5 of the story reach notice effect and the notice 5 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect) are executed even once. With regard to the premium notice), duplicate appearance (multiple appearances within one special figure synchronization effect) may be prevented. In addition, by expressing the "leopard print" as a group to prevent the duplicate appearance of the advance notice effect (multiple appearances within one special figure synchronization effect), the advance notice effect having an apparent commonality is executed. Although only the ones are shown, for example, the advance notice effect of the character C may be included as a notice effect having no apparent commonality by expressing a mode different from the "leopard pattern". In this case, Not only the duplicate appearance of the notice effect that expresses the "leopard pattern" (multiple appearances in one special figure synchronization effect), but also the character C that expresses a mode different from the "leopard pattern". The appearance of the notice production will also be regulated. In addition, duplicate appearance is regulated by deleting any or all of the notice information stored in the normal notice mode storage area and the notice mode storage area, or replacing the notice information with other notice information according to the notice type. Not limited to this, duplicate appearance may be restricted by specifying the type of advance notice effect to be executed in a variable pattern and the advance notice type. For example, in story reach, it is instructed to execute the story reach advance notice effect of notice 5. By providing a fluctuation pattern and executing a story reach that expresses "rainbow color" only once when a special figure fluctuation pattern command instructing execution of a special figure synchronization effect according to the fluctuation pattern is received. You may try to prevent duplicate appearance. In addition, there are fluctuation patterns for some groups and some notice types (for example, a notice 5 for story reach notice production and a premium notice for which a big hit is confirmed if executed even once, such as a notice 5 for pseudo-continuous notice production). Specify the type of notice effect and the type of notice to be executed in, and for other groups and other types of notice, execute the above-mentioned prohibition processing and when the prohibited conditions are met, the normal notice mode storage area or the notice mode storage area It is also possible to prevent duplicate appearance by deleting any or all of the notice information stored in the above or replacing the notice information with other notice information according to the notice type.

Further, even when the look-ahead notice effect for changing the display color of the hold display to the "leopard pattern" is executed during the variable display game as described above, the above-mentioned prohibition condition does not apply. Therefore, when a look-ahead notice effect that changes the display color of the hold display to "leopard pattern" is executed, the group is about the same as the one that changes the display color of the hold display to "leopard pattern" as the look-ahead notice effect. Even if the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect are executed, it is not always a big hit. That is, although the duplicate appearance of the notice effect according to the notice type belonging to a specific group (multiple appearances in one special figure synchronization effect) is regulated in one special figure synchronization effect, the special figure synchronization The hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911, which is displayed independently of the effect, does not restrict the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect according to the advance notice type belonging to a specific group. Therefore, a specific advance notice effect (“leopard pattern”) is specified not only for the special figure synchronization effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side but also for the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911. The game can be noticed by expecting the execution of the advance notice effect that expresses the number of times (or more), and expects the execution of a specific advance notice effect (the advance notice effect that expresses the "leopard pattern" a predetermined number of times (or more)). It is possible to pay attention to the effect executed in a plurality of areas of the panel-side liquid crystal display device 1900, that is, the area where the special figure synchronization effect is performed and the area where the hold display of the start memory is performed. In this case, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed and the display colors of two or more hold displays are changed to "leopard pattern" at the same time, the display color is changed to "leopard pattern". The result of any of the variable display games of the start memory corresponding to the above may be a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded), and in this case, a specific start memory display unit 1911 may be used. It regulates the appearance of multiple pre-reading notice effects according to the type of notice belonging to the group at the same time (allowing if there is a start memory that becomes a big hit in any of them), but the notice belonging to a specific group that appeared in the special figure synchronization effect The total of the number of advance notice effects according to the type and the number of look-ahead advance notice effects according to the advance notice type belonging to a specific group appearing in the start memory display unit 1911 is a predetermined number (2 in this example) or more. It is not a matter of restricting the appearance of the notice effects, but it is sufficient to independently regulate that the number of appearances of the notice effects according to the notice types belonging to a specific group exceeds a predetermined number. For example, if the number of advance notice effects according to the advance notice type belonging to a specific group that appears in the special figure synchronization effect is more than a predetermined number of times, it will be a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded). If the number of pre-reading notice effects according to the notice type belonging to a specific group appearing at the same time in the start memory display unit 1911 is a predetermined number or more, a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded). In this way, the notice effect according to the notice type belonging to the specific group in the special figure synchronization effect and the notice type belonging to the specific group in the hold display of the start memory executed by the start memory display unit 1911 are supported. Even if a look-ahead notice effect and a look-ahead notice effect appear at the same time, even if a plurality of specific notice effects appear at first glance, it is not always a big hit.

In addition, as described above, a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" is started as a look-ahead notice effect, and the normal advance notice effect, the story reach advance notice effect, and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect are used. Even if it is planned to perform a notice effect that makes the "leopard print" appear, it does not fall under the above-mentioned prohibition conditions. That is, when a variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" is started as the look-ahead notice effect, the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" as the look-ahead notice effect. Even if the background image B of the normal notice effect, the notice 4 of the story reach notice effect, and the notice 4 of the pseudo-continuous notice effect, which are the same group as the above, are executed, it is not always a big hit. However, when the player starts the variable display game based on the start memory in which the display color of the hold display is changed to "leopard pattern" as the look-ahead notice effect, the "leopard pattern" is already displayed as the look-ahead notice effect. Therefore, if the "leopard print" is displayed even once in the variable display game, it is assumed that it will be a big hit and the result of the variable display game is expected, so that the special figure synchronization effect can be noticed.

In addition, if the forecast type of the normal advance notice effect and the advance notice type of the story reach advance notice effect and the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect correspond to the prohibition conditions, they are memorized according to which of the advance notice types corresponding to the prohibition conditions. It may be different whether the notice information is deleted (destroyed) or the stored notice information is replaced with the notice information corresponding to another notice type. For example, in other words, a predetermined number of times (this In the example, the group 4 controlled to be a big hit (a big hit without a ball may be excluded) when it is executed more than once is configured to include a notice type for operating the movable body. When the special lottery result is out of order, the character C is set as the notice type of the normal notice effect, and the prohibition condition is met based on the fact that the notice 4 is set as the story reach notice effect or the pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition, the notice information stored in the normal notice mode storage area is stored so that the normal notice effect according to the character C is not executed without replacing the character C, which is the notice type for operating the movable body, with another notice type. Control to correct by deleting, and to display the image according to the notice type after replacement by replacing the notice 4 which is the notice type that causes the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to display the image with another notice type. One or both of the controls corrected by the above may be executed. That is, since it is easy to perform replacement control for the so-called display effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, it is possible to display another image by changing the notice type when the prohibition condition is met. On the other hand, the so-called movable body effect that operates the movable body is difficult to replace and control due to the number of installed movable bodies and the time required for movement, so it is corrected by stopping the execution of the movable body effect itself. You may do so. This makes it possible to reduce the control load related to the game processing. In addition, when replacing the display effect, all the notice information including the notice type that does not correspond to the prohibition condition is changed to the predetermined notice information among the notice information corresponding to the plurality of packaged notice types (notice modes). It may be replaced, or only the notice type corresponding to the prohibition condition may be replaced with another notice type.

Further, as described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a lottery process related to the normal advance notice effect (process for determining the advance notice type of the normal advance notice effect) and a lottery process related to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (notice type of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect). Etc.) and lottery processing related to story reach notice production (process to determine the notice type of story reach notice production), and then the prohibition processing is executed and these decision results are prohibited. It is configured to determine whether or not the condition is met and correct it if the prohibition condition is met, but the lottery process is executed so that the prohibition condition is not met based on the lottery result of the previously executed process. You may try to do it. For example, in the effect setting process shown in FIG. 103, the normal notice setting process (step S1580) is executed, the lottery process related to the normal notice effect (the process of determining the notice type of the normal notice effect) is executed, and then the story reach notice is given. When the setting process (step S1530) is executed and the story reach notice setting process is executed in step S1570 of the story reach notice setting process (step S1530), based on the lottery result of the normal notice setting process (step S1580). Specifically, the story reach notice is based on whether or not the notice type of the normal notice effect is determined to be the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen in the normal notice setting process (step S1580). The notice type of the production may be determined. That is, when the special lottery result is out of order (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the background image B that displays the "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen is determined as the notice type of the normal notice effect. If so, the notice type that displays "leopard print" in the background of the dialogue as the notice type of the story reach notice production is restricted so as not to be decided, and the notice type that is less expected to be a big hit than the notice 4 (notice 1 to notice) It may be decided in 3), or when the special lottery result is a big hit (it may not include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), "leopard" is displayed in the background of the display screen as a notice type of the normal notice effect. If the background image B for displaying "pattern" is determined, it can be determined as the notice 4 for displaying the "leopard pattern" on the background of the dialogue as the notice type for the story reach notice effect (the one that allows the decision on notice 4). It may be, or it may be forcibly decided in notice 4). As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the lottery process related to the normal advance notice effect is executed at a timing earlier than the lottery process related to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect and the lottery process related to the story reach advance notice effect, but the normal advance notice effect is as described above. It is executed at a plurality of timings, and a normal advance notice effect may be executed at a timing later than the story reach advance notice effect or the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. In this case, if the result of the lottery process related to the normal notice effect may fall under the prohibition condition (the special lottery result may be out of order (including a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the normal notice effect is produced. As the notice type of, it was decided to be the background image B that displays "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen), so that the lottery process executed at a timing later than the lottery process related to the normal notice effect does not correspond to the prohibition condition The lottery contents (notice type, etc.) are restricted. That is, although the order in which the effects are executed is the earlier timing, the order in which the lottery processing is executed is the later timing. There is no need to change the contents. In addition, when the special lottery result is out of order (may include a big hit or a small hit without a ball), the background image B that displays "leopard pattern" on the background of the display screen is determined as the notice type of the normal notice effect. If so, as the notice type of the story reach notice production, the notice type that displays "leopard pattern" in the background of the dialogue is restricted so as not to be decided, and the notice type that is less expected to be a big hit than the notice 4 (notice 1 to notice) By deciding in 3), it is possible to create a so-called upstart state in which the expectation of a big hit increases according to the progress of the game, and the player can expect a big hit and pay attention to the variable display game.

[23. Scenario production control procedure by level management]
Here, a more detailed procedure for the effect control by the level management described above will be described as a fourth modification. The reliability level is set based on the information transmitted from the main control board 4100. In addition, the reliability level is set by lottery in order to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the change notice effect, and set for each case. The outline of the procedure for setting the reliability level will be described below.

[23-1. Lottery for pre-reading notice production]
The reliability level of the look-ahead notice effect is set when the game ball wins the starting winning opening (at the time of holding winning). When the game ball wins the start winning opening, the pre-reading information is transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the effect control board 4140. Based on the received look-ahead information, the effect control board 4140 draws a lottery for the type of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo-continuous type) and the type of one or more look-ahead notice effects. The look-ahead information includes a fluctuation pattern command, a symbol type look-ahead command indicating the type of result (big hit type) of the fluctuation display of a special symbol, and the like.

[23-1-1. Selection of pseudo-continuous fluctuation type (pseudo-continuous type)]
Here, the selection of the type of pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous type) will be described. Whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be executed and the number of fluctuations are determined at the time of the hold winning, and are transmitted to the effect control board 4140 together with the look-ahead information. Then, the effect control board 4140 draws a lottery for the type of pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous type) according to whether or not the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be executed and the number of fluctuations.

FIGS. 111 and 112 are diagrams showing an example of a type of pseudo-continuous variation (pseudo-continuous type) in this modified example. The maximum number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in this modification is four, and the selection probability of the pseudo-continuous type executed according to the fluctuation pattern is defined for each pseudo-continuous number of times. FIG. 111 shows a case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0, and FIG. 112 shows a case where the number of pseudo-reams is 4. It should be noted that the drawing is omitted because the lottery probability is different only in the case of the pseudo-ream number of 1 to 3 times.

There are three types of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in this modified example: STORY (story) pseudo-ren, special move pseudo-ren, and hyper-pseudo-ren. .. In addition, it is possible to select not to execute the pseudo-ream. Then, the lottery probability is defined according to the fluctuation pattern.

Further, as the number of pseudo-reams increases, the expectation of a big hit increases. Therefore, when comparing FIGS. 111 and 112, it is set so that the probability that the pseudo-ream is executed is higher when the number of pseudo-reams is 4. Has been done. In addition, when the number of pseudo-reams is 4, the so-called ghost effect is not executed except for fluctuations in which reach does not occur.

[23-1-2. Lottery of reliability level at the time of winning]
When the type of pseudo continuous fluctuation (pseudo continuous type) is determined, the effect control board 4140 determines the reliability level at the time of winning based on the determined type of pseudo continuous fluctuation and the symbol type look-ahead command included in the look-ahead information. Lottery. In the above-mentioned example, the reliability level is set based on the fluctuation pattern, but in this modified example, the reliability level at the time of winning is determined based on the type of jackpot together with the fluctuation pattern information. That is, it is determined in consideration of the result of the variable display of the special symbol.

The winning reliability level in this modification is determined according to the symbol group corresponding to the special symbol type (big hit symbol, symbol type look-ahead command) and the variation pattern (variation pattern look-ahead command). FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example of the types of symbol groups in this modified example. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example of the definition of the symbol group in this modified example.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 113, three types of symbol groups are defined. Specifically, group 1 is for an out-of-order symbol, group 2 is for a jackpot symbol excluding the jackpot in the maximum round, and group 3 is for a jackpot symbol in the case of the maximum round.

Subsequently, referring to FIG. 114, a symbol group corresponding to the symbol look-ahead command value (mode value of the symbol type look-ahead command) is defined. The symbol look-ahead command value corresponds to the symbol name (type of jackpot). In addition, the big hit without a ball comes out corresponds to the group 1 for the missed symbol. In addition, Group 3 is set in "05H", "09H", and "0AH" which is the maximum round (10R) in Special Figure 1, and "0EH" which is the maximum round (16R) in Special Figure 2.

As described above, it is classified into groups according to the number of game balls to be paid out based on the symbol look-ahead command value notified from the main control board 4100 (game value provided to the player), and according to the classified groups. You can set the reliability level at the time of winning.

In this modification, the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning is set according to the symbol group and the number of pseudo consecutive times. When the symbol group and the number of pseudo-reams are determined, the corresponding winning reliability level lottery table is specified. Then, the winning reliability level is determined based on the specified winning reliability level lottery table. The procedure for determining the reliability level at the time of winning will be described below.

First, the reliability level at the time of winning will be specifically described. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of the reliability level at the time of winning in this modified example. As shown in FIG. 115, the winning reliability levels from level (LV) 0 to level 7 are set in ascending order of jackpot expectation (reliability).

As for the content of the effect according to the reliability level at the time of winning, the effect is not executed in the case of level 0, and the effect is executed in the case of level 1. Then, as the level increases, the reliability increases, and at level 6, a highly reliable character (ladybugs) appears, and at level 7, a premium effect indicating that a big hit is confirmed is executed.

Next, an example of the reliability level lottery table at the time of winning will be described. FIGS. 116 to 121 are diagrams showing an example of a winning reliability level lottery table in this modified example. FIG. 116 shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0 in the symbol group 1, FIG. 117 shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 4 in the symbol group 1, FIG. 118 shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0 in the symbol group 2, and FIG. 119 shows the symbol group. In the case of 2, the number of pseudo-reams is 4 times, FIG. 120 shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0 in the symbol group 3, and FIG. 121 shows the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 4 in the symbol group 3. It should be noted that the drawing is omitted because the lottery probability is different only in the case of the pseudo-ream number of 1 to 3 times. In this modification, the winning reliability level lottery table is provided for each number of pseudo-reams, but a winning reliability level lottery table may be provided for each type of pseudo-ream.

In this modification, the reliability level at the time of winning is drawn from the winning reliability level lottery table shown in FIGS. 116 to 121 based on the fluctuation pattern notified from the main control board 4100. For example, when the symbol group 2 is selected and the number of pseudo-reams is 4, and the fluctuation pattern is "character short reach jackpot" (PTN is 21), the winning reliability level lottery table shown in FIG. 119 is acquired. do. Then, level 4 is selected with a probability of 30%, level 5 with a probability of 30%, and level 6 with a probability of 40%.

By drawing the reliability level at the time of winning in consideration of the result of the variable display of the special symbol in this way, for example, the level 7 notice mode (premium notice, which is a special notice effect in which the big hit is confirmed when it appears) is maximized. It is possible to make it appear only when the jackpot fluctuation that becomes the number of balls occurs, and for fluctuations that generate jackpots that are relatively unfavorable to the player, such as jackpots with a small number of balls and jackpots that do not shift to a high probability state, By setting a low level of reliability at the time of winning, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from being excessively fueled.

[23-1-3. Look-ahead production combination lottery]
When the reliability level at the time of winning is selected as described above, the pre-reading effect (pre-reading advance notice effect) to be executed is drawn by lottery. In this modification, as the look-ahead effect, a look-ahead effect that executes a specific effect such as changing the background display and a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display can be executed. Further, since the look-ahead effect is executed until the change that is the target of the look-ahead effect is started, the effect according to the number of fluctuating changes that the look-ahead effect can be executed is executed.

The look-ahead effect that executes a specific effect can be executed by combining a plurality of effects, and one or a plurality of look-ahead effects (look-ahead notice effects) are combined and executed according to the reliability level at the time of winning. .. In this modification, "Story effect look-ahead notice", "Special move level look-ahead", "Hyper-effect look-ahead notice" that executes a predetermined notice effect, and "Countdown look-ahead notice" that displays a countdown to a change with a large degree of expectation, the same color By stopping the identification symbol or performing a specific effect when the fluctuation is stopped, "same color symbol stop look-ahead", "pre-reading notice when the fluctuation is stopped", and the light guide plate are used to suggest that the subsequent fluctuation is highly expected. It is possible to execute "light guide plate look-ahead" to be used and "thundercloud mode" to display thunderclouds in the background.

FIGS. 122 to 129 are diagrams showing an example of a look-ahead effect combination lottery of this modification, and a lottery table is set according to the type of pseudo-ream to be executed and the number of variations in which the look-ahead effect can be executed. FIG. 122 shows a case where there is no pseudo-ream and the variation is the case, and FIG. 123 shows a case where there is no pseudo-ream and the number of pre-readable fluctuations is four. FIG. 124 shows a case where the pseudo-ream type is a STORY pseudo-ream and the variation is the case, and FIG. 125 shows a case where the pseudo-ream type is a STORY pseudo-ream and the number of pre-readable fluctuations is four. FIG. 126 shows a case where the pseudo-ream type is a special move pseudo-ream and the variation is the case, and FIG. 127 shows a case where the pseudo-ream type is a special move pseudo-ream and the number of pre-readable fluctuations is four. FIG. 128 shows a case where the pseudo-ream type is a hyper-pseudo-ream and the variation thereof, and FIG. 129 shows a case where the pseudo-ream type is a hyper-pseudo-ream and the number of pre-readable fluctuations is four. In the case where the number of pre-readable fluctuations is 1 to 3 times, the lottery probability is different, so the illustration is omitted.

In this modification, the look-ahead effect corresponding to the pseudo-ream type is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 124, when the STORY pseudo-ream is executed, the story effect pre-reading notice is executed. Similarly, when the special move pseudo-ren is executed, the special move level look-ahead is executed, and when the hyper-pseudo-ren is executed, the hyper-effect look-ahead notice is executed.

Further, the countdown look-ahead notice, the same color symbol stop look-ahead, the change stop look-ahead notice, the light guide plate look-ahead, and the thundercloud mode can be executed individually or in combination with other effects. In this modification, the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed by combining 25 patterns including the case where the look-ahead effect is not executed (in the case of level 0). Furthermore, the expectation of big hits is set to be higher in the order of pattern (PTN) 1 to pattern 25, which makes it easier to execute multiple look-ahead effects. In pattern 25, countdown look-ahead notice and same-color symbol stop look-ahead , The look-ahead notice at the time of fluctuation stop is set to be executed respectively.

Explaining concretely with reference to the figure, for example, when the pseudo-ream type is determined to be "special move pseudo-ream" and the reliability at the time of winning is level 2 (LV2) (Fig. 126), the probability is 30%. Do not execute the look-ahead effect (PTN1), and execute the "special move level look-ahead" with a 3% probability (PTN2). In addition, "countdown look-ahead notice", "same color symbol stop look-ahead", "fluctuation stop look-ahead notice", "light guide plate look-ahead", and "thundercloud mode" are executed with a probability of 3% (PTN3 to PTN7). Further, along with "Special Move Level Look-ahead", "Countdown look-ahead notice", "Same color symbol stop look-ahead", and "Fluctuation stop look-ahead notice" are executed with a probability of 10% each (PTN8 to PTN10).

[23-1-4. Pre-reading prize hold lottery]
Next, a look-ahead effect that changes the hold display will be described. The hold display is displayed in a predetermined shape by the number of fluctuations held on the display device when the game ball wins a prize at the start port. In addition to the normal display (normal hold), the hold display can be displayed in a different color or shape as a look-ahead notice effect. In this modification, the hold is normally white, and it changes to blinking white, blue, green, purple, red, or rainbow depending on the degree of expectation.

FIGS. 130 to 133 are diagrams illustrating an example of a pre-reading winning hold lottery of this modified example. FIG. 130 is a diagram showing a table for drawing a mode that can be held and displayed at the start of the fluctuation at the time of starting winning. In this modification, the upper limit color of the change of the hold display, that is, the mode in which the hold display can be finally changed from the start winning to the start of the change, is determined based on the reliability level at the time of winning. From the table shown in FIG. 130, a lottery will be drawn at the time of starting winning. The hold of the change is displayed in an area different from the hold display before the start of the change (for example, an area provided adjacent to the hold display area), and in what mode the display mode in the state before the change is. It is possible for the player to recognize the warmth, and further, it is possible to notify the high or low degree of expectation by changing during the fluctuation.

FIG. 131 shows the case where the number of holdings at the time of starting winning is 1, FIG. 132 shows the case where the number of holdings at the time of starting winning is 2, and FIG. 133 shows the case where the number of holdings at the time of starting winning is 4. Based on the upper limit color of the change of the hold display determined by the table shown in FIG. 130, a lottery is drawn at the time of winning the starting opening. For example, if the number of holds at the time of starting prize is 4, and the upper limit color of the change of the determined hold display is blue, the mode of the hold display at the time of starting prize is set based on the table shown in FIG. The lottery is drawn, and specifically, it is normally held with a probability of 50%, blinks white with a probability of 30%, and is displayed with a hold in blue with a probability of 20%. In the case where the player's expectation is raised by gradually changing the hold display as the hold with the number of holds 3 is exhausted, the lottery probability is different, so the illustration is omitted.

In this modification, the player's expectation can be increased by gradually changing the hold display as the hold is digested. Therefore, if the number of holds is small, the chance of change of hold is small. Therefore, when the number of holds is 0, the hold display is performed based on the table shown in FIG. 130, and the variable display is started without changing. On the other hand, when the number of holds is 1, the mode of the hold display at the time of the start winning is drawn based on the table shown in FIG. 130, and the hold variable display is started according to the progress of the game (for example, the hold variable display is started). If), change the hold display. Further, when the number of holds is large (for example, in the case of 4), the hold display can be changed each time the hold is exhausted. At this time, the hold display is changed so as not to exceed the upper limit of the change drawn at the time of the start winning. The hold display may be changed by lottery at a predetermined opportunity, or may be changed stepwise up to the upper limit of the change. Further, it is not necessary to change it step by step, and it may be changed from blue to purple, or it may be changed at once from the normal hold to the upper limit (for example, rainbow) at the last moment.

Further, the gradual change of the hold display may be changed so that the degree of expectation does not decrease (does not decrease), or once it decreases, it is finally changed so that the degree of expectation becomes the highest from the start of the change. good. In addition, a hold display change scenario in which a mode in which the hold display changes stepwise is defined in advance may be selected by lottery based on the final mode of the hold display. As a result, it is not necessary to draw a lottery for the display mode each time the pending digestion is performed, and the control can be simplified. Further, by making it possible to select only the hold display change scenario in which the downfall does not occur, it is possible to eliminate the need for control for preventing the downfall.

As described above, by executing the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the winning reliability level drawn after the start winning of the game ball, the variation pattern, the jackpot symbol, and the effect pattern are defined for each combination of these. Since it is not necessary, it is possible to easily manage the effect control data.

[23-2. Notice scenario lottery at the time of the change]
Next, the lottery procedure of the notice scenario at the time of the change will be described. First, the lottery for the advance notice scenario at the time of the change is drawn at the start of the change. Specifically, it is determined after receiving the special figure variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 4100. Using the determined reliability level at the time of winning, the flow from drawing a notice scenario to drawing an individual notice effect will be specifically explained.

[23-2-1. Fluctuation pattern classification lottery]
When the effect control board 4140 receives the special figure variation pattern command, the effect control board 4140 draws a variation pattern classification based on the winning reliability level set at the time of the hold winning and the received special figure variation pattern command (variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern classification is to subdivide the fluctuation pattern, and it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern in which the degree of production expectation is adjusted in more detail. FIGS. 134 and 135 are diagrams for explaining an example of the variation pattern classification of this modified example, FIG. 134 is a lottery table when the reliability level at the time of winning is 0, and FIG. 135 is a drawing table of the reliability level 7 at the time of winning. The lottery table of the case is shown. As for the other winning reliability levels, since the lottery probability or the reliability level of each effect is only different, the illustration and detailed description will be omitted.

The winning reliability level used for the lottery of the notice level at the time of the fluctuation uses the winning reliability level determined at the time of the start winning, but pre-reading is prohibited (Special Figure 2 during non-time reduction, during time reduction). Special figure 1, during big hit, before or after the change of the game state on the main control side, for the predetermined number of fluctuations before and after the change, for the predetermined number of fluctuations when the power is turned on, or a combination of all or any of the conditions) If the reliability level cannot be created at the time of starting prize due to the above, etc., the reliability level at the time of winning is created by using the special figure variation pattern command in the same manner as the procedure for determining the reliability level at the time of winning at the time of starting winning. In addition, the reliability level may be drawn only based on the symbol type command of the special figure variation pattern command instead of determining the reliability level at the time of winning the start (hold), and further, it varies from the time of the start (hold) prize. The reliability level may be drawn (determined) individually at the start. In this case, the reliability level at the time of winning and the reliability level at the start of fluctuation are drawn (determined) with a certain relationship. A certain relevance is to draw (determine) the reliability level at the start of fluctuation so that it is equal to or lower than the reliability level at the time of winning, or to set the created reliability level at the time of winning to the special figure fluctuation pattern command. Compare with the contents of, and correct the reliability level at the time of winning that was decided at the time of pending winning. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the reliability level at the time of winning and the reliability level at the start of fluctuation from deviating from each other, prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and suppress the decline in the interest of the game. can.

If the reliability level at the time of winning is 0, the expectation of a big hit is low. Therefore, for example, if the fluctuation pattern is "Character short reach out of reach", refer to FIG. 134 and refer to FIG. 134, "Character short reach reliability" with low reliability. Either "degree 5%" or "character short reach reliability 20%" is selected with a lottery probability of 50%, and a more reliable fluctuation pattern classification is not selected.

On the other hand, when the reliability level at the time of winning is 7, the expectation that it will be a big hit is high. Therefore, for example, even if the fluctuation pattern is the same “character short reach out of”, referring to FIG. "Character short reach reliability 5%" is selected with a 20% probability, "Character short reach reliability 20%" is selected with a 30% probability, and "Character short reach reliability 50%" is selected with a 50% lottery probability, making it more reliable. High fluctuation pattern classification is now selected. As for the reliability of the fluctuation pattern classification, a notice mode having a reliability value according to the reliability value is drawn by lottery.

By setting the variation pattern classification in this way, even when a command for specifying the same variation pattern is received from the main control board 4100, detailed effect contents (variation pattern classification) according to the reliability level at the time of winning are received. ) Can be selected, and an effect that is more consistent with the look-ahead notice effect can be executed. When the variation pattern classification is not set, if a highly reliable effect is executed by lottery at the time of the look-ahead notice effect, there is a possibility that a low reliability effect is executed by the lottery in the notice effect at the time of the change. On the other hand, in this modified example, by determining the production based on the reliability level at the time of winning together with the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to make it difficult for the production content to be inconsistent, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. ..

In the variation pattern classification, as shown in FIG. 100, the variation pattern without a branch number may correspond to the variation pattern itself, while the variation pattern to which a branch number is assigned may correspond to the variation pattern classification. At this time, the fluctuation pattern classification may also be determined by the main control board 4100.

[23-2-2. Lottery points and notice level]
In this modification, the entire fluctuation is divided into four, lottery points are provided for each divided section, and the notice level is drawn for each lottery point. At the time of tempai (when reach occurs), the first half of SP reach, and the second half of SP reach.

FIGS. 136 to 139 are diagrams showing an example of a notice level table showing the notice level at each lottery point of this modification, FIG. 136 is a notice level table during the change in the fluctuation, and FIG. 137 is a notice at the time of tempai. The notice level table of the effect, FIG. 138 shows the notice level table of the notice effect in the first half of the SP reach, and FIG. 139 shows the notice level table of the notice effect in the second half of the SP reach. There is a one-to-one relationship between the notice level and the winning reliability level, and the winning reliability level LV7 is defined as premium, but the notice level LV7 is also defined as premium. By drawing a notice level using the winning reliability level, the notice mode in the changing notice effect is executed in a more consistent manner with the pre-reading notice effect and the hold lottery determined by the winning reliability level. Because.

In the notice level table shown in FIGS. 136 to 139, the content of the effect pattern is added and set as the reliability level, and a specific explanation is also shown. In the actual program, the pattern number (PTN) is used for control. For example, in the pattern 1 of the fluctuating level, the reliability level is 1, and the Gase notice appears after a 5-second fluctuation, so that the pattern 1 is "changing_LV1_5".

Further, even if the reliability level is the same, it is possible to assign a plurality of patterns according to the effect content (variation pattern). For example, patterns 1 to 7 are assigned to the reliability level 1 during fluctuation. Has been done. Similarly, patterns 8 to 12 have reliability level 2, patterns 13 to 17 have reliability level 3, patterns 18 to 22 have reliability level 4, patterns 23 to 27 have reliability level 5, and patterns 28 to. A reliability level 6 is assigned to 32, and a reliability level 7 is assigned to patterns 33 to 37. Explaining a plurality of patterns using the changing LV2 shown in FIG. 136, the pattern 8 performs a pseudo-ream. Patterns 9 are also assigned to fluctuations in which no reach is fixed, and pattern 9 is assigned to fluctuations in which reach is fixed and one pseudo-ream variation is performed. Similarly, patterns 10 to 12 are one-to-one with the number of pseudo-reams. ing.

Further, since SP reach is executed only when the reliability level is 3 or more, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the case where the reliability level is 3 or more is defined in the notice level table.

[23-2-3. Notice level combination scenario lottery]
Subsequently, a notice level combination scenario is drawn based on the selected variation pattern classification. FIGS. 140 to 143 are diagrams showing an example of a notice level combination scenario. FIG. 140 is an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0 (no pseudo-ream) and normal fluctuation or normal reach, and FIG. 141 is a case where the number of pseudo-reams is 0 and the SP reach is developed. This is an example of a lottery table. FIG. 142 is an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 4 and is normal fluctuation or normal reach, and FIG. 143 is an example of a lottery table in the case where the number of pseudo-reams is 4 and develops into SP reach. be. Note that the illustration is omitted when the number of pseudo-reams is 1 to 3.

Specifically, the variable pattern classification lottery will be described. For example, when "SP development_character SP second half reliability 80%" is selected, PTN5 is drawn with a lottery probability of 10% with reference to FIG. 143. In this case, the notice level "Fluctuating LV" is "Fluctuating_LV4_4 times pseudo-ream", "Tempai LV" is "Tempai_LV5", and "SP reach first half_Notice LV" is "SP reach first half LV5". However, "SP reach second half LV5" is selected for "SP reach second half_notice LV".

By having a plurality of scenarios in which a plurality of notice levels are combined for each fluctuation pattern classification in this way, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects from the start to the end of the change of the special symbol, and the notice effects can be performed. It is possible to effectively change the degree of expectation of.

[23-2-4. Notice lottery by notice level]
Subsequently, the content of the advance notice effect is drawn based on the advance notice level of each selected lottery point. FIGS. 144 and 145 are diagrams obtained by extracting an example of a plurality of advance notice lottery tables, and FIG. 144 is a diagram showing a lottery table of "window notice at the start of fluctuation". FIG. 145 is a diagram showing a lottery table of “SP second half cut-in notice”. The "window notice at the start of change" is classified during the change of the notice point, and a lottery is performed according to the contents of the "changing LV" that has already been decided. Specifically, when "Fluctuating_LV7" is selected for "Fluctuating LV", referring to FIG. 144, there is a 30% probability that the "super heat frame red" will be 50% for the "premier frame rainbow". It is designed to be selected with the probability of. In addition, the "SP second half cut-in notice" is divided into the second half of the SP reach of the notice points, and a lottery is performed according to the contents of the already determined "changing LV". Specifically, when "SP reach second half LV6" is selected for "SP reach second half_notice LV", referring to FIG. 145, "7 red stars" has a 20% probability of "red". "33 stars" is selected with an 80% probability. In addition, instead of determining the notice content (notice type, notice mode) based on the level of each lottery point, the lottery is performed directly based on the fluctuation pattern command, the symbol type command, the reliability level at the time of winning, and the fluctuation pattern classification. You may.

It should be noted that the advance notice level combination scenario may be directly associated with the variation pattern command without drawing the variation pattern classification.

[Amusement machine equipped with multiple production operation units]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine capable of further increasing the player's motivation to operate will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 to 197. The effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 4140.

FIG. 146 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 147 is a right side view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described, but the same configuration as described above will be omitted as appropriate. The operation button 410 provided on the door frame 3 corresponds to the above-mentioned pressing operation unit 405, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 also provided on the door frame 3 correspond to the above-mentioned dial operation unit 401. Equivalent to. For example, when the effect is presented, the player can participate in the effect by operating the operation button 410, the effect selection left button 331, and the effect selection right button 332. The volume output from the speaker can be adjusted by the player operating the effect selection right button 332.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided in front of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword portion 5010 having a sword blade portion 5011, a handle portion 5012, a collar portion 5013 sandwiched between the sword blade portion 5011 and the handle portion 5012, and a sword portion 5011 of the sword portion 5010. It constitutes a sword ornament 5001 composed of a sheath portion 5020 capable of being capable of being used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sheath portion 5020 movably provided on the door frame 3 in the left-right direction in the front view. Further, the sword portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword pulling direction and the sword delivering direction. The sword portion 5010 is usually in a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and the sword-drawing operation makes the sword blade portion 5011 visible to the player in the sword-drawing effect. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword-drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the sword-delivering operation by the player and returning to the sword-delivering state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 148, an opportunity to execute a sword drawing effect accompanied by movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) will be described. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern selection table in an effect mode in which a sword extraction effect can be executed. (A) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a sword removal preparation transition effect according to the type of variation pattern. Shown, and (B) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of the sword-drawing effect is shown.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword-drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword-drawing preparation transition production in advance. In spite of this, there are patterns in which the sword-drawing production is not performed, and there are patterns in which the sword-drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword-drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 148 (A), whether or not to execute the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is drawn according to the type of variation pattern determined by the main control board 4100 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a fluctuation pattern for a large hit fluctuation at the time of a big hit, a fluctuation pattern for a small hit fluctuation at the time of a small hit, and a fluctuation pattern for a missed fluctuation at the time of a miss, and the fluctuation results in an advantageous result for the player. It is set so that the higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the sword preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for big hit fluctuations, with a probability of 30% in the case of the fluctuation pattern for small hits, and in the case of the fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuations. It is executed with a 20% probability. It should be noted that the probability of the variation pattern at the time of deviation fluctuation may be changed depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect so that the probability that the sword removal preparation transition effect is executed is higher when the reach effect is performed than when it is not performed. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (B), whether or not the sword-drawing main effect is executed is drawn according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect. When the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed even if the type of the variation pattern is the same, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is set to be higher than when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed. In addition, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing effect is executed increases as the variation pattern results in an advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the fluctuation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. Specifically, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the variation pattern for out-of-order fluctuation, the probability that the sword-drawing main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is not executed in the variation pattern for small hit variation. In the case of a variable pattern for jackpot fluctuation, the sword-drawing main effect is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect.

In addition, when the sword-drawing effect is executed, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern is advantageous for the player, the higher the probability that the sword-drawing effect with the aura member is executed. Is set to be. Here, in the case of the variation pattern for small hit variation, the sword-drawing effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of aura member due to sword pulling movement of sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 149 to 152, the sword-drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-drawing effect (sword-drawing preparation transition effect and sword-drawing book effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 149, FIG. FIG. 150) and the aura member 5035 are provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described with respect to the case of forming an integral decorative body (FIGS. 151 and 152).

FIG. 149 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword ornament body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself, and is a state transition diagram in which (A) the sword is delivered and (B) the first. The sword-drawn state and (C) the second sword-drawn state are shown. FIG. 150 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5030. In addition, FIG. 150 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state where the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5030 easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sword-delivered state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 149 (B), in the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling preparation transition effect, only the part of the habaki 5011a fitted to the hand of the blade part 5011 is pulled out from the sheath part 5020 and can be seen by the player. It becomes the first sword withdrawal state. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 (C), in the sword decorative body 5001 after the sword pulling operation in the sword pulling main production, the blade portion 5011 is further pulled out from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be able to operate independently of the blade pulling operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5030 has a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword-delivered state (FIG. 149 (A)) to the first sword-drawn state (FIG. 149 (B)). The range of motion is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 150 (A)) to the open state (FIG. 150 (B)) inside the portion 5020 to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the process of changing the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (FIG. 149 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be located below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even if it operates at the maximum, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword-drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is included in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 150 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. It has a pinion 5033 and. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a driving means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the right direction of the rack 5031a and in the left direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 stop at positions (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011, respectively.

Further, below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030).

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword part 5010) changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword withdrawal state, it changes from the closed state to the open state, and the movement of the aura member 5030 causes the blade part 5011. The sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state after being deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the form in which the maximum operation is performed, but also the form in which the operation is stopped in the middle). ).

FIG. 151 is a state transition diagram illustrating a sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020, and is a state transition diagram of (A) sword delivery state, (B) first sword pulling state, and (C). Indicates the second sword pulling state. FIG. 152 is a vertical cross-sectional view illustrating the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 152 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the blade portion 5011 taken out from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make the operation of the aura member 5035 easy to understand. Here, the same reference numerals are given to the same configurations as those in FIGS. 150 and 151 described above, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 151 (A) to 151 (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 for accommodating the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself can move in the left-right direction, it can move in the up-down direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration body 5001 has an aura member, the aura member 5035 changes the state of the blade portion 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword delivery state (sword delivery state). ⇔ 1st sword withdrawal state ⇔ 2nd sword withdrawal state) This makes it possible for the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) to be united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decorative body.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath portion 5020 as shown in FIG. 152 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end thereof is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely housed state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 and the enclosure aura member 5036. It has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b provided below the hollow portion of the above, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in the front view by the driving means (not shown), the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in the front view, and both pinions mesh with each other, so that the rotational force is on the rack right. It is converted into an upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the enclosure aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the range of motion.

Further, although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion maintains a relative positional relationship according to the state change (sword delivery state ⇔ first sword extraction state ⇔ second sword extraction state) of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010). An example of combining with 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (combination) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword drawing state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means (not limited to the complete appearance state in which the maximum movement is performed, but the movement is stopped in the middle and appears in the middle It suffices if it can be in a state with an aura member). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state.

(Example of sword drawing using a sword ornament)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158, a sword-drawing effect using the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001) will be described. In the following, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed in the reach effect ((X1) to (X5) in the figure), the sword-drawing main effect is not executed ((X6) and (X7) in the figure). , The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described with respect to the effect patterns ((A1) to (D2) in the figure) in which the sword drawing main effect is executed. .. FIGS. 153 to 157 are effect transition diagrams of the sword drawing effect. FIG. 158 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation validity period related to the operation means.

In the reach effect, first, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol that were variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, "7"), and only the central decorative symbol is variablely displayed. It begins by forming a reach state (FIG. 153 (X1)). Subsequently, the decorative symbol in the reach state is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display area, and in the central display area, an effect image suggesting the execution of the sword pulling effect (movable of the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed. Specifically, after the image of two samurai facing each other and starting the Iai (Fig. 153 (X2)) is displayed, the image of one samurai holding the handle and holding the sword in the sheath (Fig.) 153 (X3)) is displayed. Here, the effect suggesting that the sword decoration body 5001 is movable is performed by the image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. During this period, the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword effect operation unit 5000 maintains the sword delivery state (FIG. 149 (A)).

Next, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed by a lottery based on the type of variation pattern transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 154 (X4) and 154 (X5). When started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the face of the samurai holding the sword with his eyes closed is displayed in the above-mentioned image, and the eyes are enlarged and displayed with the passage of time. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state, so that the sword-drawn preparation transition effect is performed. It should be noted that when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, it is easier to execute the sword-drawing main effect after that than when it is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the sword preparation transition effect is an expectation effect that indicates the expectation that the sword main effect is executed by the movement of the sword decoration body 5001. In the sword-drawing preparation transition production, by swinging the sword decoration 5001 in the first sword-drawing state up and down, even if the player is expected to change the sword decoration 5001 to the second sword-drawing state. good. The vertical swing of the sword decoration body 5001 in the first sword drawing state is performed to the extent that the aura member 5030 (5035) is not visible to the player in the form with the aura member. On the other hand, when the sword preparation transition effect is not executed, the sword decoration body 5001 may maintain the sword-delivered state so that the image shown in FIG. 153 (X3) described above continues to be displayed.

Here, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the subsequent sword drawing main effect is in the form of having an aura member, the aura member 5030 is closed inside the sheath portion 5020 at the timing of the sword extraction preparation transition effect (FIG. 150 (A). )) To move the range of motion as much as possible (maximum movement) from the open state (FIG. 150 (B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. At this time, in the sword decorative body 5011 in the first sword withdrawal state, the portion from the hand of the blade portion 5011 to the portion of the habaki 5011a can be visually recognized by the player, but as described above, the aura member 5030 is the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. Since it is provided below, there is no possibility that the aura member 5030 will be visually recognized by the player even if the aura member 5030 operates at the maximum. Further, the aura member 5030 is configured to be visible to the player at substantially the same timing as the timing at which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state. Therefore, the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state functions as an operating means capable of accepting the sword delivery operation by the player, and at the same time, the degree of expectation is determined by the form of the operating portion (sword portion 5010) operated by the player. It is possible to suggest.

Then, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed by lottery based on the type of variation pattern and the presence / absence of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, the eyes are enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Sweat oozes on the forehead of the samurai (Fig. 154 (X6)), and the central decorative design that was displayed in a variable manner stops. And the stop mode different from the right decorative symbol, that is, the stop mode (here, "6") is displayed as a stop (FIG. 154 (X7)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state from the first sword-drawn state at the time of FIG. 154 (X6), and maintains the sword-delivered state. That is, the reach effect is completed without the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as an operating means.

On the other hand, when the sword-drawing main effect is executed, after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is completed, an image of the Iai slashing being performed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is the second sword-drawing effect. It becomes a state. Here, the form of the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state includes a form with an aura member that can be visually recognized in a form in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030, and the aura member 5030 is invisible. A form without an aura member is provided so that the undeformed blade portion 5011 can be visually recognized.

First, with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword drawing state is in the form without an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing production starts, in the display area of the production display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 154 (X5) (FIG. 155 (A1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 155 (A2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 155 (A1), and the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player.

Next, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state and a predetermined period of time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player, that is, the handle portion 5012 of the sword portion 5010 in which the player protrudes from the sheath portion 5020. In order to function as an operation means capable of accepting the operation of grasping and pushing the sword blade portion 5011 downward so as to fit in the sheath portion 5020, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, a sword having the same shape as the second sword withdrawn state of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 155 (FIG. 155). A3)). In the sword decoration body 5001, the LED of the internal LED substrate 5011c blinks to indicate that the operation is valid. Further, the image in the operation promotion effect is preferably an image related to a series of Iai, so that the operation effect image is displayed in the foreground so as to be superimposed on the immediately preceding Iai slashing scene image (FIG. 155 (A2)). It may be (see FIG. 161 (G2) described later).

Then, during the valid operation period, the player grabs the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 and performs a sword delivery operation in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. The post-operation effect is performed according to the degree of expectation that gives an advantageous result, and the effect is terminated with the notification of winning of the symbol type (FIG. 156). Specifically, when the symbol type is a big hit, the cut effect image is displayed flashily in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156 (C1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed. At the timing when the opponent's samurai is defeated and the Iai is settled, the center decorative symbol stops in the same stop mode as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, that is, the jackpot mode (here, "7") in the center of the screen. It is displayed (FIG. 156 (C2)). On the other hand, when the symbol type is out of alignment, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the cut effect image is displayed more plainly than in the case of a big hit (FIG. 156 (D1)), and the central decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed is displayed. At the timing when the stop is displayed, the center decorative symbol is different from the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the center of the screen together with the image that the opponent's samurai cannot be defeated and the Iai cannot be settled, that is, the off mode (here, "6"). Is stopped and displayed (FIG. 156 (D2)).

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, a case where the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword drawing state is in the form of having an aura member will be described. When the sword-drawing effect is started, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image in which the samurai opens his eyes and his eyes become sharp is displayed from the enlarged image of the eyes of the samurai with his eyes closed in FIG. 154 (X5) (FIG. 157 (B1)), an image of pulling out the sword that was being held and slashing the opponent's samurai is displayed (Fig. 157 (B2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 changed from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state at the time of FIG. 157 (B1), and the sword blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 (right aura member 5031 and left aura member 5032). Becomes visible to the player. Here, the blade portion 5011 is already deformed by the aura member 5030 at the time when the state changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state, but the present invention is not limited to this. First, even if only the blade portion 5011 is visible to the player after the second sword is pulled out, the aura member 5030 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the blade portion 5011 is deformed to form a form with an aura member. It suffices that the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member in the second sword-drawn state by the time the operation valid period is started. However, since the sword decoration body 5001 is already in the second sword extraction state in which the player can operate the sword, the appearance of the aura member 5030 can surely recognize the change in the degree of expectation, while the aura member 5030 If the operation takes time, there is a concern that the player may induce an erroneous operation. Therefore, when the aura member 5030 is made recognizable by the player while a series of movements from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state are performed as in this example, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the second sword withdrawal state. It is preferable that the operation validity period is started promptly.

Further, the images of FIGS. 157 (B1) and (B2) are the same as the images of FIGS. 155 (A1) and (A2) described above. It is not possible to judge whether or not it is. By actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001, the player can grasp whether it is a form with an aura member or a form without an aura member. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 can be attracted attention even before the sword decoration body 5001 is made to function as the operation means, and the player can easily recognize the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation means and enjoy the operation effect without any confusion. Can be done. The image displayed on the effect display device 1600 at this time does not have to be the same as described above, and may be an image similar to the extent that the player can be directed to see the sword decoration body 5001. .. For example, there may be some differences in the samurai image (differences in eye color and effect effect).

Then, when the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player reaches the effective operation period, the image of the sword in the operation promotion effect performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is in the same form with an aura member as the sword decoration body 5001. It will be displayed (Fig. 157 (B3)). Subsequent production is the same as in FIG. 156 described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. In the case of the form with the aura member, the effect images in FIGS. 156 (C1) and (D1) described above may be displayed more flashy than the form without the aura member.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 158, the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation valid period in the sword drawing effect in which the sword preparation transition effect and the sword drawing main effect are performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 158, when the reach effect is started (time t0), the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The state changes to the state of pulling out the sword (time t1). At this time, when the effect pattern in which the aura member is attached is set, the aura member 5030 is in the open state from the closed state, but even in the open state, the aura member 5030 is in the game in the first sword drawing state. It is provided so that it cannot be seen by a person. Therefore, at the stage of the first sword withdrawal state, the player grasps whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 further changes to the second sword withdrawal state, and if so, whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can't. However, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed, the sword-drawing main effect is executed, and there is a high possibility that the form has an aura member, so that the player's expectation can be increased. Further, even if the sword-drawing main effect is not executed, the sword movement suggestion effect (FIG. 153 (X3)) is executed by the effect display device 1600 before the start of the sword-drawing preparation transition effect, so that the player can move the sword. As a movable body effect corresponding to the suggestion effect, the state change (movable) of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state can be captured.

Then, when the sword preparation transition effect is completed, the sword extraction main effect is subsequently started, and the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (time t2). Then, after a predetermined period has elapsed, the operation valid period is started, and the sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means (time t3). When the operation valid period is reached, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect using a sword related to a series of Iai effects is performed. Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period (time tx), the post-operation effect is performed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 returns from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. Then, when the preset operation valid period ends, the reach state ends (time t4), and the symbol type is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that a series of Iai effects ends (a series of Iai effects). Time t5). The operation validity period may be terminated by the detection of the operation by the player, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure. If no operation is detected during the operation valid period, the sword ornament 5001 is automatically returned from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation valid period.

Here, the predetermined period (time t3-t2) from the time when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword pulling state to the start of the operation valid period is the mode (aura member) in which the player is in the second sword pulling state of the sword decoration body 5001. A period longer than the operation valid period (time t4-t3) is secured as an aspect confirmation period during which it is possible to confirm whether or not the form is attached, a light emitting mode, and the like. That is, even if the operation unit (sword part 5010) that can be operated by the player reaches the operation position (second sword withdrawal state) that functions as the operation means, the operation acceptance is immediately started (the operation validity period is generated). Instead, the player is allowed to operate after confirming the final mode of the operation unit at the operation position. As a result, the player confirms the final mode before operating the sword ornament 5001, and raises expectations for the subsequent development (for example, in the case of the form with an aura member, the expectation increases), and prepares the mind. As soon as the second sword is pulled out, the operation validity period starts and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be reduced by rushing to the operation production without confirming the mode of the operation means. Can be wiped off.

Further, the sword drawing effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed in a series of Iai effects performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the sword decoration body 5001 is a movable effect (time t0 to t3). An operation effect (time t3 to t4) as an operation means is defined as an effect related to the operation effect. As a result, the player can be impressed with the unexpectedness and variety of effects in switching the functions of the sword decoration body 5001, so that the deterioration of the game interest caused by the uniform effect by the conventional operation means can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the above-mentioned production example, the case where the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself and the sword blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030 has been described. However, the aura member 5035 is the sheath portion of the door frame 3. The same applies to the case where the sword portion 5010 is provided on the 5020 and is united with the member on the frame side (aura member 5035) to form an integral decorative body.

As described above, the sword decorative body 5001 of this example constitutes an operating means capable of changing (deforming or combining) the mode of the members (sword portion 5010 and aura member 5030) of the same system as the decorative movable body having a general appearance. doing. The mode of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state, first sword withdrawal state, second sword withdrawal state, form without aura member and form with aura member) is a game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is determined based on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by acceptance (see FIG. 148). Therefore, the sword decoration body 5001 can suggest the degree of expectation that the variable display will be an advantageous result for the player due to the change of its own mode, and raises the interest of the player's operating means (sword decoration body 5001). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, before the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (operation position) that can be operated by the player, the expectation level is suggested by changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword delivery state to the first sword extraction state. doing. In addition, the appearance of the aura members 5030 and 5035 in the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state suggests the degree of expectation. In this way, the sword ornament 5001 of this example changes to the expected suggestion mode (first sword withdrawal state and appearance of aura member) in the process of changing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state (operation position). , The player becomes strongly interested in the operating means until the operating means becomes operable. Further, when the state change of the operating means and the expectation degree suggestion are performed separately, specifically, when the operation to the operation position is performed after the expectation degree suggestion is performed in advance, the expectation degree is high. In the aspect, there is a concern that the player may operate the sword decoration body 5001 even though the operating means is not yet in the operable operation position when the player grasps the sword decoration body 5001. Since the state change to the position and the expectation degree suggestion proceed at the same time, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned erroneous operation.

In the above-mentioned first sword pulling state, only the habaki 5011a portion of the blade portion 5011 is pulled out from the sheath portion 5012 so that the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 (5035). A part of the aura member 5030 (5035) may be visible in the one-drawn state. At this time, make sure that the amount of sword drawn in the first sword-drawn state is less than the maximum amount of sword-drawn in the second sword-drawn state (operating position). Here, the aura member 5030 (5035) is in the completely appearing state when the second sword is pulled out. Since the player can see a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) indicating that the expectation is high from the first sword withdrawal state, the player can have a higher expectation at the time of the first sword withdrawal state. You can increase your interest in subsequent changes.

In addition, when the player can see a part of the aura member 5030 (5035) in the first sword withdrawal state, it is determined that the aura member is attached at the stage of the sword withdrawal preparation transition effect (high expectation). Since the player can grasp it and have high expectations, the disappointment when the sword-drawing production is not executed in the subsequent development becomes very large. Therefore, when the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed, the player's emotions are greatly shaken depending on the presence or absence of the sword-drawing book effect, and it is possible to provide a highly playful effect.

(Modification example 1-Sword drawing effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 159 to 162, when the sword pulling effect is executed in the reach effect, the sword pulling operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect is triggered by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Will be described. 159 to 161 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 1. FIG. 162 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 of the modified example 1 and the operation timing of the operation means. The same description as the above-mentioned sword-drawing effect (FIGS. 153 to 158) will be omitted as appropriate.

Here, the production patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (E1) and (E2) in the figure) in which neither the sword-drawing preparation transition effect nor the sword-drawing main effect is performed, and after the sword-drawing preparation transition effect is executed. The screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the state of the operation button 410 for the effect patterns ((Y1) to (Y3) → (F1) to (F3) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure) in which the sword-drawing effect is performed. The transition and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described.

When the reach effect is started, the Iai effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 159 (Y1)), and the effect suggests the operation of the operation button 410 by displaying the operation button image to which the effect is added. Is performed (FIG. 159 (Y2)). Then, when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, an image display of the operation button to be operated and a gauge display of the operation valid period are performed, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate is performed (FIG. 159 (FIG. 159). Y3). At this time, the operation button 410 to be operated is lit, and the operation button for image display is also displayed in the same light emitting mode. Therefore, the player can easily perform the operation effect of the operation button 410. It is possible to detect that the operation button 410 is emitted, and the light emission of the operation button 410 is terminated when the operation by the player is detected.

If the sword-drawing preparation transition effect and the sword-drawing main effect are not performed and the result is a disengagement, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the reach effect is completed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image notifying the result of the loss (“767”) is displayed (FIGS. 160 (E1) and (E2)), and the effect is completed. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001 and the operation button 410.

Further, when the sword pulling main effect is performed after the sword pulling preparation transition effect is executed, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the first sword pulling state when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected. A sword-drawing preparation transition effect is performed (FIGS. 160 (F1) and (F2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the white characters of "Tenki" are displayed on the blackout screen (Fig. 160 (F1)), and the image of the samurai on the side trying to touch the sword is displayed. (Fig. 160 (F2)). Next, the sword-drawing effect in which the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword-drawing state to the second sword-drawing state (a form with an aura member) is started (FIGS. 160 (F3), 161 (G2) and (G2)). At this time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword extraction state to the second sword extraction state (a form with an aura member) due to the sword extraction main effect, FIG. Unlike the samurai Iai image shown in FIG. 161 (G1), an image of a lightning bolt running is interrupted and displayed on the blackout screen as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation to win (hit) Iai is shown by the strength of the lightning bolt.

Subsequent production is the same as in FIGS. 155 (A2), (A3) and 156 described above. In order to function as an operation means capable of effectively accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Then, the player is urged to perform the sword delivery operation within the operation valid period (FIG. 161 (G2)), and the symbol type (hit or miss) is notified by the player's sword delivery operation (FIG. 161 (G3) or (FIG. 161 (G3)). G4)).

Subsequently, with reference to the timing chart shown in FIG. 162, the operation of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 by the player and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 will be described. The first modification is characterized in that the operation of the operation button 410 by the player starts the state change of the sword decoration body 5001. When the reach effect is started (time t0), the operation valid period of the operation button 410 occurs at an early stage, and the operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the operation button 410 is performed (time t1). Then, when the player operates the operation button 410 within the operation valid period (time t1 to t2) (time ty), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to change the state, and the sword is first pulled out from the sword-delivered state. Here, in the first sword-drawing state, the player cannot determine whether or not the aura member 5030 appears (whether or not the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the aura member 5030). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state (time t2), and after a predetermined time elapses, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in order to make the sword decoration body 5001 function as an operation means. When the validity period occurs, an operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the player to operate the sword decoration body 5001 (time t3), and when the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation validity period (time t3 to t4) (time t3). At time tx), the decorative symbol in the reach state is stopped, the result is notified, and the effect is ended (time t5). If the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is not detected within the operation validity period of the operation button 410 set in advance (time t1 to t2), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (first form) when the operation validity period ends. (2) The form with an aura member in a sword-drawn state) may be deformed and changed at once. Further, the timing of the state change from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state is changed according to the operation of the player's operation button 410, that is, after the first sword withdrawal state is reached and a certain period of time elapses, the state changes to the second sword withdrawal state. It may be. If the player does not detect the operation of the sword decoration 5001 within the preset operation validity period (time t3 to t4), the sword decoration 5001 becomes the second when the operation validity period ends. It is returned from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state.

In the first modification, the state change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. The timing for starting the sword withdrawal operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the operation button 410 (time ty), and the timing for starting the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is determined by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 (time tk). In this way, the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is reversed (sword pulling operation and sword delivery operation) depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated, so that the mutual operation is effective. The periods (time t1 to t2 and time t3 to t4) are provided so as not to overlap. Therefore, even if the other operating means is operated during the operation valid period of one operating means, it becomes invalid.

As described above, in the first modification, the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 is started based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. Therefore, the operation of the operation button 410 by the player determines the form (final form) when the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operating means (for example, the form with an aura member by deforming and changing the state of the sword decoration body 5001). It can be made to look like the second sword is pulled out. As a result, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further increased, and the player's motivation for operation can be increased.

Further, based on the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect images corresponding to the deformation and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (FIGS. 160 (F1) to (F3) → FIG. 161). Since (G1) and (G2)) are displayed, the operation value of the operation button 410 can be further enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

(Modification example 2-Stage aura withdrawal effect using operation buttons)
In the following, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 167, the degree of appearance of the aura member 5035 in the form of the sword decoration body 5001 with the aura member, specifically, the combination of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011, based on the modification 1. A case where the degree (aura level) is changed according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 by the player will be described. 163 to 167 are examples of the effect transition diagram of the sword pulling effect of the modified example 2. The same effects as described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The aura level provided here has 0 to 3 stages. Aura level 0 indicates a completely housed state (FIG. 152 (A)) in which the aura member 5035 is not visible to the player. The aura level 3 is a completely appearing state in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 in the second sword-drawn state while maintaining a relative positional relationship in the sword-delivered state, so that the player can see the maximum. 152 (B)) is shown. The aura level 1 indicates a 1/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player by only 1/3 of the complete appearance state. The aura level 2 indicates a 2/3 appearance state in which the aura member 5035 is visibly appearing to the player for only two-thirds of the complete appearance state.

Here, there is no sword preparation transition effect with the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (H1) and (H2) in the figure) in which neither the sword preparation transition effect nor the sword main effect is performed. Is the case where the sword is pulled out, and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes the final form (the form with the aura member in the completely appearing state (aura level 3)) by operating the operation button 410 once (in the figure). (Z1)-(Z3)-> (I1) and (I2)-> (G1)-(G4)), multiple operation of the operation button 410 is required, and the aura level of the sword ornament 5001 changes stepwise. For the effect patterns ((Z1) to (Z3) → (J1) to (I2) → (G1) to (G4) in the figure), the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the sword decoration The operation transition of 5001 will be described.

In the above-mentioned modification 1, the final form (form at the time of operation) of the sword decoration body 5001 is found by operating the operation button 410 once, but in the modification 2, the operation button 410 is operated a plurality of times in stages. It is characterized in that a step operation effect is performed in which the aura member 5035 is combined with the blade portion 5011 to change the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001.

First, in the production pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword extraction main effect is not performed, that is, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 does not change even if the operation button 410 is operated, FIG. (Y1) to (Y3) → Follow the same effect transition as in FIGS. 160 (E1) and (E2) (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3) → FIGS. 164 (H1) and (H2)).

In addition, there is no sword preparation transition effect, but the sword main effect is performed, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the final form (complete appearance state (aura level 3) with an aura member) by operating the operation button 410 once. ), After the same effect as in FIGS. 159 (Y1) to (Y3) of the above-described modification 1 (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3)), the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. At this time, the aura member 5035 of the sword decoration body 5001 is united with the sword blade part 5011 while maintaining the relative positional relationship with the sword blade part 5011 in the sword delivery state, and completely appears when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword removal state. The state (aura level 3) is reached (FIG. 164 (I1)). The above-described modification 1 of the sword decoration body 5001 with an aura member is composed of the aura member 5030, and the modification 2 is composed of the aura member 5035. FIG. 160 (F1) (F2) → follows the same effect transition as in FIG. 161 (FIGS. 164 (I1) (I2) → FIGS. 161 (G1) to (G4)).

Further, in the case where there is no sword preparation transition effect but the sword extraction main effect is performed, the operation of the operation button 410 is required a plurality of times, and the aura level of the sword decoration body 5001 changes stepwise. The same production transition as before is followed up to the operation of the operation button 410 for the first time (FIGS. 163 (Z1) to (Z3)), but the sword decoration body 5001 after the first operation is in the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state. However, the aura member 5035 is in a completely housed state (aura level 0) in which the player does not see it. The image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at this time is the same image as in FIG. 164 (I1) described above (FIG. 165 (J1)).

Next, the second operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. Is performed (Fig. 165 (J2)). Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura levels 0 to 3.

First, when the set aura level is "0" (that is, in the case of the form without the aura member), the aura member 5035 maintains the completely accommodated state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the effect is produced. In the display area of the display device 1600, the step operation effect is terminated (there is no operation request for the operation button 410 thereafter), and it is notified that the process returns to the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state. An image (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed (FIG. 165 (J3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 has no aura member, and follows the same production transition as in FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. (FIG. 165 (J4) → FIGS. 161 (G1) to (G4)).

On the other hand, when the set aura level is any one of "1" to "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 is in the 1/3 appearance state from the completely housed state. Become. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 165 (J5)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in green indicating the aura level 1.

Next, the third operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emitting and decorated. Is done. At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 166 (K1)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be green indicating the aura level 1. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "1", the aura member 5035 maintains the 1/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect is completed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 ( After that, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image (here, "Iza" is displayed on the blackout screen) indicating that the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state is returned to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect). White characters) are displayed, and an image showing aura level 1 is displayed (FIG. 166 (K2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 1/3 appears, and in a production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 1, FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 166 (K3) → FIGS. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 1 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "2" or "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 1/3 appearance state to the 2/3 appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 2 is displayed (FIG. 166 (K4)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is lightly decorated in red indicating aura level 2.

Next, the fourth operation effect of the operation button 410 is started. When the operation valid period of the operation button 410 starts, an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 together with an image showing the aura level 2, and the operation button 410 to be operated is displayed. An operation promotion effect that is luminescent and decorated is performed (FIG. 166 (K5)). The emission color of the operation button 410 at this time may be red, which indicates aura level 2. Then, when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the next effect is performed according to the preset aura level.

When the aura level is "2", the aura member 5035 maintains the 2/3 appearance state even if the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, and the step operation effect ends in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Since then, there is no request to operate the operation button 410), and an image notifying that the player returns to the sword-drawing effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state (here, "Iza" on the blackout screen. White characters) are displayed, and an image showing the aura level is displayed (FIG. 167 (M1)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a state where 2/3 appears, and in a production mode (color, sound, etc.) according to the aura level 2, FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. A similar effect transition is followed (FIG. 167 (M1) → FIGS. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 2 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

When the aura level is "3", when the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the aura member 5035 changes from the 2/3 appearance state to the complete appearance state. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image showing the aura level 3 (MAX) is displayed (FIG. 167 (L1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is luminescently decorated in a rainbow color indicating an aura level 3. Subsequently, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the step operation effect is finished (after that, there is no operation request of the operation button 410), and the sword extraction effect (Iai effect) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword extraction state is performed. An image notifying the return (here, white characters of "Iza" on the blackout screen) is displayed, and an image showing the aura level 3 is displayed (FIG. 167 (L2)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a form with an aura member in a completely appearing state, and is the same as FIG. 160 (F2) → FIG. The production transition is followed (FIG. 167 (L3) → FIGS. 161 (G1) to (G4)). At this time, an image showing the aura level 3 is always displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

In the above description, the degree of integration of the aura member 5035 with the blade portion 5011 is changed each time at the operation timing when the aura level rises to widen the range visible to the player (increasing the degree of appearance). Not limited to. Even if the aura level rises, the aura confirmed when the aura level is confirmed (specifically, when the white letters "Iza" are displayed on the blackout screen) without increasing the appearance of the aura member 5035. A stock type combination may be performed in which the aura member 5035 is united with the blade portion 5011 at once so that the appearance degree according to the level is obtained. Further, the target for increasing the appearance degree stepwise is not limited to the aura member 5035, and the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be targeted. For example, the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) may be changed in a stepwise state from the first sword withdrawal state to the second sword withdrawal state.

As described above, in the second modification, the player is requested to operate the other non-movable operation button 410 while the sword decoration body 5001 functioning as the operation means is in the movable state, which is a surprising novelty. It is possible to provide various operation effects, and it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game as compared with the first modification. In addition, since the player is given multiple operation opportunities to develop the production step by step, it is possible to impress the player with a great deal of involvement in the production and prevent the interest in the production from being interrupted. be able to. In addition, since the determined aura level is recognizable in the subsequent production, the player can feel the afterglow of the operation production.

(Other production patterns 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 168 to 170 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600 and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001. First, the sword decorative body 5001 in the sword-delivered state functions as an operating means, and the sword pulling operation by the player is operated and detected. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in the front view, and the sword decorative body 5001 in the second sword-drawn state is the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

When the fluctuating symbol forms a reach state, the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 168 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 168 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (sudare) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In the normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, and a part of the bamboo blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword-delivered state.

In the princess reach effect, an image of the princess heading to the back of the blind is displayed (FIG. 168 (A3)), and then an operation effect suggestion image suggesting the operation effect is displayed (FIG. 168 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, the operation validity period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to pull out the sword decoration body 5001. An operation promotion image and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 169 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY are moved in small steps in the vertical direction from the display of the operation effect suggestion image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation validity period. May be good. Then, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword pulling operation by the player refers to an operation of pulling out the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020 so that the player grasps the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornamental body 5001 in the sword-delivered state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward. When the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword pulling state, the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection is performed. The detection / notification operation may be an operation in which the sword portion 5010 (or the handle portion 5012) moves up and down, such as movement or vibration, or an operation different from the sword pulling operation of the player can be felt through the handle portion 5012 grasped by the player. Just do it. Further, the detection / notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases his / her hand from the handle portion 5012. For this reason, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration body 5001 (such as grasping again for detection confirmation) is reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body is prevented. Can be done.

In the sword pulling operation by the player here, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear, but depending on the degree of expectation, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player pulls out the sword. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY is stationary above the display area without overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (initial stage). The state) is maintained, and a screen indicating the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (FIG. 169 (C1)). Then, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the detached mode "767" (FIG. 169 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 169 (C2) is notified, but is not limited to this, and is returned to the sword-delivered state at the timing when the detection notification operation is terminated. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword pulling operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow) is placed in the center of the front surface (below the display area) that overlaps with the display area of the effect display device 1600. Only the hold display area can be dropped and moved to a visible state (total fall state) (FIG. 169 (D1)). Next, the shadow of the princess is projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body The 5001 maintains the second sword-drawn state (FIG. 169 (D2)). At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, for example. By differentiating the color of the shadow, the size of the shadow, and the comment displayed after that, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the lottery result by the princess reach (the degree of expectation of winning, the game profit when it is a hit, etc.). ..

Then, after a predetermined period has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 was put into the second sword pulling state by the player's sword pulling operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword pulling state was reached. The sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 169 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed with the blinds removed (Fig. 170 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the position where the original sword pulling operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, the hit is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 170 (E1) (E2)), and an image notifying the detachment is displayed together with a sad princess in the case of the detachment (FIGS. 170 (F1) (F2)).

When the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above, but the sword decoration body 5001 moves to the center of the front left and right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600. If the player cannot move due to being grasped when executing, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is made. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop grasping the sword decoration 5001, but the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the left-right movable production timing (FIG. 169 (D3)) of the sword decoration 5001. If it is held at the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the movable effect in the left-right direction of the sword decoration body 5001 is executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) are progressing. Since it is configured to do so, the progress of the game will not be stagnant. The sword decoration body 5001 may be configured to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration body 5001, or may be configured not to perform a movable effect. You may.

In this way, in the princess reach production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration body 5001 is dropped and moved by the sword pulling operation (up and down direction movement) of the sword decoration body 5001 by the player. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved in the forward direction (at the operation position) of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3. On the other hand, it can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword withdrawal operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword withdrawal operation was performed, increasing the operation value of the player and motivating the player to operate. It is possible to suppress the decline of. In addition, since one operating means can be operated in a stepwise different manner (up and down direction during operation, left and right direction after operation) by the operation by the player, an effect using a plurality of movable modes is provided. It is possible to increase the operating value of the operating means as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

The left-right movable effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is an effect display for the purpose of performing an integrated effect with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). The operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword pulling operation with the sword decoration body 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved so as to be located outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. A movable effect in the left-right direction may be performed so as to displace to the left direction (the left end of the frame). Further, since the operation by the player of the sword decoration body 5001 of this example is an operation in the vertical direction (a sword pulling operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom to the top), the sword decoration body 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operating direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

Further, when the sword pulling operation by the player is detected, the detection notification operation for notifying the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player is performed, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. Further, since the detection / notification operation is performed so that the player can visually confirm it for a certain period of time, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for detection confirmation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation and delaying the subsequent movable production of the sword decoration body 5001 or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Further, if the movable effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword decoration body 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to let go, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Since even contact with the operating means is prohibited after the detection / notification operation is completed, the operating value of the operating means can be increased.

(Other production patterns 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 will be described. 171 to 173 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410 used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which the expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree that the fluctuation during execution becomes a big hit and the operation of the operation button 410 are performed. As an effect, a pattern ((A) (B) → M in the figure) in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and developed will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 171 (A)), first, the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is set. The operation promotion effect is started and the player is urged to press the operation button 410 (FIG. 171 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Later (FIG. 171 (N1)), an image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed (FIG. 172 (N2)). After that, the result of this fluctuation display (big hit, missed) is notified (FIG. 172 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expected degree suggestion effect for the variable display during execution. For example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expected degree (FIG. 172 (N2)). A character that changes the held display may appear.

Further, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is suggested and expanded by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. 171 (M1) shows an effect image suggesting that an operation effect requesting a sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 (here, the message of the title "sword pulling chance" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The sword decoration body 5001 at this time is a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 173 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword withdrawal state and the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce an effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 173 (M3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, an effect based on the result of the variation display this time is performed.

When the result of this fluctuation display is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state ( FIG. 173 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative pattern) is displayed (FIG. 173 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of order, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) only stops moving in small steps in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image for notifying the disconnection (decorative symbol stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 173 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001) become possible, and the player can perform the operation button 410. It is not possible to identify subsequent deployments at the time of manipulating. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous effect after the operation.

In addition, in a series of reach effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) are different operation modes (pressing operation and sword delivery operation) for the first time. The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, which is a concern due to the monotonous operation that does not look good.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 may be an effective operation. The operating means effective for the second operation opportunity in this case targets the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Other production patterns 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 174 to 178 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the operation transition of the sword decoration body 5001 in the reach effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not movable and is displayed in the detached mode based on the pressing operation of, the player is given an operation opportunity again by re-variating from the symbol display in the detached mode. Pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) in the figure → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword decoration 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 174 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, here). , "You can move the movable body with a single button stroke") is displayed (Fig. 174 (B)), then the operation validity period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. An operation promotion effect for urging is performed (FIG. 174 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is light-emittingly decorated. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sword-delivered state. Then, when the player's pressing operation on the operation button 410 is detected, the effect is performed according to the preset effect pattern. The pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to a single blow (once), but may be repeated (multiple times). In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410 so that the player can easily grasp the object (movable body) to be moved by the operation. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is movable and becomes a big hit, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 175 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative symbol) for notifying a big hit is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is released. The stop mode "777", the message of "superb") is displayed (FIG. 175 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) does not move, when the player detects the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is only stopped to move in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative symbol in an offset mode (“767”) is oscillatedly displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 176 (P1). After that, as it is, according to the effect pattern to be set. It is developed into a pattern (FIG. 176 (P2)) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an detached mode (“767”), or a resurrection pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the resurrection start image (referred to as "yet") indicating that the fluctuation display has not yet ended from the swing display of the decorative symbol in the detached mode of FIG. 176 (P1). (Samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 176 (P3)), the decorative design is again in the reach state and reduced to the upper right of the screen, and the operation means of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the center of the screen. An operation valid suggestion image (a face with closed eyes of a samurai ally) is displayed (FIG. 176 (P4)). Then, with the passage of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 176 (P5)). As a result, the player raises the expectation that the production using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-emitting decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sword-delivered state to the first sword-drawn state and moved up and down. Then, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 functions as an operation effective operation means according to the set effect pattern, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001. The production of (Katana) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is the operation target is set so that the degree of expectation is lower than the pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is the operation target.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat oozes on the samurai's forehead of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is luminescently decorated (FIG. 177 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is continuously moved in small steps and the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and an operation for prompting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 177 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation validity period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not decorated with light emission when it is operated a required number of times.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. (Fig. 177 (R3)). At this time, the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right corner of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible to the player in the lower right corner of the screen. As in the case of the above (FIG. 173 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the aspect of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again from the completely dropped state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released is a screen. An image notifying the jackpot (messages of the decorative symbol stop mode "777" and "superb") is displayed in the center (FIG. 177 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is stopped. In the display area, the decorative symbol of the misaligned mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 177 (R5)).

When the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the operation means, the image of the samurai who has closed his eyes and sharpens his eyes (sword decoration body) of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the form with an aura member (FIG. 178 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 may be light-emitting decorated. The player can grasp from the image of the display area that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation instead of the operation button 410, but at this point, the form such as whether or not the sword decoration body 5001 is in the form with an aura member. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration body 5001. Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is pulled out and a predetermined period of time elapses, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge showing the operation validity period are displayed (FIG. 178 (Q2)).

Then, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIGS. 177 (R3) and (R4) described above is followed (FIG. 178 (FIG. 178). Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, when the variation display result is out of alignment, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 177 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 178 (Q5)).

In this way, since the expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the expectation is more powerful than the expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. Further, even if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped and moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given an opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. Will be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest, which is a concern because the operation effect is monotonous without shining instead.

Although 3 examples of the effect pattern of the reach effect using the sword decoration body 5001 are shown in FIGS. 168 to 178, various effect modes may be combined. As a result, a wide variety of productions can be provided, and the game entertainment can be further enhanced.

(Pseudo-continuous production using sword decoration)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 179 to 193, a pseudo-continuous effect using the sword ornament 5001 that changes the form stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variable, and the temporary stop and the re-variation are repeated once or a plurality of times. Etc. are shown. Here, the above-mentioned temporary stop indicates a state in which the fluctuation display appears to have stopped, but actually swings slightly and continues to fluctuate. In this example, when a variation pattern that performs pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is selected by the main control board 4100, the pseudo-continuous effect of the effect pattern that can be selected by the lottery of the effect contents by the peripheral control board 4140 is as follows. Explain to.

(Form of sword decoration)
First, the form of the sword ornament 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 179. There are two types of the sword decoration body 5001 described above, one with an aura member and the other without an aura member. Here, the sword portion 5010 is deformed by further operating the handle portion 5012. Are provided in two types.

FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating a form of the sword decoration body 5001 used for the pseudo-continuous production. The sword decoration body 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deforming the handle portion 5012, and is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player is provided from the left and right sides of the sheath portion 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the door. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 like the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 179 (A) to 179 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the forms of the sword ornament 5001 in the sword-delivered state, and show the step 0 form to the step 3 form in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the effect.

As shown in FIG. 179 (A), the step 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to those of FIGS. 149 (A) and 151 (A) described above, and no operation is required for any of the constituent members at the initial stage. Shows the morphology. As shown in FIG. 179 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears on the outside of the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 179 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle portion 5012 expands and moves from the center so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decorative portion 5012a appears from the inside. show. As shown in FIG. 179 (D), in the stage 3 form, in the stage 2 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is further moved upward from the inside of the handle portion 5012 to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. Shows the morphology. Here, the step 1 form to the step 3 form enable the morphological change without putting the sword ornament 5001 into the second sword drawing state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 capable of accepting operations by the player and the non-operating sheath portion 5020 operate together to form an integral decorative body as the operation unit of the operation means, a more powerful operation means is provided. Can be done.

(Example of pseudo-continuous production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 180 to 193, an example of the effect transition will be described with respect to the effect pattern for performing the pseudo-continuous effect. First, the types of effect patterns will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating the types of effect patterns that can be selected based on the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 188 (A), the main control board 4100 determines the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern, the sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern, the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, and the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern. When any of the six types of variation patterns of the pattern is selected, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. The production patterns for performing pseudo-continuous production include basic production patterns (sword LV1 weak production pattern, sword LV1 strong production pattern, sword LV2 weak production pattern, sword LV2 strong production pattern, sword LV3 weak) corresponding to each of the six types of fluctuation patterns. In addition to the effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern), a specific effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, and pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern) is provided. When the fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), a sword LV1 weak production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern or a pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is selected. When the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV2 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV2 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). ), Either the sword LV3 weak production pattern, the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern, or the pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern, and pseudo revival sword LV1 production pattern) Be selected.

The effect patterns include the number of times the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) continues (1 to 3 times), whether or not the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity according to the number of continuations, and when the operation opportunity is given. The mode of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is set (see FIG. 188 (B)). The effect pattern names "LV1" to "LV3" correspond to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of 1 to 3 times. Further, "weak" and "strong" correspond to the drop positions (half drop, full drop) in the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In addition, the "pseudo-sword LV1" gives the sword decoration body 5001 a selection operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), and the player makes a selection not to operate, so that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues. It is shown that it is a production that can acquire. In addition, the "pseudo-revival sword LV1" follows the same production transition as the sword LV1 weak production pattern, which is the basic production pattern that gives the sword decoration body 5001 an operation opportunity for the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). Fluctuation Indicates that the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed again after the drop effect of the special decorative member SDY (sudare) based on the first operation opportunity. The details of the production contents of each production pattern will be described later.

Here, the basic effect pattern is set so that the higher the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, the higher the degree of expectation as the morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 progresses, and further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare role) is set. The lower the drop position of the object), the higher the expectation is set. It is set so that the drop position of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is the same as the case where all the drops are made with a few production patterns. Specifically, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) once and the half-falling sword LV1 weak production pattern is 29%, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continuation once and the full-falling sword. The expectation of the LV1 strong production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2 times, and the expectation of the half-falling sword LV2 weak production pattern is 40%, the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 2. The expectation of the sword LV2 strong production pattern of times and full fall is 50%, the expectation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is 3 times, and the expectation of the sword LV3 weak production pattern of half-fall is 50%, pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The expectation of the LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern of the sword LV3 strong production pattern is set to be 65%. Further, the specific effect pattern is set so that the degree of expectation differs depending on the selected fluctuation pattern even if the effect pattern is the same, and the higher the degree of expectation is, the higher the degree of expectation is set. The expectation of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern that gives the player a selection operation opportunity is 38% and 53%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern and the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern, respectively. It becomes. Further, the expected degree of the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is 47% and 74%, respectively, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern and when the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is used. Further, the expectation of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored after following the same effect transition as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set to 100% regardless of the variation pattern.

Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous effect of each effect pattern shown in FIG. 188 (B) will be described with reference to the effect transition examples shown in FIGS. 180 to 187 and the effect execution timing charts shown in FIGS. 189 to 193. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing an effect transition example of the pseudo-continuous effect common to all the effect patterns. 18 to 183 are diagrams showing a transition example of the effect of whether or not the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given while the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is being performed. Further, FIG. 184 is a diagram showing a transition example of the post-operation effect (drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare)) of the sword decoration body 5001 during the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) common to all the effect patterns. be. Further, FIGS. 185 and 186 are diagrams showing examples of effect transitions that are characteristic of the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern. Further, FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an example of an effect transition that is a feature of the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern. Further, FIGS. 189 to 193 are operation execution timing charts of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sword accessory) in the pseudo-continuous production, and FIG. 189 is a sword LV1 weak production pattern (sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 190 is a sword LV2 weak production pattern (sword LV2 strong production pattern), FIG. 191 is a sword LV3 weak production pattern (sword LV3 strong production pattern), and FIG. 192 is a pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern). , FIG. 193 shows a pseudo-revival sword LV1 production pattern. In the following, an example of an effect transition in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the effect before the variable display is started and the reach state is reached will be described.

(Common to all production patterns)
As shown in FIG. 180A, when the variable display is started, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the specific decorative member SDY (bamboo blind) does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and a part of the blind is visible to the player above the display area (initial state). ) Is stationary. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sword delivery state in the stage 0 form (initial form).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 180 (B) and 180 (C), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image indicating the start of the pseudo-continuous effect (effect content notification "great chance if 100 bodies can be defeated" message, samurai An image that accumulates the aura) is displayed, suggesting to the player that the pseudo-continuous production will start. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180 (D), the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the decorative symbols are re-variated to the player. Notify that. Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001, but the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). ), A sword image showing the form of the sword ornament 5001 (stage 1 form) in advance is displayed. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is notified at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts, so that the player Can grasp and face the stage of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, as shown in FIG. 180 (E), it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of FIG. 180 (D) described above. The pseudo-sword symbol is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display is moved toward the sword ornament 5001 so as to act on the sword ornament 5001, and the revariation of the decorative symbol is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 0 form (initial form) to the stage 1 form in which the aura member 5040 becomes visible. The morphological change of the sword decoration body 5001 at this time is the timing when the player's line of sight shifts to the sword decoration body 5001 from the effect display which is moved and displayed toward the sword decoration body 5001 when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started. That is, it is performed after the start of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 may be before the start of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). Pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) may be started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (F), the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in a magnified display state. , The sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 180 (G), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, is it possible to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state in which the player can operate the sword as an operating means? An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) indicating whether or not, that is, whether or not to give the player an operation opportunity is displayed. Subsequent productions include a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is operation-effective (a production pattern with "LV1" in the name) and a pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 is not operation-effective (name) according to a preset production pattern. Branches to an effect pattern with "LV2" or "LV3" attached to. In the following, an example of the effect transition will be described in order for the nine types of effect patterns.

(Katana LV1 weak production pattern / sword LV1 strong production pattern)
First, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 184, a sword LV1 weak effect pattern or a sword LV1 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case will be described. When these effect patterns are set and the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is set to the above-mentioned FIG. 180 (G). An operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in) is displayed (FIG. 181 (T1)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 181 (T2)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 181 (T3)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern.

Here, when the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 (U1), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Is moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (U2), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the fully dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 180 (B). An expectation notification image (“100 bodies destroyed!”) That notifies the expectation of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the full-fall state is set to be higher than the degree of expectation indicated by the half-fall state described later. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Here, the expected degree notification image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Further, when the set effect pattern is a "weak" effect pattern, when the player's sword delivery operation is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 (U3), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) Is moved to fall from the initial state to a semi-falling state. The semi-falling state means a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved to an intermediate position between the initial state and the fully falling state, and overlaps with the upper half area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view. .. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the stage 0 form (initial form) from the second sword drawing state to the sword delivery state by the sword delivery operation by the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (U4), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned from the semi-falling state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is shown in FIG. 180 (B). An expectation level notification image (“50 bodies destroyed!”) That notifies the expectation level of the variation display result is displayed in a mode corresponding to the start image of the pseudo continuous effect shown. At this time, there is no change in the sword decoration body 5001. Then, as in the "strong" effect pattern, the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) by displaying the expected degree notification image at this time.

If the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001, the set effect pattern is regardless of whether it is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, as shown in FIG. 184 (U5), a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started. NS. Regarding the reach effect at this time, the reach effect of the same effect content is executed in the "weak" effect pattern and the "strong" effect pattern. In this way, by operating the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword delivery operation is required, the player can perform a reach effect after grasping the degree of expectation based on the drop position of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). I can welcome you. Therefore, even if the subsequent reach production is the same, it is possible to have different expectations each time, so that the decrease in the motivation of the player to operate is suppressed, and further, the deterioration of the game interest for the uniform production is suppressed. can do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 188 (B) and 189, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form is operated during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Enable as a means and give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If there is no operation by the player, the fall effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed regardless of the effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 180 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 180 (G) → Fig. 181 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 181 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (FIG. 186). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Katana LV2 weak production pattern / Katana LV2 strong production pattern)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, a sword LV2 weak effect pattern or a sword LV2 strong effect pattern that enables the sword ornament 5001 as an operating means in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is set. An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation). After following the effect transitions shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (G), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is not provided with an operation opportunity from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 180 (G). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 that was in the second sword withdrawal state is returned to the sword delivery state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 1 morphology (Fig. 181 (S1)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 181 (S2)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (step 2 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 1 form. In this way, the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations) of the sword ornament 5001 in the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) are displayed at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) starts. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp and face the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) at which stage.

Then, when the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 181 (S2) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decorative body 5001 changes its form from the step 1 form to the step 2 form in which the handle portion 5012 is split left and right so that the first decorative portion 5012a can be visually recognized (FIG. 181 (S3)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (FIG. 181 (S4)). The morphological change timing of the sword decoration body 5001 from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword extraction state may be set to be simultaneous. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword drawing state (stage 2 form) in which the player can operate the sword as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 182 (V1)).

Here, when the set effect pattern is the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the second pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 182 (V1) is displayed (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened). FIG. 182 (V2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 182 (V3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 2 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 182 (V4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the valid operation period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area, an escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed (Fig.). 186 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 188 (B) and 190, the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern or the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV2 weak effect pattern and the sword LV2 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is not given during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. In the period T2 in which the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 2 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV2 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 190, when the sword LV2 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 180 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 180 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 181 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 182 (V1) → (V2) → (V3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 182 (V4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T2. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 2 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T2, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (FIG. 186). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T2.

(Katana LV3 weak production pattern / Katana LV3 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183, a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern that enables the sword decoration body 5001 as an operating means is set in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). An example of the effect transition in the case of being present will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is a sword LV3 weak effect pattern or a sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the sword decoration is at the timing of giving the operation opportunity of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) shown in FIG. 182 (V1) above. Since the operation opportunity of 5001 is not given, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 181 (S1) to (S4) → FIG. 182 (V1), the effect display device 1600 In the display area, a continuous image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are closed) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given is displayed from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. The sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sword-delivered state while maintaining the morphology in the stage 2 morphology (FIG. 182 (V5)).

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 182 (V6)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation). Then, a sword image showing in advance the form (step 3 form) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is displayed on the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Will be done. At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) and the sword decorative body 5001. In addition, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the stage 2 form. In this way, at the time of the temporary stop display immediately before the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the form and effect level (number of pseudo-continuous variation) of the sword ornament 5001 in the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are displayed. Since the notification is given, the player can grasp and face the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) at which stage.

Then, when the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is started, the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed at the time of FIG. 182 (V6) described above is enlarged and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the effect display is moved toward the sword decoration body 5001 so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the re-variation of the decoration pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form in which the second decoration portion 5012b protrudes above the first decoration portion 5012a so that both decoration portions can be visually recognized as an integral decoration body (the sword decoration portion 5001). FIG. 182 (V7)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 182 (V8)). The morphological change timing of the sword ornament 5001 from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form and the state change timing from the sword delivery state to the second sword withdrawal state may be set to be simultaneous. Further, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 does not have to be changed each time according to the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations, and when the final stage is reached, the form may be changed collectively for a plurality of stages. The effect display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is performed so as to act on the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword decoration body 5001 changes at once when the player's line of sight is directed toward the sword decoration body 5001. It can impress the powerful movement and attract the attention of the player.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, whether or not to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form) in which the player can operate the sword as an operation means, that is, the game. An operation opportunity suggestion image (samurai image with closed eyes) showing the result of deciding whether or not to give the person an operation opportunity is displayed (FIG. 183 (X1)).

Here, when the set effect patterns are the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given by the third pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation confirmation image (an image in which the samurai's eyes are opened) indicating that an operation opportunity is given from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. FIG. 183 (X2)). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (“opportunity !!” message) indicating that the player is given an operation opportunity to request an active operation is displayed (FIG. 183 (X3)). .. Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 3 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and an image showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!". (Fig. 183 (X4)). Then, when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected, as shown in FIG. 184 described above, the expectation degree notification effect is performed by the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) according to the set effect pattern. Therefore, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended. If the player's sword-delivery operation is not detected during the valid operation period, the effect display device 1600 is used regardless of whether the set effect pattern is a "strong" effect pattern or a "weak" effect pattern. In the display area of, an escape image ("enemy, escape!") Showing that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended without the fall effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed ("Enemy, escape!") ( See FIG. 186 (W2)). That is, if the sword delivery operation by the player is not detected within the operation valid period, the player is prevented from grasping the expected degree of the variation display result. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the initial sword delivery state when the operation valid period ends. Here, the escape image is displayed so that the player can grasp the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 188 (B) and 191; the operation of the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern or the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set. The execution timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the sword LV3 weak effect pattern and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern, the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed and the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are In the period T2 in which the sword decoration is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the game is played. Give the person an operation opportunity. Then, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 191, when the sword LV3 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ( (See FIG. 180 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see FIG. 180 (G)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 181 (S1)). Then, the sword ornament body undergoes a second pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S2)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 182 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 182 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 182 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 182 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 182 (V8)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and the expected degree notification of the expected degree corresponding to the total fall is notified. The difference is that the image is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (FIG. 186). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

(Pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern / Pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186, the sword decoration body 5001 is enabled as an operating means in the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), but the pseudo-continuous variation is made by the player selecting not to operate. An example of the effect transition when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern that can acquire the continuation (level-up effect) of (re-variation) is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

When the set effect pattern is the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is given at the operation opportunity grant timing of the first pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation). .. However, the operation opportunity at this time is not an operation opportunity for asking the player to perform an active operation as described above, but a selection operation opportunity for asking the player to select whether or not to operate. Therefore, after following the effect transition shown in FIGS. 180 (A) to 180 (G) → FIG. 181 (T1), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is provided with the operation opportunity of FIG. 181 (T1). An operation selection image (“may be an opportunity !?” message) indicating that it is a selection operation opportunity for the player to select whether or not to operate from the operation confirmation image indicating that the operation is to be performed is displayed (FIG. 185 (Z1). )). Then, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation selection promotion effect for prompting the selection of the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, the sword image in the second sword state (stage 1 form), which is the same as the sword decoration body 5001, is displayed, and the operation direction and the operation validity period are shown together with the message "Please choose whether to put the sword". The image is displayed (FIG. 185 (Z2)).

Here, the set pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) is a variation of either the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern). Subsequent production transitions differ greatly depending on whether the production pattern is set based on the pattern.

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When it is detected, it follows the same effect transition (FIG. 184) as the sword LV1 weak effect pattern (sword LV1 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern.

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. When the valid period of the operation is completed, the sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the second sword drawing state of the stage 1 form to the sword delivery state of the initial form, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 has this selection operation opportunity. An image (“Is it an opportunity ...”) indicating that it was an opportunity to operate is displayed (FIG. 186 (W1)). At this time, there is no change in the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an escape image ("enemy, escape!" ) Is displayed (FIG. 186 (W2)). Then, when the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed, a reach state is formed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the decorative symbol of the normal mode, and the reach effect is started (FIG. 186 (W3)).

In the case of the pseudo sword LV1 weak production pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong production pattern) set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player can perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period. When detected, FIG. 184 (U3) → (U4) (FIG. 184 (U1) → After following the effect transition of (U2)), the remaining effect period (total period of the periods T2 and T3) is varied and displayed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (not shown). Then, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the normal mode at the same timing as a predetermined timing in the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), and then the reach effect is started (FIG. 184 (U5)). reference).

On the other hand, if the sword-delivering operation by the player is not detected during the operation valid period, the operation selection promotion effect shown in FIG. When the operation validity period in which the operation is performed ends, the operation pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continued by acquiring the level-up effect. The effect transition at this time shifts from the above-mentioned FIG. 185 (Z2) to a continuous image (FIG. 181 (S1)) indicating that the operation opportunity is not given at the first operation grant timing, that is, the continuation of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation. After that, in the same manner as the sword LV3 weak effect pattern (sword LV3 strong effect pattern) of the basic effect pattern, FIGS. 181 (S2) to (S4) → FIG. )-> FIGS. 183 (X1) to (X4)-> FIG. 184 (U1)-> (U2) or (U3)-> (U4)-> FIG. 184 (U5).

As described above, the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) greatly differs in the effect development after the selection operation opportunity is given according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 4100. When the selected fluctuation pattern is a sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose to operate at the selection operation opportunity, and when operating at the selection operation opportunity, the basic effect pattern and Similarly, you can grasp the degree of expectation and face the reach production. On the other hand, if you choose not to operate, not only will you not be able to obtain the level-up effect described later, but you will also reach the reach effect without being able to grasp the degree of expectation that you could have known if you originally operated it. .. Further, when the selected fluctuation pattern is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the player should choose not to operate at the selection operation opportunity. If you do not operate at the selection operation opportunity, you can enjoy the production by continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) as in the basic production pattern. On the other hand, if you operate it, you will miss the effect of continuing the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) that you could have acquired if you did not operate it (the shape change of the sword decoration 5001 due to the level-up effect), and the form of the sword decoration 5001 will be initialized. It will return to the form. As for the operation at the selection operation opportunity, the operation effect obtained according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control board 4100, which the player does not know, is exactly the opposite, and the operation during the operation valid period in which the operation is effectively accepted is the game. It provides a novel production that brings a disadvantageous operation result to the person. In addition, the operation at the selection operation opportunity of the specific effect pattern has a greater influence on the subsequent production development than the operation at the operation opportunity of the basic effect pattern. Therefore, the player faces the operation at the selection operation opportunity with a sense of tension and anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game caused by a uniform operation effect.

In particular, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is set based on the sword LV3 weak variation pattern (sword LV3 strong variation pattern), the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation) occurs. When the player operates the sword decoration body 5001 at the selection operation opportunity, the level of the stage 3 form is lowered from the stage 1 form at the time of the selection operation opportunity to the stage 0 form (initial form). On the other hand, if the player does not operate the sword decoration body 5001, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is continuously performed twice, the level is raised to the stage 3 form, and the operation opportunity is given again. Conventionally, a preset number of operations is required in the effect pattern, but in this example, two operation opportunities (LV1 and L3) can be given in advance, but one operation is performed by the player. The grant will end at the opportunity, and it is possible to provide a novel production that more reflects the player's intention. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to operate the operation effect that does not look good and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In other words, even if the effect pattern in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be changed from the initial form to the stage 3 form is set by the variation pattern selected by the main control board 4100, the initial form to the stage 1 form is set depending on the operation of the player. Only the changes up to can be seen, leading to reach production. Since the player can be made to select the operation without being caught by the selected fluctuation pattern (set effect pattern), it is possible to give the player the feeling that his / her own operation selection determines the effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated at the selection operation opportunity, the form of the sword decoration body 5001 returns to the initial form, but the degree of expectation can be grasped by the drop effect of the specific decoration member SDY (sudare). .. If you do not operate the sword decoration body 5001, you will not be able to grasp the degree of expectation and you will end up, and the form will change (level up) further, and you will operate it at the operation opportunity given after becoming the stage 3 form. In some cases, the degree of expectation can be grasped by the falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). In this way, the operation selection at the selection operation opportunity produces the same normal operation effect as the basic effect pattern, and the non-operation selection produces an effect lower than the normal operation effect or a higher effect than the normal operation effect. Therefore, it is preferable to set the degree of expectation to be higher when the effect is high than when the effect is low. In FIG. 188 (A), the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern (pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern, pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern) is changed according to the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the degree of expectation of the same production pattern may be constant regardless of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, in order to provide an appropriate effect more suitable for the player's own sense of selection, it is preferable to change the degree of expectation in the same effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern and the effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to operate and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 188 (B) and 192, the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern or the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set. The operation execution timing of is described.

As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern and the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern, in the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword ornament 5001 in the stage 1 form Is enabled as an operation means, and an operation opportunity is given to the player. When the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. Further, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, three pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are originally provided so that the specific decoration can be performed. After the drop effect of the member SDY, the symbol variation in the normal mode is performed in the remaining effect period (period T2 + period T3).

If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern. Then, when the fluctuation pattern selected at this time is the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern, the second and third pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) are continued, and the second pseudo-continuous fluctuation is continued. In the period T2 in which (re-variation) is performed, the operation opportunity of the sword decoration body 5001 is not given, and in the period T3 in which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is operated. And give the player an opportunity to operate. Then, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-falled by the operation of the player. Further, when the pseudo sword LV1 strong effect pattern is set, a drop effect (expectation notification effect) is performed in which the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the operation of the player. If the player's operation is not detected, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed in either effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 192, when the pseudo sword LV1 weak effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 180 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 180 (G) → Fig. 181 (T1) → Fig. 185). (See (Z1)), the operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 185 (Z2)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) continues (when the sword is set based on the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation validity period, but maintains the stage 1 form (see FIG. 181 (S1)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the second pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 1 form to the stage 2 form (see FIG. 181 (S3)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 181 (S4)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not it enhances the player's feeling of excitement (see Fig. 182 (V1)), but the sword decoration 5001 in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) without generating an operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation. Is returned to the sword-delivered state (see FIG. 182 (V5)). Then, the sword ornament reaches the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) while maintaining the stage 2 form (see FIG. 182 (V6)).

Then, at the same time as the start of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), the sword ornament 5001 changes its form from the stage 2 form to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 182 (V7)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 182 (V8)), and is the operation effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600? Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, in the case of the "weak" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 184 (U3)). Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, in the case of the "strong" effect pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) changes from the initial state to the fully dropped state (see FIG. 184 (U1)), and corresponds to the total fall. The difference is that the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (FIG. 186). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T3.

In addition, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period and the pseudo continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is not continued (when the sword is set based on the sword LV1 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV1 strong fluctuation pattern), the sword The decorative body 5001 changes its state from the second sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state at the end of the operation valid period, and changes its form from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (FIG. 186). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

(Pseudo resurrection sword LV1 production pattern)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 187, the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern is followed, and after making it appear as if the reach production is started as it is, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is revived. An example of the effect transition when the sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. The description of the effect transition similar to the effect pattern described above will be omitted as appropriate.

The pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern is an effect pattern that can be set by the peripheral control board 4140 when the sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or the sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern is selected by the main control board 4100.

When the set effect pattern is a pseudo revival sword LV1 effect pattern, similarly to the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak effect pattern, the above-mentioned FIGS. 180 (A) to (G) → FIGS. 181 (T1) to (T3). Follow the production transition. Then, when the operation by the player is detected in the first operation opportunity, the same effect as in FIGS. 184 (U3), (U4) and (U5) described above is performed regardless of the type of the fluctuation pattern. After following the production transition of UA1) → (UA2) → (UA3), the pseudo-continuous fluctuation by the pseudo-continuous sword symbol is restarted again. If the operation by the player is not detected in the first operation opportunity, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial form of the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, as in the other production patterns. Instead of FIG. 187 (UA1) → (UA2) described above, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends without the drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)).

The resumption of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is centered among the three decorative symbols in the reach state (“7 ↓ 7”) displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 187 (UA3) described above. Temporary stop display with a pseudo-sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, a pseudo-sword symbol that indicates the form and effect level (number of pseudo-sequential fluctuations) of the sword decoration body 5001. This is notified to the player (Fig. 187 (UA4)). On the pseudo-sword pattern at this time, the sword image of the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form and the effect level 3 are displayed. At this point, there is no change in the sword ornament 5001, and the initial form (sword delivery state) is maintained. As described above, in the pseudo-recovery sword LV1 production pattern, when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored, the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 of the stage 1 form and the stage 2 form is not performed. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is performed. Then, at the time of the temporary stop display (FIG. 187 (UA4)) immediately before the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) in the stage 3 form starts, the form and the effect level of the sword decoration body 5001 in the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) are notified. Therefore, the player can grasp the stage of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) and face it.

Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the pseudo-sword pattern displayed at the time of FIG. 187 (UA4) is enlarged and displayed, and the effect display acts on the sword decoration body 5001. It is moved and displayed toward 5001, and the re-variation of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 3 form in which the aura member 5040, the first decoration part 5012a and the second decoration part 5012b operate to make both decoration parts visible as an integral decoration body. (Fig. 187 (UA5)). Subsequently, the sword image of the pseudo-sword pattern displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state, and the sword ornament 5001 is actually changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state. The state changes to (Fig. 187 (UA6)). Here, since the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form at once from the initial form to the stage 3 form for a plurality of stages, it is possible to impress a powerful movement and attract the interest of the player.

After that, the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword-drawing state (stage 3 form), which enables the player to operate the sword, is enabled as an operation means, and the above-mentioned FIGS. 183 (X1) to (X5) are given an operation opportunity. If an operation by the player is detected after following the effect transition of, although not shown, the specific decorative member SDY (not shown) depends on the presence or absence of the operation detection at the first operation opportunity regardless of the type of fluctuation pattern. The type of drop effect of the bamboo blind is determined. If the operation is detected at the first operation opportunity, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is once in a half-falling state, so the level is raised to the above-mentioned FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2). → The same as (U5), the expectation level notification effect is performed by the total drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends. On the other hand, if the operation is not detected at the first operation opportunity, the degree of expectation due to the semi-falling effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) as in FIG. 184 (U3) → (U4) → (U5) described above. The notification effect is performed, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) ends.

If no operation by the player is detected at the operation opportunity to enable the sword decoration body 5001 in the second sword withdrawal state (stage 3 form) as the operation means, the operation validity period ends as in the other effect patterns. At the same time, the sword decoration body 5001 changes to the initial state of the sword, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is not dropped, and the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is performed. An escape image (“enemy, escape!”) Is displayed (see FIG. 186 (W2)), and the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) ends.

In this way, the pseudo-revival sword LV1 production pattern follows the same production transition as the above-mentioned sword LV1 weak production pattern, and when the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) is restored again, it jumps over the level of the stage 2 form and the stage 3 form. Since the same development as the production of the level of (the production of the third pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) in the basic production pattern) is performed, the player is surprised and has a stronger expectation than other production patterns to reach the production. Can face. In addition, even if the player is given an operation opportunity by the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) or the subsequent drop effect of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is half-fall, he / she will not be disappointed. You can enjoy the game in anticipation of the revival of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation).

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 188 (B) and 193, the operation execution timing of the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) when the pseudo resurrection sword LV1 effect pattern is set will be described. ..

As shown in FIG. 188 (B), in the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 1 form is enabled as an operating means during the period T1 in which the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed. Give the player an operation opportunity. At this time, regardless of the selected fluctuation pattern (sword LV3 weak fluctuation pattern or sword LV3 strong fluctuation pattern), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is half-dropped by the operation of the player. (Direction) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed.

Then, after the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is completed and the display returns to the variation display of the decorative symbol in the normal mode, the period during which the third pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed in another effect pattern. Pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed using the sword ornament 5001 corresponding to T3, that is, the form changes to the step 3 form. Then, the sword decoration body 5001 in the stage 3 form is enabled as an operation means, and the player is given an operation opportunity. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is completely dropped by the player's operation (expectation notification). (Direction) is performed. In addition, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped during the period T1 during the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped by the player's operation. A production (expectation notification production) is performed. If there is no operation by the player, the drop effect (expectation level notification effect) is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 193, when the pseudo-revival sword LV1 effect pattern is set, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form to the stage 1 form at the same time as the start of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). (See FIG. 180 (E)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 180 (F)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is made to fully recognize the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (Fig. 180 (G) → Fig. 181 (T1) → (T2). ), The operation validity period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 181 (T3)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. Then, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) changes from the initial state to the semi-falling state (see FIG. 187 (UA1)). Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to a half drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 187 (UA2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T1.

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 1 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the first pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation), that is, at the end timing of the period T1, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (FIG. 186). See W2)), the player recognizes the end of period T1.

After that, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the reach state is once formed by the decorative symbol in the normal mode (see FIG. 187 (UA3)), but the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restored (FIG. 187 (UA4). )reference).

Then, at the same time as the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is restarted, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the initial form (stage 0 form) to the stage 3 form (see FIG. 187 (UA5)). After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (see FIG. 187 (UA6)), and whether the operation becomes effective by the operation opportunity suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Whether or not the player's feeling of excitement is enhanced, and after the player is fully aware of the sword ornament 5001 that is in the operable state (second sword withdrawal state) (see FIG. 183 (X1) → (X2) → (X3)). ), The operation valid period for effectively accepting the player's operation is started (see FIG. 183 (X4)).

Then, when the player performs the sword delivery operation during the operation valid period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its state from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state, and also changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. At this time, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is changed from the initial state to the total drop state. A changing drop effect is performed (see FIG. 184 (U1)). Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) returns to the initial state and corresponds to the entire drop in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Since the expected degree notification image of the expected degree is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U2)), the player recognizes the end of the period T3. Further, although not shown, if the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is not dropped in the first pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) starts from the initial state. It changes to the half-fall state (see FIG. 184 (U3)), and the expected degree notification image of the expectation degree corresponding to the half-fall is displayed (see FIG. 184 (U4)).

On the other hand, when the player does not perform the sword delivery operation during the operation validity period, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the second sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state at the end of the operation validity period, and changes from the stage 3 form to the initial form. The morphology changes. Then, at the end of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) of the resurrection, that is, at the end timing of the period T3, an escape image indicating that the expectation degree is not notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed (FIG. 186 (W2). )), The player recognizes the end of period T3.

In this way, in the pseudo-continuous effect using the sword decoration body 5001, in the sword LV2 effect pattern and the sword LV3 effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed a plurality of times, the number of pseudo-continuous changes is 2 and 3 times, respectively. If it is less than, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state for each pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) so that the player can operate it, but an operation validity period is provided. It is characterized by returning to the sword-delivered state without giving the player an operation opportunity. For this reason, the player is expected to see whether or not the operation is effective even when the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operable, so that the player is interested in the sword decoration body 5001 as an operation means. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is characterized in that the sword ornament 5001 returns to the initial form when the player operates the sword ornament 5001 whose form has changed from the initial form. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a novel impression different from the conventional uniform operation effect that provides a useful effect for the player by the operation of the player. Make the player's operation selection careful. Therefore, it is possible to make the sword decoration body 5001 interested in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation for the operation and a decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, since the sword decoration body 5001 can change its form stepwise until an operation opportunity is given (until the operation validity period occurs), the expectations and interests of the player are gradually raised, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. The period from when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation state and in the second sword withdrawal state (operation position) until the operation effective period is generated is the operation mode (form, light emission, movable) in the operation position by the player. Etc.), it is desirable to provide a period during which sufficient confirmation can be made. As a result, the player can confirm the operation mode before operating the sword decoration body 5001, so that the operation valid period is generated as soon as the second sword is pulled out, and the mode of the operation means cannot be confirmed. It is possible to dispel the concern that the interest in the game will be reduced by shifting to the operation production in a hurry.

The step change of the sword decoration body 5001 described above is shown in the form, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each effect mode, such as a change in the light emitting mode or the operation mode of the sword decoration body 5001, may be changed stepwise according to the number of continuations of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation).

(Application to look-ahead production)
Although the sword-drawing effect in the pseudo-continuous reach effect has been described above, it can also be executed as a look-ahead effect. The case of applying to the look-ahead effect will be described below. In the following, a case where the third hold is the target of the look-ahead effect and the sword LV3 strong effect pattern is set as the look-ahead effect pattern will be described as an example.

When the hold to be read-ahead effect occurs as the third hold 3, the same effect as in FIGS. 180 (B) to 180 (F) described above is performed in the variable display executed at the time of occurrence. The sword decoration body 5001 is different in that the second sword withdrawal state is limited to the time when the operation opportunity is given (the operation validity period is generated). Then, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of the hold 1 when the hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIG. 180 (G) → FIGS. 181 (S1) to (S4) described above is performed. Further, in the next variation display (that is, the variation display of hold 2 when hold 3 occurs), the same effect as in FIGS. 182 (V1) → (V5) → (V8) → FIGS. 183 (X1) to (X3) described above is performed. Will be. As described above, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state in the look-ahead effect only when the operation valid period occurs. Here, the operation valid period is generated at the timing when the variable display of the hold 3 which is the target of the look-ahead effect is started, and the operation promotion effect and the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword delivery state) shown in FIG. 183 (X4) described above are started. The second sword is pulled out from). After that, the same effect transition as in FIG. 184 (U1) → (U2) → (U5) is followed, and the look-ahead effect is completed.

The state change of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state is limited to the timing of occurrence of the operation valid period, but the gradual morphological change is performed at the end of the variable display, but the next variable display is performed. It may be done at the start. The look-ahead effect has the same effect as the pseudo-continuous reach effect.

(Pre-operation suggestion effect using specific decorative member SDY)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period in which the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 becomes effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is effective among the plurality of operation means by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare). .. Specifically, as a suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory), the operation valid period is generated with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern that generates an operation validity period in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated from the initial position to the suggestion position. When the operation is valid, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 194 (B)) that generates the operation validity period with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) positioned at the initial position even during the operation validity period. When is performed, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 becomes effective with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with an operation of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)) in which the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed. Has a 70% probability (including a step-up pattern) that the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, and a 30% probability that the operation button 410 is effective for operation. An example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern and the second suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect will be described below.

(1st suggestion pattern)
FIGS. 194 and 195 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the peripheral control board 4140 based on the variation effect (reach effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 4100. Is a diagram showing a transition example of a reach effect in which a pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 194 (A)), the operation buttons are determined in advance to be effective by lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation validity period for any of the operating means of the 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 194 (B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is maintained at the initial position, an operation valid period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is determined to be valid for operation. Let me. In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled for operation, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is considered to be more effective than the sword decoration 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

When the operation button 410 is activated, as shown in FIG. 194 (C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) maintains the initial position. Let me. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern, although the ratio is lower than that of the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 194 (D), the operation valid period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible.

If an operation on an operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is effective for operation is detected in FIG. 194 (C) or (D) described above, and the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a completely dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 195 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode “767” of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 196 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is valid during the reach effect, as in the case of the first suggestion pattern described above. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach effect to be executed. In FIG. 197, although the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 was once enabled for operation without the sword decoration body 5001 being effective for operation, and then the sword decoration was performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern which makes the body 5001 operation effective.

As shown in FIG. 196 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 which is determined in advance to be valid for operation by the lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. It is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) suggesting that the operation means is effective in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is displayed. It operates in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the initial position, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in the direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position, the operation valid period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) which is determined in advance to be effective is set. generate. In this example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation validity period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in the suggested position, the sword decoration body 5001 is considered to be operation effective at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

When the sword decoration body 5001 is effective for operation, as shown in FIG. 196 (AA3), the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position. To generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to perform the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state (a form with an aura), and the sword-delivering operation by the player is possible. Further, even when the operation button 410 is activated, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 196 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operating at the suggested position, and at the same time, the effect display device 1600 In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promotion effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved from the state of being operated at the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) may be moved from the state of operating at the suggested position to the fully dropped state or the initial state without being returned to the initial state.

Then, when an operation on the operation effective means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is detected in FIG. 196 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 194 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variation display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is dropped and moved so as to be in a fully dropped state from the initial state (FIG. 195 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is released. An image (a message of the stop mode "777" and "superb" of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variation display this time is out of alignment, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is kept in the initial state and is not moved, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is notified of the deviation. An image (the stop mode “767” of the decorative symbol) is displayed (FIG. 195 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

The operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern operated at the suggested position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of movement patterns are provided so that the sword decoration body 5001 has a different ratio of effective operation, the player's interest in the movement can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect used.

(Step-up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern that the operation validity period is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated to the suggestion position is performed and the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operation valid, In addition to the basic pattern that follows the effect transition from FIG. 196 (AA1) to (AA3) described above before the sword decoration body 5001 becomes operational effective, the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is operated. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation.

As shown in FIGS. 197 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation validity period for the sword decoration body 5001 which is determined in advance to be operation-effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 4140. Is generated, that is, before the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 196 (AA3) described above is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (rotation of the aura) as in FIG. 196 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps (FIG. 197 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is operated at the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is light-emittingly decorated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image for urging the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation validity period are displayed. (Fig. 197 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. 195 is not performed, and the switching suggesting the switching of the operation effective operation means. Suggested images (most blackout images) are displayed (FIG. 197 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the second sword removal state (a form with an aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the operation means for which the operation is effective is from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration body 5001. A switching notification image (messages of "chance to pull out the sword" and "I'm sorry to have you pay the sword") is displayed (Fig. 197 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is in a state of operating at the suggested position. Then, when the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration body 5001 shown in FIG. 196 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 195) in the above-mentioned second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that, at the time of FIG. 197 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the operation button 410 may be performed without enabling the operation of the operation button 410 (without the operation promotion effect). It suffices if the player's interest can be directed to the operation button 410 and then the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestion pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestion pattern.

As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is used before the operation valid period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is effective is generated. ) Can be changed, and the operation means that is effective for the operation is suggested depending on the position. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 194 (B)) in which the operation valid period is generated when the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operation effective. In the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1), the sword decoration 5001 Is highly expected to be effective for operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in order to grasp which operation means is effective for operation. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Since the operation effect (fall effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is also used for the result notification (Fig. 195) after the operation of the operation means, a series of drop effects are performed from the vertical small movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It can be shown as a production of the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is effective by the movable body will be effective, is not limited to this, and the character is shown during the pre-operation suggestion effect. It may be displayed to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the operation means for which the operation is effective is determined, not only the operation button 410 is lit or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second sword withdrawal state, but also the operation means for which the operation is effective is moved by vibration or the like. You may do it.

Further, in the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation (or pretended to be valid for operation) in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare accessory) is located at the suggested position. There is a step-up pattern that enables the operation of the sword decoration body 5001. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that, so that the motivation for operation is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) is effective is displayed. At the same timing (FIG. 194 (B)), as in the case of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 196 (AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is viewed from the initial position in front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It may operate in a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper portion, and may be moved in small steps in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. After that, when the operation valid period is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) in the first suggestion pattern is partially the same as the movement in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make it think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the sword decoration body 5001 to be effective even when the pre-operation suggestion effect by the first suggestion pattern is executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation valid period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is operated at the suggestion position. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the effect display device 1600 uses a specific effect pattern. Perform the production. In the production period in which a specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (valid period) that establishes a specific production execution condition can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. And, based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege). The degree of expectation for giving a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated). In addition to the operation button 410, it is possible to further provide another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). In this regard, in a specific effect pattern, when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), this There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) (a case where a specific effect execution condition is satisfied by operating another operation means). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated even if the operation is not performed at the operation opportunity. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for granting the privilege is higher than the case where the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation for giving the privilege suggested when the operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), the operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It will be possible to improve the interest of the game when the production is in the pre-stage where it has not been performed yet and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired effect result (effect result suggesting that the expectation for granting the privilege is high, etc.) does not appear in the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation for another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like). Even if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific production reception period (valid period), it is possible to improve the game entertainment through such operation-related production. Become.

Then, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is provided to any of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) having such a directing property. When giving, it is possible to execute a common operation-related effect when giving those operation opportunities.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) in which the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect reception is possible). ,
-The operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (the effect can be accepted) after the "specific operation-related effect" that can appear even when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is enabled (the effect can be accepted). The first production mode that generates the valid period (effect reception period), and the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled without the production of the "specific operation-related production" being started (the production can be accepted). A plurality of production modes such as a second production mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) to be performed are prepared, and by executing any of these production modes, the operation for the operation button 410 is enabled (effect). It is designed to generate a valid period (production reception period) that can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period in which the operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001 and the like) can be received. Regardless of whether there is a period during which the operation means different from the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, it is common (specification) prior to the occurrence of those periods. ) Operation-related effects will be made feasible, so it will be possible to have fun as to whether a specific operation means or another operation means can accept the effects. By performing the operation while the above is performed, it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the effect, it corresponds to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). The production reception period will be generated, but at least when the production is started, which of those operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) corresponds to the production reception period will occur. Should be kept secret.

Hereinafter, some effect modes that can be adopted when carrying out such a common (specific) operation-related effect will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanatory examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be targeted for common (specific) operation-related effects. In addition, the following production examples and other examples thereof mainly show the production contents when any of the production reception periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific) production is shown. ) Operation-related effects If any of the effect reception periods occurs without being executed, the effect contents may be omitted. However, when any of the production acceptance periods occurs without the common (specific) operation-related effect being executed, the effect contents are as shown in FIGS. 206 (E) and 206 (G), for example. .. That is, in this case, the operation instruction image for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears, or the operation instruction image for prompting the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 appears without executing the specific operation-related effect. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach effect is performed. A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period during which is being executed, or is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. (Specific) operation-related effects may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be appropriately combined and executed with each of the effects of each of the other examples described later, and can also be appropriately combined and executed with each of the above-mentioned effects. It is possible. Each of the effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of each effect of another example described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, each effect described below is performed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform each of the different examples described later. The same can be said for each of the different productions described below.

[First production mode]
In FIGS. 198 and 199, after the production of the specific operation-related effect is started, at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can accept the effect during the period during which the specific operation-related effect is being executed. It is a figure which shows the production example (the first production mode) to be performed.

In FIG. 198 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 198 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 198 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 198 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display is made to move within each. In this way, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed simultaneously in the display area by displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means at the same time. It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 198 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 198 (b) is advanced, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed. An instruction display (here, a character display such as "operate" and a production reception) prompting the user to operate any of these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) while each is stopped and displayed in the area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears to indicate the production status.

According to such an effect mode, although it is possible to receive an operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to make it unclear which of the above can be accepted for production. This is the same effect mode (FIG. 198 (c)) in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is capable of accepting the effect and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is capable of accepting the effect. It is nothing but because it is displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), a plurality of operation means are performed before the operation for at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) can be received. Common (specific) operation-related as shown in FIGS. I try to perform the production.

Therefore, in addition to this production example, in each production example described below and other examples thereof, the production content of the specific operation-related production is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 198 (b) and 198 (c). No. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is after that (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It suffices if it occurs in (middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) remains unclear as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for production. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one can be accepted for production. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed at the same time, and the button image BTG and sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, there is a case where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production for the sword decoration body 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of production) of specific operation-related effects to the occurrence of those effect reception periods, depending on the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting an operation for any of the operation means ("Operate". , Etc.), or always operate a specific operating means among the plurality of operating means, regardless of how the plurality of operating means are allowed to receive the effect. May be displayed to prompt the user. In short, as an operation instruction, the same production mode appears in both the situation where the operation for the operation button 410 is possible for the production and the situation where the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is possible for the production. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production.

Further, in the production example (first production mode) shown in FIG. 198 (c), it is kept secret as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated to receive the production. , Even when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is capable of accepting the production, and when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not capable of accepting the production (in any of the first to third situations described later). However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the sword decoration body 5001 side to provide the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. 198 (c) appears is only the operation for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. Whether it is in the first situation where the production can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted for the production, or the operation for the operation button 410 and the operation for the sword decoration 5001 Both of them are set to be in one of the third situations where the production can be accepted. When the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs among these a plurality of situations, the first situation (the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) is given. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the rate at which the second situation (the situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs within the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable to make it lower than the rate at which

Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation on the operation button 410 is performed in any of the first situation (operation button 410) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001). (Whether "FF" is progressed in the figure), or in either the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is performed (when the "GG" in the figure is advanced), the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (Fig. 199 (d), Fig. 199 (f)). Is supposed to be done.

In the operation-time effect, in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 199 (d) and 199 (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 performs a predetermined display effect. ("Chance !!") is supposed to be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided by providing an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears in response to the effect reception. , The degree of expectation for granting benefits may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time production according to this production example (first production mode), the production is accepted by the operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 199 (d) and 199 (f). Then, based on the operation, it is possible to execute the control to put the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 199 (d), even though the operation button 410 was operated by the player, the operation was performed in response to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control to reciprocate the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that has not been performed between the first position and the second position. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, the "operation" is performed. Even if the sword decoration body 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the production reception may have occurred and the production on the sword decoration body 5001 side may have been executed. It will be possible to appeal the possibility to the player.

On the other hand, in the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (f), as a result of the player performing a sword pulling operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in the sword delivery position according to the production reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the sword withdrawal position (sword withdrawal state) instead of returning to the (sword withdrawal state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword delivery position (sword delivery state) to the sword extraction position (sword extraction state) based on the operation by the player, and is in a state of being maintained in such a sword extraction state. Occasionally, the production will be performed during operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body at that time. By confirming the operating state of the 5001, it becomes possible to feel that the operation-time effect caused by the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 side is being executed.

Then, after the operation-time effect (FIGS. 199 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 199 (e). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side is available. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time elapses (at a stage before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is not operated (sword delivery position (sword delivery state)). It will be controlled to return to. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

According to the effect example (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration body 5001) is used. Regardless of whether 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specific) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is not allowed to accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) can receive the effect respectively. It will be possible to give an operation opportunity in a state where it is kept secret.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can receive the production, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is the production. Regardless of whether the operation button 410 can be received without being accepted, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and Coupled with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is capable of receiving production, the sword decoration 5001 is said to be capable of receiving production. You will be able to mislead as if you weren't there. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the production with a relatively high expectation is performed when the production is accepted. It is expected that it will be interesting to know which operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, when the operation means of the side that cannot accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the production reception period is exhausted by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to accept the effect (the side that does not have the effect acceptance period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation is performed. Although the effect reception required for executing the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is to be performed, and the operation on the side where the effect can be accepted based on the detection itself. Control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. With such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is recommended to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is capable of accepting the production and to operate it carefully. become able to.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained between the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side. Although it is made to be executed, these operation-time effects may be different from each other. For example, in the operation-time effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect-time effect performed by the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 may emit light. , A unique production sound is generated, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the game entertainment when the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is received.

Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) is operated, it is related to the generation of the other effect mode. The production reception period is not set when the production reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001) and the production reception period related to the occurrence of the other production mode is not set. An effect reception period is set for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration is 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410). In either case, when there is an operation on the first operating means in the situation shown in FIG. 198 (c), it may be possible to perform an operation-time effect. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as an operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed and the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (No. 1). When there is an operation for the first operation means (when the effect reception period for the operation means 2 is set), another effect mode is not executed as the effect during operation, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation will be produced. In short, when the effect reception period related to the generation of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the operation-time effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation means. It is set for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode appears as the operation mode, the second operation is performed instead of causing the other effect mode to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation mode on the second operation means side. The operation-time effect may be performed as an effect content different from the operation-time effect on the means side.

In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related production is being performed is the situation where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are used. The first situation where only the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted for the production, the second situation where only the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 can be received for the production, and the operation for the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 It is set so that both the operation and the operation for are corresponding to any of the third situations in which the production can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is displayed when the effect reception is performed, whereas in the third situation, the operation time is different from that of both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or the above-mentioned other effect mode (different from the operation-time effect of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the above-mentioned third situation is not always necessary.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-mentioned production example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied by the control by the peripheral control MPU4150a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. In the above-mentioned production example (first production mode), even in the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (f), the player does not perform the operation as in the production situation shown in FIG. 199 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control to operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side is set at an earlier stage than before returning to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the operating state so that the player's gaze is naturally returned to the game board 5.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Second production mode]
200 to 203 are executed as an effect showing the process of the specific operation-related effect until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. It is suggested that when the first effect result appears as a result of the above, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs among the plurality of operation means, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the production example (second production mode) which suggests that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs.

In FIG. 200A, in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 200 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 200 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 200B, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed simultaneously in the image, and the lightning bolt image IZ is depicted acting on those images BTG and SYG. In this way, the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed simultaneously in the display area by displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means at the same time. It is suggested that the operation for any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will soon be possible for the production reception, while it is unclear which of the decoration body 5001 can be received for the production. You will be able to.

In FIG. 200 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 200 (b) has progressed, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as effects. An effect is performed in which the other party is pushed out of the display area by pushing each other within the display area of the device 1600.

That is, in the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) related to this effect example (second effect mode), "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other, and these images are displayed. It is executed as an effect such as "Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area", and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c) is either "the production reception period for the operation button 410 or the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001". Corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods" even when

The figure on the left side of FIG. 200 (c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area in a predominant situation, and the figure on the right side shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts how the situation is predominant to remain in the territory. In a specific operation-related production, the situation of such inferiority / superiority changes from moment to moment with the passage of time.

FIG. 201 (d) shows a state in which the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c). Is being performed (first production result). When the content of the effect is developed, the period for accepting the effect for the sword decoration body 5001 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 201 (d)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the effect (the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 occurs).

At this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, a plurality of instruction displays (character display such as "press" and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) are displayed. Among the operation means of the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 is in a state where the effect reception is possible (during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this production example, the operation of the operation button 410 is promoted by setting only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 to the light emitting state.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 200A) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that.

Further, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when an effect (FIG. 201 (d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. Percentage of the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that when the effect (FIG. 201 (d)) in which the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity is performed without going through. Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest due to the effectary delay described later when a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In FIG. 201 (e), as a result of performing an operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means while the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed. It depicts how the production is being performed during operation.

The operation effect shown in FIG. 201 (e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 199 (d). That is, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device 1600 executes a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”). It has become. At this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is placed in the first position and the second position according to the reception of the production. The same applies to the fact that control for reciprocating operation with the position (control for setting the operating state) can be executed. The predetermined display effects include, for example, "chance !!", which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. By preparing a plurality of production modes such as, and displaying one of these production modes according to the reception of the production, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. Then, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 201 (e)) is performed, a reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 201 (f). However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, the reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect is executed. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (sword delivery state)) at a stage earlier than that. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, for the sword decoration body 5001, at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating operation or maintenance in the sword-drawn state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 202 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is in the display area. A production that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second production result). When the content of the effect is developed, the period for accepting the effect for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the period for accepting the effect for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is executed, which suggests that an operation opportunity will be granted soon while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 202 (g)). Is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operation means can be received for the production (the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs). ..

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display (character display such as "sword pull out" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is possible to receive the effect (during the effect reception period on the sword decoration body 5001) among the plurality of operation means. In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be made to emit light) is set to the light emitting state. By doing so, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is encouraged.

It should be noted that the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) does not go through the specific operation-related effect, except when the effect is advanced through the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b), (c), etc.). The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 200A) may be achieved. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed after a specific operation-related effect, the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than in the case, and the expectation for granting benefits is lower than when the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is performed after a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

In FIG. 202 (h), as a result of performing an operation on the sword decoration body 5001 among the plurality of operating means while the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g) is being performed, the effect is accepted and the operation is performed in response to the operation. It depicts how the production is being performed during the operation.

The operation-time effect shown in FIG. 202 (h) is basically the same as the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), and the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area and the effect display device. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. Here, a production mode such as "super heat !!", which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production reception, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance !!" may be displayed. Similar to this, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY is also provided with an effect mode in which the operation of displacement to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes appears according to the effect reception. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the operation-time effect shown in FIG. 202 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself is changed to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( (Change from stage 0 form shown in FIG. 179 to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form), and depending on which of these modes appears, the degree of expectation for granting benefits such as big hits The height has come to be suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 202 (i), even if the operation-time effect (FIG. 202 (h)) is completed and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position). The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sword-delivered state, but is maintained in the sword-drawn state. That is, in this production example, although the illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the sword-drawn state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword delivery state (during the period when the reach production is performed, etc.). The operation opportunity to be operated is further given, and in that case, the operation time effect according to the operation to the sword delivery state can be further executed.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is given an operation opportunity in two stages, and the first stage operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) and the second stage operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed according to each operation (operation to the sword delivery state), not only when the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) is being operated, but also the first stage. It is expected that the game interest for the operation will be maintained favorably even during the non-operation period from the operation (operation to the sword withdrawal state) to the second stage operation (operation to the sword delivery state). Become so. It is desirable that the first-stage operation and the second-stage operation have different operation modes (here, operations in opposite directions). Further, it is desirable that the operation-time effect according to the first-stage operation and the operation-time effect according to the second-stage operation are different from each other.

Further, when the operation-time effect (FIG. 202 (h)) corresponding to the first stage operation is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the sword-drawn state, and is not maintained in the sword-drawn state. In that case, it is desirable not to give the second stage operation opportunity. Whether to maintain the sword ornament 5001 at a position (sword-drawn state) that allows the second-stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state) can be given in the operation-time production according to the first-stage operation. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state and is returned to the sword-delivered state, it is practically impossible to give a second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state). It is clear that it will be. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

If the sword decoration body 5001 is not maintained in the sword-drawn state as a result of performing the operation-time effect (FIG. 202 (h)) according to the first-stage operation, when a predetermined time elapses (reach effect). The control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-driven state (sword delivery state)) before the start of the operation. However, in this case, the operating state (reciprocating) of the sword decorative body 5001 is at least half or more of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves to the display area side to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the movement (or maintenance with the sword pulled out). Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, the power consumed by ending the operating state at an earlier stage than the specific decorative member SDY returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to quantity (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 203 (j), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c), the sword decorative image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 201 (d). Therefore, an effect is performed that depicts how the button image BTG is left in the display area. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 200 (c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. 201 (d) or the production shown in FIG. 202 (g) Either the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) or the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) appears. It is said that which effect content appears has been determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the jackpot determination.

However, unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d), the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) is the effect performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) is continued, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j), the instruction display (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation is not displayed, and also in FIG. 201 (d). ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the button image BTG is left in the display area, but the production acceptance period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes recognizable that there is.

In FIG. 203 (k), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in the mist MY, and even the outline description thereof is lost. There is a production that will be broken.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), all the effect elements (button image BTG) suggesting that the operation on the operation button 410 can be accepted are removed. Therefore, although it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) that the operation for the operation button 410 can be accepted, the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k) appears. As a result, it becomes possible to raise a suspicion as to whether or not the production reception period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Even in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown which of the plurality of operating means the production reception period will occur is reduced. It suggests that.

In FIG. 203 (i), as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the appearance of the sword is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, it is suggested that the outer shape of the mist MY may cause an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. You will be able to.

Further, also in the effect shown in FIG. 203 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is continued. .. However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. It suggests that the remaining time of is even less.

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. 203 (i) is further advanced and the mist MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. 202. The production shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Even if this is done (FIG. 201 (d), FIG. 203 (j)), there is a possibility that the production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so that the interest of the game should be maintained. Will be able to.

In particular, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (FIGS. 201 (d) and 203 (j)). By confirming whether or not the effect display by the lightning bolt image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 200 (b) and (c)) is still continued, the effect on the sword decoration body 5001 is achieved. It is possible to grasp whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this will also make it possible to maintain the interest of the game.

In this production example (second production mode), the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY when the production shown in FIG. 203 (j) appears (FIG. 203 (k)), and further. When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 202 (g) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is prevented from necessarily approaching the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May also be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 203 (j) and 203 (k) also hides which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, even in the production situation shown in FIG. 202 (h) in the above production example (second production mode) after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, FIG. 201 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in the above, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side where the operation by the player has not been performed may be enabled. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operating means on the side that has not been operated by the player, and at this time, the operating means on the side that has been operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source for applying the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source for applying the drive force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different drive sources. It may be the same drive source.

[Third production mode]
FIGS. 204 to 207 are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) that is basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to a specific operation-related effect, but is different from the second effect mode. Is.

In FIG. 204 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 204 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 204 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 204 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. This suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 will soon be ready for production.

In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated respectively. As a result, it is easy to make it easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 to be able to receive the effect soon after the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. It is made recognizable. Here, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are controlled to be operated from the initial position to the operation position, but compared to the case where the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated to the operation positions when the operation opportunity is given. I try to operate each at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, it is also an operation means in which time is still left before the production reception period occurs, or an operation means in which the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed. Regardless of this, each of these operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) will operate. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur in the first place until the symbol change is completed, the game entertainment for those operations can be enjoyed. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is generated by each operation (FIG. 204 (b)) by the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the effect display in the effect display device 1600. After the start, basically, the same production progress as the above-mentioned second production mode is performed.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 204 (c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed except that the button image BTG is displayed as corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. , The production content is as described with reference to FIG. 200 (b).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 200 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are in a state of being operated from the initial positions (positions when not driven), respectively. It has become. In the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect even by such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are located at positions different from the initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effects are started. In addition, it is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when the operating opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed as compared with the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and the operation opportunity is immediately given, but it is movable. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the effect can be accepted to at least the operation position. Therefore, the operation-related production is further delayed by the time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are placed at both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position during the period when the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is positioned in a different position (for example, an intermediate position) as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied). As a result, when a specific operation-related effect is completed and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period has occurred is operated to the operation position in a shorter time, and the effect reception period does not occur. It becomes possible to operate the operating means on the other side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the operation-related production. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned as an operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It will be possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 204 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "movable operation button". Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to "410", the production content is as described with reference to FIG. 200 (c). However, in the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 200 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are placed at the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position, respectively. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

In the effect shown in FIGS. 204 (b) and 204 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 show the mode when they are in the initial position (non-driven position). While the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed in a simulated manner, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the modes of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, their matching will be achieved in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect to be performed (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

Further, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 has the button image BTG "at the operation position". Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 201 (d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), first of all, "a display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a manner of moving to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed". After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect) that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 is performed. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 will be different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the deviation of those modes will be filled soon. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), the effect shown in FIG. 205 (f) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 201 (e) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 205 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 201 (e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). In addition, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operating position.

After such an operation effect (FIG. 205 (f)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 205 (g). Is also as described with reference to FIG. 201 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) is performed, the effect display in the effect display device 1600 is an operation of the sword decoration body 5001. Except that the instruction content regarding is "pushed in" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", the production as explained with reference to FIG. 202 (g). It is the content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 202 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in an operating state. That is, in this case, since the sword decoration body 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven) toward the operation position, the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

As the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (preferably displayed in a mode of moving to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as "push"" that prompts the operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in the "mode of moving to the operation position", whereas the sword at the time of display is displayed. The decorative image SYG is different from the "mode of moving to the operation position". In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing the specific operation-related effect as a mode different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, the deviation of those modes can be prevented. It will be possible to suggest in advance that it will soon be filled (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h), the effect shown in FIG. 206 (i) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 202 (h) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 206 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 202 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. The sword decoration body 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an operation effect (FIG. 206 (i)) is performed, a reach state is formed and a reach effect can be performed as shown in FIG. 206 (j). Is as described with reference to FIG. 201 (f).

On the other hand, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 204 (d), when the effect shown in FIG. Except that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the effect content is as described with reference to FIG. 203 (j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are in the initial positions, respectively. It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. It is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and the possibility that the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 still occurs is left even by setting such an operation state. You will be able to do it.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k), the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 203 (k) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m) is performed, which has been described with reference to FIG. 203 (l) in the effect display device 1600. The contents of the street production will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 203 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position, respectively. Both are in a state of operating at different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m), it is more desirable that the outer shape of the mist MY is closer to the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the operating position than the sword decoration body 5001 when it is in the initial position.

When the effect shown in FIG. 207 (m) is further advanced, the sword decorative image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 206 (h) is sure to occur. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 207 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG on the effect display device 1600, but contrary to such display contents, the sword decoration It can also be said that the production suggests that the production reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 207 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the mist MY is not necessarily close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG) is prevented. ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape may also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 205 (e) may be performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effect shown in FIGS. 207 (k) and 207 (l) also hides which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In this production example (third production mode), the driving source that applies the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies the driving force to the sword decoration body 5001 are different driving sources. It may be the same drive source.

In each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, when "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, it is basic. Is given an operation opportunity only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the operation button 410 is received, the operation time effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of the production in which the specific operation-related effect is performed, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. Of the body 5001, the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received, the operation time effect on the sword accessory side is performed. In this regard, in the operation-time effect on the button side, success effect (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure effect (do not operate the specific decorative member SDY) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the jackpot judgment. While it is supposed that either one will appear, even in the operation time production on the sword character side, success production (operate the specific decorative member SDY) and failure production based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit judgment (The specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is to be made to appear, and the contents of their production are the same. Therefore, when an operation opportunity is given to an operation means on a side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, in the operation-time effect on the button side and the operation-time effect on the sword accessory side, in addition to the effect on whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates, the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same as each other. It may be the content.

Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is decided to perform an effect as to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is used. On the other hand, operation opportunities are given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related effect is performed with the effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means regardless of which effect result appears, such as pushing each other with each other. It may be.

For example, in any mode (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state is brought into the sword-drawn state, or a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-drawn state is brought into the sword-delivered state) with respect to one operating means. The operation opportunity may be given to the operation means according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated in a state different from that of the sword-delivered state and the sword-drawn state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the sword ornamental body 5001 is operated in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state or the sword-drawn state when the effect result of sword-making is shown.

In addition, when the symbol variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the symbol variation is in the pending state (digested before this). It is also possible to perform the effect suggested from (within the execution period of the symbol change). According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given and the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is not given are provided. For both, it will be possible to sustain the game interest related to operation for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the symbol variation in which the specific operation-related effect is performed is in the pending state (within the execution period of the symbol variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect is used. It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as a specific operation-related effect, a plurality of images (button image BTG,) corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001) Although it was decided to display the sword decoration image SYG), these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect reception period for the operation button 410 or the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 may occur after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the production reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001, those operations are performed until the production reception period occurs. It will be possible to keep secret which of the means the production reception period will occur. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and sword decoration. It is possible that none of the image SYGs appear and an effect image different from any of them appears as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even when the effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not displayed at the same time is adopted while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect is completed. Either BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the production reception period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this way is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific image (for example, lightning bolt image IZ, etc.) as the effect content, it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive effect. For example, a specific operation-related effect may be executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one of two rocks, and when a lightning bolt falls on one side of the rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock and the other side. By making the sword decorative image SYG appear from the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and 202 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping a lightning bolt toward one rock, and when the lightning bolt falls on the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. Therefore, it is also possible to advance the production to the production shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and 202 (g). In short, it is desirable to advance the production as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the second and third production modes described above, and in another example thereof, there are specific cases where the production reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of the effects) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. Further, it is desirable to set so that the effect reception period occurs for the same time regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of production modes are prepared as specific operation-related productions, and a production reception period during which a specific production (operation-time production) can be generated depends on which of these production modes the production is performed. The ratio set for the specific operating means among the plurality of operating means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, the operation was not performed based on the operation with respect to the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (such as FIG. 201 (e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed based on the time when the operation was performed. It may be. However, it is not based on the time when the operation is performed, and depending on which timing of the production reception period the operation is performed, from the operation of the operation means on the side that did not perform the operation to the end of the operation. It is desirable to make the time lengths different.

That is, when the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated and the remaining time of the effect reception period is short, the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player struggled with whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the production reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. Time length up to ("Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect may have been executed." By making the length of time that appeals to the player different), it becomes possible to maintain the game interest appropriately.

Further, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect reception period ends. May be made to work.

Further, between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. A predetermined effect suggesting the ratio at which the effect image (sword decorative image SYG) is displayed may be performed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here, a specific movable body) that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed. , The specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed by operating the movable body different from the specific decorative member SDY). Desirable to enable.

In addition, it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in the effect results between the start of the specific operation-related effect and the display of the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.). An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period for a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY). While the related effects are being performed, the effect reception period is intentionally generated only on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means. As a result, it becomes possible to create a special production mode as if the production result is shown and the production is completed even though the production is in the middle of a specific operation-related production, and the production is performed. It becomes possible to maintain the game entertainment hobby during the period. In addition, when an operation for one side of those operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the ratio at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side with high expectation is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the specific operation means to which the operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001). It is desirable to use the lower operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the game interest when the player understands that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related production. ..

Further, when the effect reception period is intentionally generated only for the operation button 410 of the operation means while the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to the plurality of operation means are being performed, the effect reception period is within the effect reception period. When the operation button 410 is operated in, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, for example). Regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as the effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the effectability as the specific operation-related effect between the time when the specific operation-related effect is started and the time when the effect result is shown. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the game interest when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side with a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is granted more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side having the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production reception periods, normally, when there is an operation by the player, the production is generated based on the operation, but even if such an operation is not performed, the production reception period elapses. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect mode in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect mode, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect reception period occurs, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to forgetting to operate. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operation-time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed without operating the corresponding operation means within the effect reception period.

However, even when the automatic button effect mode is set, the effect acceptance period is generated only for the operation button 410 of those operation means while a specific operation-related effect is being performed. In the case of making the effect, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period (the automatic button function is not functioned). After that, even if an effect acceptance period for any of the above-mentioned plurality of operation means occurs as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the corresponding operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period. It is desirable that the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed (so that the automatic button function functions) without doing so. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions, and it becomes possible to grasp whether or not a specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be expected to suppress the decrease in.

Regarding the setting change related to the on / off of the automatic button effect mode, for example, by operating the operation button 410, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol change is not executed but also during the period when the symbol change is executed. It is desirable to be. For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not occurred, the setting of the automatic button effect mode can be changed from the off state to the on state, and the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs. When the operation button 410 is operated while the operation button 410 is being operated, it is possible to change the setting of the automatic button effect mode from the off state to the on state in addition to performing the operation effect according to the operation. be. However, even when the automatic button effect mode is turned on, it is possible that the player may occasionally want to generate the effect during operation by the operation of the player. Therefore, for example, the automatic button effect mode is used. During the effect reception period for the operation button 410 when it is turned on, not only the operation button 410 but also the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation for the other operation means is performed. When is performed, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated while the automatic button effect mode is maintained in the ON state can be generated. desirable.

The operation mode may be different depending on whether the automatic button effect mode is changed from the off state to the on state or from the on state to the off state.

Further, in the second and third effect modes described above, and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or a sword decoration body 5001 is imitated. It was decided to give an operation opportunity corresponding to the displayed sword decorative image SYG, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is given to the operation button 410. The first display mode and the second display mode are provided as long as the period) is given and the operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword decoration body 5001 when the second display mode is displayed. Any display content may be adopted.

For example, in the second and third effect modes described above, the effect image CG (first) shown in FIG. 208 (a) is replaced with the effect image shown in FIGS. 201 (d) and 205 (e). The display mode) is displayed, and the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 208 (b) is displayed instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 202 (g) and 206 (h). May be good. According to such a configuration, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the background image other than that (the part displayed before the specific operation-related effect is started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (almost the entire effect in the display area). Since it can be replaced), a partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) in the display area shown in FIGS. 201 (d), 202 (g), 205 (e), and 206 (h). Unlike the case where the decorative image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the granting of operation opportunities is performed using almost the entire display area (until other effect images such as the background part where the degree of expectation can be suggested are hidden). By doing so, it is expected that the game will be more enjoyable for operation.

In the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 208 (a), the first display mode has a shield (button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) incorporating the operation button 410 in the design. The character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 208 (b), a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is possessed. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly suggest which operating means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 itself. , It is desirable to display as an effect image incorporating at least a part of the shape and a part of the design of the operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG It may also be performed with an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation depending on which of (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. Further, a plurality of effect modes (different colors, etc.) are prepared as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), and it depends on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. It may be.

Further, regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (preferably, it is desirable that the effect situation has a relatively high degree of expectation). When the operation-related effect is displayed without being executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (it is desirable that the effect is a relatively low expectation situation). It may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). If it is displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect acceptance period is also applied to another operation means (for example, sword decoration body 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. May be generated. According to such a configuration, even if the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. In the production situation where the expectation is relatively high, it becomes possible to give a different kind of fun to the operation than when the button image BTG appears, and it becomes possible to improve the game entertainment. Another operating means may be a different operating means from the sword decoration body 5001.

In addition, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, an operation for another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the effect reception period. When the effect is accepted, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher degree of expectation than when the sword decorative image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, when the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. When 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means that is occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation for the operation means (operation button 410) is performed. It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when a button image BTG appears in a production situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means may be terminated so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated and the operation is performed. Even though an operating means other than the means is being operated, the operation-time effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operating means (operation button 410) are operated may be executed.

If a specific operation-related effect is executed while the automatic button effect mode is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means of, the same operation time effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to make it work (make the automatic button function work). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing the specific operation-related effect when the above-mentioned automatic button effect mode is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is used. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means different from the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is provided even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when the operation is performed is executed, and the special operation effect that may appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is executed is not executed.

However, during the effect reception period, another effect before the specific timing at which the operation-time effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) appears by the above-mentioned automatic button function is different. When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed according to the effect reception, and a specific timing has arrived. However, it is desirable that the effect during operation (the effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect mode is continued in the on state even after the effect reception period ends. Is desirable.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the above-described effects (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not the specific operation-related effect, is executed). When the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect). In addition to the operation means corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (sword decoration body 5001), another operation means not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG (for example, the operation button 410) is also subjected to the effect reception period. It becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed, "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" or When any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and when the production is accepted by the operation means on the displayed side, it is relative. The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates) and the effect content suggesting that the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make one of the second operation-time effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate). That is, in this case, when the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect, which is the effect content suggesting the above, will be executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period generated after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first). The effect reception for the sword decoration body 5001 when the operation button 410 is executed based on the effect reception for the operation button 410 when the display mode) is displayed and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation as when it was executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side having a relatively low expectation is displayed as an effect result in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. However, as long as the first operation-time production is executed based on the reception of the production, the production image (sword decoration) on the side with relatively high expectations as a result of the production in which the specific operation-related production is performed. Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, there is no demerit in the effect result, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the timer effect described above (FIGS. 148 to 207), it is possible to set "granting an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes targeted by the timer). be. That is, in the timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" is the effect target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. This makes it possible to enjoy the production during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect of the timer effect, when the operation for the operation means is performed, the effect result is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Allow any of the unfavorable production results to appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result advantageous to the player is higher than that of the case where the effect target of the timer effect is not set. It is more desirable to be. The ratio may be 100%.

In this regard, when an effect pattern for executing a timer effect for the effect of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001)" appears, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" that is the effect target appears. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decorative image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears is executed.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001). It will be possible to improve the game entertainment when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) until just before that. However, there is a concern that it will not be possible to understand which production should be watched, distracted attention, and conversely reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 209. , Until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is set to the unexecuted state, and the count value is set. It is desirable to start the production of the "specific operation-related effect" after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0").

FIG. 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice side timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to the timer effect.

In FIG. 209 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

In FIG. 209 (b), the timer effect is started (here, the countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here, “3”) during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 209 (a). It shows the situation. In the production situation shown in FIG. 209 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

That is, in the timer effect related to this effect example, the count value is first set to a predetermined value (1), while it remains unclear which of the plurality of timer target effect candidates is being executed. Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" as the count value is displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), the "specific operation-related effect" is started to be produced. At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode). A specific operation-related effect as to which of and is displayed will be executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001), those effects are sometimes performed. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in a series, it becomes possible to enjoy each different production.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets any effect. It is not possible to recognize whether it was done as a game, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”) and the time when the specific operation-related effect is started, An effect that suggests an effect type (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001) that the timer effect is intended for is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “sword”. This suggests that the timer production was intended to "provide an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" delivery ") to the sword decoration body 5001".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 209 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed (“sword delivery). In the production situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given by "", the production of "specific operation-related production" will be started, so that the game entertainment can be improved. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sword". It may be displayed continuously.

Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the sword decoration body 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, the count is “0”). It is designed to perform reciprocating movements in the vertical direction), and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword ") to the sword decoration 5001" is the target of the timer production. I try to suggest it.

It should be noted that the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is counted not only when the timer effect targets "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001" but also when another effect is the production target. It may be performed when becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the effect type that the timer effect is intended for, but functions as an effect suggesting that the count display has become 0. It becomes. In this sense, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the production to be the production target is started, and the timer production is the production target. It is said that the effect that suggests the type of effect is being executed at the same time as or before the start of the effect that suggests the type of effect, and that the effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is targeting is also being executed during the execution state. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 209 (d) shows an effect situation in which the “specific operation-related effect” is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only the count value is already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type for which the timer effect is the effect target is hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 is also in a completed state. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect that the timer effect is intended for, and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration body 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related effect of is started.

Then, after the "specific operation-related production" is started in this way, the production progresses in the order of FIGS. 209 (e) to 209 (h), and the contents of these productions are described in FIG. 200 (c). ), FIGS. 202 (g) to (i), or FIGS. 204 (d) and 206 (h) to (j), which are substantially the same as those described above, and thus details are omitted.

As the timer effect performed in connection with the specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. 209 or the timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery. It may be made viable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that a specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 209, but the specific operation-related effect is produced. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, "0") according to the start timing (strictly, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect is to be continued even after the effect is started. It has become. In this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege is given (the privilege is given (the second display mode). Expectations for (big hit) are the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously advanced, but when the effect situation in which the effect is developed at the same time appears, the specific operation-related effect is produced. Regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decorative image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, their effect value is the same (the degree of expectation for the privilege grant (big hit) is the same. The same). That is, in this case, since the directing property of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously produced, any of the effects is produced. It will be possible to avoid the situation where the person cannot understand whether to pay attention to the timer and is distracted. However, in order to improve the interest of the game, if a production pattern in which a specific operation-related effect and a timer effect appear at the same time appears, a privilege is given as compared with the case where the effect pattern shown in FIG. 209 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 209 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the effect display device 1600 first suggests the type of the effect target (in this case, the display suggesting the type of the effect target. Although "sword delivery") is performed, such a display suggesting an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is set as the effect target as a timer effect. However, when a specific effect is targeted by the timer among a plurality of effects that can be targeted by the timer, the display suggesting which effect is the target of the timer effect may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, the operation opportunity is given to any of the operation means prior to giving the operation opportunity to any of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it would be granted. However, the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the production reception period). Does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 (prior to the production reception period). An effect pattern such as performing a second precursor effect may appear. When performing these precursory effects (first precursory effect, second precursory effect), the time required for the effect (precursor effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the time required is set to be shorter. It is desirable to reduce the degree of expectation for granting benefits when a production appears in order to enhance the interest of the game when a specific operation-related production is performed.

Here, as the precursor effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears, for example, fog is generated. Display a specific image, such as expressing the state of being stuck. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position on the layer, behind the specific image) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, reducing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to execute it as an effect to make it exposed to the public. An example of a specific depiction mode related to such a precursory effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, blue button image BTG, red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for granting benefits (big hit), As the precursory effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed progresses, it becomes possible to have an interest in which display mode the button image BTG appears.

It should be noted that the first precursor effect that appears when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration is provided. The second precursor effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each of them is executed as a different production content. Further, it is desirable that not only the content of the effect but also the time required for the effect is different.

Such a precursor effect is the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, the effect is performed as an effect related to the granting of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept that includes. Then, with respect to the precursory effect including the "specific operation-related effect", as described below with reference to FIG. 210, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the precursory effect is performed in any of the effect modes. By suggesting how long the production reception period that occurs in response to the precursory effect is, depending on what was done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment when the precursory effect is performed. It is more desirable to plan.

FIG. 210 is a time chart for explaining an example of the effect contents for each type of the effect when a plurality of types (precursor effects A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the precursor effect.

First, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (a) (precursor effect A), the precursor effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect When A is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (a) (precursor effect A), when the precursor effect A is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T1 that you have will occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect A. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T1, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 199 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 201 (e), FIG. 202 (h), FIG. 205 (f), FIG. 206 (i), etc. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (b) (precursor effect B1), when the first predetermined time elapses, not when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, when the second predetermined time elapses. The precursor effect B1 is started to be produced. This precursor effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) when an operation opportunity is given (specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set. Is to occur.

In the production reception period (valid period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. Will be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the effect reception period (valid period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-mentioned operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, a process of ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (b). (Validity period) It occurs as a period having a time length (here, a short time length) different from that of T1. This suggests how long the effect reception period generated in response to the precursor effect is, depending on which mode (precursor effect A, precursor effect B1) the precursor effect is performed. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when the precursory effect is performed.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (c) (precursor effect B2), the precursor effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Like the precursor effect B1, this precursor effect B2 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the time when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). (Those that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the precursor effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (valid period) T2 corresponding to the precursor effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is to be generated.

In addition, even in this effect reception period (valid period) T3, an instruction display (character display such as "press" and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 are displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the production reception is performed by the operation for a specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T3, the operation time production different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the production reception. Is executed, and the process of ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T3 corresponding to the precursor production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (c). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even though the precursor effect B2 with a relatively low expectation for granting a privilege (big hit) is executed, the same time as when a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high expectation is executed. Since it is suggested that a long production reception period (valid period) T3 will occur, a production situation will be created as if a specific operation-related production was performed, and the precursor production B2 It becomes possible to preferably maintain the game entertainment taste when it is performed. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege differs between when the production reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the precursory effects B1 and B2 can be specified by making the same effect mode appear from the start of the effect until the timing in the middle of the effect, and making a different effect mode appear after the timing has passed. The operation means of the above may be provided with a color rendering property as to whether to generate the effect reception period (valid period) T2 or the effect reception period (valid period) T3. However, it is not always necessary to have such a directing property, and even when the precursory effects B1 and B2 are started to be produced, the effect is started when a different time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. Alternatively, the precursor effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths from each other.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (d) (precursor effect C), the precursor effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity, and the precursor effect is executed. When C is executed, the effect acceptance period (valid period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 210 (d) (precursor effect C), when the precursor effect C is performed, the same time length is provided regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The production reception period (valid period) T4 that you have will occur.

Even in the production reception period (valid period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor effect C. ) Is displayed. Then, when the production reception is performed by the operation for the specific operation means within the production reception period (valid period) T4, the above-mentioned operation-time production (for example, FIGS. 199 (d), (f)) is performed based on the production reception. , FIG. 201 (e), FIG. 202 (h), FIG. 205 (f), FIG. 206 (i), etc. It is supposed to be done.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (valid period) T4 corresponding to the precursor production C is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (d). (Validity period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursor effect C itself is shorter than that of the precursor effect A, if the precursor effect is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that the production reception period (valid period) T4 having the same time length as that of the precursor production A is generated, the game entertainment taste when the precursor production C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

In the production example shown in FIG. 210, the production reception period is associated with the types of precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship with the length of the production reception period (valid period). The length of (validity period) is suggested. However, by setting the ratio of occurrence of a specific production reception period (for example, production reception period T2, etc.) having a predetermined time length to be different for each type of precursory production, the production reception period (valid period) ) May be suggested.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is subjected to. When the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) imitating the specific operating means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the state of the specific operating means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 205 (e), the operation button 410 is in the operating position, but the button image BTG is also displayed in the operating position in accordance with this, and FIG. 206 In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operating position (sword withdrawal state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as the state in which the sword decoration image SYG is operated in the operation position (sword withdrawal state). Has been done.

However, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, button image BTG) that imitates the appearance. If this happens, the range of the production will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the production even though a specific operation-related production with a relatively high expectation is being performed, and the interest in the game will be reduced. I am concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is described below with reference to FIGS. 211 and 212. Regarding BTG), it is desirable not to necessarily express the state of the specific operating means at that time as it is, but to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and an effect content when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed.

First, FIGS. 211 (a) to 211 (c) show the contents of the effect when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 211A, it corresponds only to the sword decoration body 5001 side of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the "specific operation-related production". Assuming that the precursory effect is executed, it becomes recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity. In addition, in the precursor effect (the same applies to the precursor effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is soon to be given is made, an effect image imitating the operation means. Does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity from the time when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production reception period is not yet displayed. Will be.

In the precursory effect shown in FIG. 211 (a), the sword decorative image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation and the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is recognizable that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity, the sword decoration image SYG, which has a low expectation as the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image SYG of the degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decorative images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 211 (b) shows the final production result of the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura, and as a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively highly expected production situation. It will be suggested that there will be a production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 211 (b), the final effect suggesting that the sword decorative image SYGb wearing a red aura does not change to another effect image (sword decorative image SYGa, etc.) is displayed. ..

FIG. 211 (c) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. In addition, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb also changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state accordingly. I try to change the state to the state. When the production reception is performed within the production reception period, the production at the time of a predetermined operation is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword delivery state. Be maintained. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursory effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, when the effect acceptance period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, here). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword withdrawal state) as the operation means (here, the sword decoration body 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image imitating the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) and the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001) Are all in a state of being stopped at a predetermined position.

On the other hand, FIGS. 211 (d) to 211 (g) show the contents of the effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. For example, in the normal game state, the effect display device 1600 is performing the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination while the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 211 (d), if the precursor production as the "specific operation-related production" is started, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 It will be recognizable that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the crab.

FIG. 211 (e) shows a production situation in which the precursory production as a “specific operation-related production” has progressed and the production result has appeared. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity as a production result of the "specific operation-related production". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 211 (e), a final effect suggesting that the sword decoration image SYG does not change to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

FIG. 211 (f) shows an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“pushing in”) prompting the sword decoration body 5001 to operate. , And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, the state of the sword decoration body 5001 changes from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword removal state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the sword withdrawal state during the production reception period (sword decoration image SYG). The sword ornament 5001 is designed to slowly and continuously perform upward displacement until the end of the production reception period, and is in a different state from each other. I am trying to do it.

In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration body 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword delivery state. Based on the reception, a predetermined operation effect is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the production. On the other hand, the other side does not work and can take on the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 211 (f) and 211 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the production reception period, but the sword is not limited to this. The decorative image SYG may be continuously operated to stop the sword decoration body 5001.

As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 211, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the effect reception period (FIG. 211 (c)) that occurs without going through a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect reception period (FIG. 211 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the production reception period occurs after a specific operation-related production, the range of the production can be expanded, and the game entertainment can be suitably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operation means to which a driving force is applied by being controlled by the peripheral control MPU4150a, the operation is performed when an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs after a specific operation-related effect. While the button 410 itself is stopped, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is set to be a dynamic state and the depiction is continued, a specific operation-related effect is obtained. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor effect other than a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effectability as to which of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, any one of them. When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode having a relatively high degree of expectation or a display mode having a relatively low degree of expectation. It will be possible to further provide the directing effect of. The method may be appropriately adopted in each of the above-mentioned production modes and other examples thereof, in addition to the production example of FIG. 211.

Then, in the case of giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is produced as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it appears or can be recognized, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side has a high degree of expectation (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is shown. Make the display state recognizable) appear as the production progresses. After that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side appearing as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white outline of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable that the state is released so that the color can be confirmed) in sequence as the production progresses. Further, when the button image BTG is displayed through the progress of such an effect, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high degree of expectation under a predetermined condition (for example, an operating means). After making the imitated production image white out, etc.), the button image BTG is further hidden, and it is recognizable that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the production result of the specific operation-related production. To a state where it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decorative image SYG is outlined so that only the outline can be recognized). It is also possible to generate an effect pattern that further advances the effect. After this, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decorative image SYG that appears as a result of the production of a specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the white state of the sword decorative image SYG). To make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the high expectation side (for example, red), it is higher than the display mode on the low expectation side (for example, blue). However, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effect shown in FIGS. 211 (d) to (g) as the effect content when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 212 (a), the precursor effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but the precursor effect has a shield (button image BTG) imitating the operation button 410. A second character holding a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword imitating the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) It is depicted that they are facing each other, and it is suggested which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying to do it.

FIG. 212 (b) shows a production situation in which the production result of the precursory production as the “specific operation-related production” appears. In this production situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration body 5001 is given an operation opportunity. The effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 212 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 208 (b) (the instruction display prompting the sword decoration 5001 to operate is hidden), and is specific. While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (confrontation between characters) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the start of the specific operation-related effect) are the relevant. It is suddenly replaced with an effect image (display image shown in FIG. 212 (b)) as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (e) show an example of the effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 212 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) is displayed to prompt the sword decoration body 5001 to operate.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts the operation from the sword delivery state to the sword removal state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 212 (d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state only after a relatively short time has passed since the production reception period started. It is designed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 212 (e), unless there is an operation by the player, the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in a sword-pulled state at least until the end of the production reception period, and the player (Operation from the sword withdrawal state to the sword delivery state) will be waited for.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 212 (c) to 212 (e), the movement (swing in the rotation direction) is completely different from the movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. In the lowering operation), the second character is depicted as swinging down the sword decoration image SYG, and even after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword-drawn state, the sword decoration image SYG continues. It is designed to operate. The sword decoration image SYG related to this production example loops a series of displays from the start (FIG. 212 (c)) to the end (FIG. 212 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the production reception period. It is designed to be repeated by processing.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected by the loop processing, and the display change progresses by the amount according to the passage of time. Further, the sword ornament 5001 is also brought into a sword-pulled state while a series of displays from the start of the swing-down operation (FIG. 212 (c)) to the end (FIG. 212 (e)) are performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will be maintained in the sword-drawn state without being affected by it. It should be noted that when the operation target accessory 141 is operated to the sword-delivered state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and the above-mentioned The loop processing is completed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword delivery state. In addition, a process is performed to end the production reception period at that time.

According to such a configuration, when a precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect reception period. The movement modes (movements that play a role in accurately transmitting the current situation (movements until moving to the operation position), loop movements used for the production) are different from each other, and the movement of the sword decoration body 5001 is completed. Even after that, the sword decoration image SYG will continue its operation without ending. As a result, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 212 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( It will be possible to expand the range of the production, such as making it feasible by (continuing the background), and it will be possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 212, the effect content (display in which the characters confront each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 212 (a)) as a specific operation-related effect is performed. The effect (FIGS. 212 (c) to (e)) is executed when the effect reception period occurs in the form of changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production reception period related to this production example, the production image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that imitate the operation means are specified differently from each other under the display of the dedicated background (full moon). Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image) and the image), it is possible to improve the effectability during the effect reception period. In this sense, even in the precursory production, it is possible to perform the production using at least one of the production image (sword decorative image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a directing connection between them to further improve the directing effect. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes having different expectations for granting benefits, and may be displayed by any of the display modes.

In addition, in the precursory production as a specific operation-related production or the production within the production reception period, a plurality of production modes are prepared as those productions, and the production reception is performed according to which of the production modes appears. It is also possible to suggest whether or not a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as an operation-time production when the production reception is performed during the period. The background image that appears when the precursory effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, when a precursor production as a specific operation-related production is performed, the production reception is performed by changing both the production content and the background image appearing in the precursor production. It was decided to execute the production within the period, but when the above-mentioned precursor production that is not a specific operation-related production is being performed, both the production content and the background image that appeared in the precursor production are changed. It is also possible to execute the production when the production reception period occurs in.

In the production example shown in FIG. 212, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. The operation of the sword ornament 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation). The performed operation may be completed before the production reception period occurs), and then the stopped state may be maintained.

Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the background image may be changed when the effect reception period occurs or the background image may be changed. It may be possible that the display to be displayed may not be performed. In this case, if the display for changing the background image is performed when the production reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the production reception period occurs. It is desirable to.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and in another example thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the production reception is performed, it is decided to operate the specific decorative member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) as an operation operation based on the production reception. At this time, for example, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 199 (d), 201 (e), and 202 (h), the sword decoration body 5001 (or the operation button) is provided as a movable body on the door frame 3 side. By making 410) also operate, it is possible to improve the effectability of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed. In this way, in order to improve the effectability of the operation-related effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed depends on the result of the effect. Then, the production situation at the time of success in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (game machine main body side) are activated appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side is movable. While the effect situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate appears, the operation-time effect (for example, a specific operation-related effect) performed without going through a specific operation-related effect. In the operation-time effect after the precursor effect, which is not an operation-related effect, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side depends on the result of the effect. It is possible to show the production situation at the time of success when only operates, or to show the production situation at the time of failure when both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and the specific operation-related effect related to the other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect. The expectation for granting benefits is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 213 (a), the button is in a mode in which the princess character is added (specific effect mode). The image BTG may be displayed, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for granting benefits is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a production result of a specific operation-related effect. If the value is set to be high, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the game entertainment taste when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Further, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific production mode) may be applied to the sword decorative image SYG as shown in FIG. 213 (b). In this case, when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode, it is desirable that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the normal mode.

Further, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (FIG.) in which the button image BTG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed). 213 (a)) and the second effect pattern (FIG. 213 (b)) in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. )) And may be prepared respectively. In this case, the expectation for granting the privilege is set to be the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decorative image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. Regardless of which of the decorative image SYG appears, it becomes possible to provide completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 213 (c), when the production result of the specific operation-related production (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared in the specific production mode. (For example, from the time when a specific operation-related effect is being produced), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decorative image SYG appears is in the stage of being performed, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed). The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (same degree of expectation). That is, in this case, since the rendering property of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, it is said that "a precursory effect by the princess character" even though the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It will be possible to provide a completely different color rendering index.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the sword portion (handle portion 5012, sword blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 169, a second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword decoration body 5001 can be operated in the lateral direction. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect of the above. Both the sword part (handle part 5012, sword blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) are operably supported by one main body support part (not shown) provided on the door frame 3. Even if one side of the sword part (handle part 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in the state of being operated (operated), the other side has a structure that can be operated (operated). It is formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is not possible. Since there is no change, there is a concern that there is a high possibility that an operation error will occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to either the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, an effect image (and its effect) that imitates the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001. When the instruction display prompting the operation) is displayed, there is an increasing concern that an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side. Become. That is, in this case, as the remaining time of the production reception period is decreasing moment by moment, let the player first perform the operation for correcting the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and if the production reception period ends before the production reception is done even though a specific operation-related production with relatively high expectations has been performed. , There is a concern that the game entertainment will decline.

Further, in the sword decoration body 5001, there are modes such as "movement in the vertical direction" by the sword part and "movement in the lateral direction" by the sheath part, and a plurality of complicated operations not having such a reversal relationship. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the operation on the wrong side is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the operation on the proper side, and the production reception period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing operation opportunities is increased.

Therefore, when performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword decoration body 5001 provided as one operation unit. , As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 214 and 215, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

FIGS. 214 and 215 show an example of an effect when an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

In FIG. 214 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of holdings is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 214 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 214 (a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 214 (b), the first effect imitating the first operation mode in which the sword portion of the sword ornament 5001 is operated from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. The image OX and the second effect image TX that imitates the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so as to move in the lateral direction are provided in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is displayed at the same time to suggest that an operation opportunity by any of these operation modes will soon be available for production. In this regard, in the first production image OX, although the image portion imitating the sword part of the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed larger than the second production image TX, the first production image OX and the first production image OX In each of the second effect image TX, the sword portion is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

FIG. 214 (c) shows the development of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 214 (b), the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, and the second effect image OX corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX and the effect image TX are pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect) When the result) appears, the effect acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

In the specific operation-related effect related to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 214 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a predominant situation, a display such as "push" can be visually recognized. The display such as "slide" can be visually recognized when the second effect image TX is left in a predominant situation. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not necessarily be performed because there is a concern that they may be mistakenly recognized as prompting an operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

In FIG. 214 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 214 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. A production that depicts the state left in is being performed (first production result). When the content of this effect is developed, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the effect at the time of a specific operation (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the effect in the first operation mode is used. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is performed, and a specific operation-time effect (movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 214 (d), the effect acceptance period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, in the production reception period, in addition to the first production image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting the operation (character display such as "push" and the remaining time of the production reception period are shown. Bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 operates from the sword-delivered state to the sword-drawn state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 215 (e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) by the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when it is performed by the player.

That is, in this effect example, even if the effect reception period related to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the first The operation detection of the operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the effect reception period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received in the effect is specified. (Here, "it is fine as it is") is done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215 (f), the content of such a specific notification changes with the passage of time so that the player can regain his / her calmness (here, “calmly push in”). It has become like. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words, so that even if the player side is in a panic state, this is preferable. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword decoration body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated by the first operation mode as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly received. You will be able to recognize it.

In FIG. 215 (g), the operation on the proper side (first operation mode) is performed in the production status (effect reception period when the operation is erroneous) in FIGS. 215 (e) and 215 (f). As a result of this, it is a depiction of how the production reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation-time production corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration body 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration body 5001 is in a non-operated state (normal state) from the state of the second operation mode. ) Will be returned.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if it is performed from the state (state of operation error), since the production reception is properly performed, the deterioration of the game interest when the operation error occurs can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned production example, when an erroneous operation is performed by the player, it is decided to notify that the operation should be performed as it is without correcting the operation error, but the content (the operation is performed as it is without correcting the operation error). It is not always necessary to provide detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since the player may be in a panic in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, it may be counterproductive to notify the complicated contents. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received, the notification is not displayed by a message but by an effect or sound only. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that the operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed during the operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect that the operation is switched to the proper operation.

On the other hand, depending on the player (particularly, an elderly player, etc.), it is possible that a situation may occur in which the operation is mistakenly performed even before the production reception period occurs in the specific operation-related production. For example, when the operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not given, but the operation for the second operation portion (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed, the first operation unit is performed. It is assumed that a situation may occur in which a production reception period related to a specific operation production is generated only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side of the above, and in this case as well, how should the player operate it? There is a concern that it will not be recognized whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit (sword part) and the second operation part (sheath part) is given the operation opportunity is performed, the first operation-related effect is performed. The second operation unit is in a situation where the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the operation unit side of the second operation unit (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 214 (b) and 214 (c)). Even when the operation for is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in an appropriate manner is received. The specific notification may be "a message display indicating that the operation unit on the appropriate side to which an operation opportunity is given soon should be operated while maintaining the operation state", or a message display may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as a notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming a special situation such that a specific notification is performed based on the operation and no effect is performed at the time of operation even though the operation is performed, the operation is subsequently performed on the appropriate side. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a chance to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being operated (for example, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation is being performed on the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion). , Even when the production reception period related to the production during a specific operation occurs only on the side of the sword part), the state in which the operation on the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is being performed (sword decoration body). When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state in which the 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-mentioned operation effect according to the operation is performed. It becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed from the same state, the production reception will be performed properly, so that the operation error occurs before the production reception period occurs. Even when the above occurs, the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

However, during the period in which a specific operation-related effect as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit is given an operation opportunity is performed, the effect result is shown and the effect acceptance period is shown. If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the above-mentioned, the information will be mixed with the content to be notified (instruction display, etc.) within the production reception period, and the player will be more and more confused. There is a concern that it will end up. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, in the period until the effect result is displayed. , The above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed even though the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, the above-mentioned first period is performed. It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operation unit of 1.

In the above-mentioned production example, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is performed. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-mentioned plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 179). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in the above to any of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and the effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated in the changed state. You may let it. Alternatively, the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the production display device 1600 during the production reception period, an instruction display (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period) for prompting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration body 5001 The sword decoration image SYG imitating the above is displayed, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same mode as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 179). It will be.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to add some fun to confirm the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor when it is in the production reception period. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to ensure the performance during the production reception period.

At this time, it is necessary to make the aspect represented by the sword decorative image SYG have a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001, which makes the effectability during the effect reception period more effective. It is desirable to ensure that it is suitable. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To display. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by confirming the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the game entertainment during the production reception period will be preferably maintained.

In order to obtain such an effect, the number of production modes on the sword decoration image SYG side may be larger than the number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of production modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of production modes are prepared as the sword decoration body 5001, the plurality of production modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the aspect of the sword decoration body 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply different from each other in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because they are falsely displayed. There is concern, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, more preferably, as the aspect of the sword decorative image SYG, a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form shown in FIG. 179). When the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, thereby displaying the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword. It is desirable to make the appearance of the decorative image SYG different from each other. Regarding the special aspect, the outer shape may be changed by further deforming and combining the sword decoration image SYG, or the sword decoration image 5001 may operate in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration body 5001. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, the structurally difficult staging expression of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, so that the concern that the sword decoration is falsely displayed is suppressed. In addition to being able to do this, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing a directing effect beyond the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword decoration body 5001.

Even when the sword decorative image SYG is provided with a special aspect in this way, each aspect of the sword decorative image SYG is prepared as an aspect of the sword decorative body 5001 (here, FIG. 179 is shown). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to the stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. When the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the sword decorative image SYG is displayed in the other mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, regarding the method for displaying the sword decorative image SYG in a special mode, in addition to the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed, for another effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 180 to 187). It may be applied.

For example, assuming that the production situation shown in FIG. 183 (X1) is present, the next production progress destination is the production situation shown in FIG. 183 (X2) and the production situation shown in FIG. 216 (a). The production pattern will be prepared. Then, when the effect is developed into the effect pattern, first, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is operated from the operation opportunity suggestion image shown in FIG. 183 (X1). A continuous image (an image with the samurai's eyes closed) indicating that no opportunity is given is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 that was in the second sword drawing state is in the sword delivery state while maintaining the form in the stage 3 form. Be returned.

Next, the three decorative symbols that have been variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a pseudo-continuous manner, and the player is notified that the decorative symbols are re-variated (FIG. 216 (b)). ). Here, among the three decorative symbols, the central decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous sword symbol that is not prepared for the left and right decorative symbols, specifically, the form and effect level (pseudo-continuous fluctuation number) of the sword ornament 5001 are shown. By displaying the pseudo-sword symbol of the aspect, the player can easily recognize the re-variation of the decorative symbol (the start of the pseudo-continuous variation).

However, here, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), the pseudo-continuous sword symbol displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 has the form of the sword decoration body 5001 in the fourth pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation). A sword image showing (special aspect) is displayed, but this special aspect can appear only in the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area, and the sword decoration Body 5001 itself is immutable. The special mode according to this production example is a mode in which the sheath portion is divided into two. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 216 (c), even if the sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to a special mode in the display area, the sword decoration body 5001 has a stage 3 form. It will change from the sword-delivered state to the second sword-drawn state while maintaining.

After that, the operation valid period of the sword decoration body 5001 is generated, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect for encouraging the sword delivery operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is performed. Specifically, while the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword extraction state (stage 3 form), a sword image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001 which is a special mode is displayed. An image (bar display) showing the operation direction and the operation validity period is displayed together with the message "Pay the sword!" (FIG. 216 (d)). Then, as shown in FIG. 216 (e), when the sword delivery operation by the player is detected during the operation valid period, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare) is dropped according to the set effect pattern. Along with the expectation notification effect, the sword decoration body 5001 changes its form from the stage 3 form to the initial form. As a result, the player can grasp that the pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) has ended.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned effect modes and other examples thereof, for example, when the symbol variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is subjected to the symbol variation. It is possible to execute the first precursor effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration body 5001. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation button 410 is not given an operation opportunity and the sword decoration body 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. It makes it possible to execute the second precursor effect that appears when an opportunity is given. Further, when the design is changed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the third precursor that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001. The effect (specific operation-related effect) can be executed.

In this respect, these precursory effects are executed as different effect contents from each other, and as those effect contents, for example,
-A specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area.
-After that, an effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed at a position where it is difficult to see by the specific image.
-After that, it is common in that the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased, the area where the specific image is displayed is decreased, etc.). It may be made to change. For example, in the first precursor effect, a display effect by a "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see an effect image imitating an operation means), and in the second precursor effect, a "flame" is performed as a specific image. Display effect by "effect" (display effect that makes it easier to see the effect image that imitates the operation means gradually, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by "water effect" as a specific image (effect image that imitates the operation means) By making the types of specific images different, such as by gradually making the display effect easier to see, it is possible to make those precursor effects different from each other. That is, in this case, the "cloud effect" is used. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. At that time, it is recognizable that the second precursor effect is performed prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword decoration body 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect) as to which of the button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given the operation opportunity is performed.

Then, when performing a precursory effect (at least one of the first precursory effect, the second precursory effect, and the third precursory effect) with such an effect content, an effect image that imitates the operation means by a specific image is used. It is desirable to generate the effect reception period for the operating means during the period when it is difficult to see. When such a configuration is applied to either the first precursor effect or the second precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operating means has a display mode with high expectation (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when it is uncertain which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect is produced during the effect reception period. You will be able to improve your sex. In addition, even when such a configuration is applied to the third precursor effect (specific operation-related effect), the conviction as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the sword cannot be held, the effectability during the effect reception period can be improved.

FIG. 217 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with such an effect content, and FIG. 218 is an example of an effect when the first precursor effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart which shows. Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the first precursor effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218. However, this example of the effect is not the first precursor effect but the second precursor effect and the third. It can also be applied to precursory effects.

In FIG. 217 (a), in the normal game state, the variation display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot determination in the state where the number of holdings is 0. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 217 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first precursor effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 217 (a).

Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 217 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" gradually changes from the display area to non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 218 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased). Or, the area where a specific image is displayed is reduced, etc.).

Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 218, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is set at the timing t2 in which the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and an instruction display (bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed (bar display). FIG. 217 (c)).

In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, red) is displayed. , Blue), the ratio of the operation-time effect is higher than that when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 217 (c), it is uncertain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect during operation is executed in a form in which the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, so that the button image BTG is the first display mode and the first display mode. It becomes possible to advance the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

Further, in the production situation shown in FIG. 217 (c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. Despite this, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 keeps changing the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the production situation shown in FIG. 217 (c) at the timing t3, the production reception period generated at the timing t2 is continued, and the “cloud effect” is obtained. Is completely hidden (FIG. 217 (d)). In such a situation, the operation button 410 can be operated while it is easily recognizable whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed in such a way that the effect content is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 217 (d).

According to such a configuration, in the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period from the display of the button image BTG until the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t2 to t3). ), It becomes possible to provide the effectability by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the color rendering index during the production reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. It is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period of the timings t2 to t3. In this production example, a message such as "press" is displayed during the period (timing t3 to t4) in which the "cloud effect" is completely hidden. For example, at timings t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stop mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the effectability in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more preferably enhanced. Will be able to.

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 217, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the production reception period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see first appears, and after a predetermined time from that situation, the effect situation is set to be difficult to see. Until then, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display for prompting the operation for the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation where it is difficult to see before the production reception period occurs, the display mode of the button image BTG changes to a mode with higher expectation (third precursor). In the case of the production, the production pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, the more difficult it is to see the button image BTG, the more interesting it is to pay attention to the button image BTG. It becomes possible to maintain it favorably.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 217, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the "cloud effect", but the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the "cloud effect". It was decided to display so that the visibility would be maintained without receiving it. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG with peace of mind while grasping the remaining time of the production reception period.

However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the "cloud effect" so that it is difficult to see until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the production reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented novel color rendering.

In addition, when such a directing property is applied to any of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is clear after the precursor effect is started. Even if the length of time until the specific image is made visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the time until the specific image becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) at the same time. Further, when such a color rendering index is applied to any of the precursor effects of the first precursor effect, the second precursor effect, and the third precursor effect, the effect imitating the operation means after the precursor effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple of these so that multiple effects with different expectations are given. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed until the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set it to the time.

Further, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image imitating the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, the effect image imitating the operation means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see due to a change in the setting of the transmittance of the effect image itself that imitates the operation means, and then relative. It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is easy to visually recognize. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see may be a timing before the timing t2, and in this case, the appearance itself in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a precursor effect, or while another display is performed as a precursor effect, an effect image imitating an operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to see. May be good.

[Movable production triggered by the establishment of conditions other than the conditions for design games]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU4100a), when the game ball is accepted at the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a determination regarding hit is made. As a result, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot game in which a large number of game balls can be acquired is executed after executing the symbol variation in which the jackpot symbol is displayed, and after the jackpot game, it is advantageous to the player. It is possible to control the game state (time saving state, probability change state). Further, while such a symbol game is performed, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, various notice effects such as a timer effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, etc., in addition to the effect pattern, are produced according to the result of the determination regarding the hit. Etc.) are made feasible, and as mentioned above, the game is maintained in the interest of the game until the big hit game is performed.

However, the display change in the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body (for example, the back front decoration unit 3100 and the back middle movable effect unit 3200, specific There is a concern that the decorative member SDY (sudare) and the like will become monotonous, and it will be difficult to maintain the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a high operating rate for a long period of time.

Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, even when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (starting condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 It is possible to execute a process that can change the behavior of the movable decorative body. That is, in this case, the display change and the movement of the movable body appear in a mode beyond the category of the symbol game, and the monotony is eliminated, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maintained at a high operating rate for a long period of time. You can be expected to do it.

Here, when another condition unrelated to the determination process related to the progress of the game and the corresponding symbol variation (start condition of the symbol game) is satisfied, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body change. As a method for causing the above, for example, each method listed below can be assumed. In addition, in order to change the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, any of the following methods is adopted. Alternatively, a method different from any of the methods listed below may be adopted, but a situation in which the symbol variation is not executed tentatively (the processing flag shown in FIG. 256 is "0" and the number of pending numbers is set. Is "0"), the above-mentioned other conditions must be satisfied, and even if the other conditions are satisfied in the situation, the display contents on the effect display device 1600 and the display contents It must be capable of causing changes in the behavior of the movable ornament.
-A method in which a production lottery that has nothing to do with symbol fluctuations is regularly executed, and the fact that a specific result is obtained in this production lottery is regarded as "the establishment of another condition" described above.-The cumulative number of operations for a specific operation means The time is measured by the RTC (real-time clock) function or the arithmetic processing in the peripheral control MPU4150a (or the main control MPU4100a) (for example, when the power is turned on). (Measure the time from), and the above-mentioned "satisfaction of another condition" is defined as the time when the measured time reaches a predetermined time.

Generally, in a pachinko gaming machine, when the time measured by using the RTC function reaches a predetermined time, the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body are changed on the assumption that another condition is satisfied. The method is often adopted. However, regardless of which method is adopted, if the display content or the behavior of the movable body is changed when another condition unrelated to the start condition of the symbol game is satisfied, until the change timing is reached. Since it is common to take a relatively long time (at least a few hours, etc.), it is possible to change the display content or the behavior of the movable ornament despite such a long time. If something that cannot be done occurs, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a specific state (for example, RTC state) in which the movable body operation time for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set in advance is set as a start condition for the symbol game. It is possible to generate it based on the fact that a specific condition different from the above (for example, the measurement time by the RTC function reaches a predetermined time) is satisfied. Then, in a situation where the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (for example, a situation in which the movable decorative body should be in the in-situ position but is not in the in-situ position) and a specific state has not occurred, the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation time arrives, it is possible to start the process of causing the movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation, whereas the movable decoration is in an abnormal state and a specific state occurs. In such a situation, it is possible to start a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state without starting a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation even when a predetermined restoration operation time arrives. ..

That is, in this case, in the specific state that can be generated based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the start condition of the symbol game, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation according to the symbol change side is prohibited. Since it is possible to start the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in a specific state, a movable body abnormality can be detected by a predetermined procedure in the specific state without being affected by the execution status of the symbol change. It is expected that the movable decoration will be restored and the operation in a specific mode (the operation when another condition is satisfied) will be executed more reliably.

Hereinafter, an example of the processing content when the movable decorative body is operated when such a specific condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 219. In the example shown in FIG. 219, for convenience of explanation, "RTC state in which a display content different from the previous one appears when it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on has reached a predetermined time by using the RTC function (RTC state). It is described as "a process that can execute a process of generating a specific state) and sequentially operating three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C according to the occurrence timing of the RTC state (specific state)". As described above, the method of causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 and the behavior of the movable decorative body when another condition (specific condition) unrelated to the start condition of the game is satisfied is not limited to this. As is the case, it is possible to appropriately adopt each of the techniques described below even when other methods are adopted.

Assuming that the state is before the RTC state (specific state) occurs, in the peripheral control MPU4150a, first, the remaining time until the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time (until the RTC state occurs). The remaining time) will be updated regularly. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt2, the elapsed time from the power-on reaches a predetermined time to generate the RTC state (specific state), and the RTC state (specific state) is generated. Based on the above, it is possible to execute the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In this way, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated based on the establishment of a condition (the establishment of the second condition) that has nothing to do with the situation of the symbol change, so that the flow of the game so far can be changed. You will be able to have a sense of expectation as if it will change. At this time, the display content of the effect display device 1600 may be changed.

In order to more preferably raise the expectation when the RTC state (specific state) occurs, for example, the RTC state is made to function as an effect period limited to a predetermined time (10 minutes), and the effect is produced. If a big hit is won between the time when the period (RTC state) occurs and the time when it ends, the production progress by the production character that cannot appear when the RTC state (specific state) does not occur (normal state) It is more desirable to have a production privilege such as enabling a special production mode).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, even at the timing Rt1 slightly before the timing Rt2 (for example, 5 seconds before), the condition unrelated to the state of the symbol fluctuation is satisfied. Based on the condition satisfaction (the first condition is satisfied), the pre-display indicating that the RTC state is about to occur (the second condition is satisfied) can be executed. That is, in the peripheral control MPU4150a according to this example, it is determined whether or not the timing Rt1 has arrived in addition to the timing Rt2 by periodically checking the passage of time since the power is turned on. When it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the pre-display (display change) appears, and when it is determined that the timing Rt2 has arrived, the process (behavior of the movable decoration) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed. .. The "pre-display" can be executed, for example, as a display such as "soon RTC state" or a countdown display toward the timing Rt2.

According to such a configuration, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated according to the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movements of these movable bodies are the result of the jackpot determination. Since it is suggested to the player in advance that it is not based on (does not have any jackpot expectation), it is preferable to avoid a decrease in the game interest due to a recognition error by the player. You will be able to.

In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at least during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. The decorative pattern (effect pattern) itself is hidden so that it is not displayed. That is, in this case, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated while only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any degree of expectation appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Since the process of causing the game to be started is started, it is expected that it is more preferably avoided that the game interest is deteriorated due to the recognition error by the player.

Here, "pre-display appearing at timing Rt1" and "moving body movement appearing at timing Rt2" correspond to "display not conforming to symbol variation" and correspond to "behavior of movable decorative body not conforming to symbol variation", respectively. Is what you do. Therefore, at the timings Rt1 and Rt2, the display and the behavior of the movable body occur regardless of the execution status (including the execution status) of the symbol variation at those timings. However, depending on the execution status of the symbol change, the preparations for operating the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are not ready (the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are in the original positions even though the timing Rt2 has arrived). There is a concern that the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C cannot be sequentially operated even though the timing Rt2 has finally arrived.

For example, when any one of several fluctuation patterns is selected as the symbol variation according to the result of the jackpot determination, the movable decorative body A or the movable decorative body B, within the period in which the symbol variation is performed, A movable effect using the movable decorative body C may be executed, but during the execution of such a movable effect, the movable body operation time (here, when the RTC state occurs) in the above-mentioned RTC state comes. In some cases, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the process of being executed cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, not only the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C but also various types of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are provided. It is possible to perform a movable abnormality determination such as whether or not the movable decorative body of is in the original position (normal state). Then, when it is determined (abnormality determination) that there is a movable decorative body that is not in the normal state in this movable abnormality determination, a predetermined movable decorative body is determined for the movable decorative body that is the determination target, following the processing of the abnormality determination. By executing the restoration process that performs the restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.), it is possible to quickly restore the movable decorative body in an abnormal state. Therefore, it is possible that the movable body operation time in the RTC state described above comes in the middle of executing the restoration process for causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation (movement to the original position, etc.). If there is, at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C that are in the middle of the restoration operation cannot be used as the above-mentioned "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". Can be assumed.

The "restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation" includes, for example, the start timing of the symbol variation (the timing of acquiring the command sent from the main control MPU4100a side when the symbol variation starts) and the symbol variation. It is possible to execute (execute the restoration process based on the acquisition of the command) as at least one of the stop times (the time when the command sent from the main control MPU4100a side is acquired when the symbol fluctuation is stopped). Is.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (peripheral control MPU4150a), first, at least "after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" arrives, the movable decorative body is specified according to the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed in the mode, the movable decorative body (movable decorative body A, movable decorative body B) used within the period is reached. , Movable decoration C) is prohibited so that it is not used as a movable effect according to the effect pattern on the symbol change side, so that the movable body movement in a specific mode in the RTC state (movable decoration that does not conform to the symbol change) It is possible to suppress the situation where the behavior of the body) cannot be performed due to the movable effect on the symbol change side.

However, at this time, even though the effect pattern corresponding to the movable effect is displayed, there is a concern that the game interest may be deteriorated if the movable effect is not executed within the effect pattern. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (peripheral control MPU4150a), at the timing Rt1, only the display (display that does not conform to the symbol variation) that does not show any expectation as the display content on the effect display device 1600 appears. That is mentioned above.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, when there is a symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that is in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives, "what kind of expectation" was displayed until then. The display that does not show the degree (display from timing Rt1) ”is not hidden at this point, and this is displayed over the period until the timing Rt2a when the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) is stopped. I try to maintain it.

According to such a configuration, although the RTC state (specific state) is generated at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a and the symbol is actually changed, the effect display device 1600 is decorated. The effect pattern by the pattern is hidden, and only the display that does not show any expectation will appear. Then, while such a display appears, the operation by the movable decorative body (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) according to the occurrence of the RTC state is advanced. It is expected that the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the movable effect corresponding to the effect pattern is not executed within the period of the timings Rt2 to Rt2a is preferably suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 219, when the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is terminated (stopped) (when the timing Rt2a arrives). , Even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the "display that does not show any expectation (display from timing Rt1)" that was displayed until then is hidden at this point. Then, a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is responded to. The display showing the degree of expectation such as the production pattern and the advance notice production is started as usual.

However, even if a new symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is started and the effect pattern is displayed in this way, the "RTC state (specific state) occurs timing Rt2 has arrived. At least as long as it is in the period from then until the movable decoration finishes operating in a specific mode (here, the three movable decorations A, B, and C sequentially operate) depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. Needless to say, the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C is prohibited. In this state, the movable effect on the symbol changing side is prohibited, but since the movable body movement corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is in the middle of execution, the game by prohibiting the movable effect on the symbol changing side. The decline in interest will be suppressed.

As such a prohibition process, it is determined whether or not the situation should be prohibited at the start of the symbol variation (C variation in the figure), and when it is determined that the situation should be prohibited, the corresponding symbol variation (figure). Among them, C variation) itself may be set as a prohibited target of the movable effect (at least the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C). That is, in this case, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs is reached in the middle of the corresponding symbol change (C change in the figure), the movable ornament is moved depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. Even if the "period until the operation in a specific mode (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed" is completed, the movable effect (in this case, the movable effect (in this case, the period until the symbol variation is completed) is completed. At least, the execution of the movable effect using any one of the movable decorative body A, the movable decorative body B, and the movable decorative body C) becomes unacceptable.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the timing for causing the specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is set to the timing Rt2a later than the original timing Rt2. There is a concern that the number will decline. However, although the RTC state itself occurs at timing Rt2, the effect privilege due to the occurrence of the RTC state (if a big hit is won between the occurrence and the end of the RTC state, it is controlled to the special effect mode. Etc.) does not occur at timing Rt2, and only the symbol fluctuations (C and D fluctuations in the figure) after the first digested symbol fluctuation after the RTC state occurs are targeted. It can be said that it is appropriate to make a specific background (for example, in the RTC state) appear when the timing Rt2a arrives.

By the way, before the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is completed (stopped) (until the timing Rt2a arrives). ), "After the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, It can be assumed that the period until the end of the sequential operation by C) elapses. However, even in this case, as long as the timing Rt2a does not arrive, the state in which the "display without any expectation (display from the timing Rt1)" appears is maintained. This is in the example shown in FIG. 219, and the symbol variation (B variation in the figure) executed so as to straddle before and after the occurrence of the RTC state (before and after the timing Rt2) is subject to the RTC effect privilege. This is because it is not.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (peripheral control MPU4150a), at least after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body has a specific mode depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. When it is in the period until the operation (here, the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) is completed, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation comes, the restoration process is triggered by this. By prohibiting this so that (a process of causing a movable decorative body in an abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation) is prohibited, the movable body operation in a specific mode in the RTC state (not according to the symbol variation). The behavior of the movable decorative body) can be suppressed from being unable to be performed due to the restoration process on the symbol change side.

According to such a configuration, in the RTC state (specific state) that can be generated based on the satisfaction of a specific condition different from the game start condition, a predetermined restoration operation is performed according to the symbol change side. Since the process of causing the operation is prohibited and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation at a predetermined time in the RTC state (specific state) can be executed, the influence of the execution status of the symbol change It is expected that the movable body abnormality will be restored by a predetermined procedure in the RTC state (specific state) without receiving the damage, and the movable ornament will more reliably perform the operation in the above specific mode. ..

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 219, when the game is controlled to the normal gaming state and the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) according to the jackpot determination is in the middle of the process. It is assumed that the timing Rt1 is reached. Then, as described above, first, at the timing Rt1, as a display that does not conform to the symbol variation, for example, a display such as "RTC state" appears in the background display on the effect display device 1600. Then, the symbol variation (A variation (loss) in the figure) is completed between the display such as "RTC state soon" and the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs, and a new symbol is created. Fluctuation (fluctuation B (loss)) is started. Then, the timing Rt2 arrives when the symbol change is in the middle of the process, and at the timing Rt2, three movable ornaments behave in a manner that does not conform to the symbol change. The process of operating the decorations A, B, and C in sequence is executed. The "display not conforming to the symbol variation" from the timing Rt1 is continued for a period until the new symbol variation (variation B (loss) in the figure) is stopped.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 219, "three movable decorative bodies A, depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs" has arrived. In the period until the sequential operation by B and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", at least the movable decorative bodies A, B, among various movable decorative bodies, It is prohibited to perform both the movable effect on the symbol variation side using C and the restoration process on the symbol variation side. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, even though the symbol variation (B variation (loss) in the figure) is executed during the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a, the effect display on the symbol variation side (the effect display on the symbol variation side (loss)). It is controlled as a period in which neither the display showing the degree of expectation, the movable effect on the symbol change side (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation), or the restoration process on the symbol change side is executed (No. 1). One limitation). On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 219, during the period from timing Rt2a to Rt5, the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) is executed, but the movable effect on the symbol variation side (expected). The movement of the movable body whose degree is indicated) and the restoration process on the symbol change side are both controlled as a period during which they are not executed (second limitation).

It should be noted that such control at the timings Rt2 to Rt2a (neither the effect display on the symbol variation side (display showing the degree of expectation) nor the movable effect (movement of the movable body showing the degree of expectation) is executed) is the said. Even if the symbol fluctuation during the period is not a loss fluctuation but is performed based on the winning of the jackpot (big hit fluctuation), it is executed. That is, in this case, when no expected effect is executed and the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C reaches the timing Rt2a in the middle of execution, the jackpot symbol suddenly appears. Therefore, as a player who expected to be in the RTC state, he / she will be able to enjoy the fun as a surprise production that exceeds the expectation. After the jackpot symbol appears in this way, the jackpot gaming state occurs while the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operating.

Further, as described above, as for the display from the timing Rt1 (only the display in which the decorative symbol is not changed and no expectation is shown), the symbol fluctuation that was in the middle of execution when the timing Rt2 arrives is present. It will be hidden at the stop timing Rt2a, and instead, a specific background (such as "in RTC state") after the RTC state has occurred will be displayed. In addition, when a symbol variation (variation pattern C in the figure) is newly started while a specific background (such as "in RTC state") is displayed, an effect display (expectation degree is shown) according to the variation pattern. Will be displayed as usual. However, regarding the movable effect on the symbol change side using the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, unless the process of sequentially operating the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed, after the timing Rt2a arrives. Will be maintained as a prohibited state. Therefore, even if an effect pattern for performing the movable effect on the symbol variation side using any of the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the movable effect is performed. Although the liquid crystal display, sound, lamp lighting, etc. are performed as usual, the movable decorative body is prevented from operating.

Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 219, after the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs arrives, the three movable decorative bodies A and B depend on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state. In the period until the sequential operation by C and C is completed (normal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5, abnormal time: timing Rt2 to Rt5') ", the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol fluctuation (here, the start of the symbol fluctuation). Even if the time (time, stop time) arrives, it is prohibited to perform the restoration process (the process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform the predetermined restoration operation). .. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt2a, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (B fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) )) The start time (restoration operation time) has come, but in these restoration operation times, even if there is a movable decoration in an abnormal state, it is restored to the movable decoration. No processing is performed.

However, during the period of timing Rt2 to Rt5 (when abnormal, timing Rt2 to Rt5'), instead of prohibiting the restoration process on the symbol change side in this way, first, at timing Rt2, the movable decorative body A is in an abnormal state. Judge whether or not it is. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body A is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body A is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body A is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body A in the original position to a predetermined effect position (first position), the movable decorative body A is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body A is moved to the original position.

Next, at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body B is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body B is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body B is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body B is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body B in the original position to a predetermined effect position (second position), the movable decorative body B is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body B is moved to the original position.

Then, at the timing Rt4 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body B is completed, it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state. Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is determined that the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, and based on the result of the determination, the movable decorative body C is operated in a normal operation mode. The process of operating (normal operation) will be executed. Here, the normal operation mode of the movable decorative body C is, for example, after moving the movable decorative body C in the original position to a predetermined effect position (third position), the movable decorative body C is in the predetermined effect position. It can be realized as an operation mode in which the movable decorative body C is moved to the original position.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (e), when the timing Rt5 after each operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is sequentially completed, the RTC state (specific state) occurs at the time of occurrence. The "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is lifted.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state by any of the abnormality determinations for the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, a process of causing the movable decorative body in the abnormal state to perform a predetermined restoration operation. Is feasible. However, while executing a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) when the RTC state occurs, the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is predetermined. If the player feels that the restoration operation is being performed, it will be annoying, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, a predetermined restoration operation for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is performed, and a series of movable body operations (here, three) when the RTC state occurs. It is not executed independently as an operation different from the operation (sequential operation by the movable decorations A, B, and C), but is executed as an operation of a special mode including an operation of returning the movable decoration in an abnormal state. There is. That is, in this case, the predetermined restoration operation itself for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be made to appear as if it is an operation incorporated as a part of the operation when the RTC state occurs. , The deterioration of the game interest when performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state can be preferably avoided.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), it is assumed that the movable decorative body B is determined to be in an abnormal state at the timing Rt3 after the normal operation by the movable decorative body A is completed. However, based on the result of the abnormality determination, it is not a process of operating the movable decorative body B in the normal operation mode (normal operation), but an abnormal time including an operation of returning (restoring) the movable decorative body B. It is possible to execute the process of operating (special operation) in the operation mode of. After that, the restored (restored) movable decorative body B is not re-operated (normally operated) in the normal operating mode, and the timing Rt4 (movable) shown in FIG. 219 (e) is not performed. Similar to (timing after the normal operation by the decorative body B is completed), it is determined whether or not the movable decorative body C is in an abnormal state, and when the movable decorative body C is not in an abnormal state, the movable decoration is movable. The process of operating the body C in the normal operation mode (normal operation) is executed. The time required for the normal operation by the movable decorative body B and the time required for the special operation by the movable decorative body B may or may not be the same.

According to such a configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B after the RTC state occurs (for example, during the operation of the movable decorative body A), the movable decorative body B in which the abnormality occurs Until the timing to operate is reached, it will be left in an abnormal state regardless of the situation on the symbol change side. Then, when the timing for operating the movable decorative body B arrives, the movable decorative body B is operated in a special mode including a restoration operation instead of the normal operation mode. Therefore, "three It becomes possible to restore the abnormally generated movable decorative body B while preferably maintaining the effect mode when the RTC state occurs, such as "sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C". That is, in this case, since it is possible to make it appear as if one of a plurality of operation modes prepared as the operation when the RTC state occurs is executed, a predetermined restoration operation is performed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. The deterioration of the game interest when performing the game will be preferably avoided.

The symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) started at the timing Rt2a is sequentially executed by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C depending on the operation time of the movable body in the RTC state. It is started when it is in the middle stage and continues until after the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is completed. Therefore, the stop time (restoration operation time) of the symbol fluctuation (C fluctuation (loss) in the figure) and the start time (restoration operation time) of the next symbol fluctuation (D fluctuation (loss) in the figure) have arrived. At that time, the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol change side has already been released. Therefore, when a movable decoration in an abnormal state exists at that time, the restoration process is executed for the movable decoration. The Rukoto.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), when the movable decorative body B is operated in the "special mode including the restoration operation", the "special aspect including the restoration operation" is described in the "normal operation". The movable decorative body B may be restored (returned to the original position) by an operation mode different from the "mode", and may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required to return the movable decorative body B to the original position.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, at the timing Rt1, only the display (for example, "soon RTC state" or the like) that does not show any expectation level appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600. Then, the display is maintained until the timing Rt2a arrives, but the display content is different based on the occurrence of the RTC state at the timing Rt2 (for example, "RTC preparation state"). You may switch to. However, even when the display content is switched at the timing Rt2 to make a new display appear, the display content on the effect display device 1600 does not show any expectation during the period of the timing Rt2 to Rt2a (design variation). It is important to make sure that the display does not conform to.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the case where an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B has been described, but when the movable decorative bodies A and C are operated, even if an abnormality determination is made, the normal operation mode is obtained. Instead, it is desirable to operate each in a special mode including a restoration operation.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, the operation time of the movable body for operating the movable decorative body in a specific mode is set as the occurrence time of the RTC state (specific state). However, the operation time of the movable body may be set at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the RTC state (specific state) occurred.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, based on the arrival of the timings Rt1 and Rt2 in which the conditions are satisfied based on the function (RTC function) that does not conform to the symbol fluctuation on the peripheral control MPU4150a side, "not conforming to the symbol fluctuation". It was decided to start "display" and "behavior of movable ornaments that do not conform to pattern fluctuations". However, instead of this, based on the command transmitted based on the function that does not conform to the symbol variation on the main control MPU4100a side, "display that does not conform to the symbol variation" and "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation". May be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 219, "after the arrival of the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state (specific state) occurs, the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode depending on the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state (here, 3). This is prohibited so that the restoration process on the symbol change side is not performed when it is in the period until the end of the sequential operation by the two movable ornaments A, B, and C. The movement of the movable body in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the (specific state) is less likely to occur due to a conflict with the restoration process on the symbol variation side. However, if the restoration process for any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state), the restoration process is set to the execution state. In this situation, the RTC state (specific state) may occur, and eventually the movable body operation time in the RTC state (specific state) may come. That is, in this case, the restoration process started immediately before the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) causes the movable body to move in a specific mode (behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation) in the RTC state (specific state). There is a concern that it will not be obtained. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 219, even during the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. It is desirable to prohibit this so that is not executed.

FIG. 220 is a modification of the example shown in FIG. 219. “During the period of timing Rt1 to Rt2, at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C among the various movable decorative bodies included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown. It is different from the example shown in FIG. 219 in that the restoration process of the above is not executed.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 220, in the period from the arrival of the timing Rt1 to the occurrence of the RTC state (timings Rt1 to Rt2), an abnormality determination (or an abnormality determination) is made for at least three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. , Restoration process) I am trying not to execute this itself. As a result, even if any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in an abnormal state while the display does not conform to the symbol variation (such as "RTC state soon"), this is restored. There is no such thing, and it will be left in an abnormal state.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 220, when the timing Rt2 at which the RTC state occurs arrives, first, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are executed prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state. It is decided to perform an abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) as to whether or not any of the above is in an abnormal state.

As a result of the above abnormality determination, when it is determined that there is no abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, it is assumed that the movable body operation time (second abnormality determination) in the RTC state has arrived, and FIG. 219. The above-mentioned processing (processing related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state) will be performed with reference to. Therefore, when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are operated in sequence, the abnormality determination as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body to be operated is executed again individually, indicating that there is no abnormality. When it is determined, the operation in the normal mode (see FIG. 219 (e)) appears, and when it is determined that there is an abnormality, the operation in the special mode (see FIG. 219 (f)) appears. That is, in this case, for example, in the movable decorative body B, the first abnormality determination is executed prior to the start of the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state, and the process related to the movable body movement in the RTC state is started. Even after that, the second abnormality determination is executed prior to operating the movable decorative body B.

On the other hand, as a result of performing the above abnormality determination prior to executing the process related to the movement of the movable body in the RTC state, it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. At that time, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed in a form of delaying the arrival of the movable body operation time in the RTC state. That is, the situation in which the abnormality determination is made is "a situation in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movement of the movable decorative body in a specific mode has not yet started". By restoring the movable decorative body in an abnormal state while maintaining the situation, the operation of the movable decorative body in a specific mode can be performed in the "normal mode" instead of the above-mentioned "special mode". Become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 220 (f), at the timing Rt2 when the RTC state occurs, "the movable body operating time in the RTC state has not yet arrived, and the movable decorative body operates in a specific mode. It is assumed that it is determined that there is an abnormality in any of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C as a result of performing the abnormality determination when "is not yet started". Then, while maintaining the "state in which the movement time of the movable body in the RTC state has not yet arrived and the movement of the movable decoration in a specific mode has not yet started", the movable decoration determined to be abnormal has not been started yet. Will be restored.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 220 (e) and 220 (f), in the RTC state, as compared with the case where it is determined that none of the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is abnormal. The arrival of the movable body operation time is delayed (delay from timing Rt2 to timing Rt2b in the figure), and the period created by such a delay (timing Rt2 to Rt2b in the figure) should be used. Then, after the movable decorative body that has been determined to be abnormal is restored, the movable body operation time in the RTC state can be reached. After that, when the movable body operation time in the RTC state arrives, the processing as described above is performed with reference to FIG. 219.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 220 (f), it is assumed that when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated, it is determined that no abnormality has occurred in any of the movable decorative bodies. doing. That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 219 (e). Then, when the timing Rt5b arrives after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in the normal state mode, the "movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is reached. Behavior ”is terminated, and the prohibited state (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5a) for the restoration process on the symbol variation side is released.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 220 (g), when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated (timing). It is assumed that after the abnormality determination (first abnormality determination) in Rt2 is performed (or after the restoration), a new abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body B). That is, in this case, from the delayed timing Rt2b, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C operate in sequence in the manner described with reference to FIG. 219 (f). Then, after the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C have been sequentially operated in a mode corresponding to each determination result (the movable decorative bodies A and C are normal modes and the movable decorative body B is a special mode). When the timing Rt5b arrives, the "behavior of the movable decorative body that does not conform to the symbol variation" at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) is terminated, and the prohibited state for the restoration process on the symbol variation side (prohibited state over timings Rt1 to Rt5b). ) Will be canceled. That is, in this case, for example, when an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body B even in the first abnormality determination, the restoration process (restoration operation) according to the first abnormality determination and the second abnormality determination are performed. Each of the operations in a special mode will be executed.

According to such a configuration, even if a movement abnormality occurs during the movement of the movable body immediately before or immediately after the start of the RTC state, a series of movements of the movable body at the time of the occurrence of the RTC state (here, three). (Sequential operation by the movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) can be appropriately executed, and the expectation that the RTC state has occurred can be suitably maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 220, when there is an abnormality in a plurality of movable decorative bodies in the abnormality determination at the timing Rt2, the restoration process for the movable decorative bodies in the abnormal state is sequentially executed, and then the RTC state is set. It is desirable to execute a series of movable body movements (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) at the time of occurrence. In this case, a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs (here, sequential movements by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C) as the number of movable decorative bodies to be restored is increased. ) Will be delayed over a longer period of time, but it will be possible to perform a series of moving body movements in the normal mode when the RTC state occurs. Restoration operations for a plurality of movable ornaments may be executed in parallel. In this case, it is possible to suppress the delay time until a series of movable body operations are started when the RTC state occurs. become.

However, even in the example shown in FIG. 220, it is a pleasure for the player to feel that the movable decorative body in an abnormal state is performing a predetermined restoration operation. There is a concern that the number will decline. Therefore, in the example shown in FIGS. 220 (f) and 220 (g), when the "restoration operation" is completed, the "sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C" is executed (sequentially executed). ), So that the series of movable body movements up to the timings Rt5a and Rt5b including the restoration operation appearing at the timing Rt2 can be seen as "a series of moving body movements when the RTC state occurs". It is made difficult to recognize that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in an abnormal state.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when an abnormality occurs in a situation different from these abnormality occurrence situations, it is possible to display (error code, etc.) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body. In the examples shown in FIGS. 220 (f) and 220 (g) as well as the example shown in FIG. 219 (f), the period during which the restoration operation (restoration process) is executed for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. During the period (during the restoration operation according to the first abnormality judgment) or during the period when the movable decoration B is operated in the special mode (during the operation in the special mode according to the second abnormality judgment), the movable decoration has an abnormality. No indication (error code, etc.) indicating that it has occurred is displayed. Further, the timing at which the operation in the special mode is started after the operation in the normal mode is completed, the timing at which the operation in the normal mode is started after the operation in the special mode is completed, and further, FIG. 220 ( At the timing when the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C start the sequential operation after the restoration operation shown in f) and (g) is completed, the display content on the effect display device 1600 is triggered by the occurrence of these timings. Does not cause any change. These things also make it appear that "a series of movable body movements when the RTC state occurs" is performed, and that a predetermined restoration operation is performed on the movable decorative body in the abnormal state. It can be said that it is important to make it difficult to recognize.

In addition, in FIG. 219 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 220 and its alternative example, as the movable body operation based on the occurrence of the RTC state, the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are sequentially operated. The movable decorative body (one, two, or three or more, etc.) used in the movable effect on the symbol change side is based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the game start condition (starting condition). It suffices as long as it is operated in a specific mode at the time of operation of the movable body within the specific state in which it occurs.

Further, as a movable decorative body that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in such an RTC state (specific state), a frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, provided so as to be movable). Operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc., and board side movable decoration body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory) ) Etc.) may be used respectively.

However, for example, in FIG. 219 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 220 and its alternative example, as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state), as an operating means. When the frame-side movable decoration body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used is used, the frame-side movable decoration body that is also used as such an operation means even after the timing Rt2a arrives. There may be a situation in which "operations that do not conform to symbol fluctuations" are being performed.

That is, as described above, in the timing Rt2a, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the display "display that does not show any expectation (from the timing Rt1)" that has been displayed until then. Display) ”is hidden at this point, and a specific background (for example, during the RTC state) after the occurrence of the RTC state (specific state) can appear. After that, when a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is started, even if it is within the operation period by the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the symbol variation is responded to. It was also mentioned above that the display showing the degree of expectation such as the effect pattern and the notice effect is started as usual. Therefore, during the period in which such a new symbol variation (C variation (loss) in the figure) is performed, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation button 410, sword decoration body 5001, etc.) that is also used as an operating means is used. Even though it is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, an operation opportunity may be given to the frame-side movable decorative body which is also used as an operation means depending on the effect pattern. A situation that causes confusion in the production can occur. In addition, in the period of timings Rt2 to Rt2a (furthermore, the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2 before that), only the display that does not conform to the symbol variation (the display that does not show any expectation) appears. Even if the symbol change (C change (loss) in the figure) is performed, the operation opportunity is not given within the period.

Therefore, even though the specific operating means (frame-side movable decorative body) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, the specific operating means is subjected to the result of the jackpot determination. When it is time to give an operation opportunity, the effect display device 1600 displays a specific display (operation instruction image) for prompting the specific operation means to perform an operation. Even if a specific operating means in a state of performing a specific operation is operated, it is desirable not to accept the effect. According to such a configuration, when a specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state is executed, the game is in a situation where an operation opportunity is originally given to the specific operation means. It is possible to make appropriate suggestions to the person. In addition, by not accepting the effect of the operation for the specific operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of failure or abnormality due to the operation being performed on the specific operation means in the operating state. It will be expected.

However, during the execution period of the specific operation corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, the operation for the specific operation means is not accepted even though the specific display prompting the operation for the specific operation means is performed. If such a thing happens frequently, the game entertainment may be reduced due to the lack of progress in the production. Therefore, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the operation effect is performed within the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination. The operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a relatively high generation rate is not used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). It is desirable to do. In this case, during the operation period of the movable decorative body corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state, there is an operation opportunity for the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) in which the generation rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively high. When it is given, it is desirable that the display related to the operation instruction image and the effect reception (predetermined effect according to the effect reception) at the time of operation are executed as usual.

That is, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable (for example, vibration), the sword decorative body 5001 and the like), the symbol changes according to the jackpot determination. A movable decorative body capable of operating a specific operating means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) having a relatively low rate of occurrence of an operation effect within the movable body at the time when the movable body operates in the RTC state (specific state). By using it as one, the movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is in a state of being subjected to a specific operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state, but the movable decorative body (for example, the movable decorative body (for example)). For example, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the production time for giving an operation opportunity according to the result of the jackpot determination is reached for the sword decoration body 5001).

Further, the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side (preferably a specific operating means in which the rate of occurrence of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low) is a movable body in the RTC state (specific state). When it is used as one of the movable decorative bodies that can be operated at the time of operation, when the RTC state occurs, the operation is independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. It is desirable to perform the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). According to such a configuration, a special operation (see FIG. 219) or a restoration operation (see FIG. 220) is executed for any one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. However, it becomes possible to perform an operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) without being affected by (delay, etc.) due to these operations. In this case, it is desirable that all of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C be used as board-side movable decorative bodies. As a result, even if any of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is in the restoration operation, the possibility of interference with the movable decorative body is eliminated, and the door frame 3 side is provided. The operation by the frame-side movable decoration can be executed in parallel.

Then, on this, after the RTC state (specific state) is generated, the frame-side movable decorative body (preferably, the specific operating means (for example, the sword decorative body) in which the occurrence rate of the operation effect within the symbol variation is relatively low is relatively low. When the time required to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation according to 5001)) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) is set as the "specific time", any of the effect patterns according to the jackpot judgment is executed. Even in this case, as long as at least a "specific time" does not elapse after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts), a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, the frame side movable decoration). It is desirable to set each effect pattern (timing for giving an operation opportunity) so that the body (for example, the operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001) does not arrive.

According to such a configuration, in FIG. 219 and its alternative example, and in FIG. 220 and its alternative example, even if the symbol variation having any effect pattern is started at the timing Rt2a, the symbol variation is within the symbol variation. By the time the operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001), the operation by the frame-side movable decoration body according to the occurrence of the RTC state (corresponding to the occurrence of the RTC state) Since the operation) has already been completed and the effect can be accepted, the effect when the RTC state occurs can be enhanced without sacrificing the effect on the symbol change side.

Further, as described above, in view of the fact that the usual effect control is allowed only for the symbol variation after the symbol variation that is first digested after the RTC state occurs, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, , The operation that does not conform to the symbol variation due to the sword decoration 5001) (the operation according to the occurrence of the RTC state) can be started based on the occurrence of the RTC state, whereas the RTC state occurs. Since the symbol variation that is first digested after that is forced to start later than this, the frame-side movable ornament (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is corresponding to the delay time (timing Rt2 to Rt2a). ) Allows a margin to complete the operation that does not conform to the symbol variation in advance.

Further, when the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is executed as an operation independent of the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C. In executing this, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the frame-side movable decorative body, and when it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, a special mode including a restoration operation is performed instead of the normal mode operation. It is desirable to execute the operation by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) as the operation of the above, or to perform the operation of the normal mode after performing the restoration operation. In this case, the "special mode including the restoration operation" also restores (returns to the original position) the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) by an operation mode different from the "normal operation mode". It may be, for example, the minimum operation mode required for returning to the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001).

Then, the operation when the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is the "normal mode", the "special mode including the restoration operation", and the "restoration operation". Regardless of which mode of "the mode of performing the operation of the normal mode in the subsequent manner", unless the operation is completed, the frame-side movable decoration body (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) is used. It is more desirable to make settings related to each effect pattern so that the timing at which the operation opportunity is given does not come. According to such a configuration, regardless of which of the effect patterns corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed at the timing Rt2a, the RTC state is generated by the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001). Regardless of whether the operation is executed in the normal mode or the mode when an abnormality is determined, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is provided only after the operation is completed. On the other hand, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity.

Further, when an operation opportunity for the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is received, at least one of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C is operated based on the effect reception. You may make it possible to execute a specific movable effect. However, in this case, when an operation opportunity is given to the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) within the symbol variation started at the timing Rt2a, the operation by the frame-side movable decoration (RTC). Even if the operation according to the occurrence of the state) has already been completed, if the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C may still be in the middle of execution, the operation opportunity is given. It will not be possible to accept productions, and there is concern that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the time from the timing Rt2 required to complete the sequential operation by the three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C in the normal state is set as the "special time", the jackpot determination is made. Regardless of which of the effect patterns according to the above is executed, as long as neither the above "specific time" nor the "special time" elapses after the symbol variation starts (the effect pattern starts). , Each effect pattern (inside operation opportunity grant timing) so that a predetermined operation opportunity grant timing in the effect pattern (here, an operation opportunity for the frame side movable decorative body (for example, the sword ornament 5001) does not come). It is desirable to make the settings related to.

When the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is restored. It is desirable to prohibit the timing Rt2 so that the timing Rt2 arrives while maintaining the abnormal state.

On the other hand, among the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C, this is the case for a specific movable decorative body (for example, a movable decorative body A having a fast operation order, a movable decorative body having a long time required for a restoration operation, and the like). When an abnormal state occurs within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is prohibited, but the movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration (for example, the operation order is slow). Regarding the movable decorative body B (or the movable decorative body C) or the movable decorative body in which the time required for the restoration operation is short), if this is in an abnormal state within the period of timings Rt1 to Rt2, the movable decorative body is restored. The process (restoration operation) may be performed without being prohibited. For example, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration body B (or the movable decoration body C) does not need to be completed by the timing Rt2, and the movable decoration body A moves when the RTC occurs. This is because if it can be completed during the period, the sequential operation by the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C can be executed in the normal state mode.

Further, the timing at which the series of operations of the above three movable decorative bodies A, B, and C are started after the RTC state is generated, and the operation of the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) are started. It may be different from the timing.

[Restoration processing for movable abnormalities with less influence on movable effects]
As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, a situation in which a specific state has not occurred), the symbol changes. When the corresponding restoration operation time (for example, the start time or the stop time of the symbol variation) arrives, it is possible to execute a process of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. However, if such a restoration process is executed regardless of the situation of the production, it will be a pleasure and there is a concern that the interest of the game will be deteriorated.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol change" is set as "restoration operation time corresponding to symbol change". Then, as shown in FIG. 221, assuming that the timing tm1 at which a new symbol change is started in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, at least the following processes are performed in the peripheral control MPU4150a. Will be executed.
-Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU4100a side when the symbol variation is started, the effect pattern corresponding to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is changed. Processing to advance the production ・ Based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU4100a side when the symbol variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), it is specified. Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decorative body of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 221, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progress related to the "specific effect pattern in which the specific movable ornament can be operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable ornament are performed. A situation will appear in which the processing to be performed is parallel to each other.

In general, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relatively expected degree) that has an effect paired relationship with the specific effect pattern. Low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the effect pattern having a paired relationship (the effect pattern having a relatively low expectation), the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, but the specific timing tm2 is reached. It is made so that the same mode of production as in the case of "a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation (a production pattern with a relatively high expectation)" is performed. NS. In this way, by preparing two effect patterns (an effect pattern that operates a specific movable decorative body and an effect pattern that does not operate a specific movable decorative body) that are in a paired relationship in a directing manner, the specific timing tm2 is reached. (For example, the predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives) is a predetermined effect having a color rendering property of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the specific movable ornament operates). Will become feasible, and the game entertainment will be suitably maintained by such a color rendering index.

However, if there is a case where the process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still in the execution state even when the specific timing tm2 arrives after the symbol variation is started, the specific timing is specified. Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the specific movable decorative body is in a situation where it cannot perform a directing operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the color rendering index will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 221, among the effect patterns, the effect progress related to "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2" and a predetermined effect for the specific movable decorative body. When a situation appears in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, "specific" is "specific" until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration status. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", but in the following explanation, "whether the abnormal state is resolved or not" It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing the restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body until a predetermined upper limit is reached is executed.

More specifically, with respect to the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation", the restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required for this to be done will be different. For example, when the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for a specific movable decoration, "a predetermined restoration for a specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the operation" is completed also arrives at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for a specific movable ornament fails and is restored (restored) is performed. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is postponed in a delayed manner. And at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not been restored (restored) yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is executed again, the specific movable decoration By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation until the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration status is completed. Will be.

In addition, when it is assumed that x time is required to perform the restoration operation for a specific movable decorative body once, one symbol is established so that the relationship "x time x n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2" is established. The upper limit number n of repeating the predetermined restoration operation within the fluctuation is set, and the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated even if the restoration (restoration) is not performed when the upper limit number n is reached. By doing so, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation may be completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status.

According to such a configuration, the effect progress related to the specific effect pattern capable of operating the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a certain situation appears, the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation is completed before the arrival of the specific timing tm2 regardless of the restoration status. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decoration is restored before the arrival of the specific timing tm2, but also when the specific movable decoration is not restored, the specific timing tm2 is specific. Since the movable decorative body is brought into a stopped state, it is possible to suitably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may occur when the specific timing tm2 arrives, or the movable decoration does not operate. Even so, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (if the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the effect operation by the movable decoration is performed). ..

However, in reality, if a specific movable decorative body is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has a color rendering property as to whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed before the above-mentioned predetermined effect is started regardless of the restoration status. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the game entertainment.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result hit by an attack) appears in the super reach effect, and operates if the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as "not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a form that incites whether or not a specific display result appears", and a specific movable decorative body is "a display effect". When it is provided as "a thing that operates based on the fact that the effect is accepted by the operation by the player (or the effect is accepted but does not operate)", "an effect that causes a specific display that encourages the player to operate" appears. Can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 221, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed. It is assumed that it will be in a normal state. In this way, even if the state is abnormal at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation time" such as when the previous symbol was stopped), the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives after the state is restored to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to produce and operate a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process of causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot recover (restore) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained at least from the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx) until the symbol variation ends and the next restoration operation time arrives. It becomes. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

However, in recent years, pachinko gaming machines have come to be provided with movable decorative bodies that perform multi-step movements with a more complicated structure, and in such movable decorative bodies, even as a restoration process, until this is completed. It often takes a long time. However, on the other hand, in a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that is in a pair relationship with the specific effect pattern, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, it is within a time shorter than the time required from the start of the symbol variation to the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation. That is, in this case, every time a specific movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can be restored only in a simple and first-aid manner, which accelerates the deterioration of the specific movable decoration. It can also be.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and when the symbol change is started, the main control MPU4100a side. When the special effect pattern is selected based on the command sent from, the specific effect pattern is specified while the effect is progressing (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is performed). The movable decorative body is controlled so as not to operate and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) and 222 (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the effect progress related to the special effect pattern. And when a situation appears in which the process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation is performed in parallel, at least while a special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped). Allows this to continue without terminating the restore process.

More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by executing the first restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. Even in this case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is executed for the entire period thereof.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration process in a more full-scale manner (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) is performed aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it will be possible to perform additional operations, etc.), this special effect pattern will function as an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and the player will be carefully restored in this way. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent production with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special production pattern so that it can be selected only when the player loses the prize in the big hit judgment. In addition, it is desirable that a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while" appears as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) and 222 (d), the timing tm11 arrives when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not terminated and is continued even after the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern is terminated. With such a configuration, the restriction that "even though an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the hold digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new symbol variation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next time) The time to start changing the design) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still being continued, it is determined that the specific movable ornament is still in an abnormal state (for example, it is not located in the original position). Will be done. Then, based on the determination, if the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the content of the process is naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the specific movable decorative body. ..

In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 (b) and 222 (d), the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. When the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) arrives at a certain time, the restoration process in the execution state is not terminated and this is continued in a form that straddles the next restoration operation time. There is. According to such a configuration, no matter what the situation is when the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, "despite the fact that an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration". Since the restriction that "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol changes are performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more full-scale manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 222 (c) and 222 (d), the new symbol variation is started as a result of the start of the new symbol variation while the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is being executed. As a result, "a specific effect pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" may appear. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 222 (a) to 222 (c), it is started from the timing tm11 regardless of the game and the production status (further, the restoration status, etc.) after the special production pattern is completed. With respect to the timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably). It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed). Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timing tm11 to tm12 (time required for digesting the special effect pattern), the specific movable time is relatively long until the time of timing tm12 to tx ends. It will be possible to continue the restoration process for the ornament.

If a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is completed, the effect is described. The restoration process is not completed within the new special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and the restoration process is straddled three or more times (effect pattern). One restoration process may be continued in a form (the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods).

In the example shown in FIG. 222, at the timing tx when the "process of causing the specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. It is assumed that it will be in a state. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be made recoverable, and it becomes possible to produce a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2.

On the other hand, despite the fact that one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation period (here, the next symbol change start time), a specific movable ornament is abnormal at timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the stopped state is maintained until the symbol variation is completed from the timing tx and the next restoration operation time is further reached. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to produce the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to preferably maintain the effectability of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. When the specific effect pattern is based on the jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot symbol is stopped even though the specific movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the specific timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. You will be able to do it.

In a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, the specific movable decorative body is specified each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) comes. If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is irreparably damaged, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored, but the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game will decline as the restoration process for the body is repeated. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit after the specific movable decoration is put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) reaches the predetermined upper limit). However, when it has not been restored from the abnormal state, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for a specific movable ornament even if a new restoration operation time comes after that.

However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the above predetermined upper limit number of times. , When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their One restoration process may be continued in a form straddling the next production pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is put into the abnormal state, the restoration operation time has reached a predetermined upper limit number, but the restoration operation has not been performed from the abnormal state. Even when the "+1" th restoration operation time arrives, the restoration process for a specific movable ornament is continued without being completed. In this way, with respect to the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation period, the predetermined upper limit number may be reached no matter how many times the restoration operation period arrives while the one restoration operation is continued. It is desirable that the count is treated as one restoration process so that the restoration process is not completed so that the restoration process in a more full-scale manner is not hindered.

By the way, regarding such a restoration process (a restoration process performed based on a restoration operation time corresponding to a symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100 or a back) provided on the game board 5 side is provided. In addition to the medium movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (sudare), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. NS. However, among the frame-side movable decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorative bodies (for example, the operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, the sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that are also used as the operating means are , It is possible to restore (return) in a manner different from the case of the specific movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) described above.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol is changed, the operation opportunity granting effect for granting the operation opportunity to the sword decoration body 5001 is executed. An operation pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 209) is prepared. And, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "a process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 209 (f))". "Process to generate the production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 209 (f))", and "display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period". ) (See FIG. 209 (f)) ”is performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decoration body 5001 that has been moved to the operation position is operated (here, a pushing operation) and the production is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (sudare accessory)" is received based on the production reception. ) And the process of producing a movable decorative body on the board side (see FIG. 209 (g)) and the process of causing a change in the displayed contents (see FIG. 209 (g)). Become. The board-side movable decorative body that is produced by this process may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222.

However, among such operation opportunity granting effects, the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" is not executed normally when the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state. While it is possible to execute when it is in the state, the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state for the "process to generate the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001" and the "process to display the operation prompting". It is made feasible at both a certain time and an abnormal state. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword decoration body 5001 and receives the effect, the effect is received. "Processing for producing a movable decorative body on the board side such as a specific decorative member SDY (sudare)" and "processing for causing a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. Not only that, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration body 5001 receives an external force by such an operation by the player and the operation part operates, so that the abnormal state is obtained. Can occur in some cases.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 provided so as to be movable, a sword decorative body 5001 or the like) that is also used as an operating means). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222, a return process for imparting a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position when the frame side becomes an abnormal state. Restoration processing) is performed at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the operation by the player in the production pattern of the movable operation system". Each is feasible.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable body can be moved by aiming at the timing at the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or stop). While the process of returning the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing at the start and stop of the symbol change, but also a different unique timing (during the change period). Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation) is aimed at the timing when an external force (operation by the player) is applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved). Since the process of restoring (restoring) the means) will be performed, it is expected that the return to the original position of the frame-side movable decoration (operating means) in an abnormal state can be realized at an early stage. ..

FIG. 223 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration body 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration body (operating means). be.

As shown in FIG. 223, the effect pattern of the movable operation system (the effect pattern in which the operation opportunity granting effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the period when the design is changed) is executed. It is assumed that the "process of moving the sword decoration body 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the operation position, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration body 5001" and "a display prompting the operation (character display such as" push "and the effect reception period". If the sword decoration body 5001 is operated by the player and the production is accepted (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time of the sword is being executed, "specific decoration member SDY (sudare), etc." The "process of causing the effect operation of the movable decorative body on the board side" and the "process of causing a change in the display contents of the effect display device 1600" are performed, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 223, the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 221 and 222 is operated as the board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 223, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the production reception is received, and the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be returned to the original position. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and this cannot be returned to the original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 and a determination that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration body, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration body. Regarding the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the specific notification sound and display are accompanied by the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable that at least one of the notifications be made. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is notified that this has become an abnormal state, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be done by the player, the specific movable ornament is "placed out of reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because, as a player, nothing can be helped by notifying the player, and simply emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed may promote a decline in the interest of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 223, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body while performing the "process for producing and operating the specific movable decorative body" based on the fact that the effect is received at the timing tm22. Although it will occur, by allowing this to be executed as usual for the "process that causes a change in the display content of the effect display device 1600", it is recognized that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced while the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both in an abnormal state, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 223, at the timing tm23, the symbol fluctuation already in the pending state is immediately digested (started) (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new symbol is started. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 221 is executed as the effect pattern according to the fluctuation. That is, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation, but the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the symbol variation). The timing tx at which the "process of causing a specific movable ornament to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed, which is started in (), is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration status). As described above, it is finished by (until the predetermined production is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, the sword decoration body 5001 is also "specifically movable" based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (here, when the symbol change starts). It is possible to execute a process of causing the decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation and at least a part of the operations in parallel so as to return the decorative body to the original position (giving a driving force). Moreover, the timing at which such a "process for causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is also the same, regardless of the restoration situation, within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect). It is made to end by (until it starts).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable ornament is resolved and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed at the timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword ornament 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of excitement when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 223, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament body is started / ended and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament body 5001 is started / ended are the same. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or all of those timings may be different.

Further, regarding the "process of causing a specific movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation", as described with reference to FIG. 222, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only can it be continued after the special effect pattern ends, but also the symbol fluctuations that are on hold after the special effect pattern ends are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds later) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) can be continued without being completed. It is desirable that the process of causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can be performed in the same manner as this (the mode described with reference to FIG. 222). That is, in this case, also for the "process of causing the sword decoration body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation", when a special effect pattern appears, the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol change start time) is straddled. It will be executed in the form, but it should be terminated regardless of the restoration situation between the start of the next symbol change and the elapse of the time required for the timing tm2 to arrive. Become.

In addition, after the sword decoration body 5001 is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times, and then a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is executed. When a situation appears in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis is executed, the special effect pattern for a predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. Form The restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 may be continued.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 223, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in an abnormal state, and the specific production pattern is produced and advanced without performing the movable production by the specific movable decoration body. Therefore, the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm24.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, an external force (driving force by a motor or the like) is not applied to a specific movable decorative body within a period of timings tx to tm2 within a specific effect pattern. ) To return to the original position (return to the normal state), the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (without applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timing tx to tm2, which itself is an abnormal situation. In such an unreliable situation, even if a specific movable decorative body is used for the effect, there is a high possibility that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable to do so.

Further, when the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and the abnormal state is restored again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed. That is, if the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 fails and a notification is given each time the abnormal state is restored, it gives a misunderstanding as if the player is responsible for not eliminating the abnormal state. Since there is a possibility, the above-mentioned notification (at least one of the specific notification sound and the display notification) should be performed only when the first abnormality that changes from the normal state to the abnormal state occurs to encourage the player to perform the repair work. Is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 223, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are subjected to the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) that arrives after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decorative body recovers from the abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration body 5001 is in the abnormal state, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. 223, the sword decoration body 5001 that was in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 Assuming that the production is accepted by the operation by the player, it is possible to expect that the abnormality generated in the sword decoration body 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is subsequently used. It is possible to apply a driving force to return it to its original position (retain it in its original position). At this time, in view of the fact that the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is performed based on the effect reception, the period during which the process of applying the driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position is performed (once). (Period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable ornament is finished (the specific movable ornament is returned to the original position). It is desirable to end the process before it is executed in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that there is a rare chance that the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by such an external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of recovery, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed in its original position. If the process of applying the driving force to return to the sword decoration body (returning operation to the sword decoration body 5001) fails, the sword decoration body 5001 is used until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration body is completed. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (the return operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is executed again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage help. However, even if this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification is performed.

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 223, it is assumed that the return process (return to the original position) for the sword decoration body 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful, and after that, it is assumed. , The sword decoration body 5001 and the specific movable decoration body are both in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is produced and progressed, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 223, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is set with respect to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoration operation time (at the start of symbol fluctuation) to be performed, the restoration operation time (timing after the production is accepted) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as an operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, it is the original. Since a large number of opportunities for returning to the position are given and various modes (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, a mode of returning by using at least an external force) are used as the returning method, the abnormal state is eliminated. There is a high possibility that the game will be less enjoyable.

Regarding the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received for the production by the operation by the player, the symbol variation starts. A driving force may be applied to the sword decoration body 5001 with contents (different operation modes) different from the restoration process performed when the time (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the processing is to restore the sword decoration body 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is necessary to perform the processing differently from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing will be executed in a simple manner so that the restoration processing will be completed within the symbol fluctuation regardless of the restoration status, and if the restoration fails, it will be more serious at the next restoration operation time. It is desirable to ensure that the return processing is performed properly.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 223, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol fluctuation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration process for the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Nevertheless, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the symbol change start time) arrives, it is movable when the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is not newly started. Even when the production pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state at the timing tm25 is received by the operation by the player, the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed after the production reception is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (retain in the original position). That is, as described above, the return process after the production is accepted is performed when the possibility of return of the sword decoration body 5001 that could not be returned by an external force (operation by the player) is increasing. Therefore, even in the above-mentioned situation where the return without external force is given up, it is desirable to execute the process without giving up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 209 (f))" and "a display prompting an operation (a character display such as" push "and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period". It is important that the process of performing the display) (see FIG. 209 (f)) ”is also performed as usual even in the above-mentioned situation where the recovery without an external force is given up.

Further, when the sword decoration body 5001 is given a first operation opportunity so as to be pushed in while being positioned at the operation position (operate to a specific detection position), and when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to give a second operation opportunity so as to operate), even if a production reception occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in an abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, but the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation portion is relatively small, so it is expected that the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally low.

Further, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration body 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the operation by the player is not necessarily the production reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed. For example, it may be executed after the production reception period ends.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 219 to 223, the symbol change start time (further, the timing after receiving the production) is illustrated as the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol change, but the restoration operation time is described. , It may be a predetermined timing that arrives on condition that the symbol change is executed at least, and may be used as at least one of the symbol change start time and the symbol change stop time, for example. When the symbol fluctuation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU4100a side when the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and this start. The restored process is terminated before the timing tm2 in the specific effect pattern that has been held and digested arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the special effect pattern that has been reserved and digested. Each of the above-mentioned processes will be performed.

Further, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) may be different depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the movement frequency of the movable decorative body is increased occurs, an abnormal state is more likely to occur as the operation frequency is increased. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state is generated. It is desirable to enable the game so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is higher than that in the case of.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4150a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, a sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body, which is also used as an operating means, is in an abnormal state. When the above-mentioned special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is performed at a certain time, as shown in FIG. 222, the abnormality is observed for a period from the start of the effect pattern according to the next symbol variation. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable ornament in the state. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a symbol change start time) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed, the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is again performed. Since it is not started and the restoration process that is already in the execution state is continued without being terminated, it is movable different from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is when to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 222, the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 is a new restoration operation time (next) after the arrival of the timing tm12 at which the special effect pattern ends. It is designed to be continuously executed without ending even when straddling (the start time of the symbol change). In this regard, a new abnormality has occurred in a movable decorative body other than the specific movable decorative body between the time when the timing tm11 elapses and the time when a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives. In the case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or "both method 1 and method 2" or "both method 1 and method 3" is adopted to perform restoration processing on the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to execute.

Method 1: Specify at least when there is a relationship such as "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, whereas the other movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body". When a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable ornament is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) ) Has arrived, and a new restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is started.

According to such method 1, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable ornament that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed, and the other movable decoration will be triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation appears in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are executed at the same time. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of the movable ornaments is expected.

Method 2: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and a specific restoration process is performed. After waiting for one restoration process for the movable decoration to be completed, another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for the body) is newly started.

According to such method 2, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is treated as invalid for the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. It will be treated as effective for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) for which the restoration process has not yet been executed. In this regard, when starting the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body), we waited for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decorative body. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early return of these movable ornaments is expected.

Method 3: If there is at least a relationship such as "a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations", one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change) arrives during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (start time of the next symbol change). The restoration process for a specific movable decoration is not executed, but another movable decoration (frame side movable) is triggered by the restoration operation time that arrives after waiting for the restoration processing for a specific movable decoration to be completed. The restoration process for the ornament) is newly started.

According to such method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol change) is the restoration process for a specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for, and unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration, the said No processing will be executed for the abnormal state. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes an abnormal state while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is in the execution state, the movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to take sufficient measures against abnormalities, and it is expected that the rate of deterioration of these movable decorative bodies will be suppressed.

(Operation button operation check period)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU4100a), it is possible to operate by driving the operation button 410 and the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword decoration body 5001) as an effect according to the design game by the main control MPU4100a. As described above, it has become possible to perform an operation-time effect (such as an effect that suggests the degree of expectation for granting benefits by driving as well as operation) using various drive-type operation means. However, although it is possible to execute such an operation effect, if some abnormality occurs in these operation means and various operation means cannot operate normally, the player can experience the operation effect in the manner intended by the designer. There is a concern that it will be difficult to make it, and as a result, it will lead to a decline in the interest in the game. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, as a part of maintenance related to whether or not the effect during operation can be executed, an operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period) described later is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is confirmed that the player can experience the operation-time effect of the mode intended by the designer, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Specifically, the operation confirmation period during which the operation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 can be confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 224. Hereinafter, for convenience, the operation confirmation of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described, but the same operation confirmation period may be provided for the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000. The operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration body 5001 may be generated in parallel or sequentially. Further, in order to realize more reliable confirmation work for each member, no overlapping period is provided between the operation confirmation period for the operation button 410 and the operation confirmation period for the sword decoration body 5001 (avoid overlapping periods). It is preferable to generate them sequentially. FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period and automatic operation confirmation period).

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state, and the operation button 410 is projected in a predetermined state. If the operation to return to the normal state is not performed until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state. In such a case, the protrusion position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a push detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. By such detection of the pressure detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state and that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. In the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed or repeatedly hit according to the instruction to press the operation button 410. Operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. On the other hand, in the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, for example, during the execution of the effect on the effect display device 1600, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state, and the protruding state is changed. By pressing the operation button 410 in the above to a normal state according to the instruction, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 224, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period of the operation confirmation period, the operator (player or hall) confirms the operation of whether or not the operation button 410 normally operates in a state of protruding from the normal state. It can be realized at the discretion of the administrator). Specifically, when the condition for generating the operation confirmation period described later is satisfied, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is started, and the operation button 410 is in a normal state for a predetermined time (10 seconds in this embodiment) which is the occurrence period. When the press detection status (operation detection status) is monitored and the press (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state is detected, the operation button 410 is projected based on the press detection (operation detection). Change to. On the other hand, even after the condition for generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period was satisfied (while generating the arbitrary operation confirmation period), the pressing (operation) of the operation button 410 in the normal state for a predetermined time was not detected. In that case, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated when the predetermined time elapses. According to this, for a player or a hall manager who wants to confirm whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated, the operation button 410 may be pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period, and by pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 may be pressed. It is possible to give confirmation that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operate, and to execute and provide the operation operation effect using the operation button 410 with peace of mind.

Then, when it is detected that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed and pressed to the normal state before the predetermined time elapses after the operation button 410 is pressed to bring it into the protruding state. To return to the normal state again, the arbitrary operation confirmation period ends after a lapse of a predetermined time. On the other hand, if the pressing of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not detected before the predetermined time elapses, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state by driving after the elapse of the predetermined time. It will be returned. After the arbitrary operation confirmation period is generated, the operation button 410 is pressed to make it in a protruding state, and when the operation button 410 is pressed again to return to the normal state, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is terminated. In such a case, it is possible to prevent an unnecessary time from occurring until a predetermined time elapses after confirming that the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated.

The above-mentioned operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) is generated when a predetermined generation condition is satisfied. In this example, the condition for generating the operation confirmation period is configured so that the condition for generating the demo effect is satisfied in order to avoid duplication with the effect during operation. Specifically, in the demo effect, there is no entry into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time after the effect set in the variable pattern is completed, and the effect set in the variable pattern is It is an effect of waiting for customers when it is not started (information on the progress of the symbol game by the main control MPU4100a is not received on the peripheral control MPU4150a side for a certain period of time), and is suitable for avoiding duplication with the operation operation effect. In this way, by using the execution time of the demo effect to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period in the confirmation operation period, the boring time that the effect set in the fluctuation pattern is not started can be set by the operation button 410. Can be changed to a meaningful confirmation time of whether or not is detected and operated normally.

The start of the demonstration effect is an instruction by the main control MPU4100a (for example, the demonstration effect) when the ball does not enter the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 for a certain period of time while the symbol game is not in progress. The start command) may be transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a side, and the confirmation operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period) may be generated on the peripheral control MPU4150a side by receiving the transmission. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, an instruction by the main control MPU4100a (for example, a demo production start command) is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU4150a side, and by receiving the instruction, the peripheral control MPU4150a side confirms the operation period (arbitrary operation confirmation). Period) may be generated, thereby avoiding duplication with the effect during operation, and confirming whether or not the operation button 410 is normally detected and operated before the player starts the game. It is possible to execute and provide an operation-time effect using the operation button 410 with greater peace of mind.

Further, LEDs (each LED of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button) are mounted on the operation button 410, and whether or not an arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and the progress stage of the arbitrary operation confirmation period (arbitrary operation confirmation period). The light emitting mode is changed in a plurality of stages according to the state of the operation button 410 in the above. Specifically, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the LED of the operation button 410 is turned off. Then, when the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is set to a specific color (for example, red) and a predetermined amount of light (a light emission mode A for the confirmation period suggesting that the arbitrary operation is possible). ) To emit light. As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the arbitrary operation confirmation period has occurred and that the operation button 410 is requested to be pressed. Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed to make it protrude after the arbitrary operation confirmation period occurs, the LED of the operation button 410 is the same color as the case where the operation button 410 is not pressed even once. However, the light is emitted in a mode in which the amount of light is increased by one step (light emission mode B for a confirmation period suggesting that an arbitrary operation is in progress). As a result, even after the operation button 410 is pressed to bring it into a protruding state, it is possible to notify the outside that the operation button 410 is further requested to be pressed. After that, when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state by pressing the operation button 410, the LED of the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are pressed even once until at least the remaining arbitrary operation confirmation period (predetermined time) elapses. Although the color is the same as when the button is not pressed, the light emission mode is a mode in which the amount of light is weaker than the above-mentioned light emission modes A and B for the confirmation period (light emission mode C for the confirmation period suggesting that the arbitrary operation has been completed). As a result, it is possible to notify the outside that the confirmation work in the arbitrary operation confirmation period has been normally performed. Even when the arbitrary operation confirmation period has not occurred, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode. For example, the operation button 410 may be made to emit light in a mode different from any of the light emitting modes A to C for the operation confirmation period. Such things can be exemplified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 224, after a predetermined waiting period elapses after the arbitrary operation confirmation period ends, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing, and the operation button 410 is in the normal position. There is an automatic operation confirmation period for confirming the origin so that it is located at. In the automatic operation confirmation period, first, the operation button 410 is operated so as to move up and down several times near the normal state, and the normal position sensor is used so that the operation button 410 in the normal state can be detected as being in the normal position. Checking the origin. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is set to a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is operated so as to return to the normal state from the protruding state. At this time, by detecting that the operation button 410 is in the normal state by the normal position sensor, it is possible to grasp that the operation button 410 is operating in the normal position. According to this, it is possible to ensure that the operation button 410 operates at a normal position, and it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from being displaced when the effect is executed using the operation button 410.

Further, the arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to be longer than the automatic operation confirmation period. Specifically, while the arbitrary operation confirmation period is set to a predetermined time of "10 seconds" as described above, the automatic operation confirmation period is a short time of "5 seconds" as the time required for a series of operations. Is set. In the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 operates regardless of the player's pressing to confirm the origin, in other words, the operation confirmation of the drive system proceeds automatically. On the other hand, in the arbitrary operation confirmation period, if the player does not press the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 does not change to the protruding state, and if the player does not press the button in the protruding state, The protruding state is maintained until the arbitrary operation confirmation period elapses. Therefore, by making the arbitrary operation confirmation period longer than the automatic operation period, the operation button 410 is not missed, and the appearance of the operation button 410 in the protruding state is changed by driving. While it is possible to have the player and the hall manager carefully check for a long period of time in the absence of such a situation, it is possible to quickly end the operation check (automatic operation period) of the drive system, which does not require such a long-term check. It is possible, and the efficiency of a series of confirmation work of the driven operation means can be improved.

In the waiting period between the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the automatic operation confirmation period, the frame side lens 417 or the second frame side lens 417 provided on the periphery of the operation button 410 is operated by the operation of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. A peripheral confirmation period is provided in which it is possible to confirm whether or not the button decoration portion 411b (LEDs of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423) is turned on. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided on the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 as described above, and the player's operation can be accepted at the time of presenting the effect. Further, in the peripheral confirmation period, when any of the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 is pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are lit. Depending on the situation, the mode in which the frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b are lit (for example, the mode of light emission such as brightness and color) is different. Therefore, in the peripheral confirmation period, by pressing the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to confirm whether or not the pressing is normally recognized, and the frame side lens 417 and the first It is possible to confirm whether or not the two-button decoration part 411b lights up normally, and the drive-type operation means itself is confirmed by a series of operation confirmation periods (arbitrary operation confirmation period, peripheral confirmation period, automatic operation confirmation period). Not only that, it is also possible to check the related members around it.

Further, if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period and the state is not projected, the peripheral confirmation period may not be provided after that. In such a case, even if the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are pressed, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b do not light up, and the series of operation confirmation periods is shortened. It becomes.

Further, prior to the series of operation check periods, a vibration check period is provided in which it is possible to check the vibration of whether or not the vibration motor 424 provided in the effect operation unit 400 is operated by operating the operation button 410. There is. In the vibration confirmation period, when the operation button 410 is pressed, the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates. Therefore, during the vibration confirmation period, by pressing the operation button 410, it is possible to confirm whether or not the vibration motor 424 operates and the effect operation unit 400 vibrates normally. In addition, by generating a series of operation confirmation periods at a time that does not overlap with the vibration confirmation period, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the series of operation confirmation periods from being hindered by the vibration of the vibration confirmation period, and various confirmation operations can be performed efficiently. realizable.

Further, when the predetermined protrusion start condition that is satisfied in the progress process of the symbol game is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state, but due to some abnormality, the operation button 410 is moved by the normal position sensor. The operation button 410 may not be in the normal position because it has not been detected as a normal state. The cause is, for example, when a problem occurs when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state when a predetermined protrusion end condition is satisfied, or the player does not intentionally return the operation button 410 to the normal state. It is possible that this is the case. In such a case, it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 225 (A), except for a series of operation confirmation periods, a special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game at the start of fluctuation (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) and a special corresponding to the end of the symbol game. Whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the end of the fluctuation of the symbol (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern) and at the timing of the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods). If it is determined whether or not (whether or not it is in the normal position) and it is determined that the state is abnormally protruding (not in the normal position), control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Demonstration. According to this, even when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state at a timing unrelated to the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern. It prevents the misunderstanding that the operation button 410 may have been operated as a part of the production based on the above. Further, even if an effect using the operation button 410 is performed after the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state, it is guaranteed that the operation button 410 operates normally, and the effect is lowered. It prevents you from doing so.

If it is set to generate an arbitrary operation confirmation period in the confirmation operation period by using the execution time of the demo production as described above, the operation button 410 is abnormal when the demo production is started. When the operation button 410 is in a protruding state and control for returning the operation button 410 to a normal state (control for returning to a normal position) is performed, the start of a series of operation check periods may be delayed. For example, if the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state at the start timing of the demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the operation confirmation period is even at the start timing of the series of operation confirmation periods. When the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (control to return to the normal position) is given priority, and the operation button 410 returns to the normal state (when the operation button 410 returns to the normal position). Based on this, the entire series of operation check periods may be delayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 225 (B), in the series of operation confirmation periods, it corresponds to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) and the end of the symbol game. At the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), it is not determined whether the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether it is not in the normal position), and it is abnormal. Even in the case of the protruding state (not the normal position), the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed at that time. This is to give priority to the operation confirmation as to whether or not the operation button 410 is pressed during the arbitrary operation confirmation period to be in a protruding state, and the operation button arbitrarily generated during the arbitrary operation confirmation period is given priority. This is to maintain the protruding state of 410 so as not to be terminated by the progress of the symbol game. In this way, when the operation button 410 is abnormally projected during the operation confirmation period, the operation is performed at the end of the operation confirmation period, as in the case where the player presses and protrudes. Control is performed to return the button 410. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state before the predetermined period as the operation check period elapses, the abnormality does not have to wait for the predetermined period to elapse. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is returned to the normal state.

(Abnormality detection of sword decoration)
Next, although the sword blade portion 5011 (see FIGS. 146 to 149) of the sword decoration body 5001 in the above-mentioned sword effect operation unit 5000 should be in the sword-delivered state, an abnormality when the sword is not in the sword-delivered state. The detection will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the sword decoration body 5001 and the abnormality detection.

The sword decoration body 5001 can be changed into a sword-delivered state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is housed and a sword-drawn state in which the sword blade portion 5011 is exposed (second sword-drawn state). In the above-mentioned production example, a state between the sword delivery state and the sword withdrawal state (first sword withdrawal state) was used as the production using the sword decoration body 5001, but in this example, such a state is used. It will not be used. The sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a sword delivery position sensor capable of detecting that the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state and a sword extraction position sensor capable of detecting that the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state. ing. Further, the sword decoration body 5001 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the sword blade portion 5011 from the sword-drawn state to the sword-delivered state. In this example, the sword-delivered state corresponds to an operable state in which the player can pull out the blade portion 5011, and the sword-drawn state corresponds to an inoperable state in which the player cannot pull out the blade portion 5011. ..

Further, as an effect set in the variable pattern, an effect using the sword decoration body 5011 is set. As shown in FIG. 226 (A), in the production using the sword decoration body 5001, an operation acceptance period in which the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword-delivered state can be pulled out is generated within the production time. During the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 in the sword-delivered state is put into the sword-drawn state according to the instruction in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, the display of "sword-pulling"), so that the predetermined effect result can be obtained. Obtainable. Then, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001 and puts the sword blade portion 5011 in the sword-drawn state within the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword-delivered state is performed at the end of the production time. Will be done. Further, if the player does not pull out the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period and the sword blade portion 5011 is left in the sword delivery state, the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state at the end of the operation acceptance period. To hold. It should be noted that the production using the sword decoration body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the production using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state among the productions using the operation buttons 410 described above. There is. That is, when the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is performed, the sword decoration body 5001 can be pulled out with higher expectation than when the operation button 410 in the normal state is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 226 (B), the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword-delivered state except during the operation acceptance period, but the period other than the operation acceptance period when the sword is not in the sword-delivered state is a predetermined period (in this example). When it is determined that the sword decoration body 5001 has reached an abnormality (2 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed. That is, it is possible to determine that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 when the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword withdrawal state or between the sword withdrawal state and the sword delivery state other than the operation acceptance period. It has become. In this example, from the time when the detection state of the above-mentioned sword delivery position sensor is in the OFF state (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword delivery state), the above-mentioned predetermined period (the sword delivery state other than the operation acceptance period) The measurement is to be started for a period that is not.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), during the operation acceptance period, the blade portion 5011 should be in the sword-delivered state unless the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001. When it is determined that the predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) has been reached, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001, and the sword restoration control for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed. Will be done. That is, during the operation acceptance period, when the player pulls out the sword decoration body 5001, the sword blade portion 5011 is located in the sword pulling state. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in 5001, and in this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is operated so that the detection state of the sword delivery position sensor is ON (the state in which the blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state). .. In this example, the processing time of one cycle for returning the blade portion 5011 to the sword-delivered state by the sword-delivered restoration control is set to "0.5 seconds".

Further, the operation acceptance period is set to be longer than the time until it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 (4 seconds in this example). During the operation reception period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed, but the operation reception is performed after returning to the sword delivery state. The remaining period of the period is likely to occur, and in the remaining period, the player can pull out the sword ornament 5001. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pulling out the sword decoration body 5001 from being hindered.

As described above, the determination of whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position) is determined at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). At the start of the production), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the timing of the start of the demo production described above. That is, during the operation acceptance period of the operation button 410 in which the operation button 410 can be pressed, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position). Not. On the other hand, it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001 even during the operation acceptance period in which the sword decoration body 5001 can be pulled out. Therefore, even if an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player cannot pull out the sword decoration body 5001 as much as possible. Further, the production using the sword decoration body 5001 has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the production using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state among the productions using the operation buttons 410. , It is possible to prevent overlooking the production result in such a highly expected production.

In this example, the period during which the blade portion 5011 is not in the sword-delivered state reaches a predetermined period (2 seconds in this example) except when the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001 within the operation acceptance period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, but only when the blade part 5011 is not in the sword delivery state at the start of the operation acceptance period, the abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. You may decide. For example, the blade portion 5011 is in the sword delivery state at the start of the operation acceptance period, and after the start of the operation acceptance period, it is not known whether the player should completely remove the sword ornament 5001, and the blade portion 5011 is removed. There is a possibility that the sword is left in a state between the state and the sword delivery state for a predetermined period, but in such a case, it is possible to prevent it from being determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001. ..

Further, when giving an instruction in the display area of the effect display device 1600 or the like regarding the removal of the sword of the sword decoration body 5001, the instruction is continuously executed regardless of the occurrence or elimination of the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 within the operation acceptance period. You may do so. For example, during the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration body 5001, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state is performed, but the "sword restoration control is completed". The instruction in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the like is continued even in "until the process" and "the remaining period of the operation acceptance period after the blade portion 5011 is returned to the sword delivery state". In addition, if the player pulls out the sword ornament 5001 in accordance with the instruction "until the sword restoration control is completed", the sword blade portion 5011 is in the sword-drawing state, and the sword is restored. The control is forcibly terminated and the instruction is terminated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of participation in the effect of pulling out the sword decoration body 5001 from being hindered by the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001.

Further, in this example, although the sword restoration control is performed to return the sword blade 5011 to the sword-delivered state, it is possible that the sword blade 5011 cannot be returned to the sword-delivered state due to a foreign object being caught. In this case, one cycle of sword restoration control, which should be completed in "0.5 seconds", may be repeated for a plurality of cycles (for example, 10 cycles). In this case, the sword restoration control for returning the sword blade portion 5011 to the sword delivery state will continue beyond the operation acceptance period, but in such a case, the operation is performed while the sword restoration control is being performed. The result effect may be derived at the end of the reception period, and the sword restoration control may be continued even after the result effect is derived. As a result, even in a situation where the abnormality of the sword decoration body 5001 cannot be resolved, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the game entertainment will be deteriorated without hindering the progress of the production.

(Abnormality judgment timing of operation buttons)
Next, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a time chart showing the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body provided on the operation button 410 and the game board 5. In this example, the abnormality determination timing of the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player will be described in comparison with the abnormality determination timing of the movable decorative body that the player cannot operate.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is in a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And, it is possible to change to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 227 (A), at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern). At the timing of the start of the demo production described above), the operation button 410 should be positioned in the normal state without satisfying the predetermined protrusion start condition. It is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (whether or not it is in the normal position), and when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state (not in the normal position), the operation button 410 is determined. Is controlled to return to the normal state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, it is returned to the normal state at least when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, an effect using the operation button 410 is performed as an effect based on the fluctuation pattern. It is possible to prevent the participation in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 from being hindered when the operation button 410 is pressed.

In the game board 5, around the effect display device 1600, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable production A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) that stands by around the effect display device 1600 and a display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to change to the operating state (display position) that appears on the front of. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the movable decorative body is not included in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A standby position sensor that can detect that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is not operating in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operation state and the operation state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 227 (B), at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (variation pattern). (At the end of the production based on When it is judged whether or not the movable decorative body is in the non-operating state (whether or not it is in the normal position) and it is judged that it is not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position), it is said that an abnormality has occurred. Control is performed to determine and return the movable ornament to the non-operating state. In this way, when the movable decorative body is not in the non-operating state due to the occurrence of an abnormality, it is returned to the non-operating state at least when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. When this is performed, the movable decorative body does not move, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the production from being lost. Further, if the movable decorative body remains positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 due to the occurrence of an abnormality during the execution of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the visibility of the display area is hindered. , At least by returning to the non-operating state at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be touched by the player, and the player can hinder the change to the normal state or the protruding state at the timing of controlling the state, whereas the movable decorative body is a movable decorative body. It is a member that the player cannot touch, and the player cannot hinder the change to the non-operating state or the operating state at the timing of controlling the operating state. Therefore, the operation button 410 is more likely to be abnormal than the movable decorative body. In this respect, the operation button 410 has more chances of abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body, so that even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it can be performed at an early stage. It is possible to return to the normal position. Therefore, although there is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur in the operation button 410, participation in the production of pressing the operation button 410 when the production using the operation button 410 is performed as the production based on the fluctuation pattern is performed. It can be prevented from being hindered.

Further, as the effect set in the variable pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and an effect using the movable decorative body are performed. However, the effect using the operation button 410 has a higher appearance rate than the effect using the movable decorative body. For this reason, the operation button 410 tends to be used more frequently than the movable decorative body. For example, the operation button 410 may have a problem at the timing of controlling the operation button 410 to a normal state or a protruding state. There is a high possibility that an abnormality will occur. However, as described above, the operation button 410 has more opportunities for abnormality determination to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred than the movable decorative body. Therefore, although the operation button 410 is frequently used, when the operation button 410 is used as the effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the participation in the effect is hindered by the occurrence of an abnormality. Can be prevented.

(Abnormal occurrence of operation buttons during operation production)
Next, an operation-time effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. FIG. 228 is a time chart showing the operation state of the operation button 410 in the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, and FIG. 229 is the operation time effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. It is a time chart which shows the operation state of the operation button 410 in.

As described above, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. The effect operation unit 400 also has a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state, and the operation button 410 is projected in a predetermined state. If the operation to return to the normal state is not performed until the end condition is satisfied (until the predetermined time elapses after the predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied), the operation button 410 is normally operated by the drive mechanism. It will be returned to the state.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. That is, if the predetermined protrusion start condition is not satisfied, the operation button 410 should be in the normal state. In such a case, the normal position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in the normal state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position. On the other hand, when a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied, the operation button 410 should be positioned in a protruding state. In such a case, the protrusion position sensor indicates that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. By detecting, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal position.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a push detection sensor 440 capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is pressed. By such detection of the pressure detection sensor 440, it can be determined that the operation button 410 is pressed in the normal state and that the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state. ..

Further, as the effect set in the variation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state and an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state are provided. It should be noted that the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state has a higher expectation (big hit expectation) than the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state. That is, when the operation button 410 is in a protruding state, the operation button 410 can be pressed with higher expectation than in the normal state.

First, when executing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated. At the start, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether or not it is in the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 228 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button in the normal state is in the normal state. Change 410 to a protruding state. Further, during the operation acceptance period, as the instruction effect A at the time of the projecting operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the projecting state, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, in the projecting state). A combination of a display that imitates a certain operation button 410, a message display of "press the protruding operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, the voice of "press the protruding operation button!") It is done.

In the above-mentioned operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. As described above, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Will be done. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect A at the time of the protruding operation described above may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 228 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation is performed during the operation acceptance period at the same timing as when the abnormality has not occurred. The instruction effect B at the time of this protrusion operation informs the player that the position is equivalent to that of the normal protrusion although it is an abnormal protrusion. For example, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, , A display that imitates the operation button 410 in a protruding state, a message display such as "This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying about it!"), And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, "" This is a real protrusion! Press the operation button without worrying about it! ”) Is combined. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation of changing the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state is not performed, so that the operation is changed to the normal state. It is not possible to recognize whether an effect using a certain operation button 410 or an effect using a protruding operation button 410 is being performed, and further, an operation in a protruding state. There is a risk that the player may hesitate to operate the button 410. However, since the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the instruction effect B at the time of the protrusion operation are performed by the sound from the speaker, the operation button 410 which is at least in a protruding state from the display and the sound is used. It is possible to recognize that the production is being performed. That is, even when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the confirmation of the degree of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 from being hindered. It should be noted that the instruction effects A and B at the time of the protrusion operation are not limited to those composed of different production contents as described above, and the player is informed that the instruction effects A and B are in the same position as the normal protrusions although they are abnormal protrusions. If this is possible, the instruction effects A and B may be configured with the same effect content.

Further, when executing an effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. If the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is not pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed at the end of the operation reception period. Control is performed to return to the state. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect B at the time of the protruding operation described above may be terminated.

Next, when executing the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation acceptance period in which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed is generated, and the operation acceptance period is generated. At the start of, it is determined whether or not the operation button 410 is in the normal state, that is, whether or not it is in the normal position. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (A), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state (normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is in the normal state. To maintain. Further, during the operation acceptance period, as the instruction effect C at the time of normal operation instructing to operate the operation button 410 in the normal state, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, in the normal state). A display that imitates a certain operation button 410, a message display of "press the operation button!", Etc.) and a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, a voice of "press the operation button!") Are combined. Further, during the operation acceptance period, by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect C at the time of the normal operation described above may be terminated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), when it is determined that the operation button 410 is not in the normal state (not in the normal position) at the start of the operation acceptance period, an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. It is determined that the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. Further, even when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, the above-mentioned instruction effect D at the time of normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period at the same timing as when no abnormality has occurred. The instruction effect D for normal operation informs the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the normal protrusion, and for example, an instruction by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, A display that imitates the operation button 410 in the normal state, a message display "This protrusion is irrelevant, but press the operation button!", And a voice instruction from the speaker (for example, "This protrusion is irrelevant but operation (Press the button! ”, Etc.) are combined. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, an unnatural situation occurs in which the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state. By performing the instruction effect during the normal operation by the voice from the speaker, it is possible to recognize from the display and the sound that the effect using at least the operation button 410 in the normal state is performed. Further, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the instruction effect D at the time of the normal operation described above may be terminated. It should be noted that the instruction effects C and D during normal operation are not limited to those composed of different effect contents as described above, and it is possible to inform the player that the current protrusion is not in the same position as the normal protrusion. If this is the case, the instruction effects C and D during normal operation may be configured with the same effect content.

Further, when executing an effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state. By doing so, the pressing (operation) is detected and a predetermined effect result can be derived. However, unlike the time when the effect using the protruding operation button 410 is executed, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation is performed. The button 410 is not locked by the locking mechanism, and its abnormally protruding state is maintained. Further, even at the end of the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

As described above, when an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410, when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed within the operation acceptance period. When pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returned to the normal state. On the other hand, when the effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period. It is not locked by the mechanism and its abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, is the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state performed from the appearance of the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state? , It is not possible to recognize whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is being performed, but it will eventually return to the normal state when the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed. It is possible to recognize whether or not the production of is being performed.

In addition, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the operation button 410 in an abnormally protruding state other than the operation reception period is used in the same manner as the operation reception period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism, and the abnormally protruding state is maintained. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), the symbol game At the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end (at the end of the effect based on the variation pattern), the operation button 410 is controlled to return to the normal state at the timing of the start of the demo effect described above.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the above-mentioned instruction effect during the normal operation is performed during the operation acceptance period when the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state is executed. However, it is possible not to perform such an instruction effect at the time of normal operation. This is because the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state has a lower expectation than the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, so that the instruction effect during the normal operation is performed. This is because even if the degree of expectation for the production cannot be confirmed by not being able to do so, the player hardly suffers any disadvantage.

Further, in this example, when the operation button 410 is abnormally generated, the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is in the normal state during the operation acceptance period when the effect using the protruding operation button 410 is executed. When pressed to, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state. However, even if the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism. It may be prevented from being locked by the device and the abnormally protruding state may be maintained. That is, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410, the abnormal protrusion is performed regardless of whether the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state or the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state is performed. When the operation button 410 in the pressed state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 may not return to the normal state. This is because the operation button 410 has an abnormality, such as when the player intentionally prevents the operation button 410 from returning to the normal state when the operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. However, until the control timing for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state arrives, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, so that such an actor can be treated. It can call attention.

(Notification when an abnormality occurs in the operation button)
Next, a notification mode performed when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button 410 and the notification mode when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410.

The operation button 410 is a member that can be operated (touched) by the player, and is in a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. ) And, it is possible to change to. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 230 (A), when an effect is executed using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation acceptance period is generated in which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed. However, at the start of the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. Then, when the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, the normal state is restored. Dont return. In such a case, the operation button 410 is abnormally projected, but at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state. Even if the protruding operation button 410 is not pressed to the normal state within the operation reception period, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation reception period. Will be done.

Further, even if the operation button 410 is not locked to the lock mechanism due to some abnormality even though the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed at the end of the operation acceptance period, the normal operation button 410 is also performed. It does not return to the state. In this way, when the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state after the end of the operation acceptance period, as will be described later, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). Timing at the start of the production), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods) Then, the control for returning the operation button 410 to the normal state is performed again.

As described above, if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is repeated after the end of the operation acceptance period. Will be done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not performed as described later. That is, during the operation acceptance period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 due to the operation of the operation button 410, and there is a high possibility that the player has not intentionally operated the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 has an abnormality. We are trying to eliminate the abnormality of the operation button 410 without making what has occurred noticeable.

On the other hand, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 other than the operation reception period, the response is different from the case where the operation button 410 has an abnormality in the operation reception period. For example, in addition to the operation acceptance period, when the above-mentioned demo effect is executed, the above-mentioned automatic operation confirmation period is also provided, and during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is operated regardless of the player's pressing. , The origin is confirmed so that the operation button 410 is located at the normal position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 230 (B), during the automatic operation confirmation period, the operation button 410 is first operated so as to move up and down several times in the vicinity of the normal state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is moved. The origin is confirmed by the normal position sensor so that it can be detected as being in the normal position. Then, after confirming the origin, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state, and the operation button 410 is locked to the lock mechanism by operating so as to return from the protruding state to the normal state.

However, if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is operated to return to the normal state within the automatic operation confirmation period, but the operation button 410 is not locked by the lock mechanism due to some abnormality, It does not return to the normal state. In such a case, the operation button 410 is in an abnormally protruding state, and unless the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state returns to the normal state, the abnormally protruding operation button 410 is returned to the normal state. Control is repeated. Then, when the control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is performed a plurality of times (five times in this example), if the operation button 410 does not return to the normal state, The automatic operation confirmation period ends, and after the automatic operation confirmation period ends, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state is not performed. That is, even if an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period and the abnormality continues after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period, the symbol is as in the case after the end of the operation acceptance period described above. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the game (at the start of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), the demonstration effect At the start timing (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), control for returning the operation button 410 in the abnormally protruding state to the normal state is not performed.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. Specifically, notification by display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (for example, display of "an abnormality has occurred in the operation button") or notification by blinking of the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4. (For example, the lamp / LED blinks more violently than in the normal production) to appeal to the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410.

As described above, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, control for returning the abnormally protruding operation button 410 to the normal state after the end of the automatic operation confirmation period is performed. Not done. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the automatic operation confirmation period, an effect of notifying that the abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is performed. That is, other than the operation confirmation period, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred due to the player operating the operation button 410 even though the operation of the operation button 410 is not required as in the automatic operation confirmation period. Since there is a high possibility that the player is intentional, the operation button 410 is left with a trace that an abnormally protruding state has occurred, and attention is given to such an actor.

In this example, when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying the occurrence of the abnormality in the operation button 410 is not performed, but such an effect is to be performed. It may be. However, in such a case, it is preferable to suppress the degree of appealing to the outside during the automatic operation confirmation period, rather than the effect of notifying when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410. As a result, even after the end of the operation acceptance period, the effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button 410 is not hindered, and the effect related to the progress of the game (the effect based on the fluctuation pattern) can be focused on. can.

(Confirmation effect when an abnormality occurs in a movable decorative body)
Next, a confirmation effect performed when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a time chart showing the flow of the effect when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body.

In the game board 5, around the effect display device 1600, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, and the back bottom front movable production A movable decorative body (see FIG. 60) such as the unit 3500 is provided. These movable decorative bodies are members that cannot be operated (touched) by the player, and are in a non-operating state (standby position) that stands by around the effect display device 1600 and a display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to change to the operating state (display position) that appears on the front of. Further, these movable decorative bodies change from a non-operating state to an operating state when a predetermined operation start condition is satisfied.

In addition, the movable decorative body is not included in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A standby position sensor that can detect that it is in an operating state is provided. In addition, the movable decorative body is not operating in the back lower rear movable production unit 3100, the back upper left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back upper middle movable production unit 3400, and the back lower front movable production unit 3500. A drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for operating between the operation state and the operation state is provided.

As shown in FIG. 231, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol corresponding to the end of the symbol game (based on the fluctuation pattern). (At the end of the production), at the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demo production (timing prior to the start of a series of operation confirmation periods), the predetermined operation start condition should not be satisfied and the movable decorative body should be located in the non-operation state. However, at those timings, it was determined whether or not the movable decorative body was in the non-operating state (whether or not it was in the normal position), and it was determined that it was not in the non-operating state (not in the normal position). In that case, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state.

However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, if the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state even though the control for returning the movable decorative body to the non-operating state is performed, the movable decorative body is movable. An effect is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the decorative body. Specifically, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the displayed contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image that have been displayed are changed to non-display. In addition, the lamp / LED provided on the main body frame 4 blinks violently. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, it is appealed to the outside that the abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body.

In addition, when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, in addition to the effect of notifying that the movable decorative body has an abnormality, it is confirmed whether or not the game proceeds in the state where the abnormality has occurred. A confirmation effect is performed. Specifically, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a display such as "Please press the operation button when ending the abnormality notification and continuing the game" is displayed. Then, unless the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, not only the movable decorative body does not operate, but also the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image are left hidden in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the main body is displayed. The lighting of the lamps / LEDs provided in the frame 4 and the sound from the speaker are prevented from being produced according to the display contents.

On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is pressed in the confirmation effect, an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. To end. Then, after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, there is no change in that the movable decorative body does not operate, but the display contents such as the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The effect of the display contents, such as lighting of the lamps / LEDs provided on the main body frame 4 and the sound from the speaker, will be performed. For example, when the effect of operating the movable decorative body is performed after pressing the operation button 410 in the confirmation effect, the display of the display area, the lamp, and the lamp are compared with the case where no abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body. Although there is no change in the lighting of the LED and the sound from the speaker, the movable decoration does not operate at the operation timing of the movable decoration. In this way, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, a confirmation effect is performed, and the game is advanced after recognizing that the movable decorative body does not operate when the effect using the movable decorative body is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the movable decorative body not operating. In addition, the same confirmation effect is performed not only when the movable decorative body in the operating state does not return to the non-operating state, but also when an abnormality such as the movable decorative body stops operating from the non-operating state occurs. It has been.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect that the movable decorative body can operate by pressing the operation button 410 is performed. However, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, the operation is performed during the operation acceptance period (the period during which the detection of the push detection sensor 440 becomes effective when the operation button 410 is pressed) in the effect using the operation button 410. Even if the button 410 is pressed, the movable decorative body does not operate from the non-operating state to the operating state. Even in such a case, the operation button 410 can be pressed by performing an effect of notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body and a confirmation effect of confirming whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed when the effect used is performed, it is possible to recognize that the movable decorative body does not operate.

In this example, as an effect using the operation button 410, an effect capable of deriving a predetermined effect result without operating the movable decorative body by pressing the operation button 410 is also performed. Even if an abnormality occurs in the movable decoration as described above, the display in the display area, the lighting of the lamp / LED, and the sound from the speaker are not affected, so that the movable decoration can operate. If there is no effect, the same effect as when no abnormality has occurred in the movable decorative body can be performed.

Further, in this example, when an abnormality occurs in the movable decorative body, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state, and when the movable decorative body does not return to the non-operating state, the movable decorative body There is an effect to notify that an abnormality has occurred in the game and a confirmation effect to confirm whether or not to proceed with the game in the state where the abnormality has occurred. You may try to produce a different effect. In such a case, after the start of the confirmation effect, control is performed to return the movable decorative body to the non-operating state. For example, if the movable decorative body returns to the non-operating state during the execution of the confirmation effect, the movable decorative body is returned to the non-operating state. The confirmation effect may be terminated even before the operation button 410 is pressed.

(Interference avoidance operation of multiple movable bodies)
Next, an interference avoidance operation when an abnormality occurs in one of a plurality of movable bodies that can interfere with each other will be described with reference to FIG. 232. FIG. 232 is a time chart showing the relationship between the operating state of the operation button cover 419 and the operating state of the operation button 410 during the operation acceptance period. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated. The case where it is possible will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to the exposed state and the open state. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. It has become. Specifically, the effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism, and in a normal state, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude, but a predetermined protrusion start condition is satisfied. At that time, the lock mechanism is unlocked, and the operation button 410 is projected by the spring mechanism. Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is projected, when the player pushes the operation button 410 until it reaches the position of the normal state, the operation button 410 is locked again by the lock mechanism and returns to the normal state.

The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

Further, as an effect set in the fluctuation pattern, an effect using the operation button 410 is set. As shown in FIG. 232 (A), in the effect using the operation button 410, an operation acceptance period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the effect time, and when the operation acceptance period occurs, The operation button cover 419 in the closed state is changed to the open state. Then, when it is determined that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, the operation button 410 in the normal state is changed to the protruding state. During the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state according to the instruction.

If the operation button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state within the operation acceptance period, the normal state is restored, but the operation button 410 in the protruding state is in the normal state. If the button is not pressed until, the operation button 410 is forcibly returned to the normal state at the end of the operation acceptance period. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

In this example, after the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is opened, the operation button 410 in the normal state is in a protruding state, and the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be pressed. However, when the operation button cover 419 is opened, a problem such as the operation button cover 419 stopping between the closed state and the open state may occur. That is, the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a relationship of interfering with each other if they operate at the same time. In such a case, if the operation button 410 is controlled to be in a protruding state without the operation button cover 419 being opened, the operation button 410 to be projected and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other, and the operation button Further problems may occur between the 410 and the operation button cover 419. Therefore, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened, control is performed to avoid the interference so that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 do not interfere with each other.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 232 (B), when the operation acceptance period occurs, the operation button cover 419 in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state, but when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control is performed. If it is determined that there is no such condition, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is not controlled to be in a protruding state (control to make the operation button 410 in a protruding state). Is prohibited). As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 from interfering with each other when the operation button cover 419 is not opened. Even if the operation button cover 419 is stopped between the closed state and the open state before the operation acceptance period occurs, unless the operation button cover 419 is in the open state when the operation acceptance period occurs. Does not control the operation button 410 in the normal state to be in the protruding state (the control to make the operation button 410 in the protruding state is prohibited).

Further, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger after that. , It is determined that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 has been resolved, and the operation button 410 is allowed to be in the protruding state, and the operation button 410 in the normal state is controlled to be in the protruding state. In this way, even though the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 are in a situation of interference, when the interference situation is resolved by the contact, the operation button 410 is brought into a protruding state. Therefore, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the protruding state during the remaining period of the operation reception period. Therefore, even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation button cover 419 at the time of the operation acceptance period, the player can make a self-help effort to press the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Participation can be prevented from being hindered. After pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state, the operation button cover 419 is returned to the normal state, and then the operation is performed. It is possible to prevent the situation where the button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again.

If the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period, but the operation button cover 419 is forcibly opened by the player's own finger touch, it is normal. The operation button 410 in the protruding state is in the protruding state, but if the operation button 410 in the protruding state is not pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 and the operation button 410 are sequentially displayed at the end of the operation acceptance period. The operation button cover 419 is forcibly returned to the normal state. Specifically, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button 410 to the normal state, and after that, when it is determined that the operation button 410 is in the normal state, the operation button in the open state is set. Control is performed to return the cover 419 to the closed state. This prevents the situation where the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 interfere with each other from occurring again later.

On the other hand, when the operation button cover 419 is not opened at the time of the operation acceptance period and the player is left in that state after that, the operation button 410 in the normal state is not in a protruding state. In such a case, it is not possible to participate in the effect of pressing the operation button 410 in the protruding state. Further, at the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in which the abnormality has occurred to the closed state so that the abnormality of the operation button cover 419 is resolved, and later, the operation button 410 It is prevented that the operation button cover 419 interferes with the operation button cover 419.

(Operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation buttons according to the game state)
Next, the operation when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 when the standby position of the operation button 410 is changed according to the game state will be described with reference to FIG. 233. FIG. 233 is a time chart showing the operating state of the operation button 410 when an abnormality occurs in the operation button 410 in the non-time saving state and the time saving state. In this example, in the effect operation unit 400 of the main body frame 4, in addition to the operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, an operation button cover 419 is provided as an opening / closing member for whether or not the operation button 410 can be operated. The case where it is possible will be described.

The operation button cover 419 is provided on the upper part of the operation button 410 in a normal state, and operates the operation button 410 in a closed state in which the operation button 410 is sealed so that the operation button 410 cannot be operated. The operation button 410 can be changed to the exposed state and the open state. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a closed position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and an open position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for moving the operation button cover 419 from the closed state to the open state and returning the operation button cover 419 from the open state to the closed state.

Like the operation buttons 410 other than this example, the operation button 410 can be changed into a normal state (initial position) that does not protrude from the effect operation unit 400 and a state (operation position) that protrudes from the effect operation unit 400. It has become. The effect operation unit 400 has a lock mechanism and a spring mechanism. In this example, the operation button 410 is locked by the lock mechanism so as not to protrude in the non-time saving state (normal state), and is positioned in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the lock mechanism is locked. The operation button 410 is positioned so as to protrude due to the spring mechanism. The effect operation unit 400 is provided with a normal position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a normal state and a protruding position sensor capable of detecting that the operation button 410 is in a protruding state. ing. Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided with a drive mechanism (for example, a drive motor) for returning the operation button 410 from the protruding state to the normal state.

In this example, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the effect using the operation button 410 in the normal state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the normal state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and the operation in the closed state occurs when the operation reception period occurs. By changing the button cover 419 to the open state, it is possible to press the operation button 410 in the normal state. Then, during the operation acceptance period, a predetermined effect result can be obtained by pressing the operation button 410 in the normal state according to the instruction. At the end of the operation acceptance period, control is performed to return the operation button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state.

Further, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 should be in the closed state and the operation button 410 should be in the normal state except for the operation acceptance period. However, as shown in FIG. 233 (A), when the operation button cover 419 is in the open state and the operation button 410 is in the protruding state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operating button 410 in the protruding state to the normal state, control is performed to return the operating button cover 419 in the open state to the closed state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, only the control for returning the open operation button cover 419 to the closed state is performed. Is done. Further, the predetermined abnormality determination timing is the same as in this example, when the special symbol corresponding to the start of the symbol game starts to fluctuate (at the start of the effect based on the fluctuation pattern), and the special symbol corresponds to the end of the symbol game. At the end of the fluctuation (at the end of the production based on the fluctuation pattern), it is the timing at the start of the above-mentioned demo production.

On the other hand, in the time saving state, the effect using the operation button 410 in the protruding state can be performed. In the production using the operation button 410 in the protruding state, an operation reception period in which the operation button 410 can be operated is generated within the production time, and when the operation reception period occurs, the operation reception period is in the protruding state. By pressing the operation button 410 to a normal state according to the instruction, a predetermined effect result can be obtained. As long as the time is shortened, even if the operating button 410 in the protruding state is pressed to the normal state, the operation button 410 is returned to the protruding state without being locked by the lock mechanism. Become.

Further, in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 should be in the open state and the operation button 410 should be in the protruding state. However, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), when the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. After returning the operation button cover 419 in the closed state to the open state, control is performed to return the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state. When the operation button 410 is in the normal state at a predetermined abnormality determination timing, but the operation button cover 419 is in the open state, control for returning the operation button 410 in the normal state to the protruding state. Only done.

As described above, in the non-time saving state (normal state), the operation button cover 419 is in the closed state and the operation button 410 is in the normal state, whereas in the time saving state, the operation button cover 419 is in the open state. At the same time, the operation button 410 should be in a protruding state. As described above, it is determined that the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 stand by at different positions in the non-time saving state and the time saving state, but any one of the operation button 410 and the operation button cover 419 When the above abnormality occurs, the position of the return destination of the member in which the abnormality has occurred is changed so that the operation button is used when the operation button 410 is used at the position corresponding to the game state. It is possible to prevent the participation in the production of operating the 410 from being hindered.

(Mission erasure timing in mission production)
Next, as an effect set in the variation pattern, in addition to a variation effect such as a variation display of a decorative pattern, a mission effect of whether or not the mission presented to the player is achieved is performed. , Will be described below.

In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started based on the variation pattern, and when the lottery result is a hit (when the variation pattern is a hit) after a predetermined time elapses, the decorative symbol is displayed. Is stopped and displayed with a winning symbol, and if the lottery result is out of order (when it is a variation pattern at the time of deviation), a variation effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a missed symbol. Further, when the execution of the mission effect is decided, the mission effect (presentation effect and result suggestion effect described later) is performed within the period in which the above-mentioned variable effect is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Control to execute is performed.

The mission production of this example is composed of a presentation production (preceding production) that presents the mission to the player and a result suggestion production (subsequent production) that informs whether or not the mission is achieved. Specifically, first, a presentation effect (preceding effect) of presenting a mission to the player is performed using the effect display device 1600, but when the player presses the operation button 410, the presented mission is deleted. Then, the presentation effect is finished, and the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) that informs whether or not the mission is achieved is started. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, a display suggesting that the mission is achieved as a result of the mission effect is derived after the start of the result suggestion effect and before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit symbol. If the result suggestion effect ends, but the lottery result is out of order, the mission will be performed as a result of the mission effect after the start of the result suggestion effect and before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the off symbol. A display suggesting failure is derived, and the result suggestion effect ends. That is, when the lottery result is a hit, in the result suggestion production (successor production) in the series of mission productions, the result of the same content as the presentation production (preceding production) in which the mission is presented earlier is derived. , If the lottery result is out of order, in the result suggestion production (successor production) in the series of mission productions, the result different from the presentation production (preceding production) in which the mission was presented earlier is derived, and the decoration is performed. It is possible to discriminate or suggest the lottery result regarding the winning before the symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this example, after the presentation effect (preceding effect) of presenting the mission to the player is performed, the player presses the operation button 410 at an arbitrary timing to end the presentation effect and suggest the result. The effect can be started, and the mission presented in the presentation effect is not erased and the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) is not started until the operation button 410 is pressed. .. In this way, as long as the operation button 410 is not pressed, the presented mission display continues and the mission production does not proceed, so that the motivation to press the operation button 410 can be increased and the mission can be motivated. It is possible to prevent the mission production from proceeding without the player noticing the presentation. If the operation button 410 is not pressed before the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) set immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol arrives. When the presentation limit time is reached, the presented mission is erased to end the presentation effect, and the result suggestion effect is started to forcibly proceed with the mission effect.

In this example, "4 seconds" is set as the execution time of the result suggestion effect, and the result suggestion effect is forced by the arrival of the presentation limit time set at the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol. Even if it starts at, the mission effect is advanced by executing the same result suggestion effect as when the player starts the result suggestion effect at an arbitrary timing. Further, the presentation limit time may be common when the mission effect is executed corresponding to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times, but the presentation limit time may be set according to a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times. For example, when performing a mission effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern of "20 seconds", "timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol" is set as the presentation limit time. On the other hand, when performing a mission effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of "20.5 seconds", set "timing 5.5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol" as the presentation limit time, etc. Can be exemplified. As a result, when the result suggestion effect is forcibly started due to the arrival of the presentation limit time, the player recognizes the length of the fluctuation pattern being executed and the stop display time of the decorative symbol by the start of the result suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent it from being lost and to prevent it from becoming less interesting.

Further, in this example, as described above, the execution time of the result suggestion effect (successor effect) is set to 4 seconds, and the result suggestion effect (successor effect) is started by pressing the operation button 410 for a predetermined time. As the (4 seconds) elapses, the result suggestion effect progresses. Therefore, if the operation button 410 is pressed at an early timing after the presentation effect (preceding effect) for presenting the mission to the player is performed, the result suggestion effect will start earlier and the result will be derived at the same time. If the operation button 410 is pressed at an earlier or later timing, the start of the result suggestion effect will be delayed, and the timing at which the result will be derived will also be delayed. As a result, the player who wants to quickly determine whether or not the lottery result is a win can be made to press the operation button 410 at an early timing after the mission is presented.

Next, a specific example of the mission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 234. In this effect example, a case where the main control MPU4100a determines a variation pattern in which the mission effect is performed in parallel with the variation effect among a plurality of variation patterns will be described.

First, when a command related to a variation pattern in which a mission effect is performed in parallel with the variation effect is transmitted from the main control MPU4100a side to the peripheral control MPU4150a side, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. (Fig. 234 (A)). Then, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the symbol display area in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed using the upper right display area and the lower left display area of the display area of the effect display device 1600 are used. It is divided into a mission display area where a series of mission effects are performed (FIG. 234 (B)). That is, at the start of the presentation effect (preceding effect) in the mission effect, the change display of the decorative symbol is performed in the symbol display area in which the area is smaller than that at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. A player who demands the progress of the mission will pay attention to the mission display area and proceed with the game, and a player who does not demand the progress of the mission production will pay attention to the symbol display area and proceed with the game.

In the mission display area of the display area of the production display device 1600, first, "If a rattling" 7 "appears, a big hit! By performing a presentation effect (preceding effect) that displays a mission message image, the player can be made to grasp the achievement conditions imposed as a mission. In addition, in the presentation effect, by displaying an operation message image different from the mission message image "Press the button to start!" In the mission display area, the mission effect proceeds when the operation button 410 is pressed ( It is possible to make the player understand that rattling as a result suggestion effect is started).

Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed while the presentation effect is being performed in the mission display area, the mission message image and the operation message image are deleted. In addition, a new display consisting of the character image of "rattle" is made to appear, and a rotation display is performed in which the rattle starts to rotate, and a result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) of whether or not the mission is achieved is started. (Fig. 234 (C)).

Next, if the lottery result is a big hit, the result of whether or not the mission has been achieved when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) was started by pressing the operation button 410. As a result, the result image in which the ball "7" appears from the rattling is displayed (FIG. 234 (D)). As a result, it was shown that the result was the same as the previously presented mission (putting out a "7" in a rattle), and the player was made aware that this mission was successful (achieved) and decorated. Before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can be made to recognize that the lottery result is a big hit. After that, when the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern elapses, the division between the mission display area and the symbol display area is released, and the decorative symbol is returned to be displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol (“777” in this example) (FIG. 234 (E)).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is out of order, the result of whether or not the mission has been achieved when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) was started by pressing the operation button 410. As a result, a result image in which a ball other than "7" appears from the rattling is displayed (FIG. 234 (F)). As a result, it was shown that the result was different from the previously presented mission (putting out a "7" in a rattle), and the player was made aware that this mission had failed (not achieved) and decorated. Before the symbol is stopped and displayed, the player can be made to recognize that the lottery result is out of order. After that, when the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern elapses, the division between the mission display area and the symbol display area is released, and the decorative symbol is returned to be displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol is removed and stopped and displayed at the symbol (“513” in this example) (FIG. 234 (G)).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, as an operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the operation button 410, there is a sword decoration body 5001 in the above-mentioned sword production operation unit 5000, and the sword decoration body 5001 Even if the player operates, the presentation effect in the mission effect is not ended, and the result suggestion effect is not started. The sword decoration body 5001 executes an effect different from the mission effect (for example, an effect change such as a dialogue effect) as an effect corresponding to (accompanying) the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative symbol performed in the symbol variation area. It is supposed to be used from time to time. Therefore, for example, after the symbol variation area and the mission display area are divided by the execution of the mission effect, the presentation effect in the mission effect is performed in the mission display area, and the operation waiting state for the operation button 410 continues. Even if it is inside, at the same time, it is possible to execute an effect using the sword decoration body 5001 different from the mission effect in the symbol display area, and an effect using the operation button 410 in the mission display area (mission effect). ) And another effect (such as dialogue effect) using the sword effect operation unit 5000 in the symbol display area, each effect can be fully entertained by the player.

In addition, in this example, as a presentation production (preceding production) in the mission production, "If a rattling" 7 "appears, a big hit! After displaying the mission message image, when the lottery result is a big hit, as a result suggestion effect (subsequent effect), the result image in which the ball of "7" appears from the rattling is displayed, and further, the presentation effect is displayed. And in the result suggestion effect, the same effect image consisting of the balls of "7" is made to appear in each case. This makes it possible to easily determine that the result is the same as the presented mission, and the mission is successful (the player can easily grasp that the mission has been achieved. However, the lottery result is a big hit. In the case of, the same effect image is not limited to appear in the presentation effect and the result suggestion effect, and for example, the effect image (shape, size, etc., which is substantially the same as the effect image appearing in the presentation effect is different) Anything that has a commonality that can be recognized as "same" from the appearance, color, etc.) may be made to appear in the result suggestion effect.

Also, in this example, as a mission production, "If you get a" 7 "in a rattling, it's a big hit! A mission effect consisting of a presentation effect (preceding effect) that displays a mission message image and a result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) that uses a rotation display of a rattle character image has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to the above, and other aspects may be used. For example, "If" this character "appears in a rattling, it's a big hit! The presentation effect (preceding effect) that displays the image of the target character (mission target pre-display image) together with the mission message image, and the image of the same character as the presented character (direction, posture, size, etc. are different). It is also good, as long as it has a commonality that can be recognized as "same" from the appearance, color, etc.), and a mission production consisting of a result suggestion effect (subsequent effect) in which an image of a character different from the presented character appears. And so on. In addition, as a mission production, for each mission production, such as "a mission production that indicates a big hit when a" 7 "appears once in a rattle" and "a mission production that indicates a big hit when a" 7 "appears twice in a rattle". The number of times the mission is completed may be different. Further, in the mission production, it is preferable that the achievement of the mission promises a big hit, but there may be a case where the achievement of the mission is a big hit.

Further, in the above example, the operation button 410 is pressed until the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) set immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol arrives. If not, when the presentation limit time is reached, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is ended, and the result suggestion effect is started to force the mission effect to proceed. However, other aspects may be used. For example, as another example, the operation button 410 is pressed until the presentation limit time (in this example, the timing 5 seconds before the stop display of the decorative symbol) set immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol arrives. If not, the presented mission may be deleted and the presentation effect may be terminated when the presentation limit time is reached, and the mission effect may be terminated without starting the result suggestion effect. In this case, when the presentation limit time is reached, the division between the mission display area and the symbol display area is released, and the game progresses in the large area symbol display area for the player who does not request the progress of the mission production. Can be actively executed. Further, depending on the type of mission production, the progress mode of the mission production at the time when the presentation limit time is reached may be different. For example, in the case of performing the first mission effect of displaying the above-mentioned rattle as a mission effect, when the presentation limit time is reached, the presented mission is deleted, the presentation effect is ended, and the result suggestion effect is started. While trying to finish the mission production without doing it, as a mission production, the second mission production (for example, the hit expectation is higher than the first mission production) (for example, the hit expectation is higher than the first mission production) When performing a mission effect (to display another character such as "Omikuji" instead of rattle), when the presentation limit time is reached, the presented mission is deleted and the presentation effect is ended to suggest the result. May be started and the mission production may be forced to proceed.

Further, in this example, the effect display device 1600 is used for both the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative pattern, the presentation effect for presenting the mission (preceding effect), and the result suggestion effect (successor effect). A plurality of display devices may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the effects thereof may be performed by using another display device. As a result, for example, the effect using the operation button 410 and the effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration body 5001 (the effect corresponding to (accompanying) the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative pattern) are clearly recognized. be able to.

(Counting the number of specific notices in roulette production)
Next, as the effect set in the variation pattern, in addition to the variation effect such as the variation display of the decorative pattern, as the effect using the operation button 410, among a plurality of types of notices in which the degree of expectation is set respectively. A case where a roulette effect is performed to indicate which notice will be decided will be described below.

In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started based on the variation pattern, and when the lottery result is a hit (when the variation pattern is a hit) after a predetermined time elapses, the decorative symbol is displayed. Is stopped and displayed with a winning symbol, and if the lottery result is out of order (when it is a variation pattern at the time of deviation), a variation effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a missed symbol. When the execution of the roulette effect is determined, the control for executing the roulette effect is also performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 within the period in which the above-mentioned variation effect is performed.

The roulette effect of this example consists of a first roulette effect that does not require the operation of the operation button 410 (first roulette effect) and a second roulette effect that requires the operation of the operation button 410 (second roulette effect). The first roulette effect and the second roulette effect proceed in this order. Specifically, first, as the first roulette effect, an effect of determining the mode of the button image imitating the operation button 410 from a plurality of types is performed. As the mode of the button image, "notice A (normal)" which is not decorated at all and "notice B (ladybug)" which is decorated with a ladybug pattern are set. Further, the expectation degree (big hit expectation degree) for the mode of the button image is set to be higher in the order of "notice A (normal)" and "notice B (ladybugs)". That is, when the lottery result is a hit, the probability of determining "notice B (ladybugs)" in the first roulette production is high. In the first roulette effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is not required, and the mode of one of the plurality of types of button images is notified as a result without pressing the operation button 410. There is.

Next, after displaying the button image in the mode determined in the first roulette effect, as the second roulette effect, an effect is performed in which the mode of the display image on which a predetermined pattern is drawn is determined from a plurality of types. It is said. As the mode of the display image, "notice 1 (x)" with the symbol of x, "notice 2 (○)" with the symbol of ○, and "notice 3 (notice 3) with the symbol of ☆" are drawn. ☆) ”And“ Notice 4 (Ladybugs) ”with a ladybug drawn on it are set. In addition, the mode of the display image includes "notice 4 (ladybugs)" which is the same pattern as "notice B (ladybugs)" in at least the first roulette production. The degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for the mode of the displayed image is "notice 1 (x)", "notice 2 (○)", "notice 3 (☆)", and "notice 4 (ladybugs)". It is set to increase in order. That is, when the lottery result is a hit, the probability of determining "notice 4 (ladybugs)" in the second roulette production is high. In the second roulette effect, the operation of the operation button 410 is required by using the display of the button image in the mode determined in the first roulette effect, and the operation button 410 is pressed. As an opportunity, one of a plurality of types of display images is notified as a result.

In the above, only when the lottery result is a hit, "Notice B (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and "Notice 4 (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the second roulette effect. It is possible to notify. That is, if the lottery result is incorrect, "Notice B (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and "Notice 4 (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the second roulette effect. Is restricted so that it is not decided at the same time. In this way, when "Notice B (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the first roulette production and then "Notice 4 (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the second roulette production, the ladybugs Even if the pattern of the pattern appears twice, it is confirmed that the lottery result is a hit, so that the roulette effect can be expected to be noticed. On the other hand, regardless of whether the lottery result is a win or a miss, and whether the result of the roulette effect is a ladybugs pattern, the content before the result notification in the first roulette effect (in the roulette display). "Notice B (Ladybugs)" appears as "Multiple modes to be displayed", and "Notice 4 (Multiple modes displayed on the roulette display)" as the content before the result notification in the second roulette effect. There are no restrictions on the appearance of "ladybugs"). That is, as the content before the result notification in the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect (plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display), the ladybugs pattern may appear any number of times, but the ladybugs. Even if the insect pattern appears multiple times, it is not confirmed that the lottery result is a win. In addition, the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) has not been determined at the stage before the result notification in the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect (the stage where multiple modes are displayed on the roulette display). Even if the ladybugs pattern appears multiple times in the stage, the expectation (big hit expectation) does not increase.

In this example, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect are performed, the contents of each roulette effect (multiple modes displayed on the roulette display), and the result of each roulette effect is notified. The aspect is determined by the variation pattern determined on the main control MPU4100a side. Specifically, in addition to setting two types of modes as a result of the first roulette effect, four types of modes are set as a result of the second roulette effect. At least eight types of fluctuation patterns are set. Then, only when the lottery result is a hit, "Notice B (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the first roulette effect, and "Notice 4 (Ladybugs)" is notified as a result of the second roulette effect. While it is possible to determine the fluctuation pattern set to be used, if the lottery result is out of order, the fluctuation pattern is restricted from being determined.

In addition, unlike this example, the content of each roulette effect (a plurality of modes displayed on the roulette display) and the mode notified as a result of each roulette effect are the peripheral control MPU4150a from the main control MPU4100a side. When the variation pattern is transmitted to the side, that is, at the start of variation of the decorative symbol, the peripheral control MPU4150a side may determine based on the variation pattern. Specifically, as a plurality of effect lottery performed at the start of the change of the decorative pattern, the "first roulette content determination lottery" for determining the content (plural aspects displayed on the roulette display) in the first roulette effect. The "first roulette result determination lottery" that determines the mode notified as a result of the first roulette effect and the "first" that determines the content (plural aspects displayed on the roulette display) in the second roulette effect. A "2 roulette content determination lottery" and a "second roulette result determination lottery" for determining the mode to be notified as a result of the second roulette effect are performed. Then, after a plurality of production lottery, even though the lottery result is out of order, "notice B (ladybugs)" as a result of the first roulette production and "notice 4 (notice 4)" as a result of the second roulette production. If "Ladybugs" is determined, the result of any roulette effect is replaced with a mode other than "Ladybugs" and executed. That is, after a plurality of production lottery, it is determined whether or not the lottery result related to the winning and the production lottery result satisfy the prohibition condition determined to be inconsistent, and if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, The result of any of the roulette effects is replaced with a mode other than "ladybugs" and executed. Of the plurality of production lottery, the "first roulette result determination lottery" and the "second roulette result determination lottery" are prohibited, but the "first roulette content determination lottery" and the "second roulette" The "content determination lottery" is not a prohibited object, and the mode of "ladybugs" may be displayed any number of times on the roulette display before the result notification in the roulette effect.

Further, in addition to the above, the mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect may be determined on the peripheral control MPU4150a side when the operation button 410 is pressed. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is pressed, a "second roulette result determination lottery" is performed to determine the mode notified as a result of the second roulette effect. After that, even though the lottery result is out of order, "Notice B (Ladybugs)" has already been decided and displayed as a result of the first roulette production, and "Notice 4" as a result of the second roulette production. When "(Ladybugs)" is determined, the result of the second roulette effect is replaced with a mode other than "Ladybugs" and executed. That is, after determining the result of the second roulette effect, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned prohibition condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the prohibition condition is satisfied, the result of the second roulette effect is "Ladybugs". It is executed by replacing it with the mode other than ".

Next, a specific example of the roulette effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236. In this production example, a case where the fluctuation pattern in which the roulette effect is performed is determined among the plurality of fluctuation patterns by the main control MPU4100a will be described.

First, when a command related to a variation pattern in which the roulette effect is performed is transmitted from the main control MPU4100a side to the peripheral control MPU4150a side, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 235 (A). )). Then, after starting the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first roulette effect is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, in the roulette display divided into four, the button images showing two "notice A (normal)" and the button images showing two "notice B (ladybugs)" are arranged alternately. The roulette effect is performed so that the images are selected in a clockwise direction (FIG. 235 (B)).

Then, after a predetermined time has passed since the first roulette effect was started, either the button image showing "notice A (normal)" or the button image showing "notice B (ladybugs)". Selection stops in the display area of. That is, when "notice B (ladybugs)" is determined as a result of the first roulette effect, the selection is stopped in the display area of the button image indicating "notice B (ladybugs)" (FIG. 235). On the other hand, when "notice A (normal)" is determined, the selection is stopped in the display area of the button image indicating "notice A (normal)" (FIG. 235 (D)). ..

Next, the second roulette effect is performed, and at the start of the second roulette effect, a selection start image "Start roulette effect!" Is displayed to notify the fact. In addition, at the start of the second roulette effect, the button image that is the result of the first roulette effect is displayed, and the start operation instruction image "Press the button to stop!" Is displayed for the second time. If the operation button 410 is pressed on the roulette display displayed after the start of the roulette effect, the player can grasp the display image on the roulette display as if he / she can select it. As for the display of the button image, the button image indicating "notice A (normal)" is displayed when the button image indicating "notice A (normal)" is selected as a result of the first roulette effect (FIG. 235 (FIG. 235). In contrast to E)), when the button image indicating "notice B (ladybug)" is selected, the button image indicating "notice B (ladybug)" is displayed (FIG. 235 (F)).

In this example, in the first roulette effect, the button image of the ladybugs pattern can be displayed both during the roulette display and after the roulette display, but the ladybugs pattern is displayed after the roulette display than during the roulette display. The button image is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the first roulette effect, the time during which the ladybug pattern button image is displayed after the roulette display is longer than the time during which the ladybug pattern button image is displayed during the roulette display. For this reason, it is difficult to recognize the button image of the ladybug pattern during the roulette display, whereas the button image of the ladybug pattern is easily recognized after the roulette display. In this example, if the ladybugs pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, it is confirmed that the lottery result is a big hit, but the ladybugs pattern displayed after the roulette is displayed. Only the button image is counted as the number of times the ladybugs pattern appears. That is, even if the button image of the ladybugs pattern is displayed during the roulette display, it is not counted as the number of times the ladybugs pattern pattern appears. In this regard, by making the ease of recognizing the button image of the ladybugs pattern different between when the roulette is displayed and after the roulette is displayed, the ladybugs pattern appears when the ladybugs pattern button image is displayed. It makes it easy to determine whether or not it is counted as the number of times it has been done.

In the second roulette production described above, in the roulette display divided into four, the display image of "notice 4 (ladybug)", the display image of "notice 1 (x)", and the display image of "notice 3 (☆)" Roulette display (rotation selection display) is performed so that the display image and the display image of "notice 2 (○)" are arranged clockwise and selected in order clockwise (FIG. 235 (G)). ..

Then, when the operation button 410 is pressed after starting the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the rotation display speed of the roulette display (rotation selection display) is slowed down by the pressing, and the operation button 410 is pressed. After a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) from pressing, the display image of "notice 1 (x)", the display image of "notice 2 (○)", and the display image of "notice 3 (☆)" , The display image showing "Notice 4 (Ladyworm)" and the selection are stopped in any of the display areas. That is, when "notice 4 (ladybugs)" is determined as a result of the second roulette effect, the selection is stopped in the display area of the display image showing "notice 4 (ladybugs)" (FIG. 236). On the other hand, when "notice 1 (x)" is determined, the selection is stopped in the display area of the display image indicating "notice 1 (x)" (FIG. 236 (I)). .. Then, when the selection is stopped in the display area of the display image showing "notice 4 (ladybugs)", the display image showing "notice 4 (ladybugs)" is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 236 (J)). )). Even if the operation button 410 is not pressed during the period from the start of the second roulette effect until the predetermined time elapses, the selection is stopped in any of the display areas as described above at that time. I am trying to do it.

As described above, in the second roulette effect as well as the first roulette effect, the ladybugs display image can be displayed both during and after the roulette display, but the roulette display is more than during the roulette display. Later, the display image of the ladybugs is enlarged and displayed. Further, in the second roulette effect, the time during which the ladybugs display image is displayed after the roulette display is longer than the time during which the ladybugs display image is displayed during the roulette display. Therefore, while the display image of the ladybug is difficult to recognize during the roulette display, the display image of the ladybug is easily recognized after the roulette display. In this example, if the ladybugs pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, it is confirmed that the lottery result is a big hit, but the ladybugs displayed after the roulette display is displayed. Only the image is counted as the number of times the ladybugs pattern appears. That is, even if the display image of the ladybugs is displayed during the roulette display, it is not counted as the number of times the ladybugs pattern appears. In this regard, by making the recognition of the ladybug display image different between during roulette display and after roulette display, the number of times the ladybug pattern appears when the ladybug display image is displayed. It is easy to determine whether or not it is counted as.

Then, when the ladybugs pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the decorative pattern becomes a big hit pattern (book) when the variation time set for the variation pattern elapses. In the example, it is stopped and displayed at "777") (FIG. 236 (K)). On the other hand, if the ladybug pattern appears only once through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, or if the ladybug pattern does not appear even once, the pattern changes. When the set fluctuation time elapses, the decorative symbol is removed and stopped and displayed at the symbol (“513” in this example) (FIG. 236 (L)).

In this example, the lottery result is determined to be a big hit when the ladybugs pattern appears twice through the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, but from that point on, the decorative pattern Until is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, a special effect different from the normal effect (effect set in the variable pattern) is performed. As a result, after the ladybugs pattern appears twice, it is possible to prevent the time from becoming boring to wait for the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed as the jackpot pattern.

Further, in this example, during the execution of the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, the decorative pattern is variablely displayed in the reduced display area on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. As a result, when it is desired to pay attention to the variable display of the decorative pattern, the roulette effect does not hinder the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the user can pay attention to it. Further, in this example, the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect are performed at a timing (so-called normal fluctuation) before whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol forms a reach. As a result, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern does not form a reach, those roulette effects can be executed, and it is possible to prevent the normal fluctuation from becoming a boring time.

Further, in this example, in each of the first roulette effect and the second roulette effect, only the image of the ladybug pattern displayed after the roulette is displayed is counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern appears. , Only when a predetermined appearance condition is satisfied is counted as the number of times a ladybug pattern appears. As in this example, when the predetermined appearance condition is satisfied, in addition to the case where the image of the ladybug pattern is enlarged and the case where the image of the ladybug pattern is displayed for a long period of time, for example, the effect display. Only when the image of the ladybug pattern is displayed at a specific position in the display area of the device 1600, the number of times the pattern of the ladybug pattern appears may be counted. On the other hand, when the predetermined appearance condition is not satisfied, for example, although the image of the ladybugs pattern appears in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it does not stay at the predetermined position and leaves the display area in a short time. In such a case, it may not be counted as the number of times the ladybug pattern appears.

(Confidential display in roulette production)
In the second roulette effect described above, as another example, the roulette display displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be arbitrarily made difficult or unrecognizable by the player. The case will be described with reference to FIG. 237.

First, at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, in addition to the above-mentioned selection start image and start operation instruction image, a secret instruction image "hold down the button if you do not want to see it" The display is performed (FIG. 237 (A)). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example determines that the operation button 410 is "long-pressed" when the operation is continuously performed for a predetermined long-pressing time or longer (2 seconds or longer in this example) without interruption. It is possible to detect the operation of "long press" by continuously inputting the operation detection signal for the operation button 410 for the long press time or longer (2 seconds or longer in this example). You can do it. By displaying the concealment instruction image, if the operation button 410 is pressed and held for a long time, the player can be made aware that the progress process and the result of the subsequent roulette display cannot be recognized.

Then, when the operation button 410 is long-pressed according to the instruction by the concealment instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the initial "press" for the "long press" is detected. Similar to the above embodiment, the rotation display speed of the roulette display (rotation selection display) is slowed down, and the display image of "Notice 1 (x)" is displayed after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) from pressing the operation button 410. , "Notice 2 (○)" display image, "Notice 3 (☆)" display image, and "Notice 4 (Ladyworm)" display image, selection stops in any of the display areas. do. However, in this alternative example, when the press on the operation button 410 reaches the long press time (2 seconds in this example), it is determined that the press is long press, and a concealment image different from the roulette display is displayed on the front layer of the roulette display. (In this example, a special still image that is painted in white to hide the back) is displayed, and at least each display image placed on the roulette display is hidden by a concealment image so that the player cannot recognize it. (Fig. 237 (B)).

That is, in this alternative example, when the operation button 410 is long-pressed according to the instruction by the concealment instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, the concealment is performed before the selection of the roulette display is stopped. The image is displayed so that the player cannot recognize the result of the rear roulette display ending. Further, the concealment image is terminated by releasing the long press, but it is designed to continue to be displayed as long as the operation button 410 is long-pressed, and while the operation button 410 is long-pressed, it is displayed. If the roulette display cannot be recognized continuously and the operation button 410 is held down even when the selection of the roulette display is stopped, it is possible to recognize which display image is selected in the roulette display. It can be eliminated (Fig. 237 (C)). As a result, if you do not want to know the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) by the roulette effect before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, you can display the result of the roulette effect by pressing and holding the operation button 410. This can be avoided, and it is possible to concentrate on whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed thereafter.

Further, in this alternative example, even during the period in which the operation button 410 is held down, that is, the period in which the roulette display cannot be recognized, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reduced display area on the upper right of the effect display device 1600. The variable display is made visible. As a result, even when the operation button 410 is pressed and held for a long time, the concealment image does not hinder the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and while avoiding the visual recognition of the roulette display, only the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Can be selectively focused on.

Further, in this alternative example, when the operation button 410 is long-pressed according to the instruction by the concealment instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, each display image arranged in the roulette display is displayed. Is hidden by a concealed image so that the player cannot recognize it. However, only a part of the displayed images, not all of them, may be hidden by the concealed image to make it difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, as a display image arranged on the roulette display, for example, a pattern similar to the pattern of "ladybugs" is provided, and the pattern of "ladybugs" or a part of the similar pattern is hidden by a concealment image. , It may be difficult for the player to determine whether or not the image is a "ladybugs".

Further, in this alternative example, not only when the operation button 410 is long-pressed according to the instruction by the concealment instruction image at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect, but also according to the instruction by the operation instruction image. Even if the operation button 410 is pressed for a long time instead of being pressed for a long time, and then the operation button 410 is pressed again for a long time, the concealment image is displayed. In this case, the roulette display is started by the first pressing, and the roulette display becomes visible temporarily, but the roulette display is hidden by the concealed image by the subsequent long press, and the same as the above-described embodiment. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the result of the roulette display, and it is possible to prevent the result of the roulette effect from being displayed for a long period of time for a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) due to the roulette effect.

In the above-mentioned alternative example, "long press of the operation button 410" is illustrated as a display condition of the concealment image, but if it is possible to make it difficult for the player to arbitrarily recognize the roulette display, the operation button is used. The concealment image may be displayed by another operation instead of pressing and holding the 410. As other operations, for example, operations on other operation units such as the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword effect operation unit 5000 described above, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 provided on the door frame 3 (hold down). It may be present or it may be a normal pressing), and the concealment image is displayed on condition of these other operations at the start of the roulette display (rotation selection display) in the second roulette effect. You may.

Further, in the above-mentioned alternative example, the display of the concealment image is terminated by releasing the long press of the operation button 410, but as another embodiment, when the operation button 410 is long-pressed, the display is terminated. Even if the long press is released, the concealment image may be displayed for a certain long period of time (preferably longer than the selection of the roulette display is stopped). In this case, the player It is possible to reduce the fatigue and burden caused by continuously pressing and holding the image.

Further, in the above-mentioned alternative example, it was decided to display a "special still image filled with white so that the rear cannot be seen" as a concealed image, but the display time of the concealed image is not limited to the still image ( If the concealment image continues to be displayed while the operation button 410 is long-pressed, it may be a dynamic image that changes depending on the elapse of the long-press time). As an example of a concealment image composed of a dynamic image, "a game information image that is switched and developed at regular intervals inside a special balloon image that is filled with white to make the rear invisible" can be exemplified. Specific examples of the game information image include an explanatory image relating to the gaming method, various gaming production explanatory images mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and an explanatory image of the current gaming mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to display a special dynamic image that informs the explanation of the game machine and the game situation while switching at regular intervals. By displaying useful information for the player even during the period when the production is not interesting with the concealed image, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

[24. Setting mode interrupt processing]
Next, the setting mode interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 240. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control MPU4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). Or a special symbol display (upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186) for a certain period of time (in this example) when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped. From the reception of the variation pattern command by the peripheral control MPU4150a until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or by the peripheral control MPU4150a, the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command is issued. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the sub-volume value of the effect sound, the door frame 5, and the like The brightness (light intensity) of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 4 can be adjusted. Specifically, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 was operated except for a predetermined period after the power was turned on and a period before and after the start or stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol (prohibition period: about 1 second). When the operation signal of the pressing operation unit 405 is input to the peripheral control MPU4150a based on the above, the setting mode interrupt processing is executed. The operation unit 400 used in the production is used as an operation unit for adjusting the sub-volume value of the production sound, the brightness (light amount) of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, and the like. Separately from the pressing operation unit 405 of, a dedicated operation unit for adjustment (for example, a cross key type operation that adjusts the volume level by operating in the vertical direction and adjusts the brightness of the light amount (brightness) by operating in the horizontal direction. A part, etc.) may be provided.

In this setting mode interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 239, the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) displays a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode. For example, when the setting mode interrupt process is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the selection screen for adjusting the volume or the brightness is displayed. It is displayed (Fig. 239 (B)). Then, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and operating the pressing operation unit 405 in a state where one of the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment is selected, the volume adjustment process (step 1122) and the brightness adjustment process (step S1123) are performed. Is executed to display the adjustment screen (see FIG. 239 (C)), adjust the volume of the effect sound, and adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to the desired brightness. It will be possible to adjust to (100% to 70%). As the LED whose brightness can be adjusted, only the LED of the game board 4 may be adjustable, only the LED of the door frame 5 may be adjustable, or either the LED of the game board 4 or the LED of the door frame 5 can be adjusted. May also be adjustable. Further, the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal may be adjustable in addition to or separately from these.

As shown in FIG. 239, in this example, the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed at a lower position of the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side), and the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Area (symbol display area) and hold display area (first hold display area 1600a to 1600d indicating the number of hold of the first special symbol, second hold display area 1600e to 1600h showing the number of hold of the second special symbol) It is designed to reduce the display as much as possible. In other words, the screen for performing the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) avoids the variable display area (symbol display area) and the hold display area of the decorative symbol (do not overlap with the symbol display area and the hold display area). ) Is to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 without obstructing the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern. It should be noted that the display is not limited to the above as long as it is displayed so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed so as not to overlap the hold display area. On the other hand, the decorative symbol should be displayed so as to overlap with the variable display area (design display area), and the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode should be semi-transparently displayed on the front layer of the decorative symbol. It may not interfere with the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern performed on the back of the screen for performing the setting mode with.

Further, when the volume adjustment is selected on the selection screen (FIG. 239 (B)), the volume adjustment process (step S1122) is executed accordingly. In the volume adjustment process, seven scales 0 to 6 are displayed so as to correspond to the seven stages of the board volume, and the board volume is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the display of the scales that are colored according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401. At the same time, it is possible to grasp the changed board volume (FIG. 239 (C)). To operate the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 after adjusting the board volume, or when the non-operation period of the operation unit 400 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the setting mode interrupt process ends and the setting mode is performed. Hide the screen. However, the board volume is usually adjusted immediately when the dial operation unit 401 is operated in the volume adjustment process, and is reflected in the volume of music and sound effects. As a result, not only the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) but also the music and sound effects according to the changed volume are actually heard to check the volume of the board volume. It can be adjusted while.

When the brightness adjustment is selected on the selection screen, the brightness adjustment process (step S1123) is executed accordingly. In the brightness adjustment process, the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted from 70% to 100% in 5% increments. The scale is displayed, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the display of the scale colored according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401, and after the change. It is possible to grasp the brightness of the door. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated in the brightness adjustment process, the setting information of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is immediately rewritten, and the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are rewritten. It is reflected in the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate. Then, after adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and each decorative substrate of the game board 4, the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, or the non-operation period of the operation unit 400 is a predetermined period (for example, 2). When it reaches (seconds), the setting mode interrupt process ends and the screen for performing the setting mode is hidden. Further, in the brightness adjustment process as well as the volume adjustment process, normally, when the dial operation unit 401 is operated, the setting information of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is immediately rewritten. Since the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is reflected, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is reflected. While checking not only the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) but also the brightness of a plurality of LEDs actually provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. Can be adjusted.

It should be noted that the pressing operation is based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the period during which the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is in the waiting state for customers and the demonstration is performed. When the operation signal of the unit 405 is input to the peripheral control MPU4150a, in addition to adjusting the sub-volume value of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, calendar information and the like are displayed. , Time information (other setting processing), etc. are also added to the selection screen, and by operating the dial operation unit 401 and pressing operation unit 405, calendar information, time information (other setting processing), etc. can be restored. It can be set (step 1124).

As shown in FIG. 240, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example is in a customer waiting state, and the operation unit 400 is pressed during the period during which the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is demonstrating. When the unit 405 is operated (FIG. 240 (A)), the setting mode interrupt process is executed, and the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) displays a screen for performing the setting mode. As shown in FIG. 240 (B), a selection screen for volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, calendar information, or time information is displayed. Then, the volume adjustment process (volume adjustment processing) is performed by operating the dial operation unit 401 to operate the pressing operation unit 405 in a state where any of volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, calendar information, and time information is selected. Step 1122), the brightness adjustment process (step S1123), or other setting process (step S1124) for resetting the calendar information and the time information is executed to adjust the volume of the effect sound (FIG. 240 (C)). ), Adjust the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to the desired brightness (100% to 70%), and re-record the calendar information, time information (other setting processing), etc. You will be able to set it.

In addition, the display is based on the fact that the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is in the waiting state for customers and the demonstration is performed. The screen for performing the setting mode is different from the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative symbol (position, size). , Shape, color, transparency, etc.). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the decorative symbol is hidden during the standby state, and a predetermined image is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display area (design display area) of the decorative symbol for demonstration. Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the demonstration, the setting modes of the volume adjustment, the brightness adjustment, the calendar information, the time information, the four selection screens, and the adjustment screen are set. The screen for performing is enlarged compared to the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the area where the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (design display area) and the central part of the effect display device 1600 which overlaps with the area where the demonstration is performed are in front of the demonstration. It is opaque so that it becomes a layer. Therefore, during the period when the production display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is in the waiting state for customers and the demonstration is performed, various adjustments and settings are made in a state that is easier to see than during the variable display of the decorative pattern. be able to. In this example, while the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed, a part of the demonstration is hidden by the screen for performing this setting mode, but the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed. Demonstrations are being held in the rear. It should be noted that the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 at least during the period during which the demonstration is being performed, and the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the above may be displayed in a different manner (position, size, shape, color, transparency, etc.). The pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped but there is a hold memory (waiting for the start of fluctuation) while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being displayed or when a big hit or a small hit is not performed. The screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation, and the pressing operation unit of the operation unit 400 during the big hit or small hit, or when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped and there is no hold memory. The screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of 405 may be different from that of the screen. Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the demonstration, a screen for performing the setting mode may be displayed instead of the demonstration (the demonstration is terminated). In this case, the setting may be performed. The demonstration will not be visible while the screen for performing the mode is displayed. This makes it easier to see the screen for performing the setting mode, and the setting mode can be operated without being distracted by the demonstration being executed backward. In addition, the display is based on the fact that the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is in the waiting state for customers and the demonstration is performed. The screen for performing the setting mode and the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative symbol are different modes (position, size). , Shape, color, transparency, etc.), for example, the screen for performing the setting mode overlaps with the variable display area (design display area) of the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Semi-transparent display is performed at the position (for example, the central part of the effect display device 1600), and the setting mode is set during the period when the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is in the waiting state for customers to demonstrate. The screen for performing the above may be displayed opaquely without changing the display position or the like.

It should be noted that the display is based on the fact that the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is in the waiting state for customers and the demonstration is performed. The screen for performing the setting mode and the screen for performing the setting mode displayed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the variable display of the decorative symbol are different modes (position, size). , Shape, color, transparency, etc.) before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, from the reception of the variable pattern command to about 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, etc.) Or just before the stop (several seconds before and after the final display of the decorative symbol performed based on the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command (for example, about 0.5 seconds before and after the final display)). May not display the screen for performing the setting mode even if the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by displaying the screens for performing the setting mode in different modes before and after the start or stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol (the final display of the decorative symbol (stop the variable display of the special symbol)). can do.

That is, basically, based on the fact that the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, the setting mode interrupt process is executed and set in the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900). A screen for performing a mode is displayed. For example, a predetermined period (for example, a variable pattern command) including a start timing and a stop timing of a variable display of a decorative symbol (decision display of a decorative symbol (stop of variable display of a special symbol)) Approximately 1 second from the reception of If the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a period of about 1 second until 0.5 seconds elapse after the confirmation display of the above, the effect display device 1600 ( Even if the screen for performing the setting mode is not displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) or the setting mode interrupt processing is executed based on the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the effect display device The screen for performing the setting mode may not be displayed on the 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side).

[25. Sound data creation process]
The sound data creation process will be described with reference to FIG. 241. As described above, in the sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the pointer thereof. The sound command data instructed by is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4150a reads out the sound generation schedule data (step S1131), and among the read schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is read out from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extract from 4150ce and set to VDP4160a with built-in sound source (step S1132).

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a activates the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 13 to divide the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a into the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is converted by the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak from the analog value to the digital value, and this is converted into the value of 7 steps. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the converted value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, the value of the board volume is increased or decreased to increase or decrease the board volume. To set. Then, in the sound data output process (step S1018) described above, the volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 so as to be the volume set in the board volume. By amplifying to the master volume value to be, serializing the amplified production sound and outputting it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects are played from the provided speakers.

That is, when the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated or the volume adjustment process (step 1122) is executed in the above setting mode interrupt process, the board volume is changed and the board volume after this change is subordinated. Set as a volume value. As a result, music and sound effects corresponding to the changed sub-volume value flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control MPU4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)). Except for, the setting mode interrupt process is executed by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and when the volume is adjusted by this setting mode interrupt process, the sound data creation process is performed. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is converted into 7 levels of the board volumes 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the compressed voltage from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is responded to by the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by setting the board volume by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value.

[26. Volume control suitable realization production]
Next, an effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume adjustment can be preferably realized will be described. As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 of this example has a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, a period until the peripheral control MPU4150a finishes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002). ) And special symbol indicators (upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186) for a certain period of time (this example) when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started or stopped. Then, from the reception of the fluctuation pattern command by the peripheral control MPU4150a until 0.5 seconds have passed after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol, or the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command by the peripheral control MPU4150a. The volume of the effect sound can be adjusted except for (until 0.5 seconds have passed after the confirmation display of the decorative symbol). However, when a variable effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is continuously executed, the volume of the effect sound cannot be adjusted by paying attention to the variable effect, and the volume of the effect sound is adjusted. I lost the timing to do it. Therefore, the player feels uncomfortable that the volume is too loud, or feels stress such as lack of excitement due to the volume being too low, and the player becomes excessively tired and continues to play for a long time. Since it is difficult to play the game, the game may be stopped or the player may be repelled from the memory of being tired, and the operating rate of the game machine may decrease.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the above-mentioned problem is solved by providing the player with a timing for adjusting the volume of the effect sound. Specifically, after the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, the effect sound is suppressed (the volume is changed to a predetermined level or less (for example, volume 2 or less)). Anything is fine, and the sound may be muted), and after a specific period is provided to notify the player that the volume adjustment is a time that can be preferably realized, a variable effect is executed to decorate the player. The display result of the variable display of the symbol is derived and displayed. An example of the effect of providing a specific period will be described with reference to FIGS. 242 to 244. The specific period may be provided during the fluctuation each time a predetermined number of fluctuations are executed, or may be provided during the fluctuation with an appropriate probability by lottery. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a specific period is provided by a lottery (a variation pattern that executes an effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume can be preferably adjusted by the variation pattern selection determination process is selected). The probability that a specific period is provided (the probability that a variation pattern that executes an effect that provides a player with a specific period in which volume adjustment can be suitably realized in the variation pattern selection determination process) is selected. It is set to be higher than the reach probability (probability of executing the reach effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern: about 10%) (about 20% in this example). Therefore, a specific period is provided at a high rate and the volume is adjusted before the reach effect, which is important as the expectation effect, is executed, and then the reach effect is executed at the player's favorite volume. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, in this example, a period of about 5 seconds is provided as a specific period, which is longer than the period until the screen for performing the setting mode is hidden (2 seconds as the non-operation period of the operation unit 400). Therefore, the volume and brightness can be adjusted with a margin.

When the peripheral control MPU4150a starts the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern when the variation pattern for executing the effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume adjustment can be preferably realized is selected, the peripheral control MPU4150a starts the variation display. The advance notice effect is executed based on the result of the advance notice lottery (FIG. 242 (A)), and when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed (for example, the volume of the effect sound is reduced). Along with suppressing the volume from 6 to 2 or less, muting the volume of the effect sound, etc.), the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display "It is a period suitable for volume adjustment" over a specific period (FIG. 242). (B)). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the player is notified that the timing of volume adjustment has been given by displaying "It is a period suitable for volume adjustment" on the effect display device 1600 during a specific period. However, such a display may not be performed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the effects to be executed during a specific period are also restricted, and only the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed without performing the advance notice effect or the reach effect. (Fig. 242 (B)). In this way, not only the volume of the production sound is suppressed, but also the appearance production is restricted (suppressed), so that a suitable opportunity is provided as the timing of volume adjustment, and the player is not confused by the production. Can be adjusted. Further, in this example, the screen for performing the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) is overlapped with the area where the character or the like is displayed as the notice effect, and is displayed on the front layer of the character displayed as the notice effect. By not performing the notice effect during the specific period, the visual appearance of the notice effect is not hindered. The screen for performing the setting mode (selection screen, adjustment screen) may not overlap with the area where the character or the like is displayed as a notice effect, or the screen for performing the semi-transparent setting mode (selection screen). , Adjustment screen) may be displayed so as to overlap the front layer of the area where characters and the like are displayed as a notice effect. In this case, the operation unit 400 is operated during a period other than a specific period to set mode. Even when the screens (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the above are displayed, it is possible not to interfere with the visual recognition of the advance notice effect. In addition, during the specific period, the number of effects to be executed and the number of characters to be displayed are suppressed (limited) compared to the period other than the specific period in the fluctuation, and a plurality of effects are executed or a plurality of characters are executed. It may be changed from a lively state such as being displayed to a lonely state in which only the background image is displayed with almost no effect or the character is hardly displayed. In this case, the display is variable. The decorative pattern or the image related to the variable display of the decorative pattern may not be displayed. This can provide a more suitable opportunity for the timing of volume adjustment. In addition, among the expectation effects that raise the expectation of the jackpot even during a specific period, a specific expectation effect (for example, a mode (color, shape, etc.) different from the normal low expectation effect in the dialogue notice for displaying the dialogue). When executing a high-expectation effect that displays lines in, or when executing a high-expectation effect that displays a hold in a mode (color, shape) different from the normal low-expectation effect in the hold notice) It may not be suppressed. As a result, while giving the player the timing of adjusting the volume, the necessary effect of the expected degree effect is executed without being suppressed, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In addition, a specific background image (for example, an image of the same color) may be displayed instead of the background image during the specific period, which makes the difference from the period other than the specific period clear, and directs the effect. It is possible to provide a suitable opportunity as the timing of volume adjustment because this is rarely performed.

Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed (silenced) (FIG. 242 (B)), the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device on the game board side) is operated. A screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed in 1900) (FIG. 242 (C)). By selecting the volume control on this selection screen, the volume of the effect sound can be adjusted (FIG. 243 (D)). Then, when the specific period ends, the peripheral control MPU4150a continuously executes the variation effect to derive and display the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 243 (E)).

As shown in FIG. 244 (A), even if the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during a specific period, the changed volume Is not immediately reflected in the volume of the effect sound A output in connection with the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, and when the volume of the effect sound is restored from the suppressed state at the end of a specific period, the effect sound A The effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 so as to be reflected in the output of. That is, even if the volume of the effect sound is changed during the specific period, the volume of the effect sound A is continuously suppressed during the specific period, and the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is provided in the main body frame 3. When the volume of the effect sound A is restored from the suppressed state after the specific period ends without outputting from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the volume is changed during the specific period. The effect sound A according to the changed volume is output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 to reflect the above. As a result, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the setting mode without being distracted by the output sound during the specific period.

On the other hand, although it is not a sound output in connection with the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed, it is related to a specific effect (pre-reading advance notice effect such as hold notice) or a specific operation (operation of the operation unit 400). A specific sound to be output (for example, a "picone" that is output when the hold display is performed in a shape other than the usual round shape in the look-ahead notice effect, or a "pip" that is output when the operation unit 400 is operated. For electronic sounds such as), if the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the specific period, the changed volume is immediately reflected in the output of the specific sound. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it is during the specific period, that is, even during the specific period, the speaker and the door frame 5 in which the specific sound corresponding to the changed volume is housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3. It is output from the speaker provided in. Further, the effect display device 1600 may perform the hold display even during the specific period. In this case, the hold display is changed during the specific period when the hold display is different from the normal one according to the result of the pre-reading lottery. The specific sound corresponding to the volume may be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. In this way, even if the volume of the production sound is suppressed for the specific sound output in connection with the specific effect or the specific operation necessary for executing the expectation level notification even during a specific period. Since it is possible to immediately reflect the change in volume and output a specific sound at the changed volume, it is possible to suppress the volume etc. for a specific effect or a specific operation while giving the player the volume adjustment timing. It is possible to notify the player by executing the game without any problems, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, even if the volume of the effect sound is changed during the specific period, the effect sound A is suppressed until the end of the specific period, and the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume is the main body. Since it is not output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display on the game board side) is used when the volume of the effect sound is changed during a specific period. The volume is determined from the scale displayed on the device 1900). Even during a specific period in which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, the auxiliary sound may be generated by operating the operation unit 400. For example, when adjusting the volume of the effect sound during a specific period, if the volume of the effect sound is changed by rotating the dial operation unit 401 (when the volume scale (barometer) increases or decreases), the changed volume. Auxiliary sound (for example, “pip” or the like) corresponding to the above may be output from a speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and a speaker provided in the door frame 5. As a result, even during the period when the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, the effect display device 1600 outputs an auxiliary sound that assists the volume adjustment when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to change the volume of the effect sound. Not only the scale displayed on the (liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) but also the auxiliary sound according to the changed volume can be adjusted while actually listening to and confirming it.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example produces a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for operating the operation unit 400 at an arbitrary timing during a specific period during which the volume of the effect sound is suppressed to perform the setting mode. The volume of the effect sound can be adjusted by changing the scale display of the adjustment screen displayed on the effect display device 1600 by displaying the display on the display device 1600 and further rotating the dial operation unit 401.

In addition to suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the specific period, the light emitting means provided on the door frame 5 (in this example, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5) and the function display. Excluding the plurality of LEDs of the unit 1180, the effect of the light emitting means provided on the game board 4 (in this example, the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 4) is restricted (suppressed). May be good. That is, during the specific period, the light emission, the light emission color, the number of blinks, the lighting pattern, the brightness, etc. by the light emitting means provided on the door frame 5 or the game board 4 are restricted (suppressed) as compared with the period other than the specific period in the fluctuation. , The light emitting means is changed from a dazzling and lively state such as blinking frequently at high brightness to a dim and calm state such as maintaining a lighting state at low brightness (may be turned off). May be good. In this way, by not only suppressing the production sound but also limiting (suppressing) the production by the light emitting means, a more suitable opportunity is provided as the timing of the volume adjustment, and the player can adjust the volume without being confused by the production. Can be executed.

Further, in the above example, the probability that a specific period is provided (the probability that a variation pattern that executes an effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume can be preferably adjusted in the variation pattern selection determination process is selected) is determined. Although it is set to be higher than the reach probability, the probability that a specific period is provided may be set to be lower than the reach probability, which makes the specific period rare and the specific period is provided. If the volume is not adjusted within this specific period, it is possible to have the feeling that the reach effect will be executed before adjusting the volume to the desired level, so that the volume adjustment operation can be promoted.

Further, the variation pattern for executing the effect of providing the player with the specific period may be selected not only when the result of the special lottery is out of order but also when the result is a big hit or a small hit. That is, when the result of the special lottery is out of order in the special symbol jackpot determination process, a specific period is provided to the player in the out-of-order variation selection information status table set when the variation pattern is determined in the variation pattern selection determination process. In addition to setting the fluctuation pattern that executes the effect to be performed, the jackpot that is set when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing when the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol jackpot judgment processing. A variation pattern for executing an effect of providing a specific period to a player may be set in the variation selection information type table. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has already completed the volume control from being provided with a specific period of time, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest in the game. In other words, the player has a specific period so that when the variation pattern that executes the effect of providing the player with the specific period is executed, the ratio of the jackpot is higher than that when the variation pattern is not executed. The jackpot expectation of the fluctuation pattern that executes the effect provided to is may be set high. In this case, not only the trigger for adjusting the volume when a specific period is provided, but also the expectation for the jackpot is raised. Therefore, not only the player who has not yet adjusted the volume but also the player who has already adjusted the volume can be prevented from deteriorating the game interest even when a specific period is provided. It should be noted that a lottery by the main control MPU4100a determines whether or not to provide a specific period (select a variation pattern that executes an effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume can be preferably adjusted by the variation pattern selection determination process). Not limited to those, a lottery is performed based on the fluctuation pattern command received by the peripheral control MPU4150a to determine whether or not to execute an effect that provides a specific period, and when a lottery result that provides a specific period is obtained, the fluctuation pattern is selected. You may want to perform an effect that provides a specific period during the variable display based on. In this case as well, as in the above example, when the effect of providing the specific period is executed, the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than when the effect of providing the specific period is not executed. The appearance probability of the provided effect may be set, and the execution probability (appearance probability) of the effect that provides a specific period may be set to the reach probability (probability of executing the reach effect with the variable display of the decorative symbol: about 10%). It may be set to be higher than (about 20% in this example).

[27. Brightness adjustment suitable realization production]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example can adjust not only the volume of the effect sound but also the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. It is said that. In the above example, the player is provided with a period in which the adjustment of the effect sound can be suitably realized as a specific period. However, in addition to or separately from the above, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 have a specific period. The player may be provided with a period in which the brightness adjustment of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate can be preferably realized. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 246.

The peripheral control MPU4150a is a variation that executes an effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be suitably realized. When a pattern is selected and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started based on the variable pattern, the advance notice effect is executed based on the result of the advance notice lottery (FIG. 245 (A)), and the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. After a predetermined period of time has passed, the volume of the production sound is suppressed (for example, the volume of the production sound is suppressed from 6 to 1, the production sound is muted, etc.), and the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are suppressed. The brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed (for example, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided in each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed to 50% or less, and each of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed. Control to display "It is a period suitable for adjusting the volume and brightness" on the effect display device 1600 is executed over a specific period (Fig. 245 (B)). .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, by displaying "It is a period suitable for adjusting the volume and brightness" on the effect display device 1600 during a specific period, the player can adjust the volume of the effect sound and the door frame 5 and the like. Although it is configured to notify that the timing of the brightness adjustment of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 4 has been given, such a display may not be performed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the effect to be executed during the specific period is restricted (FIG. 245 (B)). In this way, during the specific period, the number of effects to be executed, the number of characters to be displayed, etc. are suppressed (limited) compared to the period other than the specific period in the fluctuation, and a plurality of effects are executed or a plurality of effects are executed. In addition to changing from a lively state where characters are displayed to a lonely state where almost no production is performed or characters are hardly displayed, it is provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. By suppressing the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, it is possible to provide a suitable opportunity for adjusting the volume of the effect sound and adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. .. In addition, as in the above example, among the expectation effects that increase the expectation of the jackpot even during a specific period, a specific expectation effect (for example, a mode different from the normal low expectation effect in the dialogue notice for displaying the dialogue). When executing a high-expectation effect that displays lines in (color, shape, etc.), or executing a high-expectation effect that displays a hold in a mode (color, shape) different from the normal low-expectation effect in the hold notice. If you do, etc.), you may not suppress it. As a result, while giving the player the volume of the effect sound and the timing of adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the necessary effect of the expectation effect is suppressed. Since it is executed without doing so, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Then, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed (FIG. 245 (B)). , The screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) (FIG. 245 (C)). By selecting the brightness adjustment of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 on this selection screen, the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted. Is possible (Fig. 246 (D)). When the specific period ends, the peripheral control MPU4150a continuously executes the variation effect to derive and display the stop symbol of the decorative symbol (FIG. 246 (E)).

As shown in FIG. 244 (B), a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during a specific period. Even if the brightness of is changed, the changed brightness is not immediately reflected in the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, and the specific period ends and the door frame ends. Reflected when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards 5 and the game board 4 is restored from the suppressed state, the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are provided according to the changed brightness. Multiple LEDs will emit light. That is, even if the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the brightness is continuously suppressed during the specific period according to the changed brightness. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are not made to emit light. Then, when the specific period ends and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is restored from the suppressed state, the changed brightness is reflected and the changed brightness is used. A plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light accordingly.

In addition, even during a specific period, a specific expectation effect (for example, a specific light emitting means is usually used based on the decision to give a hold notice in a look-ahead lottery) among the expectation effects that raise the expectation of a big hit. Is used when emitting light in a different emission color, or when performing a high-expectation effect that displays lines in a mode (color, shape, etc.) different from the normal low-expectation effect in the dialogue notice that displays the lines). It may not be suppressed. As a result, while giving the player the timing of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, the light emission effect related to the necessary effect among the light emission effects performed in relation to the expectation degree effect is executed without being suppressed. , It becomes possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this example, even if the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the plurality of LEDs will be displayed until the specific period ends. Since the brightness is suppressed and the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are not emitted by the changed brightness, they are provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period. When changing the brightness of a plurality of LEDs, the volume is determined from the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side). Even during a specific period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed, by operating the operation unit 400, a specific LED among the plurality of LEDs can be used. Auxiliary LEDs other than the plurality of LEDs may be made to emit light for a predetermined period (for example, about 2 seconds) according to the changed brightness. For example, when adjusting the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to decorate the door frame 5 and the game board 4. When the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the substrate is changed (when the brightness scale (barometer) is increased or decreased), a specific LED or an auxiliary LED may be made to emit light for a predetermined period according to the changed brightness. good. As a result, even during the period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is suppressed, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated to operate each decoration of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. When the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the substrate is changed, not only the scale displayed on the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) but also the changed brightness is emitted by emitting the LED that assists the brightness adjustment. It is possible to adjust the light emission according to the above while actually visually checking it.

In the above example, when the volume of the effect sound or the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period, the changed volume until the end of the specific period is completed. The effect sound A corresponding to the above is not output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted to the changed brightness. Although the ones that do not emit light from the multiple LEDs provided in the above are shown, the production sound according to the volume that has already been set without changing the volume or volume after the change before the lapse of a specific period according to a specific operation. A plurality of A can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5, or are provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the changed brightness. The LED may be made capable of emitting light.

For example, in addition to the operation unit 400 (effect button) used in the production, the sub-volume value of the production sound, the brightness (light amount) of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, and the like are set. A cross that adjusts the volume by operating the dedicated operation unit for adjustment (for example, the up / down direction (volume adjustment button), and the brightness of the light amount (brightness) by operating the left / right direction (light amount (brightness) adjustment button). (Key type operation unit, etc.) is provided, and as shown in FIG. 247 (A), when the volume is changed during a specific period, if the operation unit 400 as an effect button is not operated, the effect according to the changed volume Sound A can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 after a specific period, while the volume is increased during the specific period as shown in FIG. 247 (B). When the operation unit 400 as an effect button is operated when the change is made, the speaker box provided in the main body frame 3 at the time when the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume operates the operation unit 400 (operation timing of the operation unit 400). The output may be enabled from the speaker accommodated in the 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 (as long as the output is possible, the output may not actually be performed until after a specific period). As a result, while performing the effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the volume of the effect sound can be preferably adjusted, the player who does not need to adjust the volume or after adjusting the volume can use the operation unit as an effect button. A state in which the effect sound A according to the changed volume or the volume already set by operating 400 can be output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Can be restored to. It should be noted that the specific period is executed as the period of the effect using the operation unit 400 as the effect button (more specifically, by operating the operation unit 400 as the effect using the operation unit 400, the winning expectation during fluctuation is expected. (Implemented as an effect to notify the winning result), during the effect by this operation unit 400 (during a specific period), the player controls the brightness adjustment unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) different from the operation unit 400. ), By operating the operation unit 400 after the adjustment, the expected degree effect executed by the operation of the operation unit 400 and the effect of notifying the winning result are produced during a specific period in which the volume is suppressed. However, since the adjusted volume is immediately reflected, the player's favorite game can be realized. When the volume control operation unit (cross key; volume control button) is operated, seven scales 0 to 6 corresponding to the seven levels of board volume are displayed and set as in the above example. The volume is displayed in different colors so that it can be identified. In addition, the display of the volume scale, etc. is hidden when the non-operation period of the volume control operation unit (cross key; volume control button) reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the setting mode interrupt process ends. Become. The specific period is longer than the period until the volume scale or the like is hidden (2 seconds as the non-operation period of the volume control operation unit (cross key; volume control button)) (for example, 5 seconds). ), After changing the volume by operating the volume control operation unit (cross key; volume control button) during a specific period, the volume scale is not set. After waiting for the display, the operation operation unit 400 can be operated to output the effect sound according to the changed volume from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Since it is possible to return to the normal state, in the effect using the operation unit 400, the effect executed after the operation of the operation unit 400 can be executed without being disturbed by the display of the volume scale or the like, and the game interest is lowered. It can be deterred.

Similarly, if the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the specific period and the operation unit 400 as the effect button is not operated, the changed after the specific period. The brightness makes it possible to emit light from a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, while the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 during a specific period is increased. When the operation unit 400 as an effect button is operated when the change is made, a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and each decorative board of the game board 4 are emitted at the time when the operation unit 400 is operated (operation timing of the operation unit 400). It may be possible (as long as it can emit light, it may not actually emit light until after a specific period). As a result, the door frame 5 and the game are played while performing an effect of providing the player with a specific period in which the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be suitably realized. After adjusting the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the board 4, or the player who does not need to adjust the brightness, the player operates the operation unit 400 as a production button to use the changed brightness or the already set brightness. It is possible to return the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to a state in which they can emit light. It should be noted that the specific period is executed as the period of the effect using the operation unit 400 as the effect button (more specifically, by operating the operation unit 400 as the effect using the operation unit 400, the winning expectation during fluctuation is expected. (Implemented as an effect to notify the winning result), during the effect by this operation unit 400 (during a specific period), the player controls the brightness adjustment unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) different from the operation unit 400. ), By operating the operation unit 400 after the adjustment, the expected degree effect executed by the operation of the operation unit 400 and the effect of notifying the winning result are produced during a specific period in which the brightness is suppressed. However, since the adjusted brightness is immediately reflected, the player's favorite game can be realized. Even when the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) is operated, seven scales and the like are displayed and set so as to correspond to seven levels of brightness as in the above example. The brightness is displayed in different colors so that it can be discriminated. In addition, when the non-operation period of the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the display of the brightness scale or the like ends the setting mode interrupt process and is hidden. Become. The specific period is longer than the period until the brightness scale or the like is hidden (2 seconds as the non-operation period of the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button)) (for example, 5 seconds). ), The brightness scale is not set after the brightness is changed by operating the brightness adjustment operation unit (cross key; brightness adjustment button) during a specific period. After waiting for the display, the operation operation unit 400 can be operated to return the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 to a state in which light can be emitted with the changed brightness. In the effect using the operation unit 400, the effect executed after the operation of the operation unit 400 can be executed without being disturbed by the display such as the luminance scale, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

[28. Volume / brightness adjustment at the time of high-importance notification such as high-expectation production]
In the above example, the player is provided with a specific period in which the adjustment of the volume and the brightness can be preferably realized. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example is provided with the volume and the volume and the brightness even when such a specific period is not provided. The brightness can be adjusted. Therefore, an unsuitable period (a high-expectation reach effect, etc. is executed as a high-expectation effect) in which it is difficult to suitably adjust the volume and brightness due to high-importance notification such as a high-expectation effect. The volume and brightness may be adjusted even during the period when the production sound is output at the volume or the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are blinking at high brightness. .. In this example, even if the volume and brightness are adjusted during the unsuitable period, it does not interfere with the highly important notification performed during the unsuitable period.

Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU4150a variablely displays the decorative symbol and executes the reach effect based on the variation pattern for executing the reach effect with high expectation, the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the player. Large volume that does not depend on (in this example, the maximum volume volume 6. However, the volume is not limited to the maximum volume, and the volume may be louder than other reach effects, etc. May be the maximum value of the volume of the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a, or may be the maximum value of the volume range of the volume of the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP used in the gaming machine). Alternatively, the player adjusts some or all of the plurality of LEDs (predetermined specific LEDs among the plurality of LEDs) provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4. High brightness that does not depend on the existing brightness (100% of the maximum brightness in this example. However, the brightness is not limited to the maximum brightness, and the brightness may be higher than that of other reach effects, etc. It may be the maximum value of the brightness of the LED, or it may be the maximum value of the brightness range of the LED used in the gaming machine). By executing both, it becomes an unsuitable period in which it is difficult to suitably adjust the volume and brightness. However, even during this unsuitable period, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated, the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode on the effect display device 1600 (the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) is performed. ) Is displayed, and the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 can be adjusted.

For example, when the volume of the effect sound is changed from volume 3 to volume 2 during the unsuitable period, the changed volume is related to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed as shown in FIG. 248 (A). It is not immediately reflected in the volume of the production sound A that is output, but is reflected in the output of the production sound A when the volume of the production sound is returned from the maximum volume (volume 6) after the unsuitable period ends, and after the change. The production sound A corresponding to the volume 2 which is the volume of the above is flown from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. That is, even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the unsuitable period to change the volume of the effect sound, the output of the effect sound A at the maximum volume is continued during the unsuitable period, and the effect sound ends after the unsuitable period ends. When the volume of A is returned from the maximum volume (volume 6), the effect sound A corresponding to the changed volume (volume 2 in this example) is provided in the main body frame 3 by reflecting the change in the volume during the unsuitable period. The sound is output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

Further, when the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed from 80% to 70% during the unsuitable period, the changes are as shown in FIG. 248 (A). The subsequent brightness is not reflected immediately, but is reflected and changed when the unsuitable period ends and the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are returned from the maximum brightness (100%). A plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 will emit light according to the later brightness of 70%. That is, even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the unsuitable period to change the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and each decorative substrate of the game board 4, the door frame 5 at the maximum brightness is changed during the unsuitable period. And some or all of the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 4 (a predetermined specific LED among the plurality of LEDs) continue to emit light, and the unsuitable period ends. When the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is returned from the maximum brightness (100%), the change in brightness during the unsuitable period is reflected and the changed brightness (this). In the example, 70%), a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light.

In this way, when the volume of the effect sound or the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed during the unsuitable period, the volume and brightness are changed after the end of the unsuitable period. In order to reflect the change in The effects and important notifications (in this example, the high-expected reach effects, etc.) that are executed during the suitable period can be executed without being suppressed, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Regarding the above-mentioned specific sound, if the volume of the effect sound is changed by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 during the unsuitable period, the changed volume is immediately reflected in the output of the specific sound. Therefore, regardless of whether or not it is in the unsuitable period, that is, even during the unsuitable period, the specific sound according to the changed volume is housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3. It is configured to be output from the speaker provided in the frame 5, but it is not suitable even if the volume is changed to the maximum volume during the unsuitable period and the volume of the directing sound is changed during the unsuitable period as in the production sound A. When the specific sound is continuously output at the maximum volume during the period and the volume of the specific sound is returned from the maximum volume at the end of the unsuitable period, the change is reflected to reflect the change in the volume during the unsuitable period. It is also possible to change the state so that the specific sound according to the later volume is output from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5.

In the above example, as an unsuitable period, a high-expected reach effect is executed and an effect sound is output at a high volume, or a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 or the game board 4 are provided at high brightness. The blinking period is shown, but it is not limited to this. For example, a period during which a special sound such as a theme song is output at a loud volume after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a theme song in a jackpot game state, etc. It may be a period in which the special sound is output at a high volume, and when the volume of the production sound or the brightness of a plurality of LEDs is adjusted during the period in which the special sound is output at a high volume, the above-mentioned high-expected reach effect is produced. The same control as when adjusted to the period during which is executed may be executed. That is, when the volume of the production sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs are adjusted within a predetermined period in which special sounds such as the theme song during the jackpot game state or after the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output at a loud volume. Is a speaker and a speaker housed in a speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 with a production sound A corresponding to the changed volume after a lapse of a predetermined period without immediately reflecting the changed volume and the changed brightness. Along with outputting from a speaker provided on the door frame 5, a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light according to the changed brightness. In this case as well, while accepting the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while enabling the adjustment), during the unsuitable period. It is possible to perform without suppressing the effects and important notifications (in this example, the reach effects with high expectations) that are executed in the game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during an unsuitable period as in the above-mentioned volume control suitable realization effect and brightness adjustment suitable realization effect, the effect display device 1600 (game board side liquid crystal display device 1900) ) Displays a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode, and by selecting the brightness adjustment of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 on this selection screen, the door is opened. It is possible to adjust the brightness of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the frame 5 and the game board 4. Further, also in this case, a screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode is displayed so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the highly important notification content performed by the effect display device 1600. .. Specifically, a screen (selection screen, By displaying the adjustment screen) and displaying the screen (selection screen, adjustment screen) for performing the setting mode semi-transparently at the position covered by the important display related to the production and the game, it is important for the production and the game. It is designed so that it does not interfere with the visibility of various displays. As a result, while accepting the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound by the player and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (while enabling the adjustment), during the unsuitable period. The effect to be executed, important notifications, etc. (in this example, a high-expected reach effect, etc.) can be displayed in a manner that can be recognized by the player. In addition, the volume and brightness are displayed on the adjustment screen on a scale, and when the volume and brightness are adjusted by operating the operation unit 400, the scale display is changed to correspond to the adjusted volume and brightness, so that the effect sound is loud. The volume and brightness can be adjusted with reference to the scale display even during an unsuitable period in which the LED emits light with high brightness as well as being output.

[29. Pseudo-continuous discrimination production]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, the variation display of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and then re-variable (pseudo-ream; temporary stop and re-variation of the variation display of the decorative symbol). (Variation display) is executed, which is stopped after repeating and repeatedly for a predetermined number of times. In addition, since the pseudo-ren is set to have a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal variable display, the player executes the game while expecting the occurrence of the pseudo-ren. However, since the pseudo-ream performs an effect similar to the case where the normal variable display is continuous, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the pseudo-ream is executed or the normal variable display is executed. There is. In this example, the above problems are solved. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIG. 249.

As shown in FIG. 249 (A), when the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed twice in succession, a prohibition period is provided at the start and stop of the variation display executed twice. .. Therefore, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed twice in succession, the prohibition period is set four times in total.

On the other hand, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed only once, but when the variation display is a pseudo-ream in which the temporary stop and the re-variation are performed once, it is shown in FIG. 48 (B). As described above, a prohibition period is provided at the start and stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and no prohibition period is provided at the time of temporary stop and re-variation. Therefore, when the pseudo-ream is executed by the variable display of the decorative symbol, the prohibition period is provided only twice no matter how many times the temporary stop and the re-variation are performed.

In this example, when the operation unit 400 is operated, specific image information (for example, character information, characters, etc.) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a certain period (for example, 5 seconds). However, before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, about 1 second from the reception of the variable pattern command to the elapse of about 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol) and stop (confirmed stop (confirmed display)). ), The end of the variable effect) (Approximately 1) from the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command to the elapse of several seconds (for example, about 0.5 seconds) after the final display of the decorative symbol. (About seconds, etc.) is a prohibited period in which acceptance of operations by the operation unit 400 is prohibited. During this prohibited period, the specific image information displayed is hidden and the operation unit 400 is operated. Also, the effect display device 1600 is prevented from displaying specific image information.

As a result, the operation unit 400 is operated before and after the stop (fixed stop or temporary stop) of the decorative symbol or before and after the start or re-variation of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to determine whether the pseudo-ream is being performed (whether the pseudo-ream is ongoing) or whether the normal variable display of the decorative symbol is continuously executed. That is, when the normal variable display of the decorative symbol is executed twice in succession, the operation of the operation unit 400 is prohibited before and after the stop display (confirmed display) of the decorative symbol and before and after the start of the second variable display. Since the period is provided, if the specific image information is already displayed, it is hidden, and even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the prohibited period, the specific image information is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, when the pseudo-ream is executed (when the pseudo-ream is continuing), the prohibition period is before and after the stop display of the decorative symbol (before and after the temporary stop) and before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (before and after the re-variation). Since it is not provided, if specific image information is already displayed, it is continuously displayed without being hidden, and when the operation unit 400 is operated before and after the temporary stop or before and after the re-variation, the specific image information is displayed. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that it can be easily determined that the pseudo-ream is being executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a prohibition period for prohibiting the operation reception of the operation unit 400 before and after the start and stop (confirmation display) of the fluctuation display is provided, and the operation reception of the operation unit 400 other than the prohibition period is provided. When the operation unit 400 is operated during the permissible period, the specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that when the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, it is simulated. It becomes possible to easily determine whether the state is temporarily stopped in a row or the normal fluctuation display is stopped (confirmed display). As a result, when it is determined that the pseudo-ream is performed, the expectation for the big hit is raised and the variable display is paid attention to, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the operation unit 400 is displayed so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the variation display of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600. Specifically, specific image information is displayed at a position that is not covered by the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, near the edge of the display area), or a position where the specific image information is covered by the variable display of the decorative symbol (this). In the example, a semi-transparent display is performed in the vicinity of the center of the display area, etc.) so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative pattern. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the decorative pattern is pseudo-ream depending on whether or not specific image information is displayed, and it is possible to display the decorative pattern in a variable manner without obstructing the visual recognition by the specific image information. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest. In addition, it may be displayed so as to obstruct the visual recognition of the variable display of the decorative symbol at the position covered by the variable display of the decorative symbol. It becomes easy to determine whether or not there is.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, when the operation unit 400 is operated, specific image information is displayed for about 5 seconds as a fixed period. Further, since the above-mentioned prohibition period is about 1 second, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the permissible period immediately before the prohibition period and specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the specific image information is displayed during the prohibition period. Although the image information is hidden, after the prohibition period, the specific image information is displayed again even if the operation unit 400 is not operated. Therefore, the operation unit 400 can be operated with a margin with respect to the end timing of the variation effect, and it becomes easy to determine whether or not the operation unit 400 is a pseudo-ream. Further, in the variable effect, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after being displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined period, and then confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the special figure 1 synchronized effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronized effect end command. Therefore, if the operation unit 400 is operated during the period from the temporary stop of the decorative symbol to the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, specific image information is transmitted to the effect display device 1600. When the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed based on the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden. .. That is, in the case of determining whether or not it is a pseudo-ream, the operation unit 400 may be operated according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol or after seeing that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, so that the player can operate the operation unit. It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being unnecessarily continuously operated during the variable display of the decorative symbol without grasping the operation timing of the 400. In addition, since the specific image information is displayed for about 5 seconds, when the variable display of the decorative symbol according to two or more starting prizes is continuously executed (normal (non-pseudo-ream)). When the variable display is executed continuously), the specific image information displayed immediately before the final display of the decorative symbol is once hidden, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the next start prize is displayed. After the start, it will be displayed again without operating the operation unit 400. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in a variable display other than the last variable display of the pseudo-ream, the specific image information displayed immediately before the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is the start of the next variable display in the pseudo-ream. It will continue to be displayed until later. In this way, in the variable display other than the last variable display of the pseudo-ream, specific image information is continuously displayed until after the start of the next variable display in the pseudo-ream, and the normal (non-pseudo-ream) variable display is continuous. In the case of a matter, the specific image information is once hidden and then redisplayed without operating the operation unit 400 after the start of the next variable display. Can be reliably identified. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example displays specific image information in different modes (position, size, shape, color, transparency, etc.) between the period during which the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is performed and other times. Therefore, the specific image information displayed on the effect display device 1600 by operating the operation unit 400 during the demonstration is displayed in a different manner from before the prohibition period after the prohibition period when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Will be. In this way, the player recognizes that the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or started by hiding the specific image information displayed during the demonstration or switching to a different mode. You can do it. In addition, a predetermined period including the start timing and stop timing of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period of about 1 second from the reception of the variable pattern command to the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol). When the operation unit 400 is operated during a period of about 1 second from the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command to the elapse of 0.5 seconds after the confirmation display of the decorative symbol. You may not display the screen for performing the setting mode, or if you have already displayed the screen for performing the setting mode, do not display the screen for performing the setting mode during the period. You may try to (turn off the display). As a result, when the specific image information displayed during the demonstration is switched to a different mode, the specific image information is temporarily hidden, so that the specific image information can be switched to another mode without discomfort. If the specific image information is hidden during the prohibition period, the specific image information may not be displayed again after the prohibition period. In this case, the decorative design is confirmed and displayed because the specific image information displayed immediately before the prohibited period is not displayed again after the prohibited period even though a certain period (5 seconds in this example) has not passed. It can be easily recognized.

Further, in addition to displaying specific image information according to the operation of the operation unit 400, a specific sound (for example, a "pip" output when the operation unit 400 is operated) is related to the display of the specific image information. Even if an electronic sound such as, or a sound corresponding to the movement of the character (for example, a sound such as "shut" corresponding to the movement of the character 1601a injecting air into the balloon 1601b in FIGS. 250 to 251 described later) is output. Often, even in this case, it is sufficient not to output a specific sound during the prohibited period, and it is possible to determine whether or not the specific sound is a pseudo-ream (whether or not the pseudo-ream is ongoing) depending on the presence or absence of the output of the specific sound. Become.

The above prohibition period is provided in connection with the variable display of decorative patterns. In other words, a prohibition period is set whenever a start-up prize is generated and a special lottery is held. In addition, since different fluctuation times are set for each fluctuation pattern, a prohibition period occurs after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The timing to be performed is determined according to the content of the determination in the variation pattern selection determination process. That is, the main control program executes the variation information number search process (step S394) based on the variation pattern selection value data table acquired in the process of step S390 of the variation pattern selection determination process, and obtains the result of the variation information number search process. Select a variation pattern based on. The fluctuation time (the time from the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol to the stop display) is set for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation time differs for each fluctuation pattern. For example, a fluctuation pattern in which the decorative symbol fluctuates for 10 seconds is a pattern in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the detached symbol 10 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but the period before and after the stop of the decorative symbol is a prohibited period. Therefore, the prohibition period will occur at a timing of about 10 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. In addition, the variation pattern that causes the deviation variation with a reach of 30 seconds is to stop and display the decorative symbol 30 seconds after the variation display of the decorative symbol is started, but the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The prohibition period will occur at a timing of about 30 seconds after that. In this way, the timing of occurrence of the prohibition period after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol differs depending on the type of the variation pattern, that is, the content of the determination in the variation pattern selection determination process.

In the above example, a specific image information is displayed when the operation unit 400 is operated during the allowable period. However, based on the fact that the operation unit 400 is further operated after displaying the specific image information. Specific image information may be changed. For example, based on the operation of the operation unit 400 during the permissible period, the character 1601a having the balloon 1601b is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as specific image information (FIG. 250 (A)). After that, when the operation unit 400 is further operated, the character 1601 changes the specific image information into a mode in which the balloon 1601b is inflated by injecting air into the balloon 1601b (FIG. 250 (B)), and the operation unit 400 The size of the balloon 1601b may be gradually changed according to the operation (the balloon 1601b may be changed so that the bulge of the balloon 1601b becomes larger by changing from FIG. 250 (A) to FIG. 250 (C)). In this way, not only whether or not specific image information is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit 400, but also the specific image information may be changed stepwise according to the operation of the operation unit 400. .. As described above, since the specific image information is displayed for a certain period of time, it is constant whether the specific image information is hidden because the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is early or the like. It becomes difficult to determine whether the image has been hidden because the period has passed, but when the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is early by changing the specific image information step by step according to the operation of the operation unit 400. However, it becomes easy to determine whether the prohibition period has been reached or not due to a change in specific image information, in other words, whether or not the pseudo-ream is being performed (the pseudo-ream is continuing).

That is, as shown in FIG. 251 (A), when the operation unit 400 is operated during the permissible period after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific image information A (for example, the character 1601a and the balloon 1601b in FIG. 250 (A)) is operated. ) Is displayed. Further, when the operation unit 400 is further operated in this state, the specific image information A is further specified as the specific image information B (for example, the character 2601a and the balloon 2601b in FIG. 250 (B)) according to the operation of the operation unit 400. Image information B is gradually changed to specific image information C (for example, the character 2601a and the balloon 2601b in FIG. 250 (C)). On the other hand, after displaying specific image information A (for example, character 1601a and balloon 1601b in FIG. 250 (A)) based on the operation of the operation unit 400 during the permissible period, in the prohibition period just before the stop of the variable display. Even if the specific image information A is hidden and the operation unit 400 is operated, the specific image information A does not change stepwise. It should be noted that the specific image information hidden due to the prohibition period may be displayed again after the prohibition period without operating the operation unit 400, or the operation unit 400 may be operated after the prohibition period. It may be displayed based on the fact.

In this way, since the specific image information is changed according to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the permissible period, it is possible to enjoy the change of the specific image information in addition to the above-mentioned determination of the pseudo-ream, and the game interest is lowered. Can be deterred.

[31. Big hit expectation judgment production]
Even when the operation unit 400 is operated during the above allowable period, if a high expectation effect such as super reach is executed, the high expectation effect ends without changing specific image information. After that, it may be changed to specific image information according to the operation of the operation unit 400. In this case, it is determined whether or not the high expectation effect is executed according to the change of the specific image information. It is possible.

For example, as shown in FIG. 251 (B), specific image information A (for example, the character 2601a in FIG. 250 (A) and the character 2601a in FIG. When the high expectation effect is started after displaying the balloon 2601b), even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the specific image information A is not changed and the specific image information A is displayed. The display may be continued (not limited to displaying the specific image information A as a still image, and the character 1601a may operate so as to inject air into the balloon 1601b in response to the operation of the operation unit 400. In this case, the display may be continued. The character 1601a operates to inject air into the balloon 1601b, but the balloon 1601b may be displayed so as not to inflate.) The display mode (in this example, a specific effect image C) may be changed according to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the execution of. In this way, except for a part of the period (prohibited period) during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the specific image information is displayed according to the operation of the operation unit 400 by the player, and the specific image information is displayed according to the further operation. Although it is configured to change the above, it can be executed without interfering with the high-expectation production, so that the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example immediately displays specific image information or changes the specific image information when the operation unit 400 is operated within the allowable period after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol ( (It is possible to immediately reflect the operation of the operation unit 400) Low expectation fluctuation pattern and fluctuation display of decorative symbols When the operation unit 400 is operated within the permissible period after the start of display, specific image information is displayed immediately. When the operation of the operation unit 400 is performed within the execution period of the high expectation effect, although the specific image information can be changed (although the operation of the operation unit 400 can be immediately reflected). The display of specific image information or the change of the specific image information is prohibited, and the specific image information is displayed or the specific image information is changed after the execution period of the high expectation effect (immediately after the operation of the operation unit 400 is performed). It has a high expectation fluctuation pattern (which is reflected after the high expectation production is completed without being reflected). Therefore, the player who is operating the operation unit 400 can determine whether or not the production has a high expectation depending on whether or not the operation of the operation unit 400 is immediately reflected, which reduces the interest in the game. It can be deterred.

Further, a specific sound may be output in connection with the display of specific image information. For example, when the character 1610a operates to inject air into the balloon 1601b and the balloon 1601b is inflated, a "shu" or the like is specified. Sound may be output. Further, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the character 1601a operates so as to inject air into the balloon 1601b, but displays that the balloon 1601b does not inflate and does not output a specific sound. After the high expectation effect is completed, the operation of the operation unit 400 during the execution of the high expectation effect is reflected, and the balloon 1601b inflated to the size corresponding to the operation is displayed and the balloon 1601b is displayed. A specific sound such as "shu" may be output when the balloon is inflated. In the above example, a specific sound is output in connection with the display of specific image information, but without displaying the specific image information or separately from the specific image information within the permissible period. A specific sound may be output based on the operation of the operation unit 400. For example, each time the operation unit 400 is operated within the permissible period, a specific sound (for example, "pip") is output, and when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the specific sound is output. Instead, the operation of the operation unit 400 may be reflected and a specific sound may be output after the high expectation effect is completed. Also in this case, the player operating the operation unit 400 can determine whether or not the high expectation effect is executed according to the timing when the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, a prohibition period is provided at each of the start and stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, so that even if the operation unit 400 is operated during the prohibition period. When specific image information is not displayed or specific sound is not output, or when specific image information that has already been displayed is hidden, it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed ends. become able to. Therefore, even if the operation unit 400 is operated in a state where an effect advantageous to the player or an effect having a high expectation is executed, or a result (stop symbol) advantageous to the player is displayed, specific image information can be obtained. If it is not displayed or a specific sound is not output, it is predicted that the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern will be advantageous to the player, and the game interest will be improved.

Further, in the above example, the character 1610a is displayed based on the operation of the operation unit 400, and the display mode of the character 1610a is changed according to the operation of the operation unit 400. However, the operation of the operation unit 400 is performed. Determining whether or not a high expectation effect is produced by changing the execution mode (display mode, background color, type of effect sound, volume, LED emission color, LED emission color, etc.) during execution according to May be possible. That is, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the low expectation effect (including not only the low expectation reach effect but also the variable effect in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed without executing the reach effect). While the execution mode of the variation effect is changed immediately, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the execution of the high expectation effect, the execution mode is changed by changing the execution mode of the variation effect being executed after the high expectation effect is completed. It may be possible to determine whether the variable effect in the medium is a high-expectation effect or a low-expectation effect.

Further, the jackpot expectation is not limited to the one that determines the jackpot expectation degree according to the change of the specific image information. The jackpot expectation may be determined according to the change in the brightness (light amount) of the plurality of LEDs provided. This will be described with reference to FIG. 252.

FIG. 252 (A) is a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is normally varied, and FIG. 252 (B) is a normal reach effect (variably displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right) after the decorative symbol is normally varied. This is a variation pattern in which the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol to generate a reach, and then the middle symbol is changed over a predetermined period and then stopped (the simplest reach effect). The fluctuation pattern that normally fluctuates in FIG. 252 (A) is a reach in which the decorative symbols that are variablely displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right are stopped in the order of left → right → middle, and the left and right decorative symbols are stopped at the same symbol. The variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B) is performed by varying the decorative symbols displayed in the three columns on the left, middle, and right, is left and right. After stopping the decorative symbol at the same symbol (after performing normal fluctuation), the normal reach effect that changes the decorative symbol inside over a predetermined period is executed to make the decorative symbol inside the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols. It stops and becomes a big hit, or the decorative symbol inside is stopped at a symbol different from the left and right decorative symbols and becomes a miss. That is, the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (B) is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than the fluctuation pattern in which the normal fluctuation is performed in FIG. 252 (A). Further, the fluctuation pattern in which the normal fluctuation is performed in FIG. 252 (A) and the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (B) are produced by executing the same effect until the normal reach effect is performed. It is difficult to distinguish from the display contents of the display device 1600.

Then, in the variation pattern in which the normal variation is performed in FIG. 252 (A), a plurality of effect sounds and a plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are provided according to the operation of the operation unit 400 during the normal variation of the decorative symbol. When the brightness (light intensity) of the LED is adjusted, the result of the volume adjustment and the result of the brightness adjustment are immediately reflected, and the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 at the adjusted volume. The effect sound is output from the speaker provided in the door frame 5, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light with the adjusted brightness. On the other hand, in the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B), during the normal variation of the decorative symbol, in other words, the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol before the reach occurs. Even if the effect sound and the brightness (light amount) of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are adjusted according to the operation of the operation unit 400, the result of the volume adjustment and the result of the brightness adjustment are immediately obtained. The production sound is reflected from the speaker housed in the speaker box 920 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 at the adjusted volume after the reach occurs, that is, when the normal reach effect is started without being reflected. Is output, and at the adjusted brightness, a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrates of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light.

That is, in the fluctuation pattern in which the normal fluctuation is performed in FIG. 252 (A), the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and the effect sound and the plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are provided. When the brightness (light intensity) of is adjusted, the output of the effect sound at the adjusted volume and the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness are controlled. , While it is possible at the operation timing of the operation unit 400, in the variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal variation in FIG. 252 (B), the decorative symbol is in the normal variation (the left and right decorative symbols are the same symbol). Even if the operation unit 400 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness (light intensity) of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 before the stop display is displayed and the reach occurs). It is possible to output the effect sound at the adjusted volume and to control the light emission of a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness at the operation timing of the operation unit 400. Instead, it is possible at a timing later than the operation timing (when the normal fluctuation ends and the normal reach effect is started). In this way, by changing the timing for reflecting the result (result of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment) according to the operation of the operation unit 400, the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation of FIG. 252 (A), which has a low expectation of big hit, is executed. It is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal fluctuation in FIG. 252 (B), which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the fluctuation pattern, is executed, and further, the operation is performed during the normal fluctuation. When the unit 400 is operated to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness (light intensity) of a plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the adjusted volume is delayed from the operation timing. The output of the production sound in the above and the emission control of multiple LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 and the game board 4 with the adjusted brightness are performed, but the normal reach production, which is an important production, has started. When this is done, the result of the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected to output the effect sound at the adjusted volume, and a plurality of decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 at the adjusted brightness. Since the light emission of the LED is controlled, the normal reach effect can be executed at the volume and brightness desired by the player.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, is the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation of FIG. 252 (A) executed from the display contents of the effect display device 1600 until the reach occurs? It is difficult to determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed is executed after the normal fluctuation of (B) is performed. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern in which only the player who operates the operation unit 400 during the normal fluctuation performs the normal fluctuation of FIG. 252 (B) at an early stage (before the reach occurs) and then performs the normal reach effect is executed. Can be determined. It should be noted that whether the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (A) is executed or the fluctuation pattern for performing the normal reach effect after performing the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (B) is executed even during the normal fluctuation. The display contents of the effect display device 1600 may be different so that they can be discriminated. In this case, as a fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal fluctuation is performed, the result according to the operation of the operation unit 400 when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation (result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment). Is reflected in the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (sound can be output at the adjusted volume or light emission is controlled at the adjusted brightness), and when the operation unit 400 is operated during normal fluctuation. The result (result of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (when the normal fluctuation ends and the normal reach effect is started) (after adjustment). A second variation pattern (which enables sound output at the volume of the above or controls light emission at the adjusted brightness) may be provided.

Further, as a fluctuation pattern for performing normal fluctuation with a low expectation, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation, the result (result of volume adjustment or brightness adjustment) corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is obtained from the operation unit 400. The first normal fluctuation pattern that reflects at the operation timing (makes it possible to output sound at the adjusted volume or controls the light emission at the adjusted brightness) and the operation unit 400 when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation. The result according to the operation (result of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment) is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400 (when the normal fluctuation ends or after the end) (sound can be output at the adjusted volume). A second normal fluctuation pattern (which controls light emission with the adjusted brightness) may be provided. Further, the display contents of the effect display device 1600 may be different so that it is possible to determine which of the first normal fluctuation pattern and the second normal fluctuation pattern is being executed. In this case, Is it the second normal fluctuation pattern by making the display contents of the second normal fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern in which the normal reach effect is performed after the normal fluctuation of FIG. 252 (B) similar to each other? It may be difficult to determine whether the fluctuation pattern is such that the normal reach effect is performed after the normal fluctuation shown in FIG. 252 (B) is performed. That is, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation and the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, a reach occurs and a normal reach effect is performed. And, even if the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 by operating the operation unit 400 during the normal fluctuation is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, no reach occurs and the normal reach effect is not performed. A variation pattern that is out of alignment may be provided. In this case, if the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation and the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is reflected later than the operation timing of the operation unit 400, the operation unit 400 is operated during the normal fluctuation. Then, the rate of reach may be higher than that in the case where the result corresponding to the operation of the operation unit 400 is anti-iei at the operation timing of the operation unit 400.

Also, before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, about 1 second from the reception of the variable pattern command to the elapse of about 0.5 seconds after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol) and stop (confirmed stop (confirmed display)). ), The end of the variation effect) (Approximately 1) from the reception of the special figure 1 synchronization effect end command or the special figure 2 synchronization effect end command to the elapse of several seconds (for example, about 0.5 seconds) after the final display of the decorative symbol. Seconds, etc.) may be a prohibited period during which acceptance of operations of the operation unit 400 is prohibited. By providing such a prohibition period, it is possible to recognize that the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or started, or that the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped or stopped.

Further, in the above example, when the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the normal fluctuation is performed to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs, the operation timing of the operation unit 400 is adjusted. Control the emission of multiple LEDs based on the output of the production sound at the volume and the brightness after adjustment, or delay the operation timing of the operation unit 400 and output the production sound at the adjusted volume and multiple brightness after adjustment. A fluctuation pattern (FIG. 252 (A)) in which normal fluctuations with a low expectation are performed by differently controlling the light emission of the LED, or a fluctuation pattern in which normal fluctuations with a higher expectation than the fluctuation pattern are performed. (FIG. 252 (B)), but the operation unit 400 is operated during a specific period of the period during which the fluctuation is normally performed to adjust the volume of the effect sound and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs. A fluctuation pattern in which low-expectation normal fluctuations are performed by different timings for controlling the emission of multiple LEDs depending on the output of the effect sound at the adjusted volume and the adjusted brightness only when this is done (FIG. 252 (A). ))) Or a fluctuation pattern (FIG. 252 (B)) in which a normal fluctuation with a higher expectation than the fluctuation pattern can be determined. As a result, it is possible to induce the operation unit 400 to be operated in a specific period. Further, in this case, it may be possible to identify that it is a specific period by changing the display content of the effect display device 1600 or the like. In this case, the operation unit 400 is provided to the player during the specific period. It can be operated, and it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being operated unnecessarily.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slot machine or the gaming machine obtained by fusing the pachinko gaming machine and the slot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko game machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 192 Handle relay terminal board 400 Operation unit (operation unit)
470 Liquid crystal display on the upper plate side 650 Ball launcher 740 Prize ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error release unit)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1900 Liquid crystal display on the game board side 4100 Main control board (game control board, game control unit, special game state generating means)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Payout control board (payout control board, payout control unit)
4120 Payout control unit 4120a Payout control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board (effect control unit, effect execution means, effect determination means, effect storage means, effect generation information selection means, effect content selection means, effect selection information change means, effect execution timing determination means, effect reference information selection means, Direction selection means)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4160 LCD and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can control a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state when a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition and the result of the lottery is a win.
A production display means capable of displaying predetermined production information and
A display control means that controls the display of the effect display means based on the result of the lottery to execute a variable effect, and a display control means.
A sound output control means that controls the output of a predetermined effect sound from the sound output means in relation to the variation effect displayed on the effect display means.
It is provided with a volume adjusting means capable of adjusting the volume of the effect sound output from the sound output means based on the operation of the operating means.
The display control means can display specific effect information as the predetermined effect information over a specific period during the variable effect.
In the specific period, the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, and in the specific period, the volume adjusting means accepts the operation of the operation means while the volume of the effect sound is suppressed, and adjusts the volume of the effect sound. Although it is adjustable, the effect sound of the adjusted volume can be heard after the lapse of the specific period.
Unlike the specific period, in the non-specific period during which the volume of the effect sound during the variable effect is not suppressed, the volume adjusting means accepts the operation of the operation means while the volume of the effect sound is not suppressed. The volume of the effect sound can be adjusted, and the effect sound of the adjusted volume can be heard at the adjustment timing.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specific period, the number of characters displayed on the effect display means is suppressed as compared with the case before the specific period.

Images